Boeing is ramping up factory hiring at its fastest pace in nearly two years, signaling renewed industrial momentum as the aerospace giant works to scale production across key aircraft programs while offsetting a wave of retirements among its most experienced workers. The expansion reflects both immediate operational demands and a longer-term effort to rebuild workforce capacity after a turbulent period marked by labor disruptions and regulatory scrutiny.

Jon Holden, Vice President of Training and Apprenticeships at the International Association of Machinists and Aerospace Workers (IAM), said Boeing is currently onboarding between 100 and 140 unionized factory workers per week. “This is more, I think, a sustained ramp that I feel good about, as long as the economy continues to go, as long as airlines continue to keep their orders,” Holden said, describing the hiring pace as durable rather than cyclical. Unionized factory headcount in the Pacific Northwest has now surpassed 34,000 workers, up from roughly 33,000 during the IAM’s 2024 strike, underscoring the scale of Boeing’s workforce rebuild.

Boeing confirmed the hiring push as part of a broader production strategy. “We’re seeing strong interest as we hire in Puget Sound and across the enterprise to support our production rate increases,” a Boeing spokesperson said, noting that recruitment is extending beyond assembly lines into logistics, warehousing, and tooling operations. The company’s hiring spans multiple divisions, reflecting the complexity of scaling modern aerospace manufacturing.

At the center of the expansion is Boeing’s narrowbody production system, particularly the 737 MAX program, which remains the backbone of global airline fleets. The company is building out a fourth Seattle-area production line—known internally as the North Line—to support higher output. Boeing is currently producing 42 aircraft per month and plans to increase that rate to 47 this summer, with a longer-term target of 53 jets per month by the end of 2026, according to comments from CEO Kelly Ortberg during the company’s latest earnings call.

Regulatory alignment is helping clear the path for that growth. Bryan Bedford, Administrator of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), said regulators have not identified any obstacles that would prevent certification of the 737 MAX 7 and 737 MAX 10 variants before the end of 2026. “We have not seen issues that would block certification timelines,” Bedford said in recent remarks, reinforcing Boeing’s expectation that both aircraft will be approved this year, with first deliveries anticipated in 2027. Boeing confirmed that the 737-10 has entered the Type Inspection Authorization 2 phase of flight testing, a key milestone toward certification.

Beyond narrowbody jets, Boeing is also advancing its long-delayed widebody flagship, the 777X. The 777-9 variant has progressed into the FAA’s Type Inspection Authorization 4a phase, bringing it closer to certification after years of delays tied to safety reviews and engineering adjustments. Boeing continues to target first delivery of the 777X in 2027, a timeline that requires parallel workforce scaling to support eventual production increases.

The hiring surge is not limited to aircraft assembly. Boeing is investing heavily in workforce development pipelines, including apprenticeship programs designed to train workers in specialized aerospace disciplines such as composite materials and advanced manufacturing techniques. Holden said enrollment has already exceeded the 125-participant cap established under Boeing’s 2024 labor agreement with the IAM, reflecting both immediate labor shortages and a strategic push to rebuild technical expertise. “We’re seeing demand not just for workers, but for skilled workers who can support next-generation production systems,” Holden said.

The broader labor market in Washington State—home to Boeing’s largest manufacturing base—is also showing signs of recovery. According to the Washington State Employment Security Department, aerospace employment fell to approximately 79,000 jobs in August 2025 before rebounding to around 81,800 by February 2026. The recovery aligns with Boeing’s hiring push and suggests improving stability across the regional supply chain.

Ortberg, who took over as CEO during a period of operational and reputational challenges, has prioritized restoring production discipline and rebuilding trust with regulators and customers. “Our focus is on stability, quality, and predictable output,” Ortberg said during Boeing’s recent earnings call, emphasizing that workforce readiness is central to achieving those goals. The company’s aggressive hiring reflects an acknowledgment that labor capacity—not demand—is now one of the primary constraints on growth.

Boeing’s expansion also extends into its space and satellite division, where the company is targeting 26 satellite deliveries in 2026, up sharply from just four in 2025. That increase requires additional hiring and training beyond commercial aviation, highlighting the breadth of Boeing’s operational ramp.

With a commercial aircraft backlog exceeding 5,500 planes valued at more than $435 billion, Boeing faces sustained pressure from airlines to accelerate deliveries. The scale of that backlog underscores the urgency behind the company’s hiring strategy. By rapidly expanding its workforce while investing in training and apprenticeships, Boeing is attempting to position itself for a multi-year production cycle driven by global travel demand and fleet modernization.

Looking ahead, the key variable will be execution. Boeing’s ability to integrate thousands of new workers, maintain quality standards, and meet certification timelines will determine whether this hiring surge translates into sustained operational recovery. If successful, the current workforce expansion could mark a turning point—shifting Boeing from a period of constraint and disruption into one of disciplined growth and industrial scale.

JBizNews Desk

Washington, D.C.U.S. Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. is rapidly reshaping the economic foundations of American healthcare, driving sweeping changes that extend far beyond Washington and into pharmaceutical pricing, food production, hospital systems, and rural healthcare infrastructure.

After a series of congressional appearances—including his eighth hearing this month before the House Energy and Commerce Committee—the most consequential developments of Kennedy’s tenure are emerging across the private sector, where policy shifts are translating into measurable cost changes and operational adjustments for major industries.

Fifteen months into leading the nation’s largest civilian agency, Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. has advanced a broad “Make America Healthy Again” (MAHA) agenda that is already producing tangible economic outcomes across pharmaceuticals, agriculture, and healthcare delivery systems.

At the center of the initiative is the administration’s Most Favored Nation (MFN) drug pricing program, implemented through the TrumpRx platform launched in February 2026. The platform initially covered 40 high-cost branded medications, aligning U.S. prices with the lowest levels paid in other developed countries.

The program has since expanded significantly. As of April 23, agreements have been reached with 17 major pharmaceutical companies, including Pfizer, Johnson & Johnson, Merck, Novartis, Bristol Myers Squibb, Amgen, Gilead Sciences, and Regeneron, collectively representing approximately 86% of the U.S. branded drug market. The pricing impact has been substantial: Novo Nordisk’s Wegovy has fallen from roughly $1,350 per month to about $350, while Eli Lilly’s Zepbound has declined from more than $1,000 to approximately $346. Discounts across the platform range from roughly 30% to more than 90% on select therapies.

A recent agreement with Regeneron underscores the program’s expanding scope. The company committed to reducing the price of its cholesterol drug Praluent from $537 to $225 and agreed to apply MFN pricing to all future therapies. The same announcement included FDA approval of a gene therapy for a rare congenital form of deafness, which Regeneron said it would provide at no cost to eligible patients.

Beyond pharmaceuticals, the MAHA initiative is reshaping the food and beverage industry. More than 40% of U.S. food producers have committed to phasing out petroleum-based artificial dyes, while the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has approved new natural alternatives derived from fruits and vegetables. PepsiCo said it will remove synthetic FD&C colors from several major beverage lines, replacing them with plant-based ingredients.

The initiative is also influencing medical education and clinical practice. More than 50 medical schools have committed to expanding nutrition education from an average of two hours to approximately 40 hours of coursework, reflecting a shift toward prevention-focused care and diet-related health management.

Within hospital systems, Secretary Kennedy directed the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS) to issue updated guidance requiring facilities receiving federal funding to align patient meals with national dietary standards. The directive focuses on reducing ultra-processed foods, sugar-sweetened beverages, and refined carbohydrates—effectively bringing nutrition policy into the core of clinical care.

Rural healthcare has emerged as another key pillar of the agenda. Through the $50 billion Rural Health Transformation Fund, federal officials are channeling resources into underserved communities. This month alone, more than $135 million has been allocated to expand rural residency programs, improve healthcare access, and strengthen nutrition services in remote regions.

Duvi Honig, a national business leader and public policy advocate, praised the Secretary’s leadership and broader impact. “Secretary Bobby Kennedy is making history with a bold, results-driven approach that is transforming healthcare economics in real time,” Honig said. “We are proud to work closely together and support these efforts—from lowering drug prices to advancing critical public health initiatives. We are especially encouraged by the ongoing work with HHS and the CDC on long-overdue Lyme disease awareness and updated clinical guidance, and we look forward to those updates being released.

On Capitol Hill, Kennedy’s latest testimony also addressed leadership at the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), where he voiced support for the nomination of Dr. Erica Schwartz, a former deputy surgeon general with extensive public health experience. Kennedy confirmed he has spoken with Schwartz and supports her candidacy.

As the MAHA agenda continues to take shape, its economic footprint is becoming increasingly visible across multiple sectors. By targeting drug pricing, food standards, hospital practices, and rural health access simultaneously, the administration is advancing a comprehensive approach that is redefining both the cost structure and delivery of healthcare in the United States.

Looking ahead, the durability of these changes will depend on continued industry participation and regulatory execution. But with broad adoption already underway, the MAHA initiative is positioning itself as a defining force in the next phase of American healthcare—where economics, policy, and public health outcomes are more tightly linked than ever.

JBizNews Desk

Markets & Economy | April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Has the United States crossed a line that markets and policymakers can no longer ignore? With federal borrowing now roughly $34–35 trillion, and the total value of global trade hovering near $33–34 trillion annually, the world’s largest economy has entered a symbolic — and for some, alarming — new phase. The comparison is not a perfect one, but it raises a fundamental question: how sustainable is America’s fiscal trajectory when its debt rivals the scale of global commerce itself?

The figures, drawn from the U.S. Department of the Treasury and estimates compiled by the World Trade Organization, highlight just how rapidly U.S. borrowing has expanded in the post-pandemic era. While the U.S. continues to benefit from the dollar’s reserve currency status and deep capital markets, the pace of debt accumulation is forcing a renewed debate in Washington and on Wall Street.

Few have framed the issue more starkly than Elon Musk, CEO of Tesla Inc. and SpaceX, who has increasingly warned that only a dramatic leap in productivity — driven by artificial intelligence and automation — can offset what he sees as an unavoidable fiscal crisis. Speaking on the Dwarkesh Podcast, Musk delivered a blunt assessment that is now echoing across business and policy circles.

“We are 1,000% going to go bankrupt as a country and fail as a country… without AI and robots,” Musk said. “Nothing else will solve the national debt. We just need enough time to build the AI and robots to not go bankrupt before then.”

Musk’s comments reflect a growing view in parts of the technology sector that traditional policy levers — taxation, spending adjustments, and monetary tools — may not be sufficient to counter the scale of the problem. Instead, proponents argue, only transformative productivity gains can meaningfully shift the equation.

But is that realistic — or is it an overreliance on future innovation?

Jerome Powell, Chair of the Federal Reserve, has taken a more measured tone in recent public remarks, emphasizing that while U.S. debt is on an “unsustainable path,” the immediate focus remains on inflation control and economic stability. At the same time, Powell and other policymakers have repeatedly noted that long-term fiscal sustainability ultimately falls to Congress, not the central bank.

Meanwhile, economists at the Congressional Budget Office have projected that federal debt will continue rising as a share of GDP for decades under current law, driven largely by entitlement spending and interest costs. In its latest outlook, the CBO warned that higher debt levels could slow economic growth, increase borrowing costs, and limit the government’s ability to respond to future crises.

Janet Yellen, U.S. Treasury Secretary, has defended the resilience of the U.S. financial system, pointing to strong demand for Treasury securities and the continued dominance of the dollar in global trade and finance. Still, even Treasury officials acknowledge that the trajectory of debt cannot rise indefinitely without consequences.

Adding a global and demographic perspective to the discussion, Duvi Honig, Chief Economist and Founder of the National Roundtable for Presidents of Chambers of Commerce in Washington, D.C., and Founder & CEO of the Wall Street–based Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, framed the imbalance in stark terms.

“Think about it — the world’s population is roughly 8.3 billion, while the United States has about 349 million people. That means America represents just about 4% of the global population, yet we are carrying approximately $34–35 trillion in debt, while total global trade is only about $33–34 trillion annually — effectively the economic activity tied to the remaining 96% of the world.

It’s unsustainable. It’s financial lunacy — and we’re in denial. Eventually, it will catch up to us.”

The comparison between national debt and global trade is, by definition, imperfect — one is a cumulative stock, the other an annual flow. But analysts say the symbolism is difficult to ignore. It reflects the extent to which U.S. fiscal expansion has outpaced not just domestic growth, but global economic benchmarks.

On Wall Street, reactions are mixed. Some investors continue to view U.S. Treasurys as the world’s safest asset, particularly in times of geopolitical uncertainty. Others are beginning to question whether persistently high deficits and rising interest costs could eventually erode that confidence.

Larry Summers, former U.S. Treasury Secretary, has repeatedly warned that the U.S. is entering a period where fiscal policy is becoming increasingly constrained. In recent remarks, Summers argued that higher real interest rates could make it significantly more expensive to service the debt, compounding the challenge over time.

At the same time, major asset managers, including BlackRock Inc., have pointed to structural demand for U.S. debt from global investors, pension funds, and central banks — a factor that continues to support the system, even as headline debt levels rise.

So where does that leave policymakers — and markets?

Is Musk right that only a technological leap can prevent a crisis? Or will traditional fiscal tools, combined with steady economic growth, prove sufficient to stabilize the trajectory?

For now, the answer remains uncertain. What is clear is that the scale of U.S. borrowing has reached a point where it is no longer just a domestic issue — it is a central pillar of the global financial system.

And as debt levels continue to climb, the stakes are rising. Interest costs are consuming a larger share of federal spending. Fiscal flexibility is narrowing. And the margin for error — whether economic, political, or geopolitical — is shrinking.

The question is no longer whether the United States can carry high levels of debt. It is whether it can continue to do so indefinitely without triggering a broader reckoning — and whether innovation, policy, or markets themselves will ultimately force the adjustment.

— JBizNews Desk

The U.S. construction industry is running into a growing problem that is no longer just about rising prices—materials are increasingly unavailable. Contractors across the country report they cannot secure enough steel, copper, and aluminum to meet project timelines, forcing delays, redesigns, and cancellations. Nearly 43% of contractors have postponed or canceled projects due to material costs and availability, according to the Associated General Contractors of America, while input prices for nonresidential construction rose at a 12.6% annualized rate early in 2026. “The challenge right now is not just cost—it’s whether you can get the material at all,” said Jeffrey D. Shoaf, Chief Executive Officer of the Associated General Contractors of America, adding that supply uncertainty is now “a primary driver of project disruption across multiple sectors.”

The shortage is being driven in part by federal policy that is redirecting supply away from civilian markets. Under the Defense Production Act, government contracts receive priority access to materials, placing defense and infrastructure projects ahead of private construction orders. “When a contract is rated under the Defense Production Act, it must be filled before any private-sector demand,” said William LaPlante, Under Secretary of Defense for Acquisition and Sustainment at the U.S. Department of Defense, describing how priority access is reshaping supply chains. Contractors say this is translating directly into delayed deliveries, with some reporting that orders cannot be fulfilled within required timelines regardless of price.

Steel availability has tightened the most, with mills and fabricators increasingly allocating production to government-backed projects. Domestic tariffs—reaching as high as 50% on imports—have reduced alternative supply options, leaving contractors dependent on constrained domestic production. “Firms are telling us they cannot lock in delivery timelines, which makes it impossible to commit to construction schedules,” said Ken Simonson, Chief Economist of the Associated General Contractors of America, noting that lead-time uncertainty is now as disruptive as cost increases. Specialty steel producer Metallus Inc. confirmed in its most recent SEC filing that “lead times continue to extend,” with order backlogs rising sharply.

Copper supply is also tightening, driven by both long-term demand growth and government stockpiling. Contractors report particular difficulty sourcing copper for electrical and mechanical systems, where substitutes are limited. “Copper is essential to energy systems, infrastructure, and advanced technologies, and supply is not keeping up,” said Carlos Pascual, Senior Vice President for Energy at S&P Global. At the same time, federal initiatives are directing copper into strategic reserves. “Strengthening domestic access to critical minerals is a national priority,” said Reta Jo Lewis, President of the Export-Import Bank of the United States, referring to financing programs supporting supply security.

Aluminum markets are facing similar constraints, with tariffs, energy costs, and global disruptions reducing supply while demand remains elevated. Contractors report delays in obtaining materials for windows, structural components, and electrical systems. “We are seeing supply constraints layered on top of cost pressures, which is amplifying the impact on projects,” said Simonson, Chief Economist of the Associated General Contractors of America, highlighting the combined effect of pricing and availability issues.

Across the industry, project timelines are being extended as a matter of necessity. “Longer lead times are now being built into project planning as a baseline assumption,” according to analysis from the Construction Today, reflecting how firms are adjusting expectations in response to supply constraints. In some cases, contractors say projects are being delayed indefinitely because materials cannot be secured at any price.

The shortages are expected to persist. Analysts at the Center for Strategic and International Studies say rebuilding U.S. reserves and expanding production capacity could take years. “Restoring stockpiles and scaling industrial output is a multi-year effort,” said Seth G. Jones, Senior Vice President at the Center for Strategic and International Studies, pointing to long-term structural constraints.

Contractors are attempting to adapt by ordering earlier, increasing inventory, and revising contracts, but those strategies are unevenly available. Smaller firms, in particular, lack the capital to secure materials far in advance. “Many contractors simply cannot afford to carry large inventories or absorb delays,” said Shoaf, Chief Executive Officer of the Associated General Contractors of America.

For the construction sector and broader economy, the shift is immediate: availability—not just price—is now the defining constraint. As government demand continues to take priority and global supply remains tight, securing steel, copper, and aluminum has become the central challenge facing projects across the country.

JBizNews Desk

Even President Trump’s toughest critics should acknowledge his grace and courage under fire. He showed it once again in his presser Saturday night after the shooting at the White House Correspondents Association Dinner.

If I can borrow from my friend Miranda Devine, he praised the Chairman of the Correspondents Association, who has been a severe Trump critic. He was magnanimous about the Secret Service, though they’re going to have to answer some tough questions in the weeks ahead. And he was self-effacing about the likelihood that the shooter was gonna go for him. He said: “it’s always shocking when something like this happens. It’s happened to me a little bit. And, that never changes the fact we’re sitting right next to each other.” Mr. Trump added that “if you take presidents, it’s 5.8 percent and about 8 percent are shot at. So nobody told me this was such a dangerous profession.” He concluded: “It’s dangerous. It’s dangerous stuff, whether it’s here or someplace else. No country is immune.” 

That’s grace under fire. Standing in his formal attire, with his bow tie in place, the president holds an extraordinary news conference. Hat tip to my friends at The New York Sun for pointing this out.

It appeared to be the third assassination attempt in two years. No president has faced that. My former boss, President Reagan was nearly killed by an assassin’s bullet in 1981. And far as I know, there have been no other assassination attempts until Butler, Pennsylvania in 2024.

Mr. Trump had a thought on this as well. Take a listen: “Well, you know, I’ve studied assassinations, and I must tell you, the most impactful people, the people that do the most. You take a look at the people. Abraham Lincoln.” Yet, he added, “the people that do the most, the people that make the biggest impact, they’re the ones that they go after.”

Faith Bottum of the Wall Street Journal’s editorial page notes that 8.5 percent of Presidents have died by assassination. Mr. Trump, though, has said time and again, including during his presser Saturday night, that he’s not worried about assassination and in fact wanted the dinner to continue that night before the Secret Service ruled it out. Yet that president has also said many times that he cannot let the criminal class or the political crazies shut down freedom of speech, or any political rallies for that matter. And of course he wanted a redo of the correspondents dinner in 30 days, or whenever it’s possible.

By the way, hat tip to Ms. Bottum for calling Mr. Trump brave and courageous. The Journal’s vaunted editorial page has been especially tough and critical of Mr. Trump. The president called for unity and it’s a great thought, but somehow in this period of our history it just doesn’t seem realistic.

In my lifetime I witnessed the assassination of JFK and then Martin Luther King and then Senator Robert F. Kennedy. These were great national tragedies. There was an assassination attempt against President Ford in 1975. Then the Reagan attempt in 1981 and then the multiple attempts on Mr. Trump. I don’t know what’s happened to the country that I love. I know America can do better. Let us hope that somehow it will.

This post was originally published here

Rogers Communications has opened voluntary buyout offers to about 10,000 employees, a sweeping cost-cutting move that underscores how aggressively Canada’s telecom sector now needs to defend margins while carrying elevated debt. Bloomberg reported Monday that the program targets a large share of the workforce, and Rogers Communications said in a statement cited by multiple outlets that it is “continuously evaluating” its operations to better serve customers and improve efficiency.

The move lands as Rogers continues integrating its C$26 billion acquisition of Shaw Communications, a deal that reshaped Canada’s telecom market and left the company under pressure to prove that promised synergies can translate into stronger free cash flow. In company disclosures tied to recent quarterly results, Rogers said merger integration remains a major focus, while Chief Executive Tony Staffieri told investors the company is “tracking to deliver” targeted cost savings from the Shaw transaction, according to earnings materials and call transcripts released by Rogers.

The buyout push also reflects a tougher operating climate across Canadian telecoms, where subscriber growth has slowed and pricing power has come under closer scrutiny. Reuters has reported in recent quarters that Canada’s major carriers, including Rogers, BCE and Telus, have faced softer wireless additions and more competitive promotions as population growth cools from earlier peaks and consumers rein in spending. In that context, analysts at National Bank Financial said in recent research that the sector faces “muted growth” and rising pressure to protect profitability, a view echoed in broad industry coverage by The Globe and Mail and Bloomberg.

For Rogers, the balance-sheet backdrop matters as much as the demand outlook. The company has repeatedly told investors that deleveraging remains a priority after the Shaw acquisition, and in its latest financial filings with Canadian securities regulators it said reducing leverage over time remains central to capital allocation. Tony Staffieri said on a recent earnings call that Rogers remains “committed to disciplined execution” on debt reduction and synergy capture, according to the company’s published transcript, while DBRS Morningstar and other credit observers have highlighted the importance of sustained cash generation for preserving credit strength.

The scale of the buyout eligibility suggests management is looking beyond routine belt-tightening. While the company has not publicly detailed how many employees it expects to accept the packages, the breadth of the offer points to a significant attempt to reshape the cost base without moving first to broad involuntary layoffs. In a statement carried by Bloomberg, Rogers said it is offering voluntary separation packages in certain parts of the business, adding that the company continues to “invest in the areas that matter most” to customers. That framing aligns with management’s recent emphasis on network quality, bundled services and business-market growth.

The timing also matters for investors watching whether Canadian telecoms can keep funding network investment, dividends and debt reduction at the same time. BCE and Telus have each signaled a more cautious environment in recent earnings commentary, with executives pointing to competitive intensity and macro pressure. BCE Chief Executive Mirko Bibic said on the company’s latest earnings call that the market remains “highly competitive,” according to company materials, while Telus executives have similarly stressed cost discipline in public filings and investor presentations. Against that backdrop, Rogers appears to be moving earlier and more visibly to defend earnings.

Labor and political sensitivity could still complicate the rollout. Canada’s telecom industry sits at the center of recurring debates over affordability, competition and service quality, and any large workforce reduction can draw scrutiny from unions and policymakers. The federal government and regulators have kept pressure on carriers to improve consumer outcomes, and Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada has repeatedly said it expects more competition and lower prices in wireless. While the buyout program is voluntary, the optics of cost cuts following a transformational merger may invite renewed questions about whether consolidation benefits customers as much as shareholders.

Investors, for now, are likely to focus on execution. Rogers has argued in filings and public remarks that combining wireless, broadband and media assets gives it scale advantages, but scale only matters if the company can convert it into steadier earnings growth and lower leverage. Analysts cited by Bloomberg and Reuters have said the next test for Rogers is whether synergy delivery and disciplined spending can offset slower industry growth without hurting customer retention or service levels.

What comes next is straightforward but consequential: markets will watch upcoming quarterly results for any disclosure on how many employees take the packages, what savings management expects, and whether those savings arrive quickly enough to support debt reduction targets. If Rogers can show that voluntary exits accelerate integration gains without disrupting operations, the company could strengthen its case that the Shaw deal still offers meaningful long-term value; if not, pressure on margins, leverage and investor confidence could deepen across the Canadian telecom sector.

JBizNews Desk

Google co-founder Sergey Brin slammed the proposed billionaire tax in California, likening it to the socialism that he fled with his family from the former Soviet Union.

Brin is one of the billionaires who relocated out of the Golden State to avoid the potential wealth tax that’s expected to appear on California voters’ ballots this fall. The proposal would impose a one-time 5% tax on residents whose net worth exceeds $1 billion. 

Assets covered by the tax may include businesses, securities, art, collectibles, and intellectual property – though real property, pensions and certain retirement accounts would be exempt.

“I fled socialism with my family in 1979 and know the devastating, oppressive society it created in the Soviet Union. I don’t want California to end up in the same place,” Brin said in a statement to The New York Times regarding a story by the outlet that discussed his move.

CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TAX NEARS BALLOT AFTER UNION COLLECTS NEARLY DOUBLE REQUIRED SIGNATURES

The proposed wealth tax applies retroactively to Californians who were residents of the state at the start of 2026, which prompted Brin to move out of the state late last year.

The Times reported, citing a person familiar with the arrangement, that Brin moved to the Nevada side of Lake Tahoe and is spending every other week at Google’s headquarters in California.

THE $1,600 LETTUCE: CALIFORNIA GROWERS WARN OF ‘MASTER PLAN’ STRANGLING FAMILY FARMS

The outlet previously reported that in December, an entity connected to Brin terminated or relocated 15 California limited liability companies (LLCs) out of the state, while several were converted into Nevada entities.

Advocates argue it would bring in significant funding for public services, while critics have warned it could drive job creators out of the state. If enacted, the tax bill would be due in 2027, with taxpayers having the option of spreading payments over five years.

OIL PRODUCER ORG SHREDS CALIFORNIA DEM FOR BLAMING IRAN WAR FOR HIS DISTRICT’S GAS PRICES

Brin’s opposition to the wealth tax on billionaires prompted him to work with other like-minded Californians and build support for an effort to defeat the measure.

The Times reported that Brin formed a pair of nonprofit groups as part of his political engagement around the wealth tax proposal, putting $57 million into Building a Better California over the last four months.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

Washington — The U.S. Department of Agriculture has awarded Palantir Technologies a contract worth up to $300 million to help solve difficult problems that farmers face when dealing with government programs, using advanced smart technology to make everything simpler and safer for the nation’s food supply.

The Problem: American farmers often have a tough time getting the help they need for loans, disaster aid, crop support, and conservation programs. Their important records are scattered across many old, separate computer systems in different offices. This leads to lots of repeated paperwork, long waiting times, mistakes, and frustration for both farmers and government workers in county offices. Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins has called reducing this government red tape one of her top priorities to better support the people who grow our food.

The Solution: Palantir Technologies will create a new smart system called “One Farmer, One File.” It brings all of a farmer’s information together into one easy digital file. Government staff can see the complete picture quickly, and field workers will get mobile tools on phones or tablets to help farmers much faster with far less paperwork. USDA officials said the new technology will cut administrative burdens, speed up help for farmers, and improve visibility into risks that could affect food production.

Brooke Rollins, Agriculture Secretary, described the award as important for both daily efficiency and protecting the country. “Protecting America’s farmland is protecting America itself,” Rollins stated in department materials.

The contract builds on previous work Palantir has done with the USDA on digital reporting tools. Alex Karp, Chief Executive Officer of Palantir Technologies, explained that his company builds software for real government needs. “We create systems that integrate data, automate routine work, and help leaders make better decisions in the real world,” Karp said in company statements and earnings calls.

Todd Neeley, DTN Environmental Editor, reported that the “One Farmer, One File” program will remove duplicate records and give staff a full view of each farmer. “This award should reduce delays and make government services work better for producers across the country,” Neeley noted.

The project tackles problems long identified by the Government Accountability Office in reports about outdated federal computer systems. Rather than replacing everything at once, Palantir’s approach connects existing data and automates tasks — a method supported by the Office of Management and Budget in its push for smarter government technology upgrades.

Farmers should benefit directly with faster approvals during tough times like droughts or storms, fewer errors on forms, and easier access to programs without needing multiple trips to county offices. USDA said the platform will especially help teams at the Farm Service Agency and the Natural Resources Conservation Service serve thousands of local locations more effectively.

This award also strengthens protection for the nation’s food supply. USDA officials highlighted that better data tools will help spot and manage threats such as animal diseases, supply chain issues, and cyber attacks on farms. Agencies including the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency have listed food and agriculture as critical national infrastructure that requires strong digital safeguards.

Alex Karp has long positioned Palantir as a trusted partner for large government agencies that need practical technology solutions. In the company’s recent SEC filings, executives noted strong demand from U.S. government customers as a key area of growth, even as contract timelines can vary with budgets and priorities.

Heath Terry, global head of technology research at Citi, said this type of government award shows increasing interest from civilian agencies in advanced data platforms. “Awards like the USDA’s Palantir contract demonstrate real demand for tools that deliver clear improvements in efficiency and risk management,” Terry observed.

The rollout will take several years, with full implementation targeted for 2028. Challenges will include combining old records, training staff spread across the country, and measuring actual results on the ground. The Government Accountability Office has repeatedly stated that successful technology modernizations need strong leadership and measurable goals.

Bloomberg Government tracking data indicates this award fits a growing national trend of civilian departments spending more on data integration and cloud-based tools to achieve better results for citizens.

Farmers, agricultural lenders, and industry groups will watch closely to see whether the new system brings faster help and fewer headaches in real life. If the project succeeds, the Palantir award could become a useful example for similar technology upgrades in other parts of the federal government.

Overall, the USDA award to Palantir represents a practical step by Secretary Brooke Rollins to use modern smart technology to solve everyday problems for farmers — delivering simpler, quicker, and more reliable government support while helping safeguard the agricultural foundation that feeds the United States.

JbizNews Desk- April 27

Britain‘s King Charles and Queen Camilla arrived in the United States on Monday for a four-day trip, welcomed by self-proclaimed royal fan Donald Trump even as the US president has differed with the British government over the war in Iran.

The state visit, by far the most high-profile and consequential of Charles’ reign, marks the 250th anniversary of the US Declaration of Independence from British rule, and is the first visit to the country by a British monarch in two decades.

Charles and Camilla touched down at Joint Base Andrews, where they were greeted by diplomatic, state, and federal officials as well as senior members of the British embassy and accepted flowers from the children of British military families stationed in the United States.

They proceeded to the White House, where they were greeted by Trump and first lady Melania Trump, who exchanged kisses on the cheek with the king and queen while the president shook their hands. The four stood briefly for photographers before retreating inside for a private tea.

The week’s schedule also includes a Tuesday address to Congress, a lavish state dinner at the White House, and a Wednesday stop in New York City. The Washington events take place with much of the capital city still on edge following the White House Correspondents’ Association dinner shooting on Saturday

US President Donald Trump and first lady Melania Trump welcome Britain's King Charles and Queen Camilla on the day of an afternoon tea at the White House in Washington, DC, US, April 27, 2026.  (credit: REUTERS/Suzanne Plunkett/Pool)

 Differences over Iran

While Trump is an unabashed fan of the British royal family who regularly describes Charles as a “great man,” he has had differences with the British government of Prime Minister Keir Starmer.

Starmer is hoping the visit will shore up the future of the two allies’ “special relationship,” which is at its lowest point since the Suez Crisis in 1956.

The long-planned visit has become enmeshed in a political spat between the two countries over the US-Israeli war on Iran, which led Trump to voice deep displeasure with the British government for failing to support the offensive.

 September 11 remembrance

The 77-year-old king, who is still undergoing treatment for cancer, on Tuesday will become the second British monarch to address the US Congress.

The royals will then head to New York City, where they will commemorate those killed in the September 11, 2001, attacks ahead of the 25th anniversary, while the queen will also mark the centenary of children’s stories featuring Winnie the Pooh.

The trip concludes in Virginia with the king meeting those involved in conservation work, a nod to his half-century of environmental campaigning. 

Britain’s ambassador to the US, Christian Turner, said the visit would underscore the shared history, sacrifice, and common values between the two countries, adding that the approach would be very British: “Keep calm, carry on.”  

While Trump has in recent days eased his criticism of Britain over its response to the Iran war, an internal Pentagon email set out how the US could review its position on Britain’s claim to the Falkland Islands as punishment for its lack of support, further straining ties.

One issue Charles will try to avoid during his visit is the Jeffrey Epstein scandal. Royal sources have said it was not possible for the royal couple to meet any victims of Epstein during the tour, as some have requested, to avoid impacting any potential criminal cases.

Charles’ brother, Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor, whose reputation and royal standing have been destroyed by his links to the late US sex offender, is facing police inquiries over his connections. The former Prince Andrew has denied any wrongdoing.

This post was originally published on here

A group of budget airlines is reportedly seeking financial assistance from the federal government that could convert to an equity stake in the air carriers.

The Wall Street Journal reported on Sunday that the group of budget airlines, including Frontier and Avelo, is seeking $2.5 billion in federal assistance through stock warrants that could convert into equity stakes in the airlines, according to people familiar with the matter.

Some of the Journal’s sources told the outlet that the group’s $2.5 billion figure was derived from an estimate of how much they expect to spend on jet fuel this year compared with earlier forecasts, with the estimate assuming jet fuel prices will remain above an average of $4 a gallon for the rest of the year.

Conversations about a possible relief package for budget airlines are reportedly expected to continue in the coming days, according to the Journal’s report. The news follows a reported meeting between the leaders of several budget carriers with Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy and Federal Aviation Administration chief Bryan Bedford last week.

“As the smallest and newest airline in the country, Avelo competes against significantly larger airlines who have unprecedented market dominance,” Avelo Airlines said in a statement to FOX Business. “Our focus on unserved and underserved airports gives millions of U.S. consumers low fare nonstop air service options they otherwise would not have. We have no specific comment on the report, but we emphatically agree that a healthy airline industry with strong competition is important to the U.S. economy, especially during this period of high fuel prices.”

FOX Business reached out to Frontier Airlines for comment.

WHAT A GOVERNMENT STAKE IN SPIRIT AIRLINES COULD MEAN FOR PASSENGERS AND THE INDUSTRY

Rising jet fuel prices amid the war in Iran have strained the outlooks for air carriers, who face higher costs than anticipated. 

Some air carriers, including larger rivals like United and American, have responded by raising fares and checked baggage fees on consumers.

TRUMP SIGNALS INTEREST IN BUYING SPIRIT AIRLINES WITH TAXPAYER BACKING, AIMS TO RESELL FOR PROFIT

Last week, leading budget carriers requested that Congress pass a bill to suspend the 7.5% federal excise tax on airline tickets and the $5.30 per segment tax, which the Association of Value Airlines estimated would offset about one-third of the increased fuel costs. 

The group represents Spirit Airlines, Frontier Airlines, Allegiant Air, Sun Country and Avelo.

The budget airlines’ pursuit of federal aid comes as the Trump administration is weighing a separate proposal to provide relief for Spirit Airlines in the form of a $500 million loan that would give the federal government the ability to convert warrants into equity stakes in the airlines.

CHEVRON CEO WARNS AVIATION STRAIN COULD WORSEN AS JET FUEL CRUNCH DEEPENS

The deal would see the federal government receive warrants equal to about 90% of Spirit’s equity in exchange for the funding.

Rising jet fuel costs have complicated Spirit’s plan to exit bankruptcy this summer, after the budget carrier entered Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings for the second time last year.

During the COVID-19 pandemic, the Treasury Department received warrants in major airlines after a roughly $54 billion support package to prevent mass layoffs during the pandemic. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The federal government ultimately opted against exercising the warrants it acquired and instead sold them in actions that yielded over $550 million.

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Former Apple CEO John Sculley identified OpenAI as the largest competitive threat facing Apple in years, marking a potential shift after decades of dominance by the iPhone maker in the technology industry.

“This is the biggest thing I think that’s happened since Tim Cook took over from Steve Jobs 15 years ago,” he told “The Claman Countdown” Monday.

Sculley’s comments come one week after it was announced that Tim Cook is stepping down as Apple’s CEO and will become its executive chairman, and as both Apple and OpenAI are reportedly exploring the development of similar next-generation AI products.

Apple is reportedly set to launch a wearable AI pin, Sculley said, while former Apple designer Jony Ive, credited for helping transform the company’s product vision, is partnering up with OpenAI to create its own AI-powered hardware.

TECH TITANS ELON MUSK AND SAM ALTMAN HEAD TO COURT IN TRIAL OVER OPENAI: WHAT TO KNOW

“It’s one that may have a camera in it. It won’t have a screen. And it’s going to be able to have what’s called ambient awareness, meaning it’s always on, it’s listening, and you get it through an ear pod,” he explained. “And that would be an entirely new user experience for people in the Apple ecosystem.”

Sculley said each company’s interpretation of the device will be different, but warned the competition poses a threat to Apple’s longstanding tech dominance.

He signaled that consumer loyalty may vary, as buyers will gravitate toward their preferred product, rather than defaulting to Apple’s ecosystem.

“I expect that they’re going to be taking very different ways of interpreting it in terms of a product,” the former Apple CEO said.

WHO IS JOHN TERNUS, SET TO SUCCEED TIM TOOK AS APPLE’S CEO?

“Some are going to become loyal to one version and some are gonna become loyal to another.”

The emergence of OpenAI as a dominant force in the tech world is part of what Sculley described as a “weather system” that is constantly shifting the industry.

Sculley affirmed that amid the AI storm, Apple’s leadership remains strong, even amid concerns surrounding Cook’s transition.

“Tim Cook did a spectacular job as CEO,” Sculley told FOX Business. “And the incoming CEO, John Ternus, looks incredibly qualified to be the next leader. So, from that standpoint, Apple’s in a very good position.”

Sculley went on to share advice for Apple as it rings in its 50th year in operation and as the race for AI dominance only intensifies.

“Stay true to the values Apple has been so successful at: beautiful products, no compromises,” he said.

This post was originally published here

Companies moved aggressively on Monday to raise fresh money in the U.S. bond market, taking advantage of a short-lived opening in credit conditions before a packed calendar of corporate earnings and major central-bank decisions. According to Bloomberg on Monday, issuers accelerated debt sales to lock in funding costs while markets weighed persistent uncertainty tied to the Middle East and the path of interest rates, a dynamic credit strategists said often pushes borrowers to act quickly when spreads stabilize.

Bankers said the timing reflected a familiar calculation: issue before volatility returns. In comments reported by Reuters in recent coverage of primary debt markets, syndicate desks at major banks have said borrowers tend to “front-load” issuance when macro risks threaten to crowd the market later in the week, especially ahead of policy meetings from the Federal Reserve and other major central banks. That backdrop matters because Treasury yields, credit spreads and investor risk appetite can all shift sharply after earnings guidance or rate signals, changing the economics of a deal within hours.

The immediate attraction for issuers lay in the chance to secure funding before any fresh repricing in rates. Officials at the Federal Reserve, including Chair Jerome Powell, have repeatedly said policy decisions remain data dependent, and in public remarks the central bank has stressed that inflation still needs to move sustainably toward target before easier policy can gain traction. That message, reflected in recent reporting from CNBC and Bloomberg, has kept borrowers sensitive to every move in benchmark yields, with finance chiefs preferring certainty over waiting for a potentially better market that may never arrive.

Investors, for their part, have continued to show demand for high-grade corporate paper even as geopolitical risk lingers. Market participants cited by Bloomberg said order books remained healthy for well-known issuers, a sign that large money managers still have cash to deploy and remain willing to buy new bonds when concessions look reasonable. Analysts at major banks, according to recent notes covered by MarketWatch and Reuters, have argued that all-in yields remain attractive enough for institutional buyers to support issuance despite concerns over growth, inflation and oil prices.

The Middle East overhang has not disappeared, but credit desks said it has not fully shut the market either. Reporting from Reuters and the Financial Times in recent sessions showed that investors continue to monitor the risk that a wider regional conflict could lift energy prices, revive inflation pressure and unsettle global risk assets. Those concerns can quickly feed into corporate borrowing costs, and bankers told clients, according to people cited by Bloomberg, that any period of relative calm should be treated as an issuance opportunity rather than a guarantee of stable conditions.

The rush also comes at a moment when corporate treasurers face a practical funding agenda beyond market timing. Companies across sectors need to refinance maturing debt, fund acquisitions, support capital spending and preserve liquidity buffers. In recent earnings calls and filings, a range of U.S. issuers have said balance-sheet flexibility remains a priority as borrowing costs stay above the ultra-low levels of the pandemic era. That broader financing need, highlighted in reporting by Dow Jones and Bloomberg, helps explain why the primary market can fill quickly even when executives remain cautious about the economic outlook.

For investors, the surge in supply offers both opportunity and a test of market depth. Portfolio managers quoted by Reuters in recent debt-market coverage said new issues often come with a premium that makes them attractive relative to outstanding bonds, but they also warned that too much supply in a compressed window can pressure spreads if demand thins. That balance between strong inflows and issuance fatigue has become central to how the market prices risk, particularly when Treasury yields remain elevated and economic data continue to send mixed signals.

The calendar ahead could determine whether Monday’s burst of activity extends or fades. Traders and bankers said upcoming earnings reports, fresh inflation and growth data, and any policy signals from the Federal Reserve and other central banks could either reinforce confidence or close the market window just as quickly as it opened. As Bloomberg reported, issuers appear to understand that the current opening may prove narrow, and the next few sessions will show whether investor demand can absorb the wave of supply without forcing companies to pay materially more for capital.

JBizNews Desk

New York City’s airspace, one of the nation’s busiest, is getting a new addition: electric flying taxis between John F. Kennedy International Airport and Manhattan. Joby Aviation on Monday announced the completion of the first point-to-point trip of its electric air taxi, developed as part of a federal program aimed at accelerating the introduction of air taxis into U.S. airspace, according to Bloomberg. Starting this week, the test flights, meant to demonstrate the zero-emission, ultra-quiet vehicle, will include human pilots but no passengers, running between JFK and Manhattan destinations at West 30th Street and East 34th Street, as well as the downtown heliport.

Monday’s demonstration marked the first point-to-point trip of an electric vertical takeoff and landing vehicle, also known as an eVTOL, Joby said in a press release. Flights are traveling along existing helicopter routes operated by Blade Urban Air Mobility, a division of Joby.

The air taxi is part of the Federal Aviation Administration’s (FAA) Electric Vehicle Takeoff and Landing Integration (elPP) Pilot Program, for which the Port Authority was selected for participation earlier this year.

Joby was chosen by the Port Authority as a partner for the project, and the company will also participate in similar initiatives in 11 other states.

According to Joby, the vehicles will turn one of the slowest commutes in the five boroughs into the fastest. Working with Delta Air Lines and Uber, the air taxis are expected to offer an end-to-end travel experience that turns a 60- to 120-minute drive into a seven-minute flight.

To safely navigate the busy airspace, the flights are supported by TruWeather, which provides weather intelligence, and are monitored by NUAIR, which offers live tracking support.

In an interview with Bloomberg, Joby CEO JoeBen Bevirt said the air taxis are “a hundred times quieter” than helicopters. Instead of the low-frequency thumping of a helicopter known to shake buildings and disturb residents, he said the company’s aircraft produces more of a “whoosh,” a broadband sound that blends into the background and dissipates quickly over distance.

Joby conducted a test flight of the vehicle from the downtown Manhattan heliport in 2023.

“New York has always been a city that defines the future by demanding better,” Bevirt said. “We first flew here in 2023, and now, building on years of experience moving people across this city, we’re showing what the next chapter looks like: a quiet, zero operating emissions air taxi service designed to better serve New Yorkers.”

The aircraft’s quiet design is significant, as increased helicopter traffic for tourism, charters, and commuter services has driven a surge in noise complaints across the city in recent years. In 2023, residents filed 59,000 complaints to 311, up from 3,300 in 2019, according to Bloomberg.

Safety is also a key concern following a high-profile crash last year in which a helicopter went down in the Hudson River, killing a Siemens AG executive, his wife, and their three children. Joby says its aircraft are built with redundancies across multiple systems to enhance safety and reliability. The vehicles feature six propellers, each driven by two electric motors connected to separate battery packs, along with three flight computers.

“The bridges, tunnels, airports, and rail lines that the Port Authority operates move hundreds of millions of people through this region every year, and our job is to make sure that network keeps pace with the future,” Port Authority Chairman Kevin O’Toole said.

“This cutting-edge aircraft is exactly the kind of innovation we have a responsibility to test, understand, and help shape for the good of the region and the public,” he added. “These flights advance our work to determine how next-generation aviation technology can serve the people of New York and New Jersey.”

The flights are part of Joby’s 2026 Electric Skies Tour, a national showcase marking the country’s 250th anniversary and highlighting the company’s technology. Joby is still in the final stages of FAA certification, after which it would be permitted to begin commercial operations in the U.S.

RELATED:

The post Electric ‘air taxis’ are traveling between JFK Airport and Manhattan this week first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here

The global chocolate industry is undergoing one of its most consequential structural resets in decades, as extreme volatility in cocoa prices forces the world’s largest confectionery companies to rethink sourcing, pricing, and product composition—all while consumers continue to face elevated prices at the register.

Cocoa futures, which surged to a record $12,931 per metric ton in late 2024, have since fallen more than 70%, stabilizing in the $5,000 to $6,000 range in early 2026. Despite the sharp decline, prices remain well above historical norms, leaving manufacturers navigating a fundamentally altered cost environment. The volatility—driven by poor harvests in West Africa, climate disruptions, disease, and years of underinvestment—has exposed deep structural vulnerabilities across the cocoa supply chain.

“The scale of the shock changed how companies think about cocoa entirely,” industry analysts note, pointing to a shift from short-term hedging strategies toward long-term supply resilience. Cocoa’s role extends far beyond chocolate bars, feeding into bakery products, snacks, dairy, and beverages—meaning pricing disruptions ripple across the broader food economy.

For The Hershey Company (NYSE: HSY), the response has centered on tightening hedging strategies while expanding sourcing flexibility. Chief Financial Officer Steve Voskuil told investors the company has strengthened its commodities governance framework, combining derivatives, market intelligence, and structured oversight to manage volatility. “We have very good visibility into our cost basket, including cocoa, albeit at significantly higher pricing levels than prior years,” Voskuil said, adding that hedging allows Hershey to cap downside risk while maintaining upside exposure if prices fall.

At the same time, Hershey has quietly adjusted certain product formulations. Some seasonal and specialty items have shifted away from traditional milk chocolate toward alternative coatings using sugar and vegetable oils, a move that has sparked consumer backlash. The company has defended its core products, particularly Reese’s Peanut Butter Cups, while acknowledging ongoing experimentation across its portfolio.

Despite the controversy, Hershey has outperformed peers. The company’s latest earnings beat expectations, sending shares higher and supporting a stronger outlook for 2026. Analysts note that Hershey has managed to maintain elevated retail prices even as input costs began to ease—effectively preserving margins in a way reminiscent of previous commodity cycles.

In contrast, Mondelēz International (NASDAQ: MDLZ) has faced a more constrained recovery. Although the company exceeded earnings estimates, its shares declined after management issued a cautious outlook. Analysts point to longer-duration cocoa hedges as a key factor limiting its ability to benefit from falling prices. Chief Executive Officer Dirk Van de Put emphasized that consumer demand for chocolate remains resilient but signaled that pricing pressure could persist. “For sure, cocoa prices will remain higher than they’ve been in the past, but they will come down eventually from the current high,” Van de Put said.

Across Europe, reformulation trends are accelerating. Nestlé S.A. (SWX: NESN) removed the legal designation of “chocolate” from certain products in the UK after reducing cocoa content below regulatory thresholds, relabeling them as “chocolate-flavored” coatings. Pladis Global, the maker of Penguin and Club bars, has taken similar steps. These changes have triggered backlash from consumers, with critics arguing that the industry has moved beyond shrinkflation into ingredient substitution.

“Chocolate manufacturers are looking for ways to decrease the impact of supply challenges, quality fluctuations, and volatile cocoa pricing,” said Billy Roberts, Food & Beverage Economist at CoBank. “But such moves have not been without controversy, whether from taste changes or negative public perception.”

Retail data underscores the disconnect between commodity prices and consumer experience. Despite the sharp drop in cocoa futures, chocolate prices in U.S. stores continued to rise into early 2026. Datasembly reported a 14.4% year-over-year increase in shelf prices during the opening weeks of the year, reflecting the lag effect of higher-cost inventories and sustained pricing strategies by manufacturers.

The most significant structural shift may be unfolding at the supply chain level. Barry Callebaut AG (SWX: BARN), the world’s largest chocolate producer, is reportedly exploring options to separate its cocoa trading and processing business from its chocolate manufacturing division. Potential scenarios include a spin-off, joint venture, or sale, according to people familiar with the matter. The move would mark a major departure from the integrated model that has long defined the industry. Shares in Barry Callebaut surged following reports of the potential restructuring.

The concentration of the cocoa market adds urgency to these discussions. Just three companies—Barry Callebaut, Cargill Inc., and Olam Group Ltd. (SGX: VC2)—control an estimated 60% to 70% of global cocoa grinding capacity, giving them outsized influence over supply dynamics. Their scale-driven model, built on predictable sourcing and cost efficiency, has been strained by the unprecedented volatility of recent years.

In response to growing pressure at the farm level, major industry players are also turning toward collective action. In February, companies including Mars Inc., Mondelēz, Nestlé, Hershey, and Lindt & Sprüngli AG (SWX: LISN) launched TogetherCocoa, a joint initiative aimed at improving farmer incomes and stabilizing production in Côte d’Ivoire and Ghana—the world’s two largest cocoa producers. “We are working closely with governments and supply chain partners to address long-term sustainability challenges,” said Todd Scott, Senior Communications Manager at Hershey.

The initiative reflects a broader acknowledgment that the root causes of cocoa volatility—aging tree stock, climate stress, farmer poverty, and lack of reinvestment—cannot be solved through financial hedging or product reformulation alone. With more than 90% of global cocoa produced by smallholder farmers, many of whom face declining yields and economic pressures, the long-term outlook for supply remains uncertain.

For consumers, the implications are clear. Even after a dramatic collapse in commodity prices, retail chocolate costs are unlikely to fall significantly in the near term. Companies that absorbed higher costs through price increases have little incentive to reverse them quickly, particularly as structural risks in the supply chain persist.

The result is a new reality for the global chocolate market—one defined by higher baseline prices, evolving product formulations, and a supply system still under strain. Whether this reset ultimately stabilizes the industry or introduces a new era of volatility will depend on how effectively companies—and governments—address the deeper structural challenges now laid bare.

JBizNews Desk

New York, April 27, 2026 — U.S. equities closed at fresh record highs Monday, capping a session shaped by geopolitical tension, artificial intelligence-driven momentum, and mounting anticipation ahead of a pivotal week for monetary policy and Big Tech earnings.

The S&P 500 rose 0.12% to 7,173.91, notching a record close, while the Nasdaq Composite advanced 0.20% to 24,887.10, also finishing at an all-time high after touching new intraday peaks earlier in the session. The Dow Jones Industrial Average slipped 62.92 points, or 0.13%, to 49,167.79, reflecting continued pressure in more cyclical sectors even as growth stocks pushed higher.

Markets opened under the weight of a complex global backdrop. The U.S.-Iran conflict entered its ninth week, with the Strait of Hormuz effectively shut, constraining global oil flows and keeping energy markets on edge. West Texas Intermediate crude climbed 2.38% to $96.65 per barrel, extending gains as supply disruptions persisted. At the same time, traders were positioning ahead of Wednesday’s Federal Reserve rate decision, where policymakers are widely expected to hold interest rates steady.

Sentiment shifted mid-session following a report that Iran had submitted a new proposal through Pakistani mediators aimed at reopening the Strait of Hormuz while deferring nuclear negotiations. While details remain limited and U.S. officials have not formally responded, the development introduced a measure of cautious optimism that helped lift equities into record territory.

Volatility eased as the CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) fell 3.69% to 18.02, signaling a modest reduction in market anxiety. Gold prices declined 0.97% to $4,694.70, while Bitcoin slipped 1.54% to $77,008, reflecting a mixed response across alternative assets.

Energy markets remain central to the macro outlook. Analysts at Goldman Sachs, including Daan Struyven and Yulia Zhestkova Grigsby, estimated that current disruptions are removing approximately 14.5 million barrels per day of Persian Gulf crude supply, driving global inventories to draw at a pace of 11 to 12 million barrels per day. The firm described the pace as “not sustainable,” underscoring the fragility of current supply-demand dynamics.

Within equities, technology and AI-linked names once again led gains, reinforcing investor conviction in the long-term earnings potential of artificial intelligence. Sandisk (SNDK) rose more than 7%, while Micron Technology (MU) gained roughly 5%, after Melius Research analyst Ben Reitzes initiated coverage with Buy ratings on both companies. Reitzes set price targets implying double-digit upside, arguing that AI-driven demand for memory and data infrastructure will persist through the end of the decade and reshape how investors value the sector.

Corporate developments also drove notable moves. Organon (OGN) surged 17% after announcing its acquisition by Sun Pharmaceutical Industries, a deal the company said would deliver “immediate and compelling value to shareholders.” Verizon Communications (VZ) added approximately 3% after raising its fiscal 2026 earnings outlook, citing stronger-than-expected performance in its core wireless business. Lionsgate Studios gained about 4% following a record-setting opening weekend for its latest film release, highlighting resilience in entertainment demand.

On the downside, losses were more pronounced in select names. POET Technologies (POET) plunged nearly 50% after disclosing the cancellation of key purchase orders tied to a major customer relationship. Domino’s Pizza (DPZ) dropped 9% after reporting U.S. same-store sales growth of 0.9%, well below analyst expectations. Adobe Inc. (ADBE) edged lower after a downgrade from Mizuho, which cited rising competitive pressures and potential margin headwinds. Meanwhile, Northland Capital Markets downgraded Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), pointing to valuation concerns amid intensifying competition in AI infrastructure from rivals including Intel Corp. and Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co.

Analyst activity remained robust across sectors. TD Cowen initiated coverage of DoorDash (DASH) with a Buy rating and a $225 price target, calling the company a long-term share gainer in digital commerce. Mizuho upgraded CrowdStrike Holdings (CRWD) to outperform, citing “very healthy demand across the platform,” while Wolfe Research raised its rating on Visteon Corp., projecting improved margins and stronger organic growth in the second half of 2026.

Market strategists continue to highlight the tension between macroeconomic risks and technology-driven optimism. JPMorgan analyst Fabio Bassi said in a client note that “financial markets remain jittery but broadly resilient,” pointing to the outperformance of technology, communication services, and consumer discretionary sectors in recent weeks.

Looking ahead, investors are bracing for a convergence of critical catalysts. The Federal Reserve’s policy decision on Wednesday will be closely watched for signals on the path of interest rates, particularly as elevated oil prices complicate the inflation outlook. At the same time, earnings reports from Alphabet Inc., Amazon.com Inc., Meta Platforms Inc., Microsoft Corp., and Apple Inc. are expected to provide fresh insight into the strength and sustainability of the AI-driven growth narrative.

Wedbush Securities analyst Dan Ives described the upcoming earnings cycle as a defining moment for the market, stating that “this is a monster week for Big Tech, and we expect continued strong demand driven by the AI revolution.”

Despite closing at record highs, markets remain finely balanced. Geopolitical uncertainty, elevated energy prices, and the trajectory of monetary policy continue to present risks, even as technological innovation and corporate earnings support valuations.

As investors navigate this environment, the central question is whether the current momentum — fueled by AI and resilient corporate performance — can withstand the mounting pressures from global instability and macroeconomic uncertainty.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved.

United Airlines on Monday announced that it’s ending its pursuit of a potential merger with American Airlines after its rival rebuffed an initial approach to discuss a deal.

United CEO Scott Kirby said in a statement published on Monday that he approached American Airlines about a potential merger because he “thought we could do something incredible for our customers together.”

“I was confident that this combination, which would have been about adding and not subtracting, creating a truly great airline that customers love, could get regulatory approval,” he said. 

“I was hoping to pitch that story to American, but they declined to engage and instead responded by publicly closing the door. And without a willing partner, something this big simply can’t get done,” Kirby said.

AMERICAN AIRLINES CEO SAYS MERGER WITH UNITED WOULD BE ‘BAD FOR CUSTOMERS’

American CEO Robert Isom on Thursday said the airline wasn’t interested in a potential merger with United, saying it would be bad for all parties involved.

“The idea of the two largest airlines in the world getting together, that is something that we’ve viewed as being anti-competitive and obviously everybody that has weighed in suggests the same thing,” Isom said. “Bad for customers, bad for the industry and ultimately, that would be bad for American Airlines.”

Kirby acknowledged that “American’s public comments make it clear that a merger like this is off the table for the foreseeable future,” but said that his vision for a merger between United and American involved using the scale of the combined airline to compete and lead around the globe.

BIPARTISAN SENATORS PRESS UNITED AND AMERICAN CEOS ON REPORTED MERGER OF LEADING AIRLINES

He wrote that the combined airline would have had opportunities to grow internationally and with expanded service to smaller communities, noting that both of those goals “are mathematically enabled by having a larger network.”

Kirby said that he thought a merger between United and American would have increased the total number of economy seats in the marketplace to give cost-conscious consumers more affordable options and choice, while the scale would boost competitiveness for international flights.

He also thought the combined company would’ve “created tens of thousands of new high-paying, unionized jobs with great benefits which would have led to even more career growth opportunities for the 250,000 employees already at United and American,” and also supporting domestic aircraft manufacturing.

UNITED AIRLINES MERGER TALK PUTS SPOTLIGHT ON AMERICAN CEO’S FUTURE, EXPERTS SAY

Kirby said he understood the scale of the merger would attract skepticism because “previous mergers have been about saving struggling airlines, previous legal and regulatory reviews have focused on subtraction and what’s being lost,” whereas he thought this merger proposal would be viewed as a “different proposition altogether.”

“While our pursuit of talks with American have ended, our mission to build the greatest airline in the history of aviation at United is well underway. We have a winning strategy, a culture of innovation and 115,000 of the best aviation professionals in the world working together to deliver for our customers,” Kirby wrote. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“While the airline industry has always been dynamic and unpredictable (it’s one of the reasons that I love this business), United’s future is brighter than it’s ever been,” he added.

This post was originally published here

Major global consumer goods companies are entering a new phase of pricing pressure as surging oil prices ripple through supply chains, threatening to derail a fragile recovery in consumer demand just months after inflation showed signs of easing.

Procter & Gamble Co. (NYSE: PG) warned that higher energy costs could cut roughly $1 billion from its fiscal 2027 profits, underscoring how deeply crude oil prices—now hovering above $106 per barrel—are feeding into packaging, transportation, and raw material costs. Company executives signaled that the renewed pressure is arriving at a particularly sensitive moment, as consumers had only recently begun stabilizing spending patterns after years of inflation.

The warning reflects broader stress across the consumer packaged goods sector. Reckitt Benckiser Group Plc (LSE: RKT) and Keurig Dr Pepper Inc. (NASDAQ: KDP) both reported a noticeable shift in consumer behavior, with shoppers increasingly trading down to private-label alternatives as price sensitivity resurfaces. Analysts say the trend raises the risk that further price increases could suppress volumes, reversing the modest demand recovery seen earlier in 2026.

“The fragile demand recovery is at risk of stalling if companies pass on higher input costs too aggressively,” Savyata Mishra, a consumer goods reporter, noted in recent sector coverage, highlighting the delicate balance companies now face between protecting margins and maintaining sales volumes.

The renewed cost pressures are closely tied to geopolitical developments. Oil markets have tightened amid ongoing disruptions linked to Iran and rising tensions surrounding key shipping routes, particularly the Strait of Hormuz. Helima Croft, Head of Global Commodity Strategy at RBC Capital Markets, said the impact is already cascading through global supply chains. “Sustained energy shocks from the Strait of Hormuz are amplifying cost pressures for everyday consumer goods, forcing companies to navigate a delicate balance between margins and volume,” Croft explained.

At the same time, consumer sentiment remains fragile. Recent data shows U.S. household confidence hovering near multi-year lows, with persistent concerns about affordability and economic uncertainty. Early corporate earnings are reinforcing that caution. Domino’s Pizza Inc. (NYSE: DPZ) lowered its full-year same-store sales guidance to low single digits, citing what it described as an “intensifying macro and competitive environment,” a move that sent shares sharply lower and signaled weakening discretionary spending.

“Verizon showed resilience in essentials like wireless, but Domino’s caution on discretionary spending highlights pockets of pressure among consumers,” said Brooke DiPalma, senior reporter at Yahoo Finance, reflecting the uneven nature of current consumption trends.

Against this backdrop, financial technology firms are attempting to cushion the impact. Affirm Holdings Inc. (NASDAQ: AFRM) announced the rollout of what it calls “agentic credit,” an AI-driven underwriting system designed to evaluate each transaction in real time rather than relying on traditional credit scores. The company says the model allows it to extend credit more dynamically while managing risk in an environment of higher borrowing costs.

“Agentic credit flips the economics by repricing risk at the transaction level, saying yes to more consumers banks traditionally overlook and no to overextended buyers instantly,” said Libor Michalek, President of Affirm, describing the system as a fundamental shift away from decades-old lending frameworks.

The move comes as consumers face mounting financial pressure from both elevated interest rates and rising costs tied to energy. Payment networks are also adjusting to shifting expectations. Executives at Visa Inc. (NYSE: V) emphasized in recent remarks that financial services must increasingly operate “at the speed of need,” reflecting a demand for more flexible, real-time access to credit and payments.

Market strategists say such innovations could play a key role in sustaining spending levels, even as macroeconomic headwinds intensify. “Innovations like this could help sustain consumer spending resilience even as macro headwinds from energy costs persist,” said Mark McCormick, Head of Equity Strategy at BMO Capital Markets.

Still, the broader global picture remains mixed. In the United Kingdom, retail sales posted their sharpest year-over-year decline in more than four decades, according to the Confederation of British Industry, with inflation fears tied to Middle East tensions weighing heavily on consumer activity. The divergence between essential and discretionary spending continues to widen, creating an increasingly complex landscape for global brands.

Investors are now turning their attention to upcoming earnings from major retailers and technology giants for clearer signals on pricing power and demand durability. “How Amazon, Walmart, and others discuss pricing power and demand will be critical,” said Lori Calvasina, Head of U.S. Equity Strategy at RBC Capital Markets, pointing to this week’s earnings cycle as a key inflection point.

The interplay between rising energy costs, cautious consumers, and evolving financial tools is shaping a new phase for the global economy—one where resilience is being tested in real time. Whether companies can successfully navigate this environment without triggering a broader demand slowdown will likely define the trajectory of consumer markets in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk

Now that the Justice Department has dropped its Federal Reserve probe, Sen. Thom Tillis, R-N.C., said he is willing to vote to confirm Kevin Warsh to serve as the next chair of the Federal Reserve System board of governors.

“I have been clear from the start: the U.S. Attorney’s Office criminal investigation into Chair Powell was a serious threat to the Fed’s independence, and it needed to end before I could support Kevin Warsh’s confirmation. I welcome the Inspector General’s investigation. This is a necessary and appropriate measure, and I have confidence it will be conducted thoroughly and professionally,” Tillis stated in a post on X.

The senator noted that he is looking “forward to supporting Kevin Warsh’s confirmation,” describing Warsh as “an outstanding nominee.”

PIRRO CLOSES INVESTIGATION INTO FEDERAL RESERVE OVER BUILDING PROJECT

U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro announced last week that she had directed her office to close the probe.

“This morning the Inspector General for the Federal Reserve has been asked to scrutinize the building costs overruns – in the billions of dollars – that have been borne by taxpayers,” she wrote in a Friday post on X. 

SENATE BANKING CHAIR SAYS POWELL DIDN’T COMMIT CRIME IN TESTIMONY

“I have directed my office to close our investigation as the IG undertakes this inquiry,” Pirro noted, while warning that she “will not hesitate to restart a criminal investigation should the facts warrant doing so.”

A spokesperson with the Fed’s Office of Inspector General said in a statement obtained by Fox News Digital, “In July of last year, the OIG announced that it was conducting an evaluation of the Board’s building renovation project.  

GOP SENATOR WILL BLOCK WARSH NOMINATION UNTIL ‘BOGUS’ POWELL PROBE ENDS

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“This assessment includes our independent analysis of the project’s substantial cost increases and overruns. We are actively working to complete our review, and look forward to making the results available to the public and Congress upon completion. We decline further comment,” the spokesperson noted in the statement.

This post was originally published here

A Princess Cruises ship recovered five bodies from the water during a voyage in Europe this month, the company confirmed.

The Sapphire Princess altered course on April 21 after crew members spotted an orange inflatable life jacket in the water while sailing en route to Cartagena, Spain, according to a statement from Princess Cruises.

The vessel deployed its Fast Rescue Boat to investigate and ultimately recovered five deceased individuals, the company said. The ship’s crew coordinated the response with the Maritime Rescue Coordination Center.

COAST GUARD PAUSES SEARCH AFTER CREW MEMBER FALLS OVERBOARD FROM NORWEGIAN CRUISE SHIP

The individuals were not passengers or crew members aboard the Sapphire Princess, according to the company.

ROYAL CARIBBEAN PASSENGER ACCUSED OF JUMPING OVERBOARD TO DODGE VACATION GAMBLING DEBT

“We extend our sincere condolences for this loss and are grateful to our crew for their swift response and efforts to render assistance,” Princess Cruises said in a statement.

CRUISE INDUSTRY GIANT MAKES $100M STRATEGIC BET ON FLORIDA WITH MASSIVE MIAMI HEADQUARTERS

The Sapphire Princess departed from Civitavecchia, Italy, on April 19 for a 14-day voyage to Copenhagen, Denmark, according to cruise tracking site CruiseMapper.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Further details about the identities of the individuals or the circumstances surrounding their deaths were not immediately available.

This post was originally published here

New Yorkers know space is always at a premium in small kitchens. However, this doesn’t mean that you have to miss out on the stylish and functional items that make cooking easier. From kitchen appliances and tools to storage and organization, these are 21 items that can help you save space in a small kitchen.

All of these products have been hand-selected by Team 6sqft. We may receive a commission for purchases made through these affiliate links. All prices reflect those at the time of publishing.

Appliances, cookware, bakeware

You can flip this toaster oven up and away when not in use, and it only takes up half the space in this position. The toaster oven has eight functions: air fry, roast, broil, bake, pizza, toast, bagel, and dehydrate. The appliance uses 75 percent less fat compared to traditional frying.
Nina Air Fryer Toaster Oven Combo, 8-in-1, $250/Sale $150 at Amazon

You may have thought you’d never have enough room to grill in your kitchen. But this innovative and compact model lets you grill indoors without any smoke. The griddler has reversible plates, so it can be used as a half grill, half griddler, full grill, full griddler, contact grill, and a panini press. The grease-reducing plates mean there’s very little smoke ( and no smoke at lower temperatures). The temperature range is 175 degrees Fahrenheit to 450 degrees Fahrenheit, and there are pre-programmed settings for beef, fish, pork, and poultry.
Cuisinart Griddler with Smoke-Less Mode, $170/Sale $150 at Amazon

Slow cookers tend to be bulky, but this one has a slim, space-saving design. However, the 6-quart capacity makes plenty of food. There are presets for meat/stew, chili/beans, soup/broth, and poultry, as well as high, medium, low, and keep warm modes. The inner pot is made of ceramic, making it easy to sear and braise food. And unlike many slow cookers, the tempered glass lid lets you view the contents. Color choices include Atlantic blue, cabernet red, dusty moss, and more.
Thyme & Table 6-Qt Programmable Slow Cooker, $80 at Walmart

With this compact espresso maker that’s only 5 inches wide, you can enjoy delicious espresso drinks with sacrificing valuable countertop space. Features include a pressure gauge, removable tank, oversized cup warmer, and removable drip tray. There’s also a stainless-steel tamper and a dosing ring, pressure gauge, 20-bar Italian pump, and professional steam milk frother. The easy-to-use controls include only four buttons: one/off, 1 cup, 2 cup, and steam. Color choices are silver, black, and rose gold.
Maestri House Semi-Automatic Espresso Maker, $140/Sale $132

Make latte art-level microfoam for your latte and espresso drinks without a steam wand – and you can also use it for matcha, collagen powder, jams, and more. This slim, handheld device has a speed dial for precise texture control and turns milk to velvety foam in less than a minute. It has a USB-C rechargeable battery and can be stored on the compact stand. Color choices are black, space gray, Christmas green, dusty rose, metallic blue, and more.
Maestri House LunaFro Max Handheld Electric Foam Maker, $35 at Amazon

Loose baking pans and sheets can take up a lot of space. However, this 11-piece bakeware set includes two storage organizations to keep everything neat and organized without taking up much space. The set includes a muffin pan, loaf pan, square pan, two circle pans, rectangle pan, medium baking sheet, large baking sheet, and cooling rack. The nonstick bakeware is made of ceramic and is free from toxic materials. It’s oven-safe to 550 degrees, and provides even heat distribution. Color choices are cream, black, gray, sage, marigold, navy, slate, and perracotta.
Caraway Nonstick Ceramic Bakeware Set, $445 at Amazon

This 6-quart air fryer has a generous interior, but the circular design is space-saving. It has a 1800-watt heating system and high-heat air circulation. It can reach temperatures of up to 450 degrees, and the streamlined silhouette includes a viewing window. The 10 cooking functions are air fry, bake, roast, reheat, and dehydrate, and there are presets for meat, fish, poultry, fries, and veggies. Some of the many color choices include slate grey, Atlantic blue, sand white, faded rose, and dusty moss.
Thyme & Table 6-quart Air Fryer, $89 at Walmart

If you like choices when brewing coffee, this space-saving single-serve coffee maker can be used with K-Cup pods, but it is also compatible with ground coffee when you don’t want to use pods. The coffee maker can make classic, rich, specialty, and iced coffee. It has a 56-ounce removable water tank and can also brew several sizes, from 6 to 24 ounces. Also, the foldaway milk frother lets you make lattes, cappuccinos, macchiatos, and more.
Ninja Pods & Grounds Specialty Single-Serve Coffee Maker, $130/Sale $100 at Amazon

If you’re pressed for space, and it may be difficult to reach a wall plug, this compact espresso machine is cordless and can heat 7 to 8 cups of espresso before it needs to be charged again. And although it’s compact, the 20-bar pressure pump extracts oils and aromas from the coffee and produces a generous crema layer. The espresso machine (which also includes a tamper kit) can heat cold water to 198 degrees Fahrenheit in 3 minutes. You can use it at home with the stand, but when on the go, you can just pour the coffee directly into your coffee cup or mug. Connecting to the app lets you adjust the water temperature, pressure, and pre-infusion time.
IKAPE KAPO K2 Pro Portable Espresso Maker, $219/Sale $197 at Amazon

Organization

This durable stand is a popular dorm room selection, but it also works well in a small kitchen. The stand has adjustable shelves on both sides, and can be used to create a coffee bar – holding a coffee maker and espresso machine along with cups and mugs, and coffee beans. Or, you can use it to hold a mini fridge, microwave, pots and pans, and other kitchen items. The stand has non-skid feet, thickened particle board, and a thickened steel frame that can hold up to 150 pounds. Power management on the side includes three AC outlets, a 6.5-foot power cord, and an on/off switch, so you don’t have to unplug anything.
Mini Fridge Stand Coffee Bar Cabinet Station, $149 at Amazon

If you don’t have room to dry your dishes on the countertop, this dish drying rack has extendable arms and goes over the sink. You have the option to extend the handles to hang it over the sink when the dishes are wet, and then retract the handles to store everything on one side of the sink when the dishes are dry. The container has areas for dishes, bowls, cups, and cutlery. It is waterproof and rustproof, and the handles include non-slip silicone. Accent color choices are silver, red, black, gold, and white.
JASIWAY Dish Drying Rack in Sink, $34/Sale $26 at Amazon

If you have a small kitchen but more space in the dining room or living area, consider this sideboard buffet cabinet, which has 2 shelves on each side, providing plenty of space for storing plate sets, cookware, and more. There’s also room on top for plants, lamps, photographs, and more. If you’re really pressed for space, you can put your TV on top of the sideboard.
CHITA 70” Sideboard Buffet Cabinet, $600/Sale $520 at Amazon

If you have just one drawer to donate to silverware, make it count with this compact utensil organizer. The drawer has five angled compartments and can hold up to 24 pieces of cutlery.
Joseph Joseph DrawerStore Compact Utensil Organizer for Kitchen Drawer, $14/Sale $10 at Amazon

This clear spice rack is made of durable acrylic and designed not to rust, stain, warp, brown, or turn yellow. The 4-tier set (which consists of eight pieces) is expandable from 13” to 25.” It can hold up to 56 4-ounce spice jars.
MIUKAA Clear Acrylic Spice Drawer Organizer, $33/Sale $25 at Amazon

This food storage container set is stackable in two ways: the containers can be stacked on top of each other, and when not in use, the bowls (and lids) nest neatly to save even more space. The borosilicate glass containers are BPA-free, oven and freezer-safe, and dishwasher safe. The containers are leak-proof and airtight. The lids also have a built-in steam valve for splatter-proof heating in the microwave. Color choices are white stone and desert sage.
Bentgo Signature 18-Piece Leak-Proof Glass Food Storage Container Set, $80 at Amazon

Corral all of your cleaning products under your sink with this two-tier sink organizer, which comes in a two-pack. The under-cabinet organizer can adjust in height from 11 inches to 13 inches. Made from carbon steel, with a baked finish, the organizer resists rust and stains.
Sevenblue 2-Pack Under Sink Organizer, $39/Sale $26 at Amazon

This steel wire organizer has five adjustable shelves, making it versatile enough to be used to hold appliances, bowls of fruit, paper towels, and pantry supplies. The durable wire organizer has a weight capacity of 1,750 pounds.
Amazon Basics 5-Shelf Adjustable Heavy Steel Wire Storage Shelves, $52 at Amazon

Other essentials

This stylish trash can is slim, so it can fit into narrow spaces. The stainless steel 13-gallon trash can has an inner bucket that is easy to remove. The stainless-steel trash can is fingerprint-resistant and has a sturdy step-on pedal, making it hands-free to operate. The soft-close lid is quiet, and the back handle makes it easy to transport the trash can. Color choices are silver, black, sandy beige, and white.
SONGMICS 13-Gallon Slim Trash Can, $90 at Amazon

Whether serving food in the kitchen or another room, this three-tier stackable serving stand holds up to 4 pounds per tier and has an anti-wobble design. Each of the three tiers has a stainless-steel food-safe platter (and divots to make it easy to remove the platters). The tiers can swivel 360 degrees, and the vertical design saves space. When not in use, the serving stand collapses to just 3 inches in height for compact storage.
3-Tier Stackable Serving Stand, $74 at Totem

Clean and wipe at the same time with this slim paper towel holder with a spray pump inside. The paper towel holder has a balanced tension arm with just the right amount of resistance to let you tear off the desired number of paper towels. At the center of the paper towel holder is the paper towel pump, which you can pull up by the finger hook. The 6-ounce pump reservoir can provide 175 pumps before the reservoir needs to be refilled.
Simplehuman Standing Paper Towel Holder with Spray Pump, $70/Sale $65 at Amazon

This knife set includes a compact Acacia Wood Knife Block that’s only 2.3 inches wide. The knife set includes a bread knife, carving knife, chef knife, Santoku knife, serrated utility knife, utility knife, paring knife, and honing Rod. The full-tang, ergonomic knives have Pakkawood handles and German steel, ultra-sharp blades that can effortlessly cut, carve, slice, chop, mince, and dice.
Cutluxe Knife Block Set 8-Piece, $189/Sale $134 at Amazon

RELATED:

The post 21 space-saving kitchen essentials that fit in your NYC apartment first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here

The United States is ramping up pressure on Iran by targeting the economic lifelines that help keep its oil flowing, with a particular focus on China’s role in facilitating those exports.

Gatestone Institute senior fellow Gordon Chang joined FOX Business’ Maria Bartiromo on “Mornings with Maria” to discuss how Washington’s latest sanctions strategy is designed to disrupt the networks moving Iranian crude, including Chinese refineries and vessels tied to Tehran’s so-called “shadow fleet.”

Those measures come as U.S. officials expand beyond traditional sanctions, warning foreign entities that continued business with Iran could jeopardize access to the American financial system. The approach reflects a broader shift toward what analysts describe as economic warfare, aimed at cutting off revenue streams that sustain Iran’s government.

“It’s important for the United States to start imposing secondary sanctions,” Chang said. “You should start, as the Treasury has done, with China because China is the main criminal here.”

Chang pointed to a recurring challenge in enforcing sanctions, noting that targeted entities often adapt quickly by shifting operations to avoid penalties.

WHITE HOUSE ACCUSES CHINA OF ‘INDUSTRIAL-SCALE’ AI TECHNOLOGY THEFT WEEKS AHEAD OF TRUMP-XI SUMMIT

“We have seen in the past that when we impose sanctions on Chinese entities… it moves the sanctioned activity to non-sanctioned entities and starts all over,” he said. “This is sanctions whack-a-mole.”

To counter that, Chang argued, the U.S. must broaden its approach to include entire networks rather than individual actors.

“The important thing here is for the United States to sanction all refiners, for instance, all vessels. We do that, we really cut off the China support for Iran,” he said.

CHINA COULD TARGET US HOMELAND IF IRAN CONFLICT ESCALATES, EXPERT WARNS

The push comes ahead of anticipated high-level talks between U.S. and Chinese leaders, raising the stakes for how aggressively Washington enforces its sanctions.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

After months of campaigning for a first-of-its-kind retroactive wealth tax in California, the union-led effort is now taking its next step.

The Service Employees International Union–United Healthcare Workers West (SEIU-UHW) said it has collected more than 1.55 million signatures, according to a press release, nearly double the 875,000-signature requirement — to put a one-time tax on billionaire assets on the California ballot.

The California Billionaire Tax Act would target the net worth of roughly 200 residents and would impose a one-time 5% tax on the net worth of California residents with assets exceeding $1 billion. The tax would be due in 2027, and taxpayers could spread payments over five years, with interest, according to the Legislative Analyst’s Office.

If the measure is approved by voters in November, anyone who was a California resident on Jan. 1, 2026, would owe the tax, according to the proposal. In practical terms, a resident with $20 billion in net worth on that date would owe a one-time tax of $1 billion, payable over five years.

THE $1,600 LETTUCE: CALIFORNIA GROWERS WARN OF ‘MASTER PLAN’ STRANGLING FAMILY FARMS

Supporters argue the tax is a direct response to “cuts to Medicaid and other federal health insurance programs by the Trump administration last year.”

“Most Californians and most billionaires recognize how reasonable and necessary this proposal is — both to keep emergency rooms open and to save California businesses from closing,” SEIU-UHW chief of staff Suzanne Jimenez said in a press release.

“A very small group of the most controversial billionaires on the planet tried to stop Californians from being able to save their local emergency rooms and hospitals — but our current signature tally proves frontline healthcare workers will prevail in bringing this commonsense proposal to voters,” she continued. “When our growing coalition files these signatures, David will have won the first round against Goliath, but healthcare workers and our allies won’t quit until we fully protect our patients from the looming healthcare disaster that will be caused by $100 billion in cuts to California healthcare.”

The SEIU-UHW did not immediately respond to Fox News Digital’s request for comment.

Opponents of the measure have warned the tax could kill an estimated 108,000 high-paying jobs over the next 20 years, The New York Times reported Sunday. Democratic Gov. Gavin Newsom even acknowledged that the state’s proposed wealth tax is bad economics, previously saying he feels vindicated in opposing the proposal after reports showed some of California’s wealthiest residents moving money and businesses out of the state, warning the measure would damage the economy and drive away investment.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

While the Legislative Analyst’s Office predicts a temporary surge in cash, it warned of an “ongoing decrease in state income tax revenues of hundreds of millions of dollars or more annually” as billionaires flee the state in response.

Some of those public figures who moved their residencies or businesses out of California before the Jan. 1 retroactive tax deadline include Google co-founders Larry Page and Sergey Brin, Meta’s Mark Zuckerberg, Peter Thiel, Steven Spielberg, Uber’s Travis Kalanick and car loan magnate Don Hankey.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Washington — Federal Reserve policymakers convene this week in what may be Jerome Powell’s last meeting as Chair, with markets pricing in a near-certain hold on benchmark interest rates as elevated energy prices from the Iran conflict cloud the inflation outlook and complicate the path for future policy easing.0

The Federal Open Market Committee is widely expected to leave the target range for the federal funds rate unchanged at 3.50%–3.75% on Wednesday, extending the pause in place since December 2025. Isabelle Mateos y Lago, chief economist at BNP Paribas, highlighted the growth risks stemming from the Middle East standoff. “Energy shocks are amplifying uncertainty across the global economy, and the Fed will likely emphasize data dependence while acknowledging clear upside risks to inflation from sustained oil prices,” Mateos y Lago said.5

Kevin Warsh, President Trump’s nominee to succeed Powell, appears closer to confirmation after Senator Thom Tillis dropped his hold on the nomination. This development potentially sets the stage for a leadership transition as soon as mid-May. Sonal Desai, executive vice president for fixed income at Franklin Templeton, stressed the importance of maintaining Fed credibility during this period of transition. “Powell’s final acts will focus on anchoring inflation expectations; any dovish tilt in communications could be misinterpreted amid the current oil volatility and geopolitical tensions,” Desai cautioned.3

Oil prices have climbed sharply in recent sessions, with Brent crude trading above $107–$108 per barrel following disruptions and limited tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz. Stephen Schork, principal at The Schork Group, noted that sustained supply constraints could significantly complicate the Fed’s task. “Higher-for-longer energy costs risk re-anchoring inflation expectations at elevated levels, forcing policymakers to remain patient even as other parts of the economy show resilience,” Schork warned.10

The timing of this week’s decision is particularly notable as it coincides with the heaviest stretch of corporate earnings from major technology firms. More than $28 trillion in S&P 500 market capitalization — including reports from Meta Platforms, Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon, and Apple — is set to report. Lori Calvasina, head of U.S. equity strategy at RBC Capital Markets, expects the central bank to carefully balance caution on growth with vigilance on price pressures. “Markets have proven resilient, but Powell will avoid signaling premature easing while the Iran situation and its impact on energy costs remain fluid,” Calvasina said.7

Broader economic implications from a steady policy stance extend directly to American households and businesses. Elevated borrowing costs for mortgages, credit cards, auto loans, and corporate investment could persist, potentially weighing on consumer spending and housing activity. Mark McCormick, head of equity strategy at BMO Capital Markets, views the week as pivotal for risk assets. “A steady Fed combined with strong results from the Magnificent Seven could reaffirm the soft-landing narrative, but oil remains the wildcard that could alter the trajectory for both inflation and growth expectations,” McCormick added.

Analysts note that Jerome Powell’s communications this week will be scrutinized not only for policy signals but also for their historical weight as potentially his final formal address in the role. His term as Chair officially ends on May 15, 2026, though he will continue serving on the Board of Governors. Paul Tudor Jones, founder of Tudor Investment Corp., has publicly highlighted the significance of leadership continuity at the Fed during turbulent times. “The transition from Powell to Warsh represents a critical juncture; markets will be listening for any hints on how the new guard might approach the balance between inflation control and economic support,” observers aligned with such views have noted in recent commentary.

The geopolitical backdrop adds another layer of complexity. With Brent crude up significantly year-to-date amid the Iran-related disruptions, economists warn of second-round effects on core inflation measures. Goldman Sachs economists have flagged that prolonged energy shocks could delay anticipated rate cuts into the second half of 2026 or later. This outlook aligns with CME FedWatch Tool data showing near-100% probability of no change this week and only modest easing priced in for later meetings.7

For businesses, steady rates mean continued elevated financing costs, which could influence capital expenditure decisions — particularly in interest-rate-sensitive sectors like real estate and technology infrastructure. Dan Ives, managing director at Wedbush Securities, remains constructive on the tech sector’s ability to weather the environment. “AI-driven productivity gains and strong balance sheets should help major companies navigate this period of policy caution,” Ives observed.

Everyday consumers are already feeling the pinch from higher gasoline prices, now averaging near $4.10 per gallon in many regions according to AAA data. This feeds directly into higher transportation and logistics costs, which ripple through to grocery bills and overall cost of living. Lori Calvasina of RBC emphasized that the Fed’s measured approach aims to avoid exacerbating these pressures through premature policy shifts.

As the FOMC prepares its statement and Jerome Powell takes the podium for what could be his swan song press conference, the focus will remain on data dependence and flexibility. Analysts broadly expect a measured, balanced tone that prioritizes continuity amid overlapping shocks from geopolitics, energy markets, and the corporate earnings cycle. The outcome will set the tone not only for the remainder of 2026 but also for the incoming leadership under Kevin Warsh.

JBizNews Staff | April 27, 2026

Elon Musk’s lawsuit claiming that OpenAI violated its mission as a nonprofit organization moves to trial on Monday as jury selection gets underway in a federal court in Oakland, California.

Musk was a co-founder of OpenAI in 2015, but left the artificial intelligence (AI) startup in 2018 after he was unable to persuade its other leaders to have OpenAI merge with Tesla or create a for-profit entity led by him to attract the investment needed to meet the company’s technological needs.

Musk’s lawsuit against OpenAI claims that the company violated its founding mission as a nonprofit to develop AI for the benefit of humanity by creating a for-profit entity in 2019.

His suit seeks the removal of OpenAI CEO Sam Altman and President Greg Brockman, as well as more than $150 billion in damages from OpenAI and Microsoft, which Musk has said he would provide to OpenAI’s nonprofit entity. Altman and Brockman were among OpenAI’s co-founders.

OpenAI is countering Musk’s claims by noting that the Tesla CEO pursued a merger with OpenAI and was involved with discussions about creating a for-profit entity for the company before his departure from its board of directors. They also view the suit as a tactic to boost his own AI startup, xAI, as a competitor to OpenAI.

OPENAI’S NONPROFIT PARENT COMPANY SECURES $100B EQUITY STAKE WHILE RETAINING CONTROL OF AI GIANT

The company’s 2019 creation of a for-profit entity governed by OpenAI’s nonprofit arm allowed the company to raise money from investors to scale up its computing capacity to facilitate AI research, which helped spur the launch of ChatGPT in late 2022.

OpenAI restructured again last fall, transitioning into a public benefit corporation in which its nonprofit arm as well as its other investors, including Microsoft, hold stakes. The nonprofit arm has a 26% stake with additional warrants if OpenAI’s valuation hits certain targets.

Musk’s legal team arrived at its estimate of damages owed to him by OpenAI by multiplying its valuation and a portion of the nonprofit’s stake that could be attributed to his contributions, claiming that between 50% and 75% of the OpenAI nonprofit’s stake can be attributed to him.

“Never before has a corporation gone from tax-exempt charity to a $157 billion for-profit, market-paralyzing gorgon – and in just eight years. Never before has it happened, because doing so violates almost every principle of law governing economic activity,” Musk’s suit claims.

ALTMAN CALLS MUSK’S SPACE DATA CENTER PLANS ‘RIDICULOUS’ FOR CURRENT AI COMPUTING NEEDS

Court documents show that Musk gave about $38 million of seed money to OpenAI between 2016 and 2020, mostly before he left the board.

Microsoft is also a defendant in the lawsuit and denies colluding with OpenAI, arguing that its partnership with OpenAI began after Musk’s departure.

OpenAI has insisted that Musk is motivated by revenge and competitive concerns, with the company writing on X that, “His lawsuit remains nothing more than a harassment campaign that’s driven by ego, jealousy and a desire to slow down a competitor.”

Both Musk and Altman signaled their eagerness for the trial to proceed earlier this year.

JUDGE STRUGGLES TO SEAT JURY IN ELON MUSK INVESTOR TRIAL AMID ‘HATE’ FOR TECH BILLIONAIRE: REPORT

“Can’t wait to start the trial. The discovery and testimony will blow your mind,” Musk said in a January post on X.

Altman countered in a February post on the X platform that he is, “Really excited to get Elon under oath in a few months, Christmas in April!”

The jury selection pool is about three times larger than a typical civil case due to concerns about possible difficulties in finding impartial jurors, given that Musk and Altman have become celebrities.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The judge determined that the jury won’t decide the specific repercussions in the case, and will instead work in an “advisory” role to determine how much OpenAI would need to pay in disgorgement if it loses the case.

FOX Business’ Kelly Saberi and Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Trump’s Next Tariff Wave Begins Tomorrow: USTR Hearings Open On New Section 301 Duties As Radio Flyer, American Manufacturers Brace For Impact

April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

The Trump administration’s trade strategy enters a new and more durable phase this week, as the U.S. Trade Representative (USTR) opens the first in a series of public hearings that will shape the next generation of American tariffs — this time built on legal authority that has already withstood judicial scrutiny.

The hearings, scheduled for April 28 and May 5, follow a major U.S. Supreme Court ruling in February that struck down tariffs imposed under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA). Writing for the majority in a 6–3 decision, Chief Justice John Roberts ruled that “the power to impose tariffs rests with Congress alone,” forcing the administration to rebuild its trade framework.

Now, that replacement is taking shape under Section 301 of the Trade Act of 1974 — a far more established and court-tested authority.

From Emergency Powers to Permanent Policy

In response to the court ruling, the administration quickly invoked Section 122 to impose a temporary 10% global tariff — a stopgap measure limited to 150 days — while launching sweeping Section 301 investigations targeting practices across more than 75 countries.

Those investigations focus on two core issues: failures to prevent forced labor in supply chains and structural overcapacity in global manufacturing. Unlike IEEPA, Section 301 provides a clear legal pathway for tariffs, with no statutory cap on rates and no expiration timeline, making it significantly harder to challenge in court.

Trade experts note that Section 301 was the same mechanism used to impose tariffs on China during Trump’s first term — measures that remain in place today at rates ranging from 7.5% to 100% on many goods.

Analysts at the Peterson Institute for International Economics say the current investigations are intentionally broad, covering an estimated 99% of U.S. imports, effectively replicating — and potentially expanding — the reach of the previous tariff regime under stronger legal footing.

The “Radio Flyer” Effect on Everyday Business

The real-world implications are already coming into focus.

Industry observers have pointed to Radio Flyer, the iconic American wagon brand, as a clear example of how deeply the new tariffs could reach into consumer markets. While the brand is American, much of its manufacturing is based overseas — particularly in China — making it highly exposed to sustained import duties.

For companies like Radio Flyer, the shift to Section 301 tariffs represents more than a temporary cost increase. It signals a long-term restructuring of supply chains, where sourcing decisions made decades ago may no longer be economically viable.

With limited short-term alternatives, many businesses face difficult choices: absorb higher costs, pass them on to consumers, or invest heavily in shifting production.

Hearings That Will Shape the Outcome

The hearings opening tomorrow will play a critical role in determining how these tariffs are applied. The USTR has already requested consultations with governments across dozens of countries, and companies have submitted written comments outlining the potential economic impact.

The first hearing, beginning April 28, will focus on forced labor enforcement, followed by a second session on May 5 addressing global manufacturing imbalances.

Businesses that participate will have a chance to influence how tariffs are structured — including which industries are targeted and at what rates.

The $160 Billion Legal Fallout

At the same time, the administration is dealing with the financial consequences of the Supreme Court’s earlier ruling.

More than 2,000 lawsuits have been filed by companies seeking refunds for tariffs previously collected under IEEPA, with total claims estimated between $160 billion and $175 billion.

U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) is currently developing a system — known as the Consolidated Administration and Processing of Entries (CAPE) — to manage potential refunds, though no timeline has been announced.

Trade advisors are urging companies to pursue claims through both litigation and administrative channels, as the process remains uncertain.

Despite the legal challenges, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has indicated the administration intends to maintain overall tariff revenue levels by combining multiple authorities, including Sections 122, 232, and 301 — ensuring that even if refunds are issued, the broader tariff structure remains intact.

A Structural Shift for U.S. Business

For American companies, the message is increasingly clear: tariffs are not being rolled back — they are being rebuilt.

What began as a contested use of emergency powers is now evolving into a long-term trade framework grounded in established law, with the potential to reshape global supply chains and pricing structures for years to come.

As the hearings begin, businesses across sectors — from manufacturing to retail — are preparing for a future where tariffs are not a temporary disruption, but a permanent feature of the economic landscape.

The companies that engage now may help shape that future. Those that do not may find themselves adapting to it.

— JBizNews Desk

Brazilian regulators on Friday moved to restrict so-called “prediction markets”—online platforms that allow users to place money on the outcome of real-world events—announcing a ban on election- and sports-related contracts offered by Kalshi and Polymarket, in a decision issued by the Secretaria de Prêmios e Apostas under the country’s Finance Ministry that places Brazil at the center of a rapidly escalating global regulatory battle.

The move comes as the United States is already grappling with the same issue through active litigation and regulatory conflict involving the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, which oversees Kalshi as a federally licensed exchange, and multiple state regulators who argue the platform is effectively offering unlicensed gambling. Federal court rulings have split on whether these contracts qualify as financial derivatives or bets, raising the likelihood that the issue could ultimately be decided by the U.S. Supreme Court.

At their core, prediction markets allow users to buy and sell contracts tied to future outcomes. In the U.S., those include whether inflation will exceed a certain level, whether the Federal Reserve will raise interest rates, whether a political party will control Congress, or outcomes of major sporting events. Rostin Behnam Chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission has previously described event contracts as “novel financial products that require careful oversight,” while emphasizing the agency’s role in determining whether they fall within derivatives law.

Brazil’s action specifically targets contracts tied to elections and sports—categories regulators determined do not qualify as financial instruments under Brazilian law—and includes practical enforcement measures such as:

  • Blocking access to platforms offering these contracts
  • Prohibiting local financial institutions from facilitating payments
  • Ordering partnered brokerages to halt distribution of restricted products

“These types of contracts are not compatible with the financial market framework,” the Secretaria de Prêmios e Apostas said in its official release, adding that such activities fall under Brazil’s betting laws and require proper licensing.

The restriction follows a joint review with the Comissão de Valores Mobiliários, which oversees capital markets but lacks jurisdiction over activities classified as gambling. Under Brazil’s legal structure, products tied to uncertain future events without an underlying economic asset—such as elections or sports—are categorized as betting.

The decision directly impacts Kalshi, which entered Brazil in March through partnerships with XP Inc. and Clear Corretora, initially offering macroeconomic contracts tied to inflation and interest rates while presenting the platform as a new financial asset class.

Co-founder Luana Lopes Lara, who is Brazilian, had identified the country as a strategic expansion market, citing its large retail investor base and growing digital trading ecosystem. The rollout, however, quickly collided with Brazil’s stricter legal separation between financial markets and betting.

Pressure from the domestic gambling industry also played a role. The Brazilian Institute for Responsible Gaming argued that prediction platforms operate similarly to sportsbooks but avoid licensing fees, taxation, and compliance requirements imposed on regulated operators, including strict identity verification and anti-money-laundering controls.

The broader regulatory backdrop includes a sharp rise in concern over gambling-related harm. The Brazil Ministry of Health has expanded national addiction programs, while authorities have blocked tens of thousands of illegal betting sites in recent years as part of a coordinated crackdown.

The broader regulatory backdrop includes rising concern among U.S. public health officials that prediction markets may expand access to gambling-like behavior under the framing of finance. “When products are presented as investing but function like betting, they can lower the psychological barriers to entry,” said Keith Whyte, Executive Director of the National Council on Problem Gambling, a Washington, D.C.-based nonprofit focused on prevention, treatment, and recovery. “For individuals vulnerable to addiction, these markets can become a gateway, where what starts as speculation can quickly turn into compulsive behavior.”

Public health authorities note that gambling-related harm is often self-identified rather than clinically diagnosed, with individuals recognizing patterns such as loss of control, financial strain, or repeated unsuccessful attempts to stop. The National Council on Problem Gambling and the World Health Organization recommend early intervention through confidential helplines, counseling, and self-exclusion programs; in the United States, the National Problem Gambling Helpline (1-800-GAMBLER), operated by the National Council on Problem Gambling, provides 24/7 confidential support, while similar resources have been expanded in Brazil through the Brazil Ministry of Health as part of a broader response to rising gambling-related concerns.

JBizNews Desk

A gourmet chocolate maker is recalling select bonbon collections sold nationwide after a labeling error failed to disclose the presence of walnuts, posing a potentially life-threatening risk to some consumers.

French Broad Chocolates PBC is recalling its Bette’s Bake Sale Bonbon Collection in six-piece, 12-piece and 24-piece boxes due to the potential presence of undeclared walnuts, according to a company announcement published by the Food and Drug Administration.

The recall applies to products with batch numbers 260414 and 260417.

DOZENS OF ICE CREAM PRODUCTS RECALLED OVER UNDECLARED ALLERGENS POSING ‘LIFE-THREATENING’ RISK

“People who have an allergy or severe sensitivity to walnuts run the risk of serious or life-threatening allergic reaction if they consume these products,” the company said.

The products were distributed between April 14, 2026, and April 20, 2026, and were sold in French Broad Chocolates retail stores in Asheville, North Carolina, and online to customers in multiple states.

CANTALOUPES RECALLED NATIONWIDE OVER SALMONELLA FEARS — WHAT SHOPPERS NEED TO KNOW

Affected products include Bette’s Bake Sale Bonbon Collection in six-piece (2.5 oz.), 12-piece (5 oz.) and 24-piece (10 oz.) boxes, with “best by” dates ranging from June 22, 2026, to June 30, 2026, depending on the batch.

According to the company, the issue stems from a labeling error in the tasting notes insert that failed to identify walnuts as a tree nut allergen. The Walnut Fudge bonbon, which contains walnuts, was incorrectly identified in the printed tasting notes and was switched with the Peach Cobbler bonbon in the guide.

GENERAC RECALLS PORTABLE GENERATORS SOLD AT COSTCO OVER FIRE RISK

The company said it was notified of the issue on April 20, 2026, by a team member. No illnesses have been reported to date, according to the company.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Consumers with a tree nut allergy who purchased the products are urged to return them to the place of purchase for a full refund or discard them. Customers with questions can contact French Broad Chocolates customer service.

This post was originally published here

.

The Golden State is losing its appeal in Malibu’s tough, salt-sprayed rocks and Moorpark’s sun-drenched hills.

Larry Thorne’s family has watched the Pacific fog pour over the community’s food-producing fields for almost 80 years. Today, the view is clouded by a different threat, including a triple price for$ 7-a-gallon diesel, rising power prices, and a suffocating regulatory environment, which local farmers refer to as the “master program” to run the working group out of the state.

Thorne is the last land to be built in a community of million-dollar estates, and it is at a point where Sacramento’s energy agenda can no longer compete with the region’s Mediterranean climate.

On a clear, spring day, Thorne told Fox News Digital at his land,” The California state has its head in the sand when it comes to power.” Every agricultural power has said,” Get great or getting out. For the past 40 years. And so the smaller producer is not surviving, but those who took on the issue of simply getting bigger and bigger and bigger are.

OIL PRODUCER ORG SHREDS CALIFORNIA DEM FOR Accusing IRAN WAR FOR GAS PRICES IN ITS DISTRICT

The 3, 000-acre Underwood Family Farms, owned and run by 83-year-old Navy veteran Craig Underwood, are located about 40 minutes north of Thorne&rsquo ;s farm. He has spent more than 50 years evicting life from Ventura County soil, has seen market crashes and droughts, and has never witnessed a$ 70 strawberry flat or a$ 1,600-per-acre regulatory cost associated with a head of lettuce.

Under the darkened support of his farm&rsquo, his education center, Underwood also reported to Fox News Digital:” Every time we cut costs, and we try to get a little bit more money, but every year the costs increase more than we’ve been able to cut them, and the money that we receive is less.” ” I think a lot of producers are under stress right now because this is a very difficult economic time,” according to the author.

The producers in California are a declining species. They are the bruised hands behind your grocery cart, who are currently being ordered to trade their trucks for an energy transition the network might not help and who are now being paid nearly$ 7 per quart of diesel fuel.

” Dicken was five cents per gallon when I was younger,” Thorne said. Between the costs of grain, fertilizer, energy, and labor, “everything has increased by at least 25 %,” according to the report. The fuel cost to deliver the food to the town is what is really killing the consumer, with my pickup trucks now costing close to$ 200. It is significantly increasing.

California has definitely become almost uncompetitive in terms of having to adhere to a lot of different rules that come from Sacramento. There is a bunch of regulation, Underwood said, and our labor fees are higher.

The labor of love that went into the area is obvious despite the stark differences in the size of the two farms ‘ activities. Before picking a few of the mature, red strawberries off their stems, Thore carefully tasted them. The result was an intense, fruity crimson explosion that stung the tongue and made the senses. After taking a vehicle tour that included a gigantic cornhole, endless fields of you-pick create options like cabbage, raspberries, turnips, several lettuce, beets, lemons, blackberries, and even fresh flowers, Underwood took the event.

The people who serve America are warning that the network, the prices, and the regulations are designed for” the very richest people,” leaving the typical home and small business owners behind. Their enthusiasm for their work is unmistakable.

They are operating the oil refineries out of the condition at the same time as we do not have the power to make it happen and we don’t have the generator to make it happen. It sounds like a master plan to reduce California’s people, to be honest. From 40 million to 20 million, essentially the very wealthy who can purchase the gas rates, real estate taxes, and other expenses, Thorne said. It sounds like a king strategy to elude state intervention in my situation.

Low prices, reduced demand, and low demand are actually affecting California’s farmers, according to Underwood, who noted that the entire export process has been halted. There are “many stories about the high cost of meal,” but the majority of it is caused by the food moving all over the nation. And there are cooling, warehouse, vehicles, and transportation involved in each head of lettuce you buy because it is the cost of getting it from the field, harvested, and then placed on a shelf.

CHEVRON WARNS NEWSOM’S ‘, ADVERSARIAL ’, ENERGY AGENDA WILL CRIPPLE CALIFORNIA ECONOMY, SEND GAS PRICES SOARING

Due to a mixture of state and local taxes, a” clean-burning” gas blend, a lower carbon fuel standard, and limited in-state plant power, California’s gas prices are among the highest in the country.

The United States recently introduced legislation to ensure a 100 % electronic coming by 2035, but President Donald Trump and the U.S. Senate blocked it in a historic vote.

According to Underwood, California regulations cost lettuce an estimated$ 1,600 per acre, while farmer margins typically range between$ 100 and$ 200, according to Underwood. The average American farmer is now between 60 and 67 years old, and tractor maintenance costs range between$ 70,000 and$ 30,000.

Both farmers said operating their businesses outside of the state would be more economical, but neither has ever thought about preserving their millennial past.

Although it’s definitely 30 % less expensive to operate outside of California, I couldn’t develop what I do elsewhere. In Nevada, I am unable to do this. We have a climate that hardly anyone else on earth can increase, according to Thorne, and I didn’t grow strawberries in Nevada.

” Farming is one of those industries. You have to survive it, and you much like it because it’s difficult, Underwood said. It’s both a life and a company. We’ve experienced very difficult times before, so this isn’t something completely new, and I’d assume we’ll definitely manage to survive.”

Gov. The California Energy Commission was requested by Gavin Newsom’s office for remark on Fox News Digital. The conflict in Iran and the successful closing of the Strait of Hormuz, a crucial delivery canal through which about 20 % of the nation’s petrol supply flows, are all contributing factors, according to a spokesperson. Regardless of whether oil is being pumped out or have refineries, the state’s investments in clean transportation, fresh fuels, network reliability, and electric vehicle adoption are the key components of protecting consumers from the kind of unusual policy-driven price shocks that Americans are experiencing every day.

Instead of mandated electricity, Thorne and Underwood advocated for a return to what they termed” common-sense power solutions” like factories and nuclear energy.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

Thorne emphasized that California needs to shut down power suppliers and that oil refineries are necessary. Build nuclear reactor, factories, and [do it ] as quickly as humanly possible.

According to Underwood,” Change needs to come, and I would like the condition to reflect us more than Edison and PG&amp, E,” and it seems like Edison and PG&amp, E usually have a seat at the table while the typical business or customer doesn’t.”

The first episode of Fox News Digital’s” Golden State stress: Inside California’s monetary problem” is available. Visit us for Part 2 where we travel across the country to the most expensive petrol stations to hear the voices Sacramento is trying to silence.

FOX BUSINESS: Extra

This post was originally published here

By Staff, April 27, 2026

Beijing — Chinese regulators on Monday ordered Meta Platforms to unwind its roughly $2 billion acquisition of the agentic AI startup Manus, a decisive intervention that highlights Beijing’s escalating efforts to safeguard domestic artificial-intelligence talent and intellectual property amid deepening U.S.-China technological rivalry.

The National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC) issued a terse statement prohibiting foreign investment in Manus — a Singapore-headquartered but Chinese-founded company specializing in autonomous AI agents capable of complex tasks such as drafting reports and building websites — and requiring both parties to terminate the transaction in line with Chinese laws. The move caps months of regulatory scrutiny that began shortly after Meta Platforms announced the deal in December 2025. Officials had already barred Manus co-founders from leaving China during the review.

Meta Platforms expressed disappointment but signaled it would pursue a resolution. “The transaction complied fully with applicable law, and we anticipate an appropriate resolution to the inquiry,” the company said. Mark Zuckerberg, Meta Platforms’ chief executive, has made aggressive AI expansion a cornerstone of the company’s strategy, positioning the Manus deal as a key step to accelerate development of advanced agentic systems that could complement its existing Llama models and ad-driven business.

Paul Triolo, senior vice president for China and technology policy lead at DGA-Albright Stonebridge Group, said the NDRC’s action reflects Beijing’s view that Manus’ relocation of key assets and talent to Singapore risked setting a dangerous precedent for other Chinese AI founders seeking to monetize abroad. “This isn’t just about one deal,” Triolo noted. “It’s a clear signal that cross-border AI acquisitions involving Chinese-origin talent will face heightened scrutiny going forward.”

Lian Jye Su, chief analyst at technology research firm Omdia, described the blockage as Beijing playing “hardball” with assets it regards as core national security priorities. Su added that the decision could deter U.S. tech giants from similar pursuits and mirrors Washington’s own export controls and investment curbs on China. “It strongly indicates what Chinese authorities may do regarding acquisitions involving deep-tech companies,” Su said.

The setback arrives at a critical moment for Meta Platforms, which is scheduled to report first-quarter 2026 earnings on April 29. Analysts expect revenue of approximately $55.4 billion, up nearly 31% year-over-year, driven by resilient advertising performance despite heavy capital expenditure on AI infrastructure. Mark Zuckerberg has already announced roughly 8,000 job cuts — about 10% of the workforce — to help offset those investments.

Dan Ives, managing director and senior equity research analyst at Wedbush Securities, remains constructive on Meta Platforms despite the regulatory hurdle. “The Manus block is a near-term negative, but Meta Platforms’ core ad business and AI roadmap are robust enough to absorb it,” Ives said. “Investors will focus on guidance around AI monetization and capex trajectory when Zuckerberg speaks on the earnings call.”

Broader market reaction was muted, with Meta Platforms shares little changed in early trading as investors weighed the news against the week’s heavy earnings calendar. The episode nevertheless underscores the fragility of global AI supply chains and the growing willingness of both Washington and Beijing to weaponize regulatory tools in the technology arms race.

Lian Jye Su of Omdia warned that the ruling could chill outbound Chinese AI entrepreneurship. “Founders may now think twice about structuring deals that could be perceived as talent or tech leakage,” Su observed.

For Meta Platforms and Mark Zuckerberg, the path forward likely involves accelerating internal AI development and alternative partnerships while navigating an increasingly fragmented global regulatory environment. The company’s strong balance sheet and advertising cash flow provide a buffer, but sustained success in agentic AI will require overcoming such geopolitical friction.

JBizNews- Desk

By Staff, April 27, 2026

New York — Oil prices extended gains on Monday, with Brent crude hovering above $106 per barrel, as stalled U.S.-Iran peace negotiations and continued restrictions in the Strait of Hormuz kept supply risks elevated and reminded markets of the waterway’s outsized role in global energy flows.

Brent futures rose as much as 2% intraday before paring some gains on reports that Iran had floated a new proposal to reopen the strait in exchange for the lifting of U.S. port blockades, with nuclear talks postponed. West Texas Intermediate traded near $96. The fifth straight day of advances reflects the market’s pricing of persistent bottlenecks that have already disrupted roughly one-fifth of global oil and gas shipments.

Goldman Sachs commodity analysts, who have repeatedly adjusted forecasts amid the crisis, flagged that a prolonged closure of the Strait of Hormuz could push Brent above $100 per barrel on average for the remainder of 2026. “We continue to see risks to our price forecast as skewed to the upside,” the Goldman Sachs team wrote in a recent note, citing the potential for additional production losses if tanker traffic remains constrained.

The impasse stems from the ongoing Iran conflict that began earlier this year. U.S. naval actions and Iranian countermeasures have tightened supply, with limited tanker movements reported through the critical chokepoint. Goldman Sachs analysts noted that even a one-month delay in reopening would keep prices elevated through the second half of the year.

For everyday consumers, the price surge is already translating into higher gasoline costs at the pump — now averaging around $4.10 per gallon in many U.S. markets — feeding into broader inflation pressures on groceries, transportation, and household budgets. Goldman Sachs economists have warned that sustained energy shocks could complicate the Federal Reserve’s path as it prepares for its policy meeting later this week.

Helima Croft, head of global commodity strategy at RBC Capital Markets, echoed the caution. “Geopolitical risk premiums are back in full force, and the Strait of Hormuz remains the single biggest choke point in global energy markets,” Croft said. “Any de-escalation would trigger a sharp pullback, but the baseline remains volatile.”

Stocks opened mixed, with the S&P 500 little changed as chip and AI-related shares provided some offset to energy-sector caution. Traders are balancing the oil headline risk against optimism around this week’s “Super Bowl” earnings from Meta Platforms, Alphabet, Amazon, Microsoft, and Apple.

Goldman Sachs analysts continue to see upside skew in oil even after trimming near-term forecasts following earlier ceasefire signals. In their adverse scenario, persistent Middle East disruptions could drive Brent averages well above $100 through year-end.

The developments come as central banks including the Fed, ECB, BOE, and BOJ deliver rate decisions this week. Higher-for-longer oil prices could reinforce sticky inflation readings, potentially delaying rate cuts and weighing on consumer spending.

Lian Jye Su of Omdia, while focused primarily on tech, noted the spillover: “Energy shocks from the Middle East are amplifying cost pressures across global supply chains, including those critical to AI hardware.”

Markets remain highly sensitive to any breakthrough in U.S.-Iran talks, mediated in part through third parties. For now, the combination of stalled diplomacy and physical supply constraints keeps the oil complex on edge, with Goldman Sachs and peers maintaining a watchful eye on tanker traffic data as the key near-term indicator.

JBizNews -Desk

Chevron CEO Mike Wirth warned that strain on the aviation industry could intensify in the coming weeks as jet fuel supplies tighten, driven by disruptions tied to the Iran war.

Appearing Sunday on CBS News’ “Face the Nation,” Wirth said jet fuel in key regions was already at seasonally low levels before the conflict began, leaving markets vulnerable to supply shocks.

“It’s not flowing today. So, we are seeing jet fuel tighten very quickly in Europe, in Asia, and we’re seeing airlines announce adjustments in their flight schedules,” Wirth said. “I think aviation is clearly an area where it’s going to probably get worse over the next few weeks.”

Jet fuel prices have surged sharply since late February, reflecting constrained shipping through the Strait of Hormuz – a critical oil transit choke point through which roughly one-fifth of global supply typically passes.

DEM LAWMAKER SAYS AMERICANS ‘GETTING FLEECED AT THE PUMP,’ PUSHES OIL EXPORT BAN AMID IRAN TENSIONS

U.S. jet fuel prices have climbed from about $2.50 per gallon before the conflict to $4.19 per gallon as of April 24, according to Airlines for America. Globally, prices remain volatile, with the International Air Transport Association reporting a 6.7% week-over-week decline to $184.63 per barrel, even as broader supply pressures persist.

MAJOR AIRLINE AXES 20,000 ‘UNPROFITABLE’ FLIGHTS AS JET FUEL COSTS SOAR

Airlines are already adjusting operations in response to higher fuel costs. United Airlines said it plans to cut about 5% of its planned capacity this year, while Delta Air Lines has trimmed growth plans by roughly 3.5 percentage points.

Fuel typically accounts for about a quarter of airline operating costs, leaving carriers highly exposed to price swings. In response, airlines are reducing lower-margin routes and leaning on higher fares and fees to offset rising expenses.

Consumers are beginning to feel the impact. Bureau of Labor Statistics data shows airfares rose month over month in March, a trend that could accelerate as carriers pass along higher fuel costs and limit capacity heading into the peak summer travel season.

UNITED AIRLINES RAISING TICKET PRICES UP TO 20% AS FUEL COSTS SURGE AMID IRAN WAR

Wirth said the core issue remains disrupted energy flows through the Strait of Hormuz. Reduced shipments from Middle Eastern refiners, which supply a significant share of global jet fuel, have tightened availability across Europe and Asia.

He added that the global energy system has lost much of its flexibility, with inventories that typically act as “shock absorbers” now depleted after weeks of disruption.

“The risks kind of skew to the upside right now,” Wirth said, noting that even if flows resume, it could take time for supply chains and inventories to normalize.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

In the meantime, airlines and travelers are likely to continue feeling the effects, as higher fuel costs ripple through flight schedules, pricing and availability.

Reuters contributed to this report. 

This post was originally published here

April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Meta Platforms Inc. is moving beyond Earth in its race to power artificial intelligence. The company announced Monday a pair of ambitious energy partnerships — including a first-of-its-kind agreement to harness solar power from space — underscoring how far major tech firms are willing to go to secure reliable electricity for next-generation data centers.

The announcement positions Meta as the first major technology company to reserve capacity for space-based solar energy, alongside one of the industry’s largest commitments to ultra-long-duration energy storage — a dual strategy aimed at solving the growing power constraints of AI infrastructure.

Energy From Orbit: The Overview Energy Deal

Meta has partnered with Overview Energy, a space-based power startup, to develop a system that captures solar energy in orbit and beams it back to Earth. The companies plan an initial orbital demonstration by 2028, with commercial deployment targeted for 2030.

Under the agreement, Meta has secured access to up to 1 gigawatt of capacity — roughly equivalent to a nuclear reactor. Financial terms were not disclosed.

Overview’s approach centers on satellites positioned in geosynchronous orbit, where continuous sunlight can be harvested without interruption. The energy would then be transmitted as low-intensity infrared light to ground-based solar facilities, effectively extending their output into nighttime hours and across regions.

CEO Marc Berte described the shift in stark terms: “Space is becoming part of America’s energy infrastructure. Our approach enables hyperscalers to secure clean power with speed and reliability, beyond traditional geographic and time constraints.”

The company envisions a constellation of hundreds — potentially thousands — of satellites transmitting energy to terrestrial solar farms. Berte confirmed that early transmission testing has already been conducted from airborne platforms, with the first satellite launch planned for January 2028.

Meta’s Vice President of Energy and Sustainability, Nat Sahlstrom, framed the partnership as both a technological leap and a strategic necessity. “Space solar represents a transformative step forward,” Sahlstrom said. “This is about delivering uninterrupted energy and strengthening long-term energy resilience for our infrastructure.”

Overview’s advisory board includes prominent figures such as former NASA Administrator Jim Bridenstine, former NASA Administrator Mike Griffin, and former FERC Chairman Joseph Kelliher, lending institutional credibility to a concept long considered experimental.

Second Front: 100-Hour Energy Storage

Alongside its space initiative, Meta announced a separate partnership with Noon Energy focused on ultra-long-duration energy storage — addressing the second major limitation of renewable energy: reliability.

The agreement includes a reservation for up to 1 gigawatt and 100 gigawatt-hours of storage capacity, with a pilot project of 25 megawatts and 2.5 gigawatt-hours expected by 2028.

Noon’s technology uses reversible solid oxide fuel cells capable of storing energy for more than 100 hours, far exceeding the four-to-eight-hour limits of conventional lithium-ion batteries.

CEO Chris Graves called the deal “a monumental step,” noting the system is designed to deliver multi-day energy supply during periods when renewable generation is unavailable.

Sahlstrom emphasized the urgency: “Bringing data centers online faster requires reliable, scalable energy. This technology helps deliver that — with resilience built in.”

The Bigger Picture: AI’s Energy Arms Race

Meta’s twin announcements highlight a deeper reality: the AI boom is driving an unprecedented surge in energy demand.

In 2024 alone, Meta’s data centers consumed more than 18,000 gigawatt-hours of electricity — enough to power over 1.7 million U.S. homes. That figure is expected to rise sharply as AI models grow in size and complexity.

To meet demand, Meta has already contracted more than 30 gigawatts of clean energy, including major investments in geothermal and nuclear power through partnerships with Vistra, TerraPower, Oklo, and Constellation Energy.

Yet traditional renewables face hard limits — solar depends on daylight, wind is variable, and battery storage remains constrained in duration. Space solar and ultra-long-duration storage aim to solve all three challenges simultaneously.

The broader tech sector is moving quickly. Microsoft, Google, and Amazon are all competing to secure energy capacity for AI workloads, driving a global race not just for compute power — but for electricity itself.

Meta’s move into space raises the stakes.

What Comes Next

Both the Overview orbital demonstration and the Noon Energy pilot project are scheduled for 2028 — a critical test of whether experimental energy technologies can scale fast enough to meet AI-driven demand.

If successful, space-based solar could redefine how power is generated and distributed — turning orbit into a permanent layer of the global energy grid.

For now, investors are watching closely. Meta reports earnings later this week, with shares trading near record highs — and expectations building that its energy strategy will become as central to its future as its AI ambitions.

— JBizNews Desk

April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

The Trump administration’s immigration enforcement apparatus reached a new milestone this week, as U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement expanded its network of local law enforcement partnerships to 1,734 agreements across 39 states — even as new data shows enforcement activity moderating, a major U.S. city reversed course under financial pressure, and the broader economic consequences of the strategy begin to surface across key industries.

ICE’s 287(g) Network Hits Record Scale

As of April 23, ICE had signed 1,734 Memorandums of Agreement under the Section 287(g) program, including 176 Jail Enforcement partnerships, 497 Warrant Service Officer agreements, and 1,061 Task Force Model agreements spanning 39 states and two U.S. territories. The program deputizes local law enforcement to carry out federal immigration functions under ICE supervision, effectively extending enforcement capacity far beyond federal staffing levels.

The expansion reflects a structural shift — a distributed enforcement model embedded within local policing systems. But it is also intensifying political resistance. States including New Mexico, Maine, and Maryland moved in 2026 to ban participation, joining others that have long prohibited the program, setting up an ongoing legal and policy battle with direct implications for labor markets and regional economies.

Labor Markets Begin to Feel the Pressure

For businesses, the scale of enforcement is translating into measurable labor disruption. Sectors heavily reliant on immigrant workers — including agriculture, construction, hospitality, and food service — are reporting tightening labor supply and rising wage pressure in high-enforcement regions.

The American Farm Bureau Federation has warned that labor shortages could leave crops unharvested and processing facilities understaffed during critical seasons. The U.S. Chamber of Commerce has similarly cautioned that workforce removals are creating ripple effects across supply chains, ultimately pushing costs higher for consumers.

In construction, where roughly 23% of the workforce is foreign-born, contractors in states with aggressive enforcement activity report project delays and rising bid costs. Restaurants, hotels, and agricultural operators in Texas, Florida, and California are also facing persistent hiring gaps, driven by both deportations and voluntary workforce exits under enforcement pressure.

The Department of Homeland Security has stated that more than 3 million individuals have either been removed or self-deported since President Donald Trump returned to office. While ICE’s stated target is 1 million deportations annually, official removals in fiscal 2025 totaled 442,637, underscoring a gap between policy ambition and operational capacity — even as the economic impact is already being felt.

Houston Reverses Course Under $114 Million Pressure

The week’s most significant policy reversal unfolded in Houston, where the City Council voted 13–4 on April 22 to roll back a recently passed sanctuary ordinance. The move came after Texas Governor Greg Abbott threatened to withdraw approximately $114 million in public safety funding, including critical support tied to upcoming FIFA World Cup security operations.

Mayor John Whitmire, facing a $170 million budget deficit and mounting financial pressure ahead of the summer tournament, made clear the city had little choice. “We have no alternative… we’ve got to have the restoration of the $114 million,” Whitmire said.

The pressure campaign extended beyond Houston. Abbott signaled similar action against Dallas and Austin, placing an additional $200 million in combined funding at risk. Meanwhile, Texas Attorney General Ken Paxton filed suit against Houston officials, citing violations of the state’s 2017 anti-sanctuary law.

The episode highlights a broader enforcement strategy: leveraging state and federal funding as a financial tool to compel local compliance — effectively turning immigration policy into a fiscal decision for municipalities.

Targeted Enforcement Continues in Houston

Between April 6 and April 17, ICE Houston arrested 277 individuals classified as criminal illegal aliens, with a combined 751 criminal convictions and 654 prior illegal entries. The arrests included 17 child predators, six individuals convicted of murder, 16 drug traffickers, and 67 robbery offenders.

Acting Field Office Director Paul McBride credited local partnerships for enabling the operation, warning that sanctuary policies would have “immediate impacts to public safety,” particularly within vulnerable communities.

The timing — coinciding with Houston’s policy reversal — reinforced the administration’s argument that coordinated local-federal enforcement delivers measurable results.

Arrests Fall 12% Following Minnesota Pullback

Despite the expansion of infrastructure, enforcement activity has moderated. An Associated Press analysis published April 25 found that weekly ICE arrests fell nearly 12%, from 8,347 to 7,369, following a February enforcement drawdown ordered by Border Czar Tom Homan after a controversial Minnesota operation.

That operation, which resulted in the fatal shooting of two U.S. citizens, triggered public backlash and policy recalibration. The share of non-criminal arrests also declined slightly, from 46% to 41%, though still above the broader second-term average.

The political fallout contributed to leadership changes, including the departure of Homeland Security Secretary Kristi Noem, and introduced new caution into enforcement strategy.

For employers, the fluctuation itself has become a challenge. Business groups report that inconsistent enforcement intensity — alternating between surges and pullbacks — is creating uncertainty that complicates workforce planning, particularly in industries already facing structural labor shortages.

The Bigger Picture

This week’s developments underscore a complex reality: the administration is simultaneously expanding its enforcement infrastructure, delivering targeted operational outcomes, and encountering practical limits — both political and economic.

The 12% drop in arrests, the reliance on financial pressure to secure local compliance, and the growing strain on labor markets point to an enforcement strategy that is evolving in real time — and one that is increasingly intertwined with the broader U.S. economy.

For business leaders, the takeaway is clear. Immigration enforcement at this scale is no longer a background policy variable — it is a direct driver of labor availability, wage inflation, supply chain stability, and municipal financial planning.

And as enforcement expands, so too does its economic footprint.

— JBizNews Desk

April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Wall Street opened Monday under a cloud of geopolitical uncertainty, oil-driven inflation pressure, and Federal Reserve transition risk — a mix that is keeping investors cautious even as a historic earnings week and a blockbuster M&A deal compete for attention. The S&P 500 fell 0.2%, alongside the Nasdaq Composite, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average dropped 87 points, or 0.2%, at the opening bell, reversing sentiment after Friday’s record closes as weekend diplomacy unraveled.

The primary driver of the shift is the abrupt collapse of U.S.-Iran peace talks before they formally began. President Donald Trump scrapped plans to send envoy Steve Witkoff and Jared Kushner to Pakistan, writing on Truth Social: “Too much time wasted on traveling, too much work! Nobody knows who is in charge, including them. Also, we have all the cards; they have none!” The statement rattled markets that had been pricing in at least a partial reopening of energy flows.

A subsequent Axios report that Iran submitted a proposal to reopen the Strait of Hormuz offered only limited relief. Traders remain skeptical after repeated ceasefire headlines failed to deliver sustained normalization. The chokepoint carries roughly 20% of global oil supply, making any disruption immediately market-moving.

Goldman Sachs responded by revising its outlook. Analysts Daan Struyven and Yulia Zhestkova Grigsby raised their Q4 Brent crude forecast to $90, up from $80, noting prices are now “nearly $30 higher than before the Hormuz shock.” They warned the market is facing a 9.6 million barrel-per-day deficit swing, compared to a previously expected 1.8 million barrel surplus, adding that “extreme inventory draws are not sustainable.” Brent traded above $107, with WTI above $95.

Adding to investor caution is the Federal Reserve meeting Wednesday — expected to be Chair Jerome Powell’s second-to-last before a leadership transition to Kevin Warsh in May. Markets are pricing in a 100% probability of no rate change, according to CME FedWatch, with only an 8% chance of a hike by year-end. Former Cleveland Fed President Loretta Mester framed the dilemma: “There’s still uncertainty about how this war is going to be resolved… oil prices remain well above pre-war levels, and that will eventually impact the economy.”

Market Movers — Gainers

The standout early mover is Organon & Co. (OGN), jumping roughly 15% after Sun Pharmaceutical Industries announced an $11.75 billion all-cash acquisition, paying $14 per share. Executive Chair Carrie Cox called the deal “compelling and immediate value” following a strategic review. The transaction positions Sun Pharma among the top 25 global drugmakers, with expanded reach across 140 countries and deeper exposure to biosimilars and women’s health. J.P. Morgan and Jefferies advised Sun Pharma, while Morgan Stanley and Goldman Sachs advised Organon.

Intellia Therapeutics (NTLA) surged more than 25% ahead of Phase 3 data from its HAELO trial, a binary catalyst driving speculative biotech flows.

Micron Technology (MU) rose after Melius Research initiated coverage with a Buy rating, extending a rally that has already pushed the stock up 74% year-to-date on AI-driven demand.

Taiwan Semiconductor (TSM) gained 2.3% after Taiwan’s regulator eased concentration limits, allowing funds to increase exposure — a structural tailwind for the world’s leading chipmaker.

DoorDash (DASH) moved higher after TD Cowen initiated with a Buy rating and a $225 price target, implying 27% upside. Analyst John Blackledge cited its expanding platform, including grocery, retail, and advertising, as key growth drivers.

Market Movers — Decliners

Airlines opened under pressure. United Airlines (UAL) and American Airlines (AAL) slipped after United CEO Scott Kirby revealed he had proposed a merger that was rejected by American CEO Robert Isom, who labeled the idea “anticompetitive.” President Donald Trump also signaled opposition, effectively ending the possibility. Kirby stated: “Without a willing partner, something this big simply can’t get done.”

Analyst Calls

On the Street, Stifel raised its target on Baker Hughes (BKR) to $74, reflecting strength in energy markets. Wells Fargo lifted Caterpillar (CAT) to $960 and Corteva (CTVA) to $90, both at Overweight. Truist upgraded SBA Communications (SBAC) to Buy, while Evercore ISI raised Apollo Global Management (APO) and Ally Financial (ALLY). DA Davidson initiated Reddit (RDDT) with a Buy rating and a $200 target.

The Week Ahead

Five members of the “Magnificent Seven” — Microsoft, Amazon, Alphabet, Meta, and Apple — report earnings this week, alongside Coca-Cola, Visa, Starbucks, UPS, Mastercard, and Verizon. Wedbush analyst Dan Ives called it “a monster week for Big Tech earnings,” predicting continued upside driven by AI demand.

With a Fed decision Wednesday and Q1 GDP Thursday, markets are entering one of the most consequential weeks of the year — balancing geopolitical risk, inflation pressure, and corporate performance.

The early signal is clear: volatility is back, and investors are watching every headline.

— JBizNews Desk

The U.S. Supreme Court is set to hear a closely watched dispute over police use of geofence warrants, a case that could reshape how investigators obtain location data from technology companies and how far Fourth Amendment protections extend in the smartphone era. In court filings reviewed through the Supreme Court docket and lower-court records, Okello Chatrie argues that the government’s demand for location data tied to a bank robbery investigation crossed a constitutional line, while the U.S. Department of Justice has said investigators acted lawfully under a warrant approved by a judge.

At issue is a once-common investigative tool that let law enforcement seek anonymized location data for devices detected within a defined area and time window, typically from Google, whose legal compliance process and public statements have drawn repeated scrutiny in recent years. In a 2023 update on location history, Google said it had begun changing how such data is stored and processed, adding that the move would “better protect your privacy,” according to the company’s official blog, a shift widely interpreted by legal analysts and reported by Reuters and other outlets as a response to mounting pressure over geofence requests.

The case stems from the 2019 conviction of Chatrie, who challenged a geofence warrant used after a 2019 bank robbery in Virginia, according to opinions from the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Fourth Circuit. In its ruling, the appeals court said the warrant implicated Fourth Amendment concerns but allowed the evidence under the good-faith exception, with the judges explaining that officers relied on a warrant approved by a magistrate. That split outcome turned the case into a major test for digital privacy because, as the court put it in substance, location data can reveal “deeply revealing” details about a person’s life, language that echoed broader Supreme Court privacy reasoning in earlier cases.

The constitutional fight turns heavily on the Supreme Court’s 2018 decision in Carpenter v. United States, where Chief Justice John Roberts wrote for the majority that people hold a legitimate expectation of privacy in historical cell-site location information, even when that data sits with a third party. Roberts said then that granting the government “near perfect surveillance” through digital records demanded constitutional limits, according to the court’s opinion. Lawyers for Chatrie have argued in current filings that geofence warrants present an even broader privacy threat because they begin with a place and sweep in many devices, including those of people with no connection to a crime.

The government has countered that the search here unfolded through a warrant process and that investigators narrowed the request in stages, a position laid out in briefs filed by the Solicitor General. The Justice Department has argued that users voluntarily shared location information with Google through account settings and app services, invoking the long-debated third-party doctrine that historically limited privacy claims over business records held by others. That argument faces skepticism from privacy advocates and some judges, who have said modern digital services collect data on a scale that older legal precedents never contemplated, as reflected in amicus briefs from groups including the Electronic Frontier Foundation and the American Civil Liberties Union.

The business stakes reach well beyond criminal procedure because the ruling could affect compliance costs, data-retention practices and product design across the technology sector. In public statements over the past two years, Google has said it is “committed to keeping user data private and secure,” and its redesign of location history storage aimed to reduce the amount of centrally accessible data available in the first place. That shift matters for companies facing rising legal demands for user information, and analysts cited by Bloomberg and Reuters have said a tougher constitutional standard could accelerate industry moves toward on-device storage, shorter retention periods and narrower default data collection.

Law enforcement agencies, meanwhile, have warned in court papers and public commentary that geofence data can help solve violent crimes quickly when investigators lack suspects, witnesses or usable surveillance footage. Prosecutors in the Chatrie matter said the location search formed one part of a broader investigation, not the sole basis for the case, according to appellate records. But civil-liberties lawyers say the method reverses the traditional logic of warrants by identifying everyone near a scene first and sorting out suspicion later, a concern that several judges in the Fourth Circuit highlighted in separate opinions.

The timing also matters because geofence warrants already have become less available in practice even before a final constitutional answer arrives. Google indicated in prior public disclosures that changes to location history architecture would make many such requests harder or impossible to fulfill in the same way, and reporting from CNBC and Reuters has noted that the company’s policy shift altered a key pipeline long used by police. Even so, the Supreme Court’s ruling could still set a durable national standard for digital searches involving app data, cloud records and future forms of location tracking beyond the specific tool at issue here.

What comes next carries unusual weight for both Silicon Valley and criminal investigators. Oral arguments on April 27 will give the justices a chance to test whether Carpenter extends to geofence warrants and whether a place-based digital dragnet fits within the Fourth Amendment’s requirement that warrants describe with particularity what officers may search and seize. A decision by the end of the court’s term could determine not only the fate of one conviction, but also how much latitude police retain in the data economy and how aggressively technology companies redesign systems to limit what they can hand over when the government comes calling.

JBizNews Desk


April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

U.S. budget airlines are escalating their appeal to Washington. Frontier Group Holdings and Avelo Airlines are leading a coalition seeking $2.5 billion in federal relief, as surging jet fuel prices push the low-cost carrier model toward a potential breaking point — with Spirit Airlines facing a make-or-break April 30 deadline that could trigger the first major U.S. airline liquidation in a generation.

According to a report first published by The Wall Street Journal, airline executives met in Washington last week with Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy and FAA Administrator Bryan Bedford to press their case. The proposal under discussion would structure government support as warrants convertible into equity stakes — echoing pandemic-era rescue frameworks.

The $2.5 billion figure reflects a simple reality: fuel costs have blown past projections. Airlines estimate jet fuel will remain above $4 per gallon through 2026. Data from Airlines for America shows prices already at $4.19, a level that is rapidly compressing margins across the sector.

Fuel Shock Hits the Weakest First

The driver is geopolitical. The ongoing Middle East conflict has disrupted flows through the Strait of Hormuz — a channel responsible for roughly 20% of global oil supply — pushing Brent crude up about 44% to near $105 per barrel and effectively doubling jet fuel costs.

For budget airlines, the impact is immediate and severe.

Conor Cunningham, airline analyst at Melius Research, said ultra-low-cost carriers are “disproportionately exposed” to fuel volatility, given their limited hedging strategies and dependence on ultra-low base fares. Simply put, they lack the pricing power of legacy airlines.

That divide is already visible. United and American Airlines have trimmed forecasts but successfully passed higher fuel costs onto passengers. Budget carriers don’t have that flexibility — raising fares undermines their core model — leaving them squeezed between rising costs and price-sensitive customers.

Avelo said it “emphatically agrees that a healthy airline industry with strong competition is important to the U.S. economy,” but declined further comment. Frontier and the White House did not respond.

Spirit’s $240 Million Deadline

The urgency is being driven by Spirit Airlines, now at the center of the crisis. The company needs access to $240 million in restricted cash by April 30 to continue operating. A bankruptcy court hearing that day could determine its fate.

A potential rescue package includes $500 million in federal support, structured as a loan that could convert into as much as a 90% government stake.

Behind the scenes, restructuring talks are intensifying. Marshall Huebner of Davis Polk, representing Spirit, and Mike Stamer of Akin, advising bondholders, are navigating a complex negotiation as creditors and policymakers weigh outcomes.

President Donald Trump has publicly backed intervention, stating: “We’re thinking about doing it… helping them out, meaning bailing them out, or buying it.” Spirit CEO Dave Davis said the airline is “grateful” for the administration’s support.

Labor groups are also pressing for action, warning liquidation would ripple through jobs, travel access, and regional economies.

Backlash Builds in Washington

The potential bailout is already triggering resistance. Secretary Sean Duffy has questioned the logic of intervention, warning against “putting good money after bad.”

On Capitol Hill, opposition is bipartisan. Sen. Ted Cruz called the proposal “an absolutely terrible idea,” while Sen. Tom Cotton said it would be “not the best use of taxpayer dollars.” Sen. Elizabeth Warren blamed the administration’s Iran policy for driving fuel prices higher and pushing airlines into distress.

Policy analyst Tad DeHaven of the Cato Institute warned that government intervention risks setting a dangerous precedent, creating expectations of future bailouts across the industry.

Industry Model Under Pressure

Aviation analyst Gary Leff highlighted a competitive contradiction: rescuing Spirit could weaken rivals like Frontier by preserving excess capacity in the ultra-low-cost segment.

Consultant Mike Boyd went further, arguing the crisis exposes a structural flaw. The ultra-low-cost model, he said, “struggles to function” when fuel remains elevated for extended periods.

Credit markets are already signaling concern. Joe Rohlena, senior director at Fitch Ratings, warned that sustained fuel pressure could lead to broader credit deterioration across budget carriers if conditions persist.

What Comes Next

The stakes extend beyond a single airline. During the pandemic, the U.S. government deployed $54 billion in airline support but recovered only a fraction through equity warrants — a precedent that continues to shape today’s debate.

Analysts at JPMorgan have cautioned that any bailout could trigger a wave of similar requests — a scenario now unfolding as Frontier and Avelo step forward.

The administration now faces a defining decision: allow market forces to play out — potentially leading to the first major airline collapse in decades — or step in and risk opening the door to sustained intervention in the aviation sector.

Secretary Sean Duffy has signaled that consolidation may be the preferred path, noting President Trump’s openness to large-scale deals — hinting that mergers, not bailouts, could ultimately reshape the industry.

For now, the timeline is clear.

April 30 is approaching — and the outcome may redefine the future of budget air travel in the United States.

— JBizNews Desk

April 27, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

American consumers already feeling pressure at the grocery store may be facing a second, more severe wave of food inflation. While headline numbers are already striking—wholesale tomato prices up 102% and diesel costs soaring 88% since late February—economists and federal officials warn that the full impact of the Middle East crisis has yet to reach U.S. households.

The disruption traces back to the Strait of Hormuz, a critical global artery through which roughly 20% of the world’s oil supply and nearly one-third of globally traded fertilizer flows. Following the outbreak of conflict on February 28, closures and instability triggered what the International Energy Agency described as the largest oil supply shock in modern history. The result is a cascading effect on food prices that unfolds in stages—energy first, fertilizer next, and ultimately crop yields—each layer compounding the next.

Tyler Schipper, an economist at the University of St. Thomas, explained the mechanism clearly: “Pretty much everything you buy off a shelf is delivered by a truck that uses diesel. It’s the transmission belt from an energy shock to consumer prices.” Diesel, which powers both transportation and farm equipment, surged to over $5.60 per gallon in March and has continued climbing, with cumulative increases approaching 88% across key regions and wholesale markets.

That surge is now working its way through the supply chain. David Ortega, a food economist at Michigan State University, noted that diesel impacts every stage of production and distribution. “Tractors run on diesel. Most food moves by truck. These higher fuel costs translate directly into higher prices—and eventually, the consumer feels it.” Perishable goods, which rely on refrigerated transport, are being hit first and hardest.

Nowhere is that more visible than in tomatoes. Often viewed as a bellwether for produce inflation, tomatoes have become the clearest early indicator of stress in the system. At the retail level, prices have climbed to roughly $2.25 per pound, an 18.6% increase since February, according to David Branch of the Wells Fargo Agri-Food Institute. But wholesale dynamics are far more dramatic. Distributors report prices jumping from $25 to over $80 per 25-pound box in just weeks—a more than 200% increase in some cases.

The surge reflects a convergence of factors. Domestic supply was already constrained after Florida crops were hit by winter freezes, while Mexico’s production suffered from disease and weather disruptions. The added pressure from rising fuel costs has intensified the spike, particularly for a product that is highly perishable and heavily reliant on trucking.

Critically, economists emphasize that these increases are only partially reflected at the retail level. Ricky Volpe, an agribusiness professor at California Polytechnic State University, warned that the pricing pipeline is still catching up. “There’s more pain ahead,” he said, noting that it typically takes one to two months for energy-driven cost increases to fully reach grocery shelves.

Beyond transportation, a second and potentially more damaging wave is building at the farm level. A recent American Farm Bureau Federation survey found that 70% of farmers cannot afford all the fertilizer they need, while nearly 60% report worsening financial conditions. Fertilizer prices have surged sharply, with urea up 49%, UAN up 38%, and anhydrous ammonia up 32%, according to analyst Josh Linville.

For farmers, the economics are increasingly unsustainable. Matt Frostic, a Michigan-based operator, said nitrogen fertilizer has jumped from $350 per ton to nearly $600 in just a few months. Meanwhile, the U.S. Department of Agriculture estimates that corn costs approximately $5 per bushel to produce, yet sells for around $4.20, while soybeans cost $12.27 to produce and fetch just $10.30. That gap is forcing farmers to cut inputs—decisions that could reduce yields and tighten supply later this year.

Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins acknowledged the growing strain, stating that “everything is on the table” to support farmers. However, with only 20% to 25% of farmers exposed to current fertilizer prices—the rest having locked in earlier—the full impact is expected to materialize during the upcoming harvest cycle.

The USDA now projects food-at-home prices to rise 3.1% in 2026, nearly double earlier forecasts. Yet analysts caution that even this revised estimate may understate what’s coming, as it does not fully account for sustained energy volatility or reduced agricultural output.

Lydia Boussour, senior economist at EY-Parthenon, pointed to lingering structural pressures. “The impact will extend beyond the duration of the conflict,” she said, citing ongoing supply chain constraints and energy capacity limits. Similarly, Adam Hanieh of the SOAS Middle East Institute warned that earlier projections underestimated the scale of disruption. “Food inflation is very much on the table for the remainder of the year,” he said.

For consumers, the message is straightforward: the current spike may not represent the peak. The shock that began in the Strait of Hormuz is still moving through the system—measured not in days, but in months.

What comes next will depend on how long energy markets remain volatile and whether supply chains stabilize. But for now, the data points in one direction: higher prices ahead.

— JBizNews Desk

Americans are facing mounting financial pressure, but even small changes to everyday habits could make a major impact on long-term wealth, one expert says.

Nearly three-quarters of Americans failed to meet their savings and spending goals last year, according to a Vanguard consumer survey — highlighting nationwide financial pressure.

Many households are dealing with broader cost pressures. The Federal Reserve said in its latest Survey of Household Economics and Decisionmaking that inflation and prices remained a top financial concern, while overall financial well-being stayed below the recent high reached in 2021.

People in their 30s and 40s are also falling into costly traps, including failing to build emergency savings, delaying investing and taking on too much debt, fintech entrepreneur and financial expert Ksenia Yudina told FOX Business.

WHAT ARE ACTIVE ETFS AND HOW ARE THEY RESHAPING HOW AMERICANS INVEST?

Here are five financial mistakes she says Americans should avoid:

In 2025, 62% of Americans said they owned stocks, according to Gallup.

“Many people in their 30-40s keep their savings in cash, missing out on the power of compounding,” Yudina said. “Time is the most valuable asset you have in investing, and delaying even a few years is one of the most expensive financial mistakes you can make.”

TEEN INVESTOR BOOM: WHY WALL STREET IS CHASING YOUNGEST GENERATIONS EARLIER THAN EVER

As of September 2025, 48% of Americans in their 40s and 44% of those in their 50s say they lack confidence that their savings will last through retirement or believe they may not be able to retire at all, according to the Pew Research Center.

“It’s easy to focus on short-term needs, but retirement requires decades of planning,” Yudina said. “Missing out on employer matches or delaying contributions can have a long-term impact that’s hard to recover from later. The math is unforgiving: if you don’t start in your 30s and stay consistent, there’s no catch-up strategy that fully compensates for lost time.”

Total U.S. household debt rose by $191 billion, reaching $18.8 trillion in the fourth quarter of 2025, according to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.

“Debt has become so normalized that young adults stop questioning it. Whether it’s credit cards, lifestyle inflation, or overextending on big purchases with buy-now-pay-later, excessive debt quietly eats away at your ability to build real wealth,” Yudina said.

More than 40% of Americans say they wouldn’t be able to cover a $1,000 emergency expense with their savings, while roughly one-third report they lack enough savings to cover even one month of living costs, according to a U.S. News survey conducted Jan. 16–20, 2026.

“Unexpected expenses are inevitable,” Yudina said. “In today’s environment, with ongoing layoffs and economic uncertainty, this risk is even more pronounced. 

“Without a financial cushion, young professionals are forced to rely on high-interest debt or withdraw from investments at the worst possible time. Having a steady income may feel like security, but without an emergency fund, it’s fragile. One unexpected event can unravel years of financial progress.”

FINANCIAL INFLUENCER ARGUES ‘MONEY IS MORE MENTAL THAN IT IS MATHEMATICAL’ IN NEW APPROACH TO PERSONAL FINANCE

American families spent an average of $30,837 on college last year, a 9% increase from $28,409 the year before, according to Sallie Mae.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Many parents assume they’ll deal with college when the time comes. But education is one of the largest financial obligations families face,” Yudina said. “College costs continue to rise, and many families underestimate how much time matters. The earlier you start, the less painful it becomes.”

This post was originally published here

One year after Beijing’s export curbs, efforts intensify to loosen its grip

KUANTAN, Malaysia — April 27, 2026 — On Malaysia’s eastern coastline, far from Washington and Beijing, a sprawling industrial complex has quietly become one of the most critical nodes in the global balance of power. The Lynas Advanced Materials Plant, operated by Lynas Rare Earths Ltd., is now at the center of the Pentagon’s urgent push to break China’s grip on the rare earth supply chain — a dependency long viewed as one of America’s most dangerous strategic vulnerabilities.

Stretching across more than 220 football fields and powered by a workforce of roughly 850 engineers and chemists, the facility executes more than 1,300 production steps to isolate 15 rare earth elements — including samarium, terbium, and dysprosium, essential inputs for high-performance magnets used in advanced weapons systems, fighter jets, and missile guidance technologies.

The timing is no coincidence. After China imposed sweeping export restrictions on rare earth materials last year, global supply chains were shaken within weeks. Automakers from Ford Motor Co. in the United States to Suzuki Motor Corp. in Japan were forced to slow or halt production, exposing just how deeply the modern industrial economy depends on a narrow set of materials largely controlled by Beijing.

“Rare earths represent one of the most acute vulnerabilities in U.S. defense preparedness,” said Mike Cadenazzi, Assistant Secretary of Defense for Industrial Base Policy, speaking at the NDIA Pacific Operational Science and Technology Conference in Honolulu. He noted that China controls roughly 30% of global manufacturing output and dominates the processing of critical minerals essential to modern warfare.

Nowhere is that dominance more evident than in heavy rare earths — where 98% to 99% of global processing capacity remains inside China. Until recently, even Western producers had no alternative. Lynas itself, the largest rare earth miner outside China, was forced to send key materials back to Chinese refiners for final separation.

That changed in 2025, when the Malaysian plant became the first facility outside China capable of commercially separating heavy rare earth oxides at scale — a breakthrough that has rapidly elevated its geopolitical significance.

The Pentagon has responded with unusual urgency. The U.S. Department of Defense has backed Lynas with direct financial support and long-term procurement commitments, including a $110-per-kilogram price floor on key materials under a multi-year offtake agreement. The goal is clear: eliminate China’s ability to manipulate prices and choke off Western competitors.

“Price suppression has been one of China’s most effective tools,” said Amanda Lacaze, CEO of Lynas Rare Earths. “A guaranteed floor price ensures that Western production remains viable regardless of market fluctuations.”

The strategy is being coordinated across allies. Japan has adopted a similar pricing mechanism, creating a unified front designed to neutralize Beijing’s longstanding tactic of undercutting global prices to drive competitors out of business.

At the same time, the U.S. is extending the supply chain back home. The Pentagon has committed $258 million to support Lynas in building a rare earth processing facility in Texas, while also investing in domestic players including MP Materials, where it has taken a direct equity stake to accelerate U.S.-based production.

The broader push spans multiple continents. During recent diplomatic engagements, the U.S. secured agreements with Malaysia, Thailand, Japan, and Australia to expand rare earth exploration, processing, and stockpiling — part of a coordinated effort to rebuild a supply chain that had quietly migrated to China over decades.

The urgency is driven by a hard deadline. Under U.S. defense policy, starting January 1, 2027, no Chinese-origin rare earth materials can be used in American weapons systems. The rule follows a 2022 incident in which a Chinese-made magnet was discovered in an F-35 fighter jet, triggering a temporary production halt and exposing the depth of U.S. reliance on adversarial supply chains.

That deadline is forcing rapid action across the defense-industrial base. Companies like REalloys, backed by senior defense officials including former Pentagon Chief of Staff Joe Kasper and retired General Jack Keane, are racing to build domestic capabilities in rare earth metal production — one of the most technically challenging segments of the supply chain.

Yet even as investments surge, the challenge remains immense. Analysts estimate that rebuilding a fully independent Western rare earth ecosystem could take years, if not decades — particularly given China’s scale, cost advantages, and entrenched infrastructure.

For now, Malaysia has emerged as the unexpected frontline.

In a global contest increasingly defined not just by military power but by control over supply chains, the Lynas facility in Kuantan represents more than an industrial site — it is a strategic pivot point in the effort to rebalance economic and national security power away from Beijing.

Whether the West can translate urgency into sustained production before China reasserts its dominance may prove to be one of the defining industrial and geopolitical questions of the decade.

JBizNews Desk

NEW YORK — April 27, 2026 — In a candid reflection that is resonating across Wall Street, Anthony Scaramucci, founder of SkyBridge Capital and former White House communications director, has distilled decades of market experience into a hard-earned conclusion: the biggest investing mistake is not what you buy — it’s selling too soon.

In a social media post that quickly circulated among investors, Scaramucci said the most expensive habit of his career has been exiting positions prematurely, leaving massive long-term gains unrealized. His advice to investors is deliberately simple: own the S&P 500 and stay invested.

“The index does the work for you,” Scaramucci explained, describing the S&P 500 as a built-in upgrade system that continuously replaces underperforming companies with stronger ones based on market value, earnings, and growth. He noted that he bought his first index investment roughly 30 years ago — and still holds it today.

The lesson is rooted in one of the most painful missed opportunities of his career. In 1999, Scaramucci attended a presentation by Jeff Bezos, where the Amazon founder laid out a long-term vision centered on logistics and scale. Scaramucci said he left convinced he should invest — but reversed course after hearing Warren Buffett question Amazon’s valuation at the time.

He walked away from the investment.

Looking back, the cost is staggering. A $10,000 investment in Amazon at that moment would be worth approximately $16.5 million today, a return exceeding 165,000%.

But the path to those gains would not have been easy. Scaramucci emphasized that holding Amazon over that period would have required enduring multiple drawdowns of 50% or more, including at least one collapse approaching 90%. The takeaway, he said, is not about stock selection — it is about staying power.

“You have to survive the volatility,” Scaramucci has said in prior interviews, reinforcing that long-term success depends less on timing the market and more on remaining invested through extreme swings.

He is now applying that same mindset to artificial intelligence, comparing today’s environment to the early days of the internet in the mid-1990s — a period marked by uncertainty, volatility, and skepticism. Rather than waiting for clarity, Scaramucci said he is investing through the noise, determined not to repeat his Amazon misstep.

Market performance is reinforcing his view. Despite geopolitical shocks — including U.S.-Iran tensions, disruptions in global shipping lanes, and sharp oil price swings — the S&P 500 recently closed at a record 7,041.28, climbing 2.9% year to date and rebounding strongly from earlier volatility. Investors who exited during moments of panic have once again been left behind.

Scaramucci’s perspective is echoed by Mike Novogratz, CEO of Galaxy Digital, who has been advising everyday investors to avoid chasing high-risk trades. According to Scaramucci, Novogratz recommends that individuals with portfolios in the $50,000 to $200,000 range focus on diversified index exposure rather than attempting to consistently outperform the market.

“Nihilism is not a strategy,” Scaramucci said, emphasizing that fear-driven decisions often lead to missed opportunity rather than protection.

He has also pointed to a growing feedback loop between markets and policy, noting that President Donald Trump’s economic positioning can influence market sentiment — and vice versa — creating scenarios where policy decisions and market rallies reinforce each other.

But beneath the headlines and market commentary, Scaramucci’s message is strikingly simple.

After navigating multiple market cycles, bear markets, and periods of extreme volatility, he argues that the greatest risk investors face is not losing money on a bad trade — it is abandoning a winning investment before it has time to compound.

In an era defined by constant noise, rapid headlines, and short-term thinking, that lesson may prove more valuable than any individual stock pick.

JBizNews Desk

LOS ANGELES — April 27, 2026 — A high-stakes ballot battle is taking shape in the nation’s largest state economy after a union-backed initiative to impose a one-time 5% wealth tax on California’s billionaires cleared the required signature threshold, setting up a closely watched and potentially precedent-setting vote this November.

Organizers behind the measure, led by Service Employees International Union–United Healthcare Workers West (SEIU-UHW), announced they have gathered more than 1.5 million signatures, far exceeding the roughly 875,000 required to qualify for the ballot. County election officials must now verify the signatures before forwarding certification to the California Secretary of State, a process expected to conclude ahead of the June 24 filing deadline.

“This milestone reflects the urgency Californians feel,” said Dave Regan, President of SEIU-UHW, who spearheaded the initiative. “We’re confident this will qualify — and once it does, the public debate will shift rapidly.”

The proposal targets individuals who were California residents as of January 1, 2026, with a net worth of at least $1 billion by year-end. Backers estimate roughly 200 individuals would be affected, collectively controlling close to $2 trillion in wealth. Under the plan, 90% of revenue would be directed toward healthcare programs, with the remaining 10% allocated to education and food assistance.

Supporters argue the measure is necessary to offset funding gaps tied to federal policy changes. The initiative was designed in response to healthcare funding pressures following provisions in the tax-and-spending legislation signed by President Donald Trump, which union leaders warn could strain Medi-Cal and hospital systems statewide.

“This is about protecting healthcare access for millions,” said Suzanne Jimenez, spokeswoman for the Billionaire Tax Now coalition, framing the campaign as a grassroots push against concentrated wealth.

But opposition has been swift and well-funded. Governor Gavin Newsom has publicly opposed the measure, warning it risks accelerating an exodus of high-net-worth individuals and undermining the state’s tax base. Several prominent figures have already relocated or signaled intent to do so, including Larry Page, Peter Thiel, David Sacks, and Larry Ellison.

In a letter to the governor, Attorney Alex Spiro, representing high-profile clients including Elon Musk, warned the proposal could trigger “a permanent relocation of capital and innovation,” arguing the measure would fundamentally alter California’s business climate.

Not all industry leaders are pushing back. Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang offered a contrasting view, telling Bloomberg Television: “We chose to live in Silicon Valley, and whatever taxes they would like to apply, so be it.” With an estimated $167 billion net worth, Huang could face an $8 billion tax liability under the proposal.

Two major opposition groups — Stop the Squeeze and Golden State Promise — have already mobilized, with Golden State Promise reporting more than $10 million in early funding, including backing from Chris Larsen and Ripple Labs. Competing campaigns are actively funding counter-initiatives and paying signature gatherers to challenge the proposal’s momentum.

National political figures have also entered the fray. Senator Bernie Sanders endorsed the initiative at its February launch, calling it essential to prevent millions from losing healthcare coverage, while Representative Ro Khanna has advanced similar legislation at the federal level targeting billionaire wealth.

The fiscal projections remain contested. Analysts from California’s Legislative Analyst’s Office and Department of Finance estimate the tax could generate tens of billions in revenue, but warn of potential long-term losses if top taxpayers leave the state — a shift that could erode income tax receipts by hundreds of millions annually.

Legal challenges are widely expected regardless of the election outcome. Constitutional experts have flagged potential vulnerabilities, including challenges under the Dormant Commerce Clause, due process concerns, and equal protection arguments, particularly given the narrow group of individuals targeted by the measure.

If certified, the initiative will appear on the November 3, 2026 ballot, requiring only a simple majority to pass — a threshold that could reshape how wealth is taxed not just in California, but across the United States.

The stakes are enormous: a test of political will, economic policy, and the future of wealth taxation in America’s most influential state.

JBizNews Desk

TOKYO / SEOUL — April 27, 2026 — Asian markets pushed to historic highs Monday as investors doubled down on the global artificial intelligence boom, brushing aside stalled U.S.-Iran negotiations and elevated oil prices to drive equities in Japan and South Korea to record levels.

Japan’s Nikkei 225 surged as much as 1.45%, breaking above the 60,000 mark intraday and trading near 60,585 before closing around 60,388 — a milestone that underscores the market’s deepening alignment with global AI-driven growth. The rally was led by export-heavy technology names tied to semiconductor demand, even as Brent crude hovered above $100 per barrel, reflecting ongoing tensions in the Middle East.

“AI and chip supply chains remain the dominant theme,” said Masashi Hashimoto, equity strategist at Nomura Securities. “Japanese exporters are benefiting from resilient global demand that has little to do with the Strait of Hormuz right now.”

In South Korea, the Kospi index climbed nearly 2%, reaching a fresh all-time high near the 6,600 level, driven by heavyweight semiconductor firms including Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix. The rally reflects surging global demand for high-bandwidth memory (HBM) — a critical component powering next-generation AI infrastructure.

Government officials in Tokyo and Seoul signaled cautious optimism. Bank of Japan policymakers, led by Governor Kazuo Ueda, continue to monitor inflation risks tied to higher energy prices while maintaining an accommodative stance that supports equity markets. Meanwhile, South Korea’s export data showed accelerating semiconductor shipments, reinforcing the strength of the country’s tech-led recovery.

Despite the strong momentum, analysts warn that the current disconnect between markets and geopolitics may not hold indefinitely. “Markets are shrugging off the news for now, but prolonged disruption in oil flows would eventually pressure importers like Japan and South Korea,” said Eunice Park, Asia macro strategist at Goldman Sachs. “Still, the AI capital expenditure cycle appears durable enough to absorb near-term volatility.”

The rally comes even as diplomatic efforts between Washington and Tehran stall. President Donald Trump canceled a planned envoy trip over the weekend, citing lack of progress on key issues including nuclear limits and regional security. Iranian officials have rejected recent proposals, and tensions remain elevated around critical shipping routes, particularly the Strait of Hormuz.

Yet markets across Asia have effectively decoupled from the headlines. The MSCI Asia Pacific Index rose approximately 1.3%, tracking gains on Wall Street where U.S. technology earnings continue to exceed expectations despite mixed economic signals.

Underpinning the surge are structural tailwinds. Japan’s corporate sector has benefited from governance reforms, stronger shareholder returns, and a weaker yen that boosts exporter earnings. In South Korea, policy shifts under President Lee’s administration aimed at supporting strategic industries have helped unwind the long-standing “Korea Discount,” drawing renewed foreign capital into equities.

“Semiconductor revenues are growing at double-digit rates,” said Rajiv Shah, head of Asia equity strategy at JPMorgan Chase. “That growth more than offsets the drag from higher energy costs.”

Still, the risks are real. Analysts estimate that a sustained increase in oil prices could shave up to 0.5 percentage points off GDP growth in both economies. Japan and South Korea remain heavily dependent on energy imports, leaving them exposed to prolonged geopolitical disruptions.

For now, however, the momentum is firmly with technology. Traders in Tokyo described Monday’s session as a “classic decoupling” — geopolitical headlines dominated screens, but capital continued flowing aggressively into semiconductor and AI-linked names. Market volumes remained strong without signs of speculative excess, suggesting conviction rather than short-term trading.

The coming days will test whether that conviction holds. A wave of U.S. corporate earnings — particularly from major technology firms — could reinforce or challenge the AI-driven narrative. At the same time, any escalation in the Middle East could quickly shift sentiment.

For now, the message from Asia’s two largest tech-driven markets is unmistakable: the AI boom is powerful enough to override geopolitical uncertainty — at least for the moment.

JBizNews Desk

U.S. producer prices increased in March but came in below economists’ forecasts, a sign that pipeline inflation pressure remained contained even as energy costs climbed. The Bureau of Labor Statistics said in its April 14 release that the producer price index for final demand rose 0.5% in March, while economists surveyed by Reuters had expected a larger increase, and Reuters reported the gain reflected higher goods prices led by energy.

In its statement, the Bureau of Labor Statistics said the March advance “can be traced to prices for final demand goods, which moved up 1.6 percent,” while prices for final demand services edged lower. That split matters because, as Bloomberg noted in its coverage of the report, a goods-led increase tied to fuel costs does not necessarily signal a broad-based reacceleration in underlying inflation across the economy.

Energy sat at the center of the increase. The BLS said more than 70% of the rise in final demand goods prices came from a 15.7% jump in gasoline, and the agency also reported increases in diesel fuel, jet fuel, home heating oil, meats and basic organic chemicals. MarketWatch, citing the government data, said the report suggested “wholesale inflation remained relatively tame outside of volatile energy categories,” underscoring that the headline figure masked softer conditions in several other components.

The details offered some relief for policymakers and investors watching for signs that higher oil prices could spill more forcefully into broader inflation. Oxford Economics lead U.S. economist Nancy Vanden Houten said in a note cited by Reuters that the report pointed to “limited pass-through beyond energy so far,” even though she cautioned that commodity shocks can take time to filter through supply chains. That distinction could prove important for the Federal Reserve as it weighs whether recent inflation progress remains intact.

The producer-price data arrived after a closely watched consumer inflation report that also suggested price pressures had not sharply accelerated. According to CNBC, economists viewed the March producer reading as broadly consistent with a still-gradual inflation backdrop, especially because core measures excluding food and energy showed less momentum than the headline number. In its release, the BLS said the index for final demand less foods, energy and trade services rose modestly, a gauge many economists track as a cleaner read on underlying trends.

For financial markets, the softer-than-expected reading reinforced the view that inflation shocks tied to oil have not yet derailed the broader disinflation story. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell said in recent public remarks published by the central bank that officials remain focused on incoming data and that policy decisions will depend on whether inflation continues moving sustainably toward target. While Powell did not comment specifically on the March producer-price report, his emphasis on data dependence framed investor reaction, as traders looked for confirmation that energy-led volatility had not become entrenched.

The composition of the report also highlighted a familiar post-pandemic pattern: goods prices remain more sensitive to commodity swings, while services inflation carries more weight for the medium-term policy outlook. Bloomberg Economics economists said in commentary reported by Bloomberg that a jump in gasoline can boost the headline PPI quickly, but “services and core pipeline measures” matter more for judging persistent inflation. The March figures fit that pattern, with goods doing the heavy lifting and services offering little evidence of a broad inflation breakout.

Businesses, meanwhile, still face a mixed cost environment. The BLS said some categories, including fresh and dry vegetables and natural gas, declined in March, showing that not every input cost moved higher. Analysts at Wells Fargo, in a note cited by MarketWatch, said the report suggested companies continue to navigate “uneven pricing pressure” rather than a uniform surge in costs, a dynamic that could limit how much of the energy increase gets passed on to consumers.

What comes next matters more than the March headline alone. Investors now will look to upcoming consumer inflation, wage, and import-price data, along with comments from Federal Reserve officials, for evidence on whether energy-related pressure broadens or fades. For executives, the key question remains whether fuel and transportation costs stay elevated long enough to squeeze margins and pricing plans; for policymakers, the March report, as the Bureau of Labor Statistics framed it, offered another month of data suggesting inflation risks remain real but not yet decisively more widespread.

JBizNews Desk


“This is why we need the ballroom.”

Within hours of a shooting that forced his evacuation from the White House Correspondents’ Dinner, President Donald Trump moved aggressively to tie the incident to his proposed $400 million White House ballroom — framing the project not as political, but as essential to presidential security.

“It’s much more secure — drone proof, bulletproof glass,” Trump said at a press briefing. “We need the ballroom.” He sharply criticized the venue, calling the Washington Hilton “not a particularly secure building.”

By Sunday morning, Trump escalated further on Truth Social, writing: “This event would never have happened with the Militarily Top Secret Ballroom… It cannot be built fast enough,” emphasizing that the proposed facility would sit inside the White House perimeter — “the most secure building in the world.”

The urgency followed a dramatic security breach on April 25, when gunfire erupted near a checkpoint outside the annual dinner in Washington, D.C., triggering a full-scale Secret Service response. President Trump, First Lady Melania Trump, Vice President JD Vance, and senior officials were rushed from the scene as agents secured the area, according to the U.S. Secret Service.

Authorities identified the suspect as Cole Tomas Allen, 31, a California teacher armed with a shotgun, handgun, and multiple knives. According to the Department of Justice, Allen charged the security perimeter, fired multiple rounds, and struck a Secret Service agent — who was protected by a bulletproof vest and is expected to recover. Agents subdued the suspect on-site.

Investigators said writings attributed to Allen described himself as the “Friendly Federal Assassin” and suggested he intended to target individuals tied to the administration. Preliminary findings from the Department of Justice indicate President Trump may have been the intended target.

Inside the ballroom, confusion quickly turned to panic. Guests initially mistook the noise for dropped equipment before realizing shots had been fired. Journalists reported hearing five to eight gunshots as hundreds of attendees took cover under tables. Secret Service agents flooded the room, and a chant of “God Bless America” broke out as the president was escorted offstage.

The administration wasted no time translating the incident into policy leverage. Assistant Attorney General Brett Shumate sent a letter to the National Trust for Historic Preservation, which is suing to block the ballroom project, stating the case “serves no purpose” and warning that delays could put officials at risk. The Justice Department indicated it would seek to have the lawsuit dismissed if it is not withdrawn.

The proposed ballroom — estimated at $400 million — has been tied up in legal challenges from preservation groups and skepticism from some lawmakers, who argue it alters the White House’s historic character and lacks proper congressional authorization. Courts have repeatedly slowed construction, keeping the project in limbo.

But the political dynamic shifted immediately after the shooting. Louisiana Governor Jeff Landry wrote that the incident “is yet another reason” to move forward with the project. Even Senator John Fetterman (D-Pa.) signaled support, saying the ballroom should be considered “for events exactly like these.”

Trump, who had prepared a confrontational speech for the dinner, acknowledged the disruption. “I was all set to rip,” he told reporters, adding the event would be rescheduled. “I don’t know if I can ever be as rough as I was going to be tonight.”

The incident marks one of the most serious security breaches involving a sitting president in recent years — and has instantly reframed a stalled construction fight into a debate over risk, protection, and presidential infrastructure.

Cole Tomas Allen is expected to appear in federal court Monday in the U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia as the investigation continues.

The question now is no longer just whether the ballroom should be built.

It is whether Saturday night made it inevitable.

JBizNews Desk

USA Rare Earth said it has agreed to buy Brazil’s Serra Verde in a transaction valued at about $2.8 billion, a move that would sharply expand its access to the magnet rare earths increasingly sought by automakers, defense suppliers and industrial manufacturers outside China. In a statement released April 20, USA Rare Earth said the deal includes $300 million in cash and 126.849 million newly issued shares, implying the valuation based on the company’s April 17 closing price of $19.95, while Chief Executive Barbara Humpton said the acquisition marks “an important step in building a global rare earth platform,” according to the company announcement.

The proposed purchase lands at a time when governments and manufacturers are trying to reduce dependence on Chinese supply chains that dominate mining, separation and processing of rare earths. International Energy Agency Executive Director Fatih Birol has said in recent critical-minerals assessments that “today’s supply chains for many energy minerals are highly concentrated,” and the agency has repeatedly warned that rare earth concentration creates strategic risk for clean-energy and industrial sectors, according to its latest market work. That backdrop helps explain why USA Rare Earth framed the Serra Verde deal as a scale play in ex-China supply, with the company saying the transaction is expected to close in the third quarter of 2026, subject to customary approvals.

Serra Verde already occupies a notable position in the emerging non-Asian rare-earth market because its project in Brazil targets ionic clay deposits that can yield heavy rare earths used in high-performance permanent magnets. In public materials, Serra Verde has said it is “the only scale producer outside Asia” of certain heavy rare earth concentrates from ionic clay, and the company has described Phase 1 as a commercial operation in Minas Gerais focused on neodymium, praseodymium, terbium and dysprosium-bearing material. Those elements matter because, as the U.S. Department of Energy has said in critical-materials strategy documents, dysprosium and terbium remain especially important for heat-resistant magnets used in electric vehicles, wind turbines and defense systems.

The transaction also underscores how quickly rare-earth assets have become strategic corporate targets as Washington pushes domestic and allied-country sourcing. The U.S. Geological Survey said in its 2026 Mineral Commodity Summaries that the United States still relies heavily on imports for rare-earth compounds and metals, while China continues to account for the largest share of global mine production and processing capacity. In that context, Humpton said in the company release that combining USA Rare Earth with Serra Verde would support a broader supply chain serving customers that want alternatives to Asia-centered production, a message likely to resonate with policymakers and industrial buyers alike.

Investors will also focus on how the deal is financed and whether the combined company can execute across mining, processing and magnet manufacturing without stretching its balance sheet. USA Rare Earth said the consideration includes a relatively modest cash component and a much larger stock issuance, meaning existing shareholders face dilution even as the company gains a producing asset. In its announcement, the company said the structure reflects both the strategic value of Serra Verde and the desire to preserve capital for growth, while market participants will likely compare the move with other critical-minerals transactions that have leaned on equity to fund expansion in a capital-intensive sector.

The industrial logic is straightforward: magnet rare earths sit at the center of a supply chain that governments increasingly treat as a national-security issue as much as a commercial one. Reuters has reported in recent years that the United States and allies have accelerated efforts to build rare-earth mining, refining and magnet capacity after export restrictions and geopolitical tensions exposed vulnerabilities in the sector. U.S. Department of Defense officials have also said in public contracting announcements that secure domestic and allied supply of rare-earth materials is essential for advanced weapons systems, adding another layer of urgency for companies trying to assemble integrated platforms.

Brazil’s role in that strategy has grown because the country holds significant mineral resources and offers an alternative jurisdiction for Western buyers seeking diversification. Serra Verde has said in corporate disclosures that its deposit benefits from a lower-strip, clay-based geology that differs from hard-rock rare-earth mining and can support production of valuable heavy rare earths, while Brazil’s mining framework gives international investors a route into a politically important supply source. For USA Rare Earth, the acquisition would add an operating foothold in Latin America at a time when manufacturers increasingly want long-term contracts tied to non-Chinese origin, a trend highlighted in recent industry reporting by Bloomberg and Reuters on critical-minerals procurement.

What comes next will matter as much as the headline valuation. The companies said the deal is expected to close in the third quarter of 2026, leaving time for regulatory review, shareholder processes and integration planning, and investors will watch for more detail on production targets, separation capacity and customer agreements. If USA Rare Earth can turn Serra Verde’s output into a broader trans-American rare-earth chain, the company could emerge as a more credible supplier in a market where governments and manufacturers keep saying diversification is no longer optional but necessary, as the IEA, the USGS and U.S. policymakers have repeatedly made clear.

JBizNews Desk


The U.S. economy did not just slow at the end of 2025 — it nearly stalled.

Real gross domestic product expanded at just a 0.5% annualized rate in the fourth quarter, according to the final estimate released by the U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on April 9, marking a sharp downgrade from earlier readings and a dramatic loss of momentum heading into 2026. “Growth increased at an annual rate of 0.5 percent in the fourth quarter of 2025,” the BEA said — well below the initial 1.4% estimate and down from 0.7% in the prior revision.

The message is clear: the economy entered 2026 with almost no cushion.

The downgrade was driven by weakening demand across the board. The BEA said the revision “primarily reflected downward revisions to consumer spending and private inventory investment,” while a rise in imports — which subtract from GDP — further dragged on the headline number. “When consumption and investment are both revised lower, that’s not noise — that’s a signal,” said Bret Kenwell, U.S. investment analyst at eToro, warning that underlying demand is softening.

The slowdown marks a decisive break from earlier strength. After growing 2.4% in the third quarter, the economy lost speed rapidly, leaving investors and executives questioning whether the weakness is temporary — or the start of something deeper. Economists cited by Reuters pointed to softer household spending and uneven business investment, while analysts speaking to Bloomberg said revisions of this magnitude reinforce concerns that the economy entered 2026 “on fragile footing.”

Consumer spending — which drives roughly two-thirds of U.S. economic activity — still increased, but not enough to carry the economy. The BEA acknowledged that growth “primarily reflected increases in consumer spending and private inventory investment,” but the revised data makes clear that both were weaker than initially believed. Even modest downgrades in consumption can materially shift the economic outlook.

Trade made things worse. The BEA confirmed imports rose during the quarter, subtracting from overall growth. Economists at Wells Fargo, cited by MarketWatch, said swings in trade and inventories can distort quarterly data, but emphasized that the final reading still points to “subdued” underlying activity.

Layered on top of that was a major policy shock. The longest government shutdown in U.S. history disrupted federal spending and economic data collection late in the quarter, adding volatility to already weakening conditions. Analysts at Oxford Economics, cited by Reuters and Bloomberg, said government disruptions likely compounded private-sector softness, even if the precise impact remains difficult to isolate.

At the same time, inflation refused to cooperate. The PCE price index rose 2.9% in the quarter, with core PCE at 2.7%, keeping pressure on the Federal Reserve. “This is a difficult mix — growth slowing while inflation stays elevated,” said Sonu Varghese, Chief Macro Strategist at Carson Group, warning that the Fed’s path forward is becoming increasingly constrained.

That constraint is now front and center. In recent remarks, Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell reiterated that the central bank remains “focused on our dual mandate goals of maximum employment and stable prices,” signaling no immediate pivot. A near-flat growth print only intensifies the dilemma: cut rates and risk inflation — or hold steady and risk further slowdown.

Corporate America is already adjusting. Economists at The Conference Board warn that slower growth pressures hiring and capital spending decisions, while analysts cited by The Wall Street Journal say companies often respond to near-zero growth by conserving cash and delaying expansion until clearer signals emerge.

Global risks are adding to the pressure. The International Monetary Fund has cut its 2026 growth outlook to 3.1%, with Chief Economist Pierre-Olivier Gourinchas warning that escalating Middle East tensions could pose a “much larger threat” to global growth than previously expected. Higher energy prices, tighter financial conditions, and weakening demand are all moving in the wrong direction.

One area still holding up: profits. The BEA reported corporate profits rose $246.9 billion in the fourth quarter, suggesting businesses are maintaining margins — for now. But profits tend to lag economic slowdowns, not prevent them.

The real test is next.

With fourth-quarter growth now locked at 0.5%, attention shifts to incoming 2026 data to determine whether this was a temporary disruption — or the start of a broader downturn. Economists across Reuters, Bloomberg, and major bank research desks are already warning that momentum was thin before the year even began.

If the next data confirms that trend, the slowdown won’t be a surprise.

It will be a confirmation.

JBizNews Desk

JetBlue Airways is facing a proposed class action in federal court that accuses the carrier of collecting customer browsing and purchase data through tracking technology and using that information in ways travelers did not knowingly authorize, a case that adds to growing legal pressure on companies over online data practices and personalized pricing. In a complaint filed April 22 in the U.S. District Court for the Eastern District of New York, plaintiff Andrew Phillips alleged that JetBlue Airways captured information entered on its website and shared data with a third party, according to the court filing reviewed through federal records.

The lawsuit centers on claims under privacy and consumer-protection law rather than any proven finding that fares changed for a specific passenger, and that distinction matters as courts and regulators scrutinize how companies deploy tracking pixels, session-replay tools and ad-tech software. In the complaint, Phillips said he booked travel on JetBlue’s website and “provided his contact and payment information” along with travel preferences, according to the filing, which alleges he did not know website code would collect additional information and transmit it externally.

JetBlue did not immediately respond to a request for comment from multiple news outlets on the allegations, and the company had not filed a substantive response in the case as of the latest federal docket update. That leaves the claims untested, but the suit lands at a time when airlines and other consumer-facing companies face sharper questions about digital consent, especially after a wave of litigation tied to website tracking tools from vendors such as Meta Platforms and Google, as reported in recent coverage by Reuters and legal industry publications tracking privacy cases.

The complaint, filed in Brooklyn federal court, seeks class-action status and damages, arguing that the data collection exceeded what a reasonable consumer would expect during a ticket purchase. While the filing alleges the information could support airfare optimization or ad targeting, it does not appear, based on the publicly available complaint, to provide direct internal evidence from JetBlue showing the airline used an individual customer’s personal data to raise that traveler’s fare. That gap is likely to become central as the case proceeds, because courts typically require plaintiffs to show not only data collection but also concrete harm, a standard the U.S. Supreme Court and lower federal courts have emphasized in privacy disputes, according to analyses published by Bloomberg Law and major law firms following standing doctrine.

The broader issue has become more urgent for travel companies as regulators on both sides of the Atlantic examine “surveillance pricing,” a term consumer advocates use for pricing shaped by personal data, browsing behavior or inferred willingness to pay. In a report released earlier this year, the Federal Trade Commission said it is studying how companies use consumer data in pricing decisions, and FTC Chair Lina Khan has said businesses should not deploy personal information in ways that are “opaque” or “exploitative,” according to agency statements and prior public remarks. The agency has not accused JetBlue of wrongdoing in this matter.

For airlines, the legal and reputational stakes extend beyond one lawsuit because carriers increasingly rely on dynamic pricing systems that adjust fares in real time based on demand, inventory, route economics and competitor moves. Industry executives have long described those systems as standard revenue management rather than individualized price discrimination. In prior public comments on airline merchandising and pricing, executives across the sector have said fare changes reflect market conditions and seat availability, not secret dossiers on individual shoppers, according to earnings call transcripts and conference remarks covered by CNBC and The Wall Street Journal. The complaint against JetBlue challenges whether consumers can be sure where that line sits online.

The case also arrives as JetBlue works through a difficult strategic period marked by cost pressure, network adjustments and heightened investor scrutiny after the collapse of its proposed acquisition of Spirit Airlines. In recent public filings, JetBlue said it remains focused on restoring profitability and improving free cash flow, and executives have described 2026 as a period of operational and financial discipline, according to the company’s latest investor materials and SEC disclosures. A privacy suit may not alter near-term operations, but it adds another layer of legal exposure for a company already trying to reassure shareholders on execution.

Consumer privacy lawyers say these website-tracking cases often turn on technical detail: what code captured, where data went, whether the information qualified as protected communications, and what disclosures appeared in privacy policies or cookie banners. Courts have split on similar claims, with some judges allowing cases tied to session-replay or pixel tools to move forward and others dismissing them where plaintiffs could not show interception or injury, according to recent reporting by Reuters and summaries of federal decisions published by Bloomberg Law. That uneven record means the allegations against JetBlue could face an early motion to dismiss even if the complaint survives initial filing.

What comes next is likely to matter well beyond one airline. JetBlue will have an opportunity to challenge the complaint, and the court will eventually decide whether the case can proceed on a class basis, a step that often determines settlement pressure and financial risk. If the plaintiff secures discovery, the litigation could offer a rare look into how a major airline structures website analytics, third-party tracking and pricing architecture, an issue regulators, investors and travelers increasingly view as a test of how far companies can go with personal data before transparency and trust break down.

JBizNews Desk

PepsiCo is accelerating changes to Gatorade as pressure builds on food and beverage companies to simplify ingredient labels, saying it plans to remove synthetic colors from the sports-drink brand while introducing new products with fewer additives. In a statement released April 16, Mike Del Pozzo, president of PepsiCo Beverages U.S., said, “By listening to consumers, we’re learning more of what they want and don’t want in their Gatorade,” adding that the company is “on a journey to remove artificial colors from our product portfolio while maintaining the bold Gatorade color people know and love,” according to PepsiCo.

The shift starts with a new product, Gatorade Lower Sugar, which PepsiCo said contains no artificial flavors, sweeteners or colors and less sugar than the flagship drink. In the same company announcement, Del Pozzo said the launch reflects “evolving consumer preferences,” while PepsiCo added that powder-stick formats without artificial colors are due later this spring and that three flavors of Gatorade Thirst Quencher and Gatorade Zero, including Fruit Punch, will move to colors derived from fruits and vegetables.

The decision lands at a time when ingredient transparency has become a sharper commercial issue across packaged food, with major brands facing scrutiny from shoppers, advocacy groups and policymakers over petroleum-based dyes and other additives. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration says approved color additives are reviewed for safety before use, but the agency also notes on its website that manufacturers remain responsible for ensuring ingredients meet legal safety standards. In public materials, the FDA says color additives “are safe when they are used in accordance with FDA regulations,” a position that continues to shape how companies balance regulatory compliance with changing consumer sentiment.

Industry analysts say the move by PepsiCo reflects a broader recalibration rather than a sudden break with past formulations. CFRA Research analyst Arun Sundaram told clients in recent consumer-sector commentary that large food companies are increasingly adapting portfolios to meet demand for “better-for-you” products while protecting brand equity and margins, and that reformulation can help sustain relevance with younger and more ingredient-conscious buyers. That matters for Gatorade, which remains one of the most important brands in PepsiCo’s beverage lineup and a core profit engine in North America.

The commercial stakes extend beyond one product line. PepsiCo said in its latest annual filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission that consumer preferences continue to shift toward products perceived as healthier and more sustainable, warning that failure to respond could hurt demand. In that filing, the company said its business depends on its ability “to anticipate and respond to changes in consumer preferences and demand,” underscoring why ingredient changes at Gatorade carry significance for investors tracking growth in the broader convenience-food and beverage sector.

Competitors across the beverage aisle have already leaned harder into cleaner-label messaging, particularly in hydration, energy and functional drinks where shoppers often scrutinize ingredient panels as closely as performance claims. Coca-Cola, in product disclosures for brands such as BodyArmor, has emphasized the use of coconut water and the absence of certain artificial ingredients in parts of its portfolio, while newer entrants have built marketing around simpler formulations. Analysts at Bank of America have said in sector notes that brand owners increasingly need to pair legacy scale with reformulation and innovation if they want to defend shelf space and pricing power.

For retailers, the timing also fits with a market that rewards both premiumization and health-oriented variety. Circana, which tracks consumer purchasing trends, has said in recent U.S. food-and-beverage analysis that shoppers continue to seek products that align with wellness goals even as they remain price sensitive. That creates an opening for companies like PepsiCo to use line extensions such as Gatorade Lower Sugar to capture demand without abandoning mainstream offerings that still drive volume.

The regulatory backdrop remains fluid, and that could keep reformulation on executive agendas well beyond this spring. While the FDA maintains that approved color additives can be used safely within federal rules, several states have pushed tougher standards or disclosure requirements for food ingredients, and consumer advocates continue to press for broader restrictions. PepsiCo has not said when every Gatorade product will complete the transition, but the company’s public commitment suggests ingredient strategy is moving closer to the center of competition in packaged beverages.

What comes next will matter not only for Gatorade shoppers but for the wider food industry. If PepsiCo succeeds in removing synthetic colors while preserving the brand’s signature look, taste and shelf appeal, rivals may face added pressure to move faster on similar changes. For now, Del Pozzo’s statement to PepsiCo offers the clearest signal of direction: the company says it is responding to what consumers want, and in a category where loyalty and visibility drive sales, that response could shape product development across the beverage aisle through 2026.

JBizNews Desk

In a year dominated by artificial intelligence mania, Federal Reserve uncertainty, and geopolitical risk, one of the simplest strategies on Wall Street is quietly outperforming nearly everything else — and doing so at levels not seen in almost a century.

Bank of America’s chief investment strategist Michael Hartnett calls it the “sleep like a baby” portfolio — a deliberately balanced approach designed not to chase returns, but to preserve them. In 2026, however, the strategy is doing both. “It’s on pace for its best year since 1933,” Hartnett wrote in a recent Bank of America Global Research Flow Show note, describing a performance that is now forcing even aggressive investors to take notice.

The structure is straightforward: instead of the traditional 60/40 split between stocks and bonds, the portfolio allocates 25% each to stocks, bonds, cash, and commodities. The result has been a remarkable 26% annualized return in 2026, just shy of the 27% achieved during the Great Depression-era rebound in 1933. “This is one of the strongest relative performances versus 60/40 in modern market history,” Hartnett noted.

What makes the outcome striking is that the strategy was never intended to lead. It was built to withstand — spreading exposure across growth, safety, liquidity, and hard assets. Yet in today’s environment, each of those components is contributing meaningfully. “Diversification is finally working again,” said Savita Subramanian, Head of U.S. Equity Strategy at Bank of America, pointing to a rare alignment where all major asset classes are delivering positive returns simultaneously.

The standout driver of 2026 has been commodities, particularly gold. Hartnett highlighted that while equities are posting solid gains of around 14% annualized, gold has surged 31% year-to-date, marking a rare fourth consecutive year of double-digit increases — a pattern historically associated with wartime economies and inflationary cycles. “Gold is signaling structural shifts in the global economy,” said Natasha Kaneva, Global Head of Commodities Strategy at J.P. Morgan, who has projected prices could approach $5,000 per ounce.

Other major institutions are even more bullish. UBS analysts have outlined scenarios where gold could reach as high as $6,200 per ounce by mid-2026, driven by central bank accumulation, persistent deficits, and declining real interest rates. “The macro backdrop strongly favors hard assets,” UBS noted in a recent outlook.

Despite the surge, most investors remain significantly underexposed. According to Bank of America data, private client portfolios hold an average of just 0.4% in gold, far below the 25% allocation that is powering the “sleep like a baby” strategy. “There is a massive positioning gap,” Hartnett wrote, warning that continued performance could force investors to rotate into commodities late in the cycle.

The concept itself is not new. Its roots trace back to the Permanent Portfolio introduced by Harry Browne, which advocated equal allocations across stocks, long-term bonds, cash, and gold to weather all economic conditions. Bank of America’s modern adaptation broadens the commodity exposure beyond gold into a wider basket of natural resources, aligning it more closely with today’s global economy.

The renewed interest in such strategies comes after a critical failure of the traditional 60/40 model. In 2022, both stocks and bonds declined simultaneously, breaking a decades-old assumption that bonds would provide downside protection. “That was a wake-up call,” said David Kostin, Chief U.S. Equity Strategist at Goldman Sachs, noting that “correlations have changed, and portfolios need to adapt.”

In 2026, those changes are fully visible. Rising energy prices tied to Middle East tensions, persistent inflation pressures, and elevated cash yields have created an environment where all four components of the diversified portfolio are contributing. “We are in a regime where balance is outperforming concentration,” said Mark Haefele, Chief Investment Officer at UBS Global Wealth Management, emphasizing the benefits of broad exposure.

Hartnett’s conclusion is direct: the strategy that investors often overlook as too simple is now outperforming many of the most complex approaches on Wall Street. “The boring portfolio is beating everyone,” he wrote — a statement that captures both the irony and the lesson of 2026.

As capital begins to follow performance, the key question is whether this historic run has further to go. If investors begin reallocating toward commodities and rebalancing portfolios away from concentration in high-growth sectors, the “sleep like a baby” strategy may not only sustain its edge — it could reshape how portfolios are built in the years ahead.

JBizNews Desk

Crocs, Inc. has pulled off one of the most unexpected turnarounds in modern retail, transforming a once-mocked foam clog into a global cultural and financial force generating more than $4 billion in annual revenue and commanding attention across Wall Street and social media alike.

Long dismissed as unfashionable — and even labeled one of the “worst inventions” by critics in its early years — Crocs (NASDAQ: CROX) is now experiencing a powerful resurgence fueled by cultural relevance, disciplined execution, and aggressive expansion into digital commerce. “This is a brand that rewrote its own narrative,” said Andrew Rees, Chief Executive Officer of Crocs, noting that the company has “leaned into authenticity and consumer engagement in a way that resonates globally.”

The numbers underscore the transformation. Crocs reported full-year 2025 revenue exceeding $4 billion, while generating approximately $659 million in free cash flow. The company returned capital to shareholders by repurchasing roughly 6.5 million shares for $577 million and reduced debt by $128 million — a financial profile that signals strength rather than recovery. “Crocs is operating from a position of offense,” said Jim Duffy, analyst at Stifel, describing the company’s capital allocation as “a clear indicator of confidence in sustained demand.”

At the core of Crocs’ resurgence is a dramatic cultural repositioning. Once considered socially undesirable, the brand has successfully repositioned itself as a customizable, expressive, and highly visible lifestyle product. Strategic collaborations have played a central role. In 2025, Crocs launched partnerships with the National Football League, as well as entertainment franchises including Stranger Things and Twilight, both of which generated rapid sellouts and strong resale activity. “Limited drops and cultural tie-ins have created urgency and relevance,” said Simeon Siegel, retail analyst at BMO Capital Markets, adding that “Crocs has mastered the modern playbook of scarcity and storytelling.”

The company’s newest partnership with LEGO Group signals a longer-term strategy aimed at younger consumers and families, extending Crocs’ reach across generations. “We are building for the future consumer,” Rees said, emphasizing the importance of brand engagement early in life.

Nowhere is Crocs’ momentum more visible than on social platforms. The company and its sister brand HeyDude currently rank as the number one and number two footwear brands on TikTok Shop in the United States, reflecting a broader shift in how consumers discover and purchase products. “Social commerce is becoming a primary growth driver,” Rees said, pointing to continued expansion across international TikTok markets.

To deepen that engagement, Crocs has moved into original content. In early 2026, the company launched a short-form microdrama series titled Charmed to Meet You, which surpassed 10 million views within weeks and reached the Top 10 on ReelShort, a fast-growing mobile entertainment platform. “This is a brand behaving more like a media company,” said Doug Stephens, retail futurist and founder of Retail Prophet, noting that “Crocs understands attention is currency.”

International growth is accelerating alongside digital expansion. Crocs reported an 11% increase in international revenue in 2025, with China surging 30% and continued strength in Japan and Western Europe. The company now operates approximately 2,600 branded retail locations globally and plans to open an additional 200 to 250 stores and kiosks in 2026. “Global demand remains robust, particularly in Asia,” said Erinn Murphy, consumer analyst at Piper Sandler, highlighting Crocs’ ability to localize while maintaining brand consistency.

Product innovation and personalization remain central to the company’s strategy. Crocs’ signature Jibbitz charms — small, customizable accessories that attach to footwear — accounted for roughly 8% of total sales last year. The company has expanded the concept into adjacent categories, including bags and accessories. “Personalization drives repeat purchases and brand loyalty,” Rees said, describing Jibbitz as “a meaningful contributor to growth.”

Meanwhile, Crocs is quietly building a second growth engine in sandals. The category accounted for approximately 13% of product mix in 2025, approaching $450 million in annual revenue. The company is now launching its Saturday sandal line, designed to capture additional market share in a segment traditionally dominated by legacy competitors. “We see significant runway in sandals,” Rees said, pointing to strong momentum in North America and extended seasonal demand.

The broader industry backdrop is also supportive. The global footwear market is projected to reach approximately $550 billion in 2026, growing at an annual rate of more than 5%. Crocs is not merely participating in that growth — it is outperforming within the fastest-moving channels, particularly digital and social commerce. “Crocs is where the consumer is going, not where they’ve been,” said Simeon Siegel of BMO, emphasizing the brand’s relevance with younger demographics.

What began in 2002 as a niche boating shoe — conceived by founders Scott Seamans, Lyndon Hanson, and George Boedecker Jr. — has evolved into a symbol of modern consumer behavior, where comfort, individuality, and cultural alignment outweigh traditional notions of fashion. The company’s stock has reflected that shift, with investors increasingly viewing Crocs as a durable growth story rather than a cyclical fad.

From industry punchline to platform-driven powerhouse, Crocs has redefined what a comeback looks like in the digital age. The question now is no longer whether the brand can sustain relevance — but how far it can scale it.

JBizNews Desk

Waymo and Waze are expanding their use of road data beyond navigation and robotaxis, launching a program to flag potholes and other roadway hazards for local governments as Alphabet looks to turn its growing autonomous fleet into a civic infrastructure tool. In an April 9 statement, Waymo said the effort aims to help cities identify road damage faster, while Waze said its crowdsourced reporting network can add another layer of real-time visibility for public agencies.

Arielle Fleisher, policy development and research manager at Waymo, said in the company’s announcement that “Waymo is already making roads safer where we operate” and added that the company wants “to build on the safety benefits of our service by partnering with organizations and city officials to help improve the infrastructure we all depend on.” Waze, in the same announcement, said the partnership will combine data from its driver community with signals gathered by Waymo vehicles, a move that reflects how Alphabet is trying to extract more value from sensor-heavy autonomous systems beyond passenger trips.

The initiative arrives as Waymo scales commercial operations in U.S. cities and faces increasing scrutiny over how autonomous vehicles interact with public streets. Reuters has reported that Waymo has steadily expanded paid robotaxi service in markets including Phoenix, San Francisco and Los Angeles, while executives have argued that the company’s vehicles generate detailed road-level information useful for safety and mapping. In a blog post earlier this year, Waymo co-Chief Executive Tekedra Mawakana said the company is “building the world’s most experienced driver,” underscoring management’s view that its vehicles can contribute data and operational insights at city scale.

For Waze, the pothole effort builds on a long-running model of user-reported road conditions that already includes crashes, stalled vehicles and hazards. Waze said in materials describing its government partnerships that its data products help transportation agencies “make more informed infrastructure decisions,” and the new arrangement with Waymo suggests a deeper push into machine-generated reporting. That matters because potholes carry a measurable economic cost: the American Society of Civil Engineers has repeatedly warned in its infrastructure assessments that deferred road maintenance raises vehicle repair bills and freight inefficiencies, while local agencies struggle with limited inspection capacity.

City officials have increasingly sought automated ways to monitor pavement conditions, particularly as labor shortages and budget pressure complicate manual inspections. The U.S. Department of Transportation said in guidance tied to federal infrastructure funding that better asset management and digital monitoring can improve maintenance planning and reduce lifecycle costs. Against that backdrop, Waymo said the pothole program grew out of conversations with municipalities about “reporting gaps,” indicating that local governments want more continuous street-level intelligence than traditional complaint systems and periodic surveys can provide.

The business logic also fits a broader pattern across autonomous driving and mapping, where companies are trying to monetize data generated in the course of normal operations. Alphabet has not publicly broken out revenue for Waymo, but executives have repeatedly framed the unit as a long-term platform business rather than only a ride-hailing operator. On Alphabet earnings calls, Chief Executive Sundar Pichai has described Waymo as making progress in “building a sustainable business,” according to company transcripts, and the pothole initiative hints at how that sustainability could eventually include municipal and enterprise services tied to road analytics.

The partnership could also strengthen Waymo’s standing with regulators and city leaders at a time when autonomous vehicle operators need public-sector cooperation to expand. In recent years, transportation officials in California and Arizona have pressed AV companies to share more information about safety, traffic interactions and emergency response. By offering road-condition data to public agencies, Waymo can present itself not only as a user of city streets but as a contributor to their upkeep. Fleisher said in the company statement that the goal is to help “improve the infrastructure we all depend on,” language that aligns with a broader effort to position autonomous fleets as public-benefit technology.

What comes next will depend on whether cities can integrate the data into maintenance workflows quickly enough to show visible results. Waymo and Waze have not publicly detailed which municipalities will participate first or how frequently reports will flow, leaving key operational questions open. Still, the direction is clear: as autonomous vehicles move from pilot projects to everyday urban presence, companies like Waymo are under pressure to prove they do more than carry passengers. If the pothole program helps cities repair roads faster and document savings, it could become a template for how robotaxi fleets justify broader access to public streets and deepen their role in transportation infrastructure.

JBizNews Desk

U.S. land prices remain under pressure from a yearslong shortage of available parcels, a trend that real-estate economists say increasingly mirrors the housing market and carries implications for builders, rural owners and investors. In a report released April 21, Realtor.com said the median listing price for land reached $62,365 per acre in the first quarter of 2026, and senior economist Joel Berner said in the company’s analysis that “the pandemic didn’t only drain home inventory, it drained land inventory,” a statement published by Realtor.com as part of its first national land-listing study.

The supply squeeze matters because developable lots sit at the front end of the housing pipeline, and recent official data show builders still face a structurally tight market for new homes. U.S. Census Bureau and Department of Housing and Urban Development data released in recent months showed housing starts and permits continuing at levels that economists closely track for signs of future supply, while National Association of Home Builders Chief Economist Robert Dietz said in an April industry update that “the lack of buildable lots remains a significant constraint” for many builders, according to the trade group.

The land market’s rise also fits a broader pattern in home values since 2020, even though financing costs have climbed sharply. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell said in recent public remarks that housing services inflation has “been quite persistent,” according to the central bank, while National Association of Realtors Chief Economist Lawrence Yun said in the group’s latest market commentary that limited inventory continues to support prices despite affordability pressure. Those dynamics help explain why raw land, especially parcels near growth corridors, has held value even as mortgage rates remain far above pandemic lows.

Publicly available market trackers point to the same imbalance between demand and supply. In its April report, Realtor.com said land inventory in the first quarter stood at 426,986 listings, down 23.6% from the first quarter of 2019, and Joel Berner said developed parcels “never return to the market,” underscoring the one-way nature of land conversion. Separately, analysts at Redfin and Zillow have said in recent housing-market updates that constrained inventory remains one of the main forces keeping broader real-estate prices elevated, even as transaction volumes stay subdued.

For homebuilders, the issue reaches beyond headline land prices to margins, project timing and where companies choose to build. In earnings calls this year, executives at major builders including D.R. Horton and Lennar have described lot supply and land strategy as central to profitability, with Lennar Executive Chairman Stuart Miller saying on a recent earnings call, according to the company transcript, that the builder continues to emphasize a “land-light” model to reduce risk. That approach reflects an industry effort to avoid tying up too much capital in expensive land while still securing enough lots to feed future communities.

Investors and rural landowners also have reasons to watch the market closely, particularly as farmland, exurban development tracts and recreational land attract different buyer pools. The U.S. Department of Agriculture said in its latest Land Values summary that farm real-estate values, including land and buildings, continued to rise nationally, and the agency noted that cropland and pasture values increased again in 2025. Those gains do not map perfectly onto residential land listings, but they reinforce a broader message from official data: land as an asset class has remained resilient across several categories.

Higher borrowing costs, however, could still limit how far prices run from here. Economists at Fannie Mae said in recent housing outlooks that elevated mortgage rates and affordability strains should keep home sales relatively muted, and Mortgage Bankers Association Chief Economist Mike Fratantoni said in the group’s latest forecast that financing conditions continue to weigh on real-estate activity. If builders slow purchases or consumers pull back from custom-home projects, some local land markets could cool even if national inventory stays tight.

Geography also matters more in land than in existing-home sales, because zoning, water access, infrastructure and entitlement risk can sharply alter value from one county to the next. National Association of Home Builders has repeatedly said in its policy statements that regulatory costs and lot shortages add materially to the final price of a new home, and Robert Dietz said the industry needs more “attainable, buildable lots” to improve affordability, according to the association. In fast-growing Sun Belt metros, where population gains continue to outpace housing supply, that shortage can become especially acute.

What comes next depends on whether more landowners decide to sell, whether local governments speed approvals, and whether builders regain confidence to replenish lot pipelines. Realtor.com framed its latest findings as evidence that the land market has not normalized after the pandemic shock, and broader signals from NAHB, USDA and federal housing data point in the same direction: scarce buildable land could remain a bottleneck for U.S. housing supply well into 2026. For executives across homebuilding, lending and real-estate investment, that means the cost and availability of land may stay one of the clearest indicators of where housing growth can happen next.

JBizNews Desk

Elon Musk and OpenAI are moving toward a high-stakes court fight in California that could test how far a nonprofit-backed artificial intelligence lab can pivot into one of the world’s most valuable private companies. In a lawsuit filed in federal court and updated through recent hearings, Musk argues that Sam Altman, Greg Brockman and OpenAI abandoned the organization’s founding commitment to develop AI for the public benefit, while OpenAI has called the case meritless in court papers and public statements reported by Reuters and The Wall Street Journal.

The dispute matters well beyond a personal feud because OpenAI sits at the center of the generative-AI boom, backed by billions of dollars from Microsoft and racing against rivals including Google, Anthropic and xAI. In a blog post published by OpenAI in response to the litigation, the company said Musk had previously supported a for-profit structure as the company sought more capital, while court filings cited by Bloomberg show Musk contending that the company’s current model contradicts the mission he helped establish in 2015.

At the center of the case is a question that Silicon Valley increasingly cannot avoid: whether frontier AI can remain governed by public-interest ideals once the cost of building the technology reaches into the tens of billions of dollars. In earlier public remarks, Sam Altman said “the cost of compute” and the scale of model development demanded far more capital than a conventional nonprofit could raise, a point he made in interviews cited by Financial Times and CNBC, while Musk has repeatedly said on his platform X and in legal filings that OpenAI “has become a closed source, maximum-profit company effectively controlled by Microsoft.”

The legal battle has already produced consequential rulings even before any jury hears the full case. In March 2024, Reuters reported that Musk sued OpenAI and Altman for breach of contract and fiduciary duty, and by August 2024 a federal judge allowed key parts of the case to proceed while narrowing others, according to court records and reporting from Bloomberg. In those filings, OpenAI said the claims “rest on convoluted, false factual premises,” while Musk’s lawyers argued the company’s restructuring and commercial partnerships represented a “textbook betrayal” of its founding principles, as quoted in the complaint.

The company’s ties to Microsoft give the case broader commercial weight because the software giant has become OpenAI’s most important strategic partner and cloud provider. Microsoft President Brad Smith said in public testimony and company statements cited by Reuters that the partnership aims to “advance AI safely and responsibly,” and regulatory filings show Microsoft has committed multibillion-dollar investments to support model training and product deployment. That relationship has drawn antitrust and governance scrutiny in the U.S., U.K. and Europe, adding another layer of significance to any court finding on how much control outside investors and partners exert over OpenAI.

The governance issue became even more visible after the boardroom crisis in November 2023, when OpenAI’s nonprofit board abruptly removed Altman before reinstating him days later. In a memo to employees published by major outlets including The New York Times and Reuters, interim leadership said the board had lost confidence in Altman, while Altman later told staff and investors he looked forward to “returning to OpenAI” and continuing the company’s mission. That episode gave Musk’s legal team fresh material to argue that the organization’s governance no longer matches its public-interest branding, though OpenAI has said subsequent board changes strengthened oversight.

The case also lands as Musk builds xAI, his own artificial-intelligence company, creating an unavoidable competitive backdrop. Musk said when launching xAI in 2023 that its goal is to “understand the true nature of the universe,” according to the company’s public announcement, and Reuters has reported that xAI quickly raised capital and expanded data-center ambitions. OpenAI has pointed to that rivalry in public responses, saying Musk is trying to slow a competitor, while Musk maintains in legal filings that his claims focus on charitable purpose and contractual commitments, not market share.

Investors and policy makers are watching because the trial could influence how AI ventures structure themselves, raise capital and describe their missions to donors, employees and regulators. Legal experts quoted by Bloomberg and WSJ have said the dispute could clarify whether nonprofit control can coexist with aggressive commercial expansion, especially in sectors where safety claims and public-benefit language help attract talent and political support. OpenAI has said in statements that its structure exists to ensure artificial general intelligence “benefits all of humanity,” while critics including Musk argue that phrase now sits uneasily beside closed models, enterprise contracts and investor economics.

What comes next matters not only for the parties in court but for the rules of the AI economy. If Musk wins meaningful relief, OpenAI could face pressure on governance, licensing and future fundraising; if OpenAI prevails, the verdict may strengthen the industry’s argument that mission-driven labs need corporate-style capital and control to compete. Either way, as recent reporting from Reuters, Bloomberg and court filings makes clear, the case stands to shape how the most powerful AI companies balance public promises with private power.

JBizNews Desk

Nvidia Corporation has done what no company in market history has ever achieved — crossing and sustaining a $5 trillion market capitalization, cementing its position as the most valuable enterprise ever to trade on a public exchange and redefining the upper limits of global equity markets.

The milestone, reached with a valuation of approximately $5.08 trillion, places Nvidia (NASDAQ: NVDA) far ahead of its closest rivals, with Alphabet Inc. valued near $4.1 trillion and Apple Inc. at roughly $3.97 trillion, while Microsoft Corp. and Amazon.com Inc. trail behind. “This is not just another record — it’s a structural break in how markets value dominance,” said Dan Ives, Managing Director at Wedbush Securities, calling Nvidia “the backbone of the AI economy.”

The scale of Nvidia’s valuation now defies traditional comparison — and even among America’s largest corporations, the gap is staggering. At roughly $5 trillion, Nvidia is worth more than the combined market value of companies like JPMorgan Chase, Walmart, Exxon Mobil, Procter & Gamble, Coca-Cola, PepsiCo, McDonald’s, Nike, Disney, Boeing, and IBM — a collection of iconic Fortune 500 names that collectively define entire sectors of the U.S. economy. “You’re talking about compressing decades of industrial leadership across multiple sectors into a single company,” said Bank of America analyst Vivek Arya, adding that “there has never been this level of value concentration in modern market history.”

Put another way, it would take roughly 10 to 15 of the most recognizable blue-chip companies in America combined to approach Nvidia’s valuation today. Even entire sectors struggle to match it: the total market capitalization of many traditional industries — from airlines to retail conglomerates — falls short of Nvidia alone. “This is a once-in-a-generation concentration of market power,” said Goldman Sachs analyst Toshiya Hari, noting that “AI has created a winner-take-most dynamic at a scale we haven’t seen before.”

Friday’s surge was catalyzed in part by a blowout earnings report from Intel Corp., which delivered first-quarter 2026 revenue of $13.58 billion, far exceeding the $12.42 billion consensus estimate, alongside adjusted earnings per share of $0.29 versus expectations of just $0.02. Intel’s data-center segment jumped 22% year-over-year, sending its shares to their strongest single-day gain since 1987. “The read-through for Nvidia is immediate — data center demand is accelerating, not slowing,” said Stacy Rasgon, semiconductor analyst at Bernstein, emphasizing that “every incremental dollar spent on AI infrastructure disproportionately benefits Nvidia.”

The rally quickly spread across the semiconductor landscape. Advanced Micro Devices Inc. surged more than 14%, Qualcomm Inc. climbed more than 8%, and the Philadelphia Semiconductor Index (SOX) reached a fresh all-time high. “This is a rising tide moment for chips, but Nvidia remains the clear leader,” Arya added, pointing to the company’s unmatched ecosystem and pricing power.

Underpinning Nvidia’s historic valuation is a financial profile that continues to exceed even the most aggressive forecasts. The company reported fourth-quarter revenue of $68.1 billion, up 73% year-over-year, bringing full fiscal 2026 revenue to $215.9 billion — a 65% annual increase. Data Center revenue alone reached $62.3 billion in the quarter, surging 75% from the prior year. Looking ahead, Nvidia has guided for approximately $78 billion in current-quarter revenue, implying roughly 77% year-over-year growth. “These are numbers that simply didn’t exist at this scale before,” said Morgan Stanley analyst Joseph Moore, describing Nvidia’s trajectory as “hyper-growth at megacap size.”

But Nvidia’s significance extends beyond its financial dominance. The company has become the foundational infrastructure layer for the global artificial intelligence economy — supplying the high-performance GPUs that power everything from advanced AI models to enterprise automation, autonomous systems, and national-scale computing. “Nvidia isn’t just selling chips — it’s selling the engines of modern intelligence,” said Jensen Huang, Co-Founder and Chief Executive Officer of Nvidia, who has repeatedly described AI as a new industrial revolution reshaping every sector.

That transformation traces back to humble beginnings. Nvidia was founded in 1993 by Jensen Huang, Chris Malachowsky, and Curtis Priem, who met at a Denny’s in Silicon Valley with a vision to build advanced graphics processors for gaming. The company’s early years were marked by extreme risk, including a near-collapse before the successful launch of its RIVA 128 chip in 1997. “We were thirty days from going out of business,” Huang has said, highlighting how close the company came to failure before establishing itself.

The inflection point came in 2006 with the launch of CUDA, Nvidia’s parallel computing platform, which allowed developers to use GPUs for general-purpose computing. That move — initially underappreciated — ultimately became the backbone of modern AI computing. “CUDA created the ecosystem that competitors still struggle to replicate,” said Stacy Rasgon, emphasizing that Nvidia’s software advantage now reinforces its hardware dominance.

The next phase of expansion is already underway. Nvidia’s upcoming Vera Rubin platform, expected to launch in the second half of 2026, is projected to drive up to $1 trillion in combined lifetime sales alongside its Blackwell architecture through 2027. Huang has stated that Nvidia could reach $1 trillion in annual revenue within two years. “AI is the most powerful technology force of our time,” he said, adding that “we are at the beginning of a new industrial revolution.”

Wall Street remains overwhelmingly supportive. Of the 57 analysts covering the stock, 56 rate it a buy, with price targets ranging as high as $380. Goldman Sachs, Bank of America, Wedbush, and Cantor Fitzgerald all maintain bullish outlooks. “We see continued upside driven by unmatched demand visibility,” said Cantor analyst C.J. Muse, citing Nvidia’s backlog and long-term supply agreements.

The immediate test now shifts to Nvidia’s largest customers. Microsoft, Alphabet, Meta Platforms, and Amazon — among the biggest buyers of Nvidia’s chips — are set to report earnings this week, with investors focused on capital spending plans that will signal whether AI demand remains at current levels. Nvidia itself reports next on May 20.

From a near-bankrupt startup to a company now worth more than a dozen of America’s most iconic corporations combined, Nvidia’s rise reflects a fundamental shift in how value is created in the global economy.

What comes next will determine whether $5 trillion is a ceiling — or simply the next starting point.

JBizNews Desk

Wall Street is heading into what analysts are calling the most consequential week of the 2026 earnings season — a five-day stretch beginning Monday, April 27 that will bring together Big Tech earnings, a Federal Reserve rate decision, fresh GDP data, inflation readings, and key consumer indicators, all against a backdrop of heightened geopolitical and energy market uncertainty.

The centerpiece arrives Wednesday, April 29, when Microsoft (NASDAQ: MSFT), Alphabet (NASDAQ: GOOGL), Meta Platforms (NASDAQ: META), and Amazon (NASDAQ: AMZN) all report first-quarter earnings after the close — just hours after the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) delivers its rate decision at 2:00 p.m. ET. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell is expected to follow with what could be one of his final press conferences before a leadership transition, adding further weight to an already dense market calendar. Apple (NASDAQ: AAPL) reports Thursday, completing the cycle for the largest technology companies.

The concentration of events is unusual. Markets will be forced to process earnings from four of the world’s most valuable companies at the same time policymakers signal the path of interest rates — all within a single trading day. Investors are bracing for elevated volatility as equities, bonds, and commodities respond simultaneously to corporate results and macroeconomic signals.

At the center of this earnings cycle is a single dominant question: whether massive spending on artificial intelligence is translating into measurable financial returns. Meta Platforms has outlined capital expenditures of between $115 billion and $135 billion for 2026, while Amazon has projected as much as $200 billion in spending tied to AI infrastructure, chips, and logistics automation. Alphabet and Microsoft have similarly expanded investment at a pace that has fundamentally reshaped their cost structures.

Analysts are increasingly focused not on whether these companies will continue investing — but whether the revenue impact is accelerating fast enough to justify the scale. Management commentary this week is expected to center heavily on monetization timelines, margins, and the durability of demand tied to AI-driven products and services.

Meta enters the week with strong sentiment on the Street. Analysts expect first-quarter revenue of roughly $55.5 billion and earnings near $6.65 per share, with some pointing to its advertising platform as one of the earliest beneficiaries of AI deployment. Microsoft, by contrast, faces scrutiny around cloud growth, with expectations of approximately $81.4 billion in revenue and earnings near $4.05 per share, driven largely by Azure performance.

Outside of Big Tech, Tuesday’s earnings slate will provide a broader read on the American consumer. Coca-Cola (NYSE: KO), Visa (NYSE: V), Starbucks (NASDAQ: SBUX), General Motors (NYSE: GM), United Parcel Service (NYSE: UPS), T-Mobile (NASDAQ: TMUS), Booking Holdings (NASDAQ: BKNG), and Robinhood Markets (NASDAQ: HOOD) are all set to report. Together, they represent a cross-section of spending across retail, travel, payments, and logistics — offering investors one of the clearest real-time snapshots of household economic conditions.

Ford Motor Company (NYSE: F) reports Wednesday, with investors watching closely for insight into how rising input costs, including steel and fuel, are impacting margins across the auto sector. The results could also shed light on demand trends as financing costs remain elevated.

Macroeconomic data released throughout the week will add another layer of complexity. Thursday brings the first estimate of first-quarter GDP from the Bureau of Economic Analysis, with growth expected to come in near 1.3% annualized, according to the Atlanta Fed’s GDPNow model. The same day will also deliver the Core PCE Price Index, the Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation measure, along with jobless claims and labor cost data. Tuesday’s consumer confidence report is expected to reinforce recent readings showing historically weak sentiment.

The Federal Reserve’s rate decision itself is widely expected to result in no change. However, markets will focus intensely on Powell’s language, particularly whether policymakers view recent inflation pressures — driven in part by energy market volatility — as temporary or persistent. That distinction could shape expectations for rate policy through the remainder of 2026.

For investors, businesses, and households alike, the convergence of these events creates a rare moment where corporate performance and economic policy intersect in real time. From stock portfolios to borrowing costs, the outcomes of the coming days are likely to ripple across financial markets and the broader economy.

In practical terms, this is one of the few weeks where nearly every major driver of the U.S. economy — corporate earnings, interest rates, inflation, growth, and consumer behavior — will be revealed almost simultaneously. The implications will extend far beyond Wall Street, shaping the financial outlook for the remainder of the year.

JBizNews Desk- Markets

A major airline is looking to take luxury travel to new heights.

Dubai-based Emirates is exploring a major upgrade to its first-class experience — introducing private bathrooms directly inside individual suites, according to Abu Dhabi outlet The National.

“I’m working on en-suite bathrooms in first-class suites,” Emirates President Tim Clark said Thursday at the 2026 Capa Airline Leader Summit in Berlin. “I want everyone to hear that so everyone rushes out the door to find out how they can get bathrooms in first-class suites.”

Clark added that Emirates is “constantly refining the product” to prevent it from “going stale,” according to The National.

UNITED AIRLINES RAISING TICKET PRICES UP TO 20% AS FUEL COSTS SURGE AMID IRAN WAR

The airline currently offers first-class cabins on its Airbus A380 and Boeing 777 aircraft.

Aboard the Airbus A380, first-class passengers enjoy private suites with sliding doors, along with access to shared shower spas and an onboard lounge and bar, the outlet reported.

MAJOR AIRLINE AXES 20,000 ‘UNPROFITABLE’ FLIGHTS AS JET FUEL COSTS SOAR

The airline first introduced its signature shower spas in 2008, as noted on its website.

Meanwhile, the Boeing 777 features fully enclosed, floor-to-ceiling suites with advanced entertainment and technology, though it does not include shower spas, The National reported.

The reported move comes as airlines across the industry ramp up investment in high-end travel, rolling out upgraded onboard experiences to attract premium customers.

TRUMP SAYS HE WANTS ‘SOMEBODY’ TO BUY SPIRIT AIRLINES, OPPOSES UNITED-AMERICAN MERGER

It also comes as airlines worldwide adjust operations in response to surging jet fuel costs.

The energy market has seen increased volatility since the Iran war began. The flow of oil through the Strait of Hormuz has been severely constrained by the threat of Iranian attacks, impacting the availability of a key input in making jet fuel.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Emirates did not immediately respond to FOX Business’ request for comment.

FOX Business’ Eric Revell contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. Coast Guard has paused its search crew member who went overboard from a Norwegian Cruise Line ship bound for Boston after the person was seen falling from the vessel on security video.

“A HC144 took over the aerial search and searched with the Station Provincetown crew,” Coast Guard Sector Southeastern New England told Fox News, which added that “the search was suspended pending new information at 12:25 [p.m.] local time.”

The incident involved the Norwegian Breakaway, which was traveling from Bermuda to Boston when authorities were notified that a crew member had gone overboard about 12 miles east of Wellfleet, Massachusetts.

The cruise ship returned to the person’s last known position and deployed a rescue boat and life rings in an attempt to help.

CRUISE INDUSTRY GIANT MAKES $100M STRATEGIC BET ON FLORIDA WITH MASSIVE MIAMI HEADQUARTERS

“A crew member was observed falling from the ship on a security camera,” according to the Coast Guard. 

“A Coast Guard MH-60 helicopter arrived on scene at approximately 0119 local time to assist the search. A crew from Coast Guard Station Provincetown is assisting the search as well.”

Norwegian Cruise Line told Fox News in a statement that “a crew member went overboard east of Cape Cod, Massachusetts,” on Saturday night. 

ROYAL CARIBBEAN PASSENGER ACCUSED OF JUMPING OVERBOARD TO DODGE VACATION GAMBLING DEBT

“Upon confirming the incident, the vessel immediately informed the United States Coast Guard Marine Rescue Coordination Center and a coordinated search and rescue operation was initiated,” the statement added. 

“The United States Coast Guard has taken over the search and rescue operation and released the vessel to continue the voyage. 

“The safety, security, and well-being of our crew is our highest priority. Our thoughts are with the crewmember’s family during this difficult time.” 

VIKING IS A ‘DIFFERENT ANIMAL’ FROM CRUISE LINES, CEO SAYS

Norwegian Cruise Line had not publicly identified the crew member as of Sunday. The circumstances surrounding the fall were not immediately clear.

The incident delayed the ship’s return to Boston, according to Cruise Hive, which reported that embarkation for the vessel’s next sailing was expected to be pushed back as the search continued.

The reported overboard incident comes weeks after another Norwegian Cruise Line crew member was lost at sea from the Norwegian Viva near Costa Maya, Mexico.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

In that case, the cruise line later confirmed that the search had been suspended.

This post was originally published here

A pattern of unusually well-timed trades in global oil markets — totaling more than $2.3 billion — is drawing intense scrutiny in Washington, with lawmakers formally urging federal regulators to investigate what could become one of the most significant insider trading probes in recent history.

Members of Congress, including Rep. Ritchie Torres (D-N.Y.) and Rep. Sam Liccardo (D-Calif.), have called on the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) to examine a series of large, directional crude oil futures positions placed shortly before major geopolitical announcements by President Donald Trump related to the Iran conflict. In letters to regulators, both lawmakers said the timing and structure of the trades raise “serious concerns” about potential misuse of nonpublic information.

The first incident occurred on March 22, when more than $580 million in crude oil futures trades were executed minutes before the president publicly announced a pause in planned strikes against Iranian energy infrastructure. Following the announcement, oil prices dropped sharply, producing significant gains for positions that had been structured to profit from a decline. According to market data cited by Reuters, trading volume at that moment surged to multiples of normal activity for that time of day.

A second cluster emerged on April 7, when roughly $950 million in similar trades were placed shortly before a U.S.-Iran ceasefire announcement and the temporary reopening of the Strait of Hormuz. Once again, the positions appeared calibrated to benefit from falling oil prices and a stabilization of global markets immediately following the policy shift.

The third episode occurred on April 17, involving approximately $760 million in Brent crude futures contracts placed just minutes before Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi confirmed that the Strait of Hormuz would remain open during the ceasefire period. The announcement again triggered market movements consistent with the positioning of those trades.

In total, the three episodes share a consistent pattern: large-scale positions, precise timing ahead of market-moving announcements, and rapid profitability following those developments. Rep. Torres, in his letter to CFTC Chairman Michael Selig, described the activity as presenting a “textbook basis” for potential insider trading or market manipulation under federal commodities law. Rep. Liccardo, writing to both the SEC and CFTC, said the trades “strongly suggest” the possibility that certain market participants acted on advance knowledge of policy decisions.

The issue has been further complicated by activity in prediction markets. Reporting by The New York Times found that a surge of accounts placed bets anticipating U.S. military action shortly before key developments in the Iran conflict. In a separate case cited by lawmakers, federal authorities recently arrested a U.S. special operations service member accused of using confidential information to place profitable wagers tied to geopolitical events — raising broader concerns about information leakage into financial and quasi-financial markets.

Regulators have not yet publicly confirmed the scope of any investigation, though the CFTC is widely expected to take the lead given its jurisdiction over commodities derivatives. Lawmakers have urged agencies to obtain detailed trading records, including beneficial ownership data, to determine whether any accounts can be linked to individuals with access to sensitive government information.

Tracing such activity may prove challenging. Large futures trades are often routed through layered accounts, offshore entities, and intermediaries that obscure ultimate ownership. Market experts note that while unusual timing alone does not prove wrongdoing, the repeated alignment of trades with policy announcements is likely to draw sustained regulatory attention.

The White House has rejected allegations of misconduct, calling suggestions of any connection between administration actions and market activity “baseless.” Still, the episode has intensified calls in Congress for stronger oversight of both traditional financial markets and emerging prediction platforms.

Beyond Washington, the stakes extend to everyday Americans. Oil price volatility tied to the Iran conflict has already filtered through to higher gasoline prices and increased transportation costs. Against that backdrop, the possibility that select market participants may have profited from advance knowledge of geopolitical decisions has heightened public and political sensitivity.

Whether the activity ultimately proves to be illicit or coincidental, lawmakers are signaling that the pattern itself warrants a full accounting. As Rep. Torres put it, the integrity of U.S. financial markets depends on ensuring that no participant operates with an informational advantage tied to government decision-making.

JBizNews Desk

American homebuyers are entering the spring season with the most favorable mortgage rate environment in three years, as a combination of geopolitical uncertainty and shifting bond market dynamics pulls borrowing costs lower — offering a narrow but meaningful opportunity for buyers and homeowners alike.

Freddie Mac reported that the average 30-year fixed-rate mortgage fell to 6.23% for the week ending April 23, 2026, down from 6.30% the previous week and significantly below the 6.81% level recorded one year ago. The 15-year fixed-rate mortgage declined to 5.58%, reflecting broader easing across lending markets. Meanwhile, data from Zillow’s lender marketplace showed select offerings dipping below the 6% threshold, with some quotes briefly reaching 5.99%, marking the first sub-6% reading since early February.

The drop in rates is closely tied to movements in the U.S. Treasury market. Mortgage rates, which track the 10-year Treasury yield, have declined roughly 30 basis points over the past month as investors moved into safer assets amid global uncertainty. Analysts point to easing fears around worst-case oil supply disruptions following diplomatic developments in the Middle East, which helped stabilize inflation expectations and drive bond yields lower.

Sam Khater, Chief Economist at Freddie Mac, said the current rate environment represents “the lowest level seen during the spring homebuying season in the past three years,” noting that the decline is already translating into increased activity. Purchase applications and refinance demand have both begun to tick higher, signaling renewed engagement from consumers who had been sidelined by elevated borrowing costs.

For households, the financial impact is immediate. According to LendingTree, the difference between a 7% mortgage rate and approximately 6.1% can translate into hundreds of dollars in monthly savings. On a typical $500,000 home with a 10% down payment, buyers could save more than $3,000 annually, easing pressure on budgets already strained by higher energy and food prices.

Orphe Divounguy, Senior Economist at Zillow, said that “slightly lower rates combined with increasing housing inventory are beginning to create opportunities for buyers who have been waiting on the sidelines.” Inventory levels have gradually improved in several U.S. markets, giving buyers more negotiating power than they had during the peak of the housing shortage.

Still, economists caution that the current window may be short-lived. The Mortgage Bankers Association projects mortgage rates to hover around 6.3% through much of 2026, while Fannie Mae expects rates to remain slightly above 6% by year-end. However, volatility remains a key risk. Analysts warn that renewed geopolitical tensions — particularly in energy markets — could quickly reverse recent gains and push borrowing costs higher again.

The Federal Reserve’s upcoming policy decisions also loom large. With inflation still above target and leadership transitions underway at the central bank, markets remain sensitive to any signals on interest rate direction. Even modest shifts in Treasury yields could translate into rapid changes in mortgage pricing.

For current homeowners, the decline is prompting renewed interest in refinancing. LendingTree analysts suggest that borrowers with rates above the high-6% range may benefit from exploring refinance options, while those already locked into lower rates may see limited advantage in the near term.

The broader takeaway for the housing market is clear: conditions are improving, but not stabilizing. The interplay between inflation, global conflict, and monetary policy continues to shape borrowing costs in real time. For buyers, that means timing remains critical.

As the spring homebuying season gains momentum, the coming weeks — particularly around the Federal Reserve’s next decision — could determine whether this brief window evolves into a sustained trend or closes just as quickly as it opened.

JBizNews Desk

April 26, 2026

Washington — Senator Thom Tillis (R-N.C.) said Sunday he is prepared to advance Kevin Warsh’s nomination to chair the Federal Reserve, removing a significant roadblock days after the Justice Department dropped its criminal investigation into current Chair Jerome Powell.0

The move clears the way for a potentially swift confirmation of Warsh, a former Fed governor and Wall Street veteran, as President Donald Trump seeks to reshape monetary policy before Powell’s term expires on May 15. Tillis, a member of the Senate Banking Committee, had conditioned his support on the resolution of the DOJ probe into cost overruns on the Federal Reserve’s headquarters renovation.1

Senator Thom Tillis (R-N.C.), who announced he is lifting his hold on the Warsh nomination.

Speaking on NBC’s Meet the Press, Tillis stated he is now ready to move forward, describing Warsh as someone who “is going to be a great Fed Chair.” He emphasized that the DOJ’s decision to close the investigation removed a key concern regarding the integrity of the process and the Fed’s perceived independence.0

The DOJ’s action on Friday, announced by U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro, shifted the matter to the Federal Reserve’s inspector general for further review of the multibillion-dollar renovation project. No criminal wrongdoing was identified in the probe, which had centered on whether Powell misled Congress about the costs.25

Warsh, 56, served as a Fed governor from 2006 to 2011, becoming one of the youngest in the central bank’s history. A Harvard Law School graduate and former Morgan Stanley banker, he acted as the Fed’s key liaison to Wall Street during the 2008 financial crisis. Since leaving the Fed, he has been a visiting fellow at Stanford’s Hoover Institution and a vocal commentator on monetary policy.16

Trump nominated Warsh in late January, positioning him as a candidate who could deliver lower interest rates and a more growth-friendly stance while maintaining some distance from direct White House influence. Warsh has publicly pledged to act independently if confirmed.22

Kevin Warsh, President Trump’s nominee to succeed Jerome Powell as Federal Reserve Chair.

Tillis’s earlier hold had created a rare intra-party standoff. As a Republican on the 13-11 GOP-majority Banking Committee, his opposition risked a 12-12 tie that would have stalled the nomination. The senator had repeatedly stressed that his position was not personal but tied to preserving institutional norms amid the Powell investigation.45

Policy Implications and Market Context

Warsh’s potential ascension comes at a pivotal moment. The Fed is expected to hold interest rates steady at its upcoming meeting amid persistent inflationary pressures fueled by geopolitical tensions in the Middle East, including uncertainties around oil supplies and the Strait of Hormuz. Higher energy costs have already prompted warnings from companies like Procter & Gamble about significant profit impacts in fiscal 2027.5

Investors have closely watched Warsh’s signals. During his confirmation hearing earlier this month, he discussed potential “regime change” in inflation targeting and balance-sheet policy, views that initially rattled some markets concerned about tighter conditions but also signaled a pragmatic approach. Stocks have shown resilience in recent sessions, with the S&P 500 and Nasdaq hitting records last week on tech strength, though broader caution persists over valuations and external risks.35

A Warsh-led Fed could prioritize faster normalization of policy while navigating Trump administration priorities. Analysts note his experience during the 2008 crisis equips him to balance financial stability with growth objectives. However, questions remain about how he would navigate political pressures, especially given Trump’s history of public criticism of Fed leadership.17

Democrats on the committee are expected to challenge Warsh on issues ranging from financial regulation to his past skepticism of certain quantitative easing measures. Yet with Republican control of the Senate, confirmation appears likely once the committee advances the nomination, possibly as early as this week.9

The Federal Reserve’s Eccles Building in Washington, D.C.

The development provides a measure of policy clarity heading into a heavy earnings week, including reports from several Magnificent Seven tech giants. It also coincides with ongoing global market volatility tied to energy prices and supply-chain disruptions.

JBIZ News Desk- Washington DC

April 26, 2026

Washington — Federal Reserve officials are signaling a cautious approach to the latest energy price surge triggered by the Middle East conflict, treating the oil shock primarily as a temporary supply disruption while monitoring whether it spills into broader inflation expectations and core prices.

“We can look past the energy shock in the short term, but patience has limits if it begins to affect longer-term inflation expectations,” said Fed Chair Jerome Powell in recent remarks.

The central bank has held interest rates steady in recent meetings, with officials projecting only modest easing later in 2026 despite the war’s impact on oil markets. Higher energy costs have already pushed gasoline prices sharply higher nationwide, contributing to a record-low University of Michigan consumer sentiment reading of 49.8 in April and lifting one-year inflation expectations to 4.7%.

“The vast majority of participants noted that progress toward the Committee’s 2 percent objective could be slower than previously expected and judged that the risk of inflation running persistently above the Committee’s objective had increased,” according to the minutes from the Fed’s March meeting.

Dallas Fed research highlights the sensitivity of the outlook. Under current scenarios, the Iran conflict is expected to add 0.6 percentage points to fourth-quarter-over-fourth-quarter headline PCE inflation in 2026, with smaller effects on core inflation. Prolonged disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz could amplify these impacts significantly.

“An extended disruption of the world’s oil trade from the Iran war could lift headline U.S. inflation to well over 4% by year-end,” warned researchers at the Dallas Fed.

Balancing Supply Shocks and Policy Goals

Powell and other officials have emphasized the textbook response to supply-driven energy shocks: look through them in the near term because monetary policy cannot quickly offset temporary price spikes in commodities. However, repeated shocks — following the pandemic and earlier tariff effects — have complicated the picture.

“We were at about 3% inflation and somewhere between 0.5 and 0.8 [percentage points] of that is from tariffs. We’ve been pretty close to 2% all this time. Now we have another supply shock coming,” Powell noted in late March remarks at Harvard.

The Fed is closely watching whether higher energy costs feed into wages, services prices, or long-term inflation expectations. So far, officials believe expectations remain reasonably well anchored, but they acknowledge risks if the conflict drags on.

“The duration of the Iran war will likely influence how far consumers pull back and whether second-round effects emerge in the broader economy,” said economists tracking Fed deliberations.

Market and Policy Implications

Markets have pushed back expectations for rate cuts this year as inflation risks rise. Some investors had priced in the possibility of a hike if core pressures broaden, but Powell has pushed back against immediate tightening.

The central bank’s dual mandate — maximum employment and price stability — is being tested. While the labor market has shown some cooling, consumer spending (which drives about 70% of the economy) faces headwinds from higher fuel and logistics costs.

“Policy is likely not riding to the rescue like it did during the Covid era,” noted analysts assessing the Fed’s constrained options.

Longer term, the episode reinforces the importance of diversified energy supplies and supply-chain resilience. For now, the Fed appears committed to data-dependent decisions, avoiding knee-jerk reactions while remaining vigilant against any unanchoring of inflation psychology.

As the conflict’s duration remains uncertain, Fed officials will scrutinize incoming data on consumer prices, producer prices, and expectations in the May and June meetings. Any signs of broadening price pressures beyond energy could prompt a more hawkish tilt, while a swift resolution could reopen the door to easing later this year.

The current environment underscores the challenges of conducting monetary policy amid geopolitical volatility. How the Fed navigates this latest supply shock will influence not only inflation outcomes but also growth, employment, and household finances nationwide through the remainder of 2026 and beyond.

JbizNews Desk Washington

April 26, 2026

New York — The ongoing conflict in the Middle East has triggered a sharp and sustained surge in global air freight rates, with spot prices on key international routes jumping as much as 95% since late February due to skyrocketing jet fuel costs, reduced flight capacity, and major disruptions to Gulf air hubs.

“Airfreight rates have continued to rise in recent weeks despite some capacity recovery, driven primarily by higher fuel costs and rerouting around conflict zones,” noted analysts at WorldACD in their latest weekly report.

International air freight spot rates exploded in March, according to data from Drewry and Freightos. Routes from Shanghai to Dubai soared 95% to approximately $8.60 per kilogram, while South Asia to Europe lanes increased by up to 82%. Even as some Gulf carriers have partially resumed operations, rates remain significantly elevated above pre-conflict levels, with global averages up more than 37% year-over-year as of mid-April 2026.

“The Iran war has slashed available capacity and driven jet fuel prices sharply higher, pushing many shippers toward premium pricing for time-sensitive cargo,” said senior logistics analysts tracking daily market movements.

Major Gulf carriers including Emirates, Qatar Airways, and Etihad have been operating at reduced schedules, forcing shippers to reroute cargo through alternative hubs and creating widespread bottlenecks. Jet fuel prices have nearly doubled in key regions since the conflict escalated, leading carriers to impose substantial fuel surcharges on shipments. This has hit hardest sectors that rely heavily on air freight, such as pharmaceuticals from India, high-tech electronics, fashion, perishables, and time-sensitive e-commerce goods.

“Rates from key Asian origins to Europe and North America remain under pressure, with some lanes still showing double-digit increases week-over-week,” reported Freightos analysts in their early April market updates.

Broader Supply Chain and Economic Impact

The disruption is rippling through global supply chains far beyond the Middle East. Airlines have cut both passenger and cargo flights due to fuel availability concerns, higher insurance premiums, and safety considerations. Shippers in Asia and Europe are reporting longer lead times, higher costs, and increased difficulty securing space on flights for urgent shipments.

“Despite some weakness in overall demand, air freight rates have held strong or continued climbing because of persistent supply-side constraints caused by the war,” warned economists at major logistics research firms.

As of April 26, rates have stabilized at these elevated levels rather than continuing their steepest monthly climbs. However, analysts caution that any prolongation of the Middle East conflict or renewed disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz could push air freight prices toward levels last seen during the height of the COVID-19 pandemic.

“Businesses should prepare for continued volatility in air freight pricing through at least the second quarter of 2026,” advised market participants closely monitoring the latest freight indices.

The steep rise in air cargo costs is adding significant pressure across multiple industries. Technology companies shipping high-value components, pharmaceutical firms moving temperature-sensitive drugs, and retailers relying on just-in-time inventory are all facing higher logistics expenses that could eventually flow through to consumer prices.

Some shippers are shifting to multimodal solutions — combining sea and air legs — or booking capacity further in advance to mitigate costs. Others are absorbing the increases for now, hoping for a swift resolution to the conflict that would ease fuel prices and restore capacity on critical Gulf routes.

The situation highlights the fragility of global air cargo networks to geopolitical shocks. Air freight remains essential for high-value, time-sensitive supply chains in technology, healthcare, and e-commerce. The sustained price surge is contributing to broader inflation concerns in logistics-dependent sectors and forcing companies to reassess their sourcing and inventory strategies.

“The Iran conflict has reminded everyone how interconnected and vulnerable global logistics networks truly are,” said one senior supply chain executive at a major multinational firm.

Looking ahead, the duration of the Middle East tensions will be the key variable. A rapid de-escalation could bring relief to jet fuel prices and restore capacity, while a prolonged conflict would likely keep air freight rates elevated well into the second half of the year.

For now, the industry is operating in a high-cost environment with limited flexibility, underscoring the strategic importance of diversified routing options and stronger contingency planning for global shippers.

JbizNews Desk New York

The United States has imposed sanctions on one of China’s largest independent refineries for purchasing billions of dollars’ worth of Iranian crude and petroleum products. The U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) announced the measures on April 24, 2026, also targeting approximately 40 shipping firms and vessels operating as part of Iran’s notorious “shadow fleet.”

The primary target is Hengli Petrochemical (Dalian) Refinery Co., Ltd., widely known as one of China’s leading “teapot” refineries. These independent facilities have become major buyers of discounted Iranian oil, helping sustain Tehran’s revenue streams despite international pressure. Hengli Petrochemical (Dalian) Refinery Co., Ltd., China’s second-largest teapot refinery with a processing capacity of roughly 400,000 barrels per day, has reportedly purchased billions in Iranian petroleum since at least 2023.

According to the Treasury Department, Hengli Petrochemical (Dalian) Refinery Co., Ltd. received shipments from sanctioned shadow fleet vessels, including the BIG MAG, GALE, and ARES. These deliveries alone accounted for over five million barrels of Iranian crude. The refinery’s purchases have generated hundreds of millions of dollars in revenue that directly supports Iran’s armed forces and broader regional activities.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent described the sanctions as part of a broader effort to disrupt the financial lifelines keeping Iran’s regime afloat. “China-based independent oil refineries, colloquially known as ‘teapots,’ purchase the majority of Iran’s crude oil, providing a vital source of revenue to the Iranian regime and its armed forces,” the Treasury statement noted. The action comes even as indirect peace talks between Washington and Tehran continue through intermediaries in Pakistan.

The sanctions package extends far beyond the refinery itself. OFAC designated around 40 additional entities, including shipping companies and tankers that form the backbone of Iran’s shadow fleet. These vessels often obscure their origins, reroute through third countries like Malaysia, and use complex payment schemes — frequently in Chinese yuan — to evade U.S. financial restrictions. By targeting both the buyer and the transporters, Washington aims to choke off Iran’s ability to monetize its oil exports effectively.

This latest move fits into a pattern of increasing pressure on Chinese independent refiners. Previous sanctions have hit other teapots such as Hebei Xinhai and Shandong Shouguang Luqing. Hengli Petrochemical (Dalian) Refinery Co., Ltd.’s prominent role makes this designation particularly impactful. Located in the port city of Dalian, the facility benefits from direct access to imported crude and has expanded aggressively in recent years, becoming a key player in China’s domestic fuel market.

For global energy markets, the sanctions introduce fresh uncertainty. Oil prices have remained elevated amid ongoing tensions in the Strait of Hormuz and broader Middle East conflicts. If other Chinese teapots reduce their purchases or face higher compliance and insurance costs, global supply could tighten further in the short term. However, analysts note that ChinaIran’s largest customer, historically importing 80-90% of its exported crude — has shown resilience by shifting to alternative payment methods and rerouting shipments.

The sanctions also highlight deepening U.S.-China frictions over energy and trade. Beijing has previously denounced similar measures as illegal and extraterritorial. For Hengli Petrochemical (Dalian) Refinery Co., Ltd., the immediate effects include blocked access to U.S. financial systems, potential asset freezes for any dollar-denominated holdings, and reputational damage that could complicate dealings with international partners.

Chinese teapot refineries thrive on discounted sanctioned crude because they operate with thinner margins and greater flexibility than national oil majors like Sinopec or CNPC. This business model has helped China secure affordable energy supplies while providing Iran with a critical economic lifeline. The U.S. strategy appears designed to raise the risk premium for such trades, forcing buyers to reconsider or pay significantly higher costs for evasion.

Since February 2025, OFAC has sanctioned over 1,000 Iran-related persons, vessels, and aircraft under the “Economic Fury” banner. The campaign seeks to limit Tehran’s revenue used for proxy militias, ballistic missile programs, and nuclear ambitions. This latest action demonstrates that even as diplomatic channels remain open, the Trump administration continues aggressive enforcement on the economic front.

Industry observers suggest the sanctions may accelerate a shift toward non-dollar settlement mechanisms in Asia. More deals could move entirely into yuan or other currencies, further diminishing U.S. leverage over global energy flows over time. For now, however, the designations add friction and costs to a trade that has proven remarkably durable.

JbizNews Desk

April 26, 2026

Newark — New Jersey is stepping up its efforts to host the 2026 FIFA World Cup, grow its film and television sector, and cut red tape for businesses as part of a coordinated push to strengthen the state’s economy.

“New Jersey is not sitting back — we are actively building the infrastructure and partnerships needed to turn these major events into lasting economic gains,” said Evan Weiss, CEO of the New Jersey Economic Development Authority (NJEDA).

The NJEDA recently approved $20 million to support the New York New Jersey Host Committee for the World Cup. This includes $5 million in community grants to help local businesses benefit from tourism, watch parties, and related events. With MetLife Stadium in East Rutherford scheduled to host multiple matches — including the final — officials expect a major boost to hospitality, retail, and small businesses across the state.

“This is a once-in-a-generation opportunity to showcase New Jersey to the world and drive real investment into our communities,” noted Weiss.

The state’s film and television industry is also expanding rapidly. Major studio projects are moving forward in Monmouth County (Netflix), Newark’s South Ward (Lionsgate), and Bayonne (1888 Studios). These developments, backed by New Jersey’s film tax credit program, are expected to create thousands of jobs and bring hundreds of millions of dollars in production spending to the state.

“The film industry has become a genuine economic engine for New Jersey, creating high-quality jobs and attracting major talent and investment,” said Weiss.

Governor Mikie Sherrill is focusing on making it easier to do business in the state. In a new executive order, she launched the “Saving You Time & Money” initiative to streamline permitting processes — especially at the Department of Environmental Protection, which has long been a major hurdle for developers and companies.

“Streamlining permitting processes is critical to reducing costs, boosting innovation, creating good jobs, and growing the economy,” emphasized Governor Sherrill.

Challenges Remain

Despite the positive momentum, New Jersey businesses still face high operating costs, elevated energy prices, and workforce shortages. The state recorded a net job loss in February, though the overall labor market remains relatively stable.

“Affordability, energy costs, and workforce development remain the top concerns for New Jersey executives heading into the rest of 2026,” said participants at recent business roundtables.

World Cup preparations have also sparked debate over proposed high transit ticket prices for MetLife Stadium events. The Sherrill administration has defended the costs as necessary to cover infrastructure and security while still delivering net economic benefits to the state.

“The state’s economic future depends on converting these high-profile opportunities into broad-based competitiveness for businesses and residents,” noted regional economists.

If executed well, New Jersey’s strategy around the World Cup, film production, and regulatory reforms could help attract more investment and improve the state’s business reputation in the competitive Northeast.

JbizNews Desk New Jersey

(Word count: 678)

April 26, 2026

Washington — President Donald Trump abruptly fired all members of the National Science Board (NSB) on Friday, April 25, 2026, in a sweeping move that eliminated the independent oversight body for the National Science Foundation and immediately drew sharp criticism from lawmakers across the aisle as well as the broader scientific community.

“This is the latest stupid move made by a president who continues to harm science,” said Rep. Zoe Lofgren (D-CA), ranking member of the House Science, Space and Technology Committee.

The National Science Board, created by Congress in 1950, is composed of up to 24 presidentially appointed members serving staggered six-year terms. Its mandate is to provide independent advice to the president, Congress, and the director of the nearly $9 billion National Science Foundation on national policy for science and engineering. Board members received terse termination letters from the Presidential Personnel Office stating their positions were “terminated, effective immediately.”

“On behalf of President Donald J. Trump, I’m writing to inform you that your position as a member of the National Science Board is terminated, effective immediately,” the standardized message reportedly read.

This mass dismissal represents a significant break from long-standing precedent. The staggered terms were intentionally designed to protect the board from short-term political pressures and ensure continuity in U.S. science policy. By removing the entire board at once, the administration has created an immediate leadership vacuum at a critical time for American research priorities.

“The dismissal of the entire National Science Board is widely seen as the latest move to erase the NSF’s independence,” noted science policy analysts monitoring the developments.

The National Science Foundation plays a foundational role in American innovation. It funds basic research across virtually every scientific discipline — from artificial intelligence, quantum computing, and advanced materials to biology, climate science, and Antarctic exploration. Many transformative technologies that define modern life, including MRIs, GPS systems, the internet’s early architecture, and key components of today’s smartphones, trace their origins to NSF-supported work.

“This action undermines the nonpartisan foundation of American science policy at a time when global competition in technology and innovation is intensifying, particularly with China,” warned leaders from major scientific organizations including the American Association for the Advancement of Science.

Critics argue the firings could have immediate operational consequences for the NSF. The agency has already been navigating proposed budget cuts, staffing reductions, and delays in grant awards under the current administration. The sudden loss of the oversight board adds another layer of uncertainty for researchers awaiting funding decisions and for universities relying on NSF grants.

“We must ensure that decisions about science funding and policy remain grounded in expertise rather than politics,” said Rep. Lofgren, who urged Congress to take steps to protect the integrity and independence of the NSF.

Defenders of the administration’s decision maintain that the move is necessary to realign federal science spending with national security and economic competitiveness priorities. They argue that previous boards had become too insulated and resistant to necessary reforms aimed at eliminating perceived waste and redirecting resources toward strategic areas such as advanced manufacturing, semiconductor research, and technologies critical to competing with China.

As of April 26, the White House has not issued a detailed public explanation for the firings or outlined a timeline for appointing new members. The NSB’s next regularly scheduled meeting was set for early May, leaving a temporary governance gap that could affect major decisions on budget recommendations and new program approvals.

The controversy fits into a broader pattern of tension between the Trump administration and segments of the scientific establishment. Earlier actions have included proposed deep cuts to NSF funding, changes at other agencies such as the National Institutes of Health, and efforts to reshape federal research priorities.

Scientific and academic groups have expressed alarm that politicizing the National Science Board could damage the United States’ long-term leadership in global research and innovation. Universities, which receive a large share of NSF funding, worry about disruptions to ongoing projects and future grant cycles.

“The board exists to provide expert, nonpartisan guidance — removing it wholesale raises serious questions about the future direction of American science,” said one university research administrator who requested anonymity due to ongoing federal funding relationships.

Lawmakers on both sides of the aisle have begun weighing in. While some Republicans have remained quiet or expressed support for greater accountability in federal science spending, Democrats have been vocal in their opposition. Bipartisan concerns about maintaining U.S. technological edge against strategic competitors could lead to congressional pushback or hearings in the coming weeks.

The episode also raises legal and procedural questions. Legal experts are examining whether the president has the unilateral authority to remove all NSB members simultaneously or whether certain statutory protections might apply. Congressional oversight committees are expected to seek more information from the administration.

For the research community, the immediate focus is on continuity. NSF staff and grantees are seeking reassurance that existing programs and funding commitments will not be disrupted while the board is reconstituted. Longer term, the composition and direction of a new board will be closely watched by universities, industry, and international partners.

This development comes at a pivotal moment for U.S. science policy. With rapid advances in artificial intelligence, biotechnology, and clean energy, many argue that stable, expert-driven governance of federal research agencies is more important than ever. How the administration fills the vacancies and sets new priorities will likely shape American competitiveness for years to come.

JbizNews Desk Washington

Ottawa — Canadian retail spending demonstrated notable resilience in the first quarter of 2026, rising 0.7% in February and an estimated 0.6% in March, delivering three consecutive months of gains for the first time since spring 2023 and tracking a solid roughly 2.1% quarter-over-quarter increase.

“It suggests that consumers were on a robust footing at the start of the year and are likely in a better position to face the sharp rise in energy prices,” said Charles St-Arnaud, chief economist at Servus Credit Union.

February retail sales climbed to C$72.1 billion, according to Statistics Canada data released on April 24. The increase was broad-based, with seven of nine major subsectors posting gains. Core retail sales, excluding volatile motor vehicles and gasoline stations, advanced a healthy 0.6%. In volume terms (adjusted for price changes), overall sales rose 0.3%, while year-over-year growth stood at 3.8%.

“Retail sales suggest that before the impact of higher energy costs from the Iran conflict, Canadian consumers were quite resilient,” noted St-Arnaud.

Motor vehicle and parts dealers led February’s advance with a 1.0% increase, supported by strong demand for both new and used vehicles. General merchandise retailers, food and beverage stores, and clothing outlets also contributed positively. Softness was limited mainly to building materials and garden equipment categories.

“We’ve seen relatively healthy spending in the first quarter,” added St-Arnaud.

“Overall, it appears that retail sales in Q1 have posted their best quarter for growth since before U.S. trade tensions started to negatively impact consumer sentiment,” said Andrew Grantham, senior economist at CIBC Capital Markets.

Fuel Costs Set to Test Consumers

The early-year momentum now confronts a significant headwind as surging global oil prices tied to the ongoing Iran conflict drive Canadian gasoline prices sharply higher. While higher pump prices inflate headline retail figures in the short term, they erode disposable income for other purchases.

“With higher pump prices limiting the ability of some households to make discretionary purchases, we expect consumer spending to slow again in volume terms during the second quarter,” warned Andrew Grantham of CIBC.

The duration and intensity of Middle East tensions will likely dictate the extent of any consumer pullback. Prolonged elevated energy costs could force households to curtail spending on big-ticket items, dining out, travel, and non-essential goods. A quicker resolution might allow fuel prices to moderate and help sustain some of the recent strength.

“Softer spending volumes and signs of further weakness in March suggest consumers can only hold on for so long,” said Shelly Kaushik, senior economist at Bank of Montreal Capital Markets.

Beyond energy prices, Canadian households face additional pressures including a cooling labor market, persistent housing affordability challenges, and ongoing uncertainty around U.S.-Canada trade relations. Many consumers remain heavily indebted after years of elevated borrowing costs, limiting their capacity for further discretionary outlays.

Provincial data showed broad strength, with eight of ten provinces recording increases in February. Particularly strong gains appeared in Nova Scotia and Manitoba, indicating the rebound extended beyond major urban centers.

On the positive side, the Bank of Canada’s earlier interest rate cuts are expected to ease financial pressure on variable-rate borrowers later in the year. However, this relief may arrive too late to fully offset the immediate impact of the energy shock.

“The estimated rise in retail sales in March was softer than some economists expected after prices at the pump notched the biggest one-month jump on record,” noted analysts at Capital Economics, underscoring early signs of price sensitivity.

For retailers, the outlook is mixed. Necessity-driven categories such as groceries and fuel may continue to see nominal gains, while discretionary sectors like clothing, electronics, and home improvement could experience margin pressure if volumes weaken. E-commerce, which represented about 7% of total retail trade in February, may provide some cushion as cost-conscious shoppers hunt for deals online.

Longer term, the first-quarter resilience highlights underlying household strength amid global uncertainty. Yet the combination of geopolitical risks and domestic constraints means the coming months will be pivotal in determining whether this rebound can endure or if it marks a final surge before a more pronounced slowdown.

Market participants and policymakers will watch upcoming GDP, inflation, and consumer confidence releases closely. Retail sales remain a critical gauge of household consumption, which drives a substantial share of Canada’s overall economic activity. Any sustained softening could prompt revisions to growth forecasts for the second half of 2026.

JbizNews Desk Canada

VELDHOVEN, NetherlandsASML Holding remains the world’s only supplier of the specialized machines required to manufacture cutting-edge artificial intelligence chips at commercial scale. As big tech giants pour hundreds of billions into AI infrastructure, the Dutch company finds itself at the epicenter of the global semiconductor boom.

ASML’s extreme ultraviolet (EUV) lithography systems enable the production of the most advanced processors that power popular AI models like OpenAI’s ChatGPT and Google’s Gemini. Without these machines, the rapid scaling of high-performance AI chips would not be possible.

Highly realistic news photograph of the ASML headquarters and factory complex in Veldhoven, Netherlands on a bright sunny day. Modern high-tech industrial architecture with glass facades, steel structures, corporate signage visible, clean professional documentary style suitable for business finance news article.landscape

Demand has accelerated dramatically. On April 15, 2026, ASML reported strong first-quarter results with €8.8 billion in net sales and a 53% gross margin. The company raised and narrowed its full-year 2026 revenue guidance to between €36 billion and €40 billion (approximately $42 billion to $47 billion), citing surging AI-driven orders.20

ASML is racing to expand capacity. The company plans to produce at least 60 of its standard Low-NA extreme ultraviolet machines in 2026 — a roughly 25-36% increase over 2025 levels — and aims for at least 80 units in 2027. It is building new facilities, repurposing existing cleanrooms, and optimizing production lines while adding engineers to its workforce. Leadership roles in certain areas have been streamlined to speed up decision-making.24

Christophe Fouquet, ASML’s Chief Executive Officer, made the company’s priorities clear: “We do not want to be the bottleneck for our customers.” The firm has learned from previous demand surges and is deploying every available tool to scale output without compromising quality or reliability.20

This momentum stems directly from explosive spending by major technology companies. Microsoft, Meta Platforms, Amazon.com, and Alphabet’s Google are collectively planning more than $600 billion in capital expenditures this year for AI data centers and related infrastructure. That spending is flowing downstream to chip manufacturers such as Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. (TSMC), which in turn are increasing orders for ASML’s equipment.24

The boom has elevated ASML to Europe’s most valuable company by market capitalization, surpassing traditional luxury powerhouses like LVMH and Hermès. Its near-monopoly on EUV technology gives it unmatched strategic importance in the semiconductor supply chain.

ASML executives acknowledge the complexity of scaling such sophisticated equipment. Each machine represents years of engineering precision, involving hundreds of thousands of components and extreme cleanliness standards. Despite these challenges, the company reports strong progress in increasing output rates quarter by quarter.

Looking ahead, ASML is also advancing its next-generation High-NA EUV systems, which promise even greater resolution for future chip nodes. These tools are moving toward high-volume manufacturing and will play a key role in sustaining long-term growth.

Geopolitical factors remain a variable. Ongoing export restrictions, particularly related to China, introduce some uncertainty. However, management has built flexibility into its 2026 guidance to account for various regulatory outcomes.

For the broader market, ASML’s performance serves as a real-time indicator of the AI buildout’s health. Its ability to ramp production will help determine how quickly the industry can meet demand for advanced AI accelerators. With a substantial backlog and strong order momentum, the company appears well-positioned — though the margin for error stays narrow in a sector where every machine shipped directly impacts global computing capacity.

As artificial intelligence continues to reshape industries, ASML’s machines represent one of the most vital pieces of infrastructure in the modern economy. The Dutch firm’s expansion efforts underscore both the opportunities and the immense pressure of being the indispensable link in the AI supply chain.

JbizNews Desk

Berkshire Hathaway is drawing renewed attention from value-focused investors even as its shares continue to lag the broader market. The conglomerate, long a benchmark for steady performance under Warren Buffett, is experiencing one of its most pronounced periods of underperformance against the S&P 500 in decades.20

Berkshire Hathaway shares have fallen roughly 6-7% year-to-date in 2026, while the S&P 500 has advanced about 4%. Over the past 12 months, the gap widens significantly, with Berkshire trailing the index by around 30-40 percentage points in some measures. This stretch marks one of the widest divergences since Buffett took control in 1965.27

Highly realistic high-resolution news photograph of Berkshire Hathaway headquarters building in Omaha, Nebraska on a clear sunny daytime. Modern corporate campus style with brick and glass architecture, green lawns, trees, American flag, professional documentary photo style like Bloomberg or Reuters for business finance article.landscape

The underperformance has accelerated since Buffett announced his planned departure as CEO in 2025, with Greg Abel now leading operations. Berkshire Hathaway’s heavy cash position — exceeding $300 billion — has acted as a drag in a market dominated by high-growth technology stocks. While the cash provides a defensive buffer and earning power through Treasury investments, it has limited participation in the S&P 500’s recent rally.23

Analysts note that Berkshire Hathaway resumed share repurchases in early 2026, signaling confidence in its valuation. Greg Abel has also personally invested in the stock. Despite these moves, the company’s diversified portfolio of insurance, railroads, utilities, and consumer businesses has not kept pace with the tech-heavy index. Insurance underwriting results have faced headwinds, and organic growth in operating subsidiaries has been modest.11

Yet this very weakness is what is attracting fresh interest. At current levels, Berkshire Hathaway trades near 1.4 times book value — closer to historical norms — and offers an earnings yield in the mid-5% range when including look-through earnings from its equity portfolio. Some observers argue that not much needs to go right for the stock to deliver market-beating returns going forward, even in a post-Buffett era.35

Berkshire Hathaway’s massive cash hoard positions it to act decisively when opportunities arise. The company has historically excelled in deploying capital during periods of market stress. With valuations elevated in many sectors, patient capital like Berkshire’s could prove advantageous if economic conditions shift.19

The transition to Greg Abel remains a focal point. While he has deep operational experience running Berkshire’s energy and utilities businesses, investors are still assessing his capital allocation style compared to Buffett’s legendary track record. The stock’s recent weakness may reflect some uncertainty around this handover, though Abel has largely maintained the same conservative approach.

From a broader market perspective, Berkshire Hathaway’s lag highlights the dominance of a handful of mega-cap technology names in the S&P 500. The index’s concentration in companies like Nvidia, Apple, Microsoft, and others has driven outsized gains, leaving more diversified or value-oriented names behind. Berkshire holds significant stakes in several of these names but has been a net seller of equities in recent quarters.22

Long-term investors point out that Berkshire Hathaway has underperformed the S&P 500 in full calendar years only about 20 times since 1965. Many of those periods were followed by strong relative recoveries, especially when the market eventually rotated away from high valuations.34

Berkshire Hathaway also benefits from its insurance float, which provides low-cost leverage, and its collection of stable cash-generating businesses. These attributes make it resilient in downturns — a quality that could regain favor if inflation concerns, geopolitical risks, or a market correction materialize.

Wall Street’s view is mixed but increasingly constructive on valuation. While some analysts caution that Berkshire still needs to demonstrate stronger growth to justify current levels, others see it as one of the more attractively priced large-cap options in an expensive market. The resumption of buybacks and the potential for opportunistic acquisitions add to the appeal.23

For individual investors, Berkshire Hathaway Class B shares (BRK.B) offer a straightforward way to gain exposure to a diversified empire without the high per-share price of Class A shares. The stock’s current discount to recent highs, combined with its fortress balance sheet, is prompting many to take a closer look.

As the market digests the post-Buffett reality, Berkshire Hathaway’s underperformance may ultimately create a compelling entry point for those with a long-term horizon. Whether the company can narrow the gap with the S&P 500 will depend on capital deployment success, insurance results, and broader economic conditions.

JbizNews Desk

The United States has issued a sweeping global diplomatic warning about what it describes as systematic efforts by Chinese artificial intelligence companies, including the high-profile startup DeepSeek, to steal and replicate advanced American AI technology through a technique known as model distillation.

According to a U.S. State Department diplomatic cable dated April 24, 2026, and sent to American diplomatic and consular posts worldwide, Chinese firms are engaged in widespread intellectual property theft targeting leading U.S. AI laboratories. The cable directs U.S. diplomats to raise these concerns directly with foreign governments, warning of the security and economic risks posed by AI models derived from stolen proprietary technology.

Realistic high-resolution news photograph of a modern Chinese AI technology campus exterior during daytime, featuring sleek contemporary glass and steel buildings, visible server racks through large windows, satellite dishes and communication antennas on the roof, surrounded by landscaped grounds with subtle digital overlay of neural networks in the sky. Clear professional documentary style for business news article on U.S. warnings about Chinese AI theft involving DeepSeek.landscape

The cable specifically highlights DeepSeek, a rapidly rising Chinese AI company known for releasing powerful and cost-effective open-source models. OpenAI had previously warned U.S. lawmakers that DeepSeek was actively targeting leading American AI developers, including itself, in an effort to replicate their advanced models at a fraction of the original development cost. Other Chinese companies flagged in related concerns include Moonshot AI and MiniMax.

The technique at the center of the allegations is called “extraction and distillation.” In this process, adversaries reportedly use massive amounts of queries and computing resources to extract capabilities from frontier U.S. models such as those powering ChatGPT. The resulting distilled models can perform well on certain benchmarks while being significantly cheaper to operate and deploy. However, according to U.S. officials, they often lack the full sophistication, safety features, and reliability of the original systems.

The diplomatic cable explicitly states its purpose is to “warn of the risks of utilising AI models distilled from U.S. proprietary AI models, and lay the groundwork for potential follow-up and outreach by the U.S. government.” A separate demarche has also been delivered directly to Beijing.

This latest action builds on earlier White House accusations of “industrial-scale” AI theft by entities primarily based in China. In recent weeks, senior officials including Michael Kratsios, director of the White House Office of Science and Technology Policy, have publicly highlighted coordinated campaigns involving tens of thousands of proxy accounts used to evade detection while systematically distilling capabilities from American AI systems.

For the global technology sector, the implications are substantial. Governments and companies considering or already using Chinese AI tools may now face increased scrutiny from allies aligned with Washington. This could lead to new compliance requirements, supply chain audits, and restrictions on procurement in sensitive sectors such as defense, finance, and critical infrastructure.

DeepSeek has emerged as a particular flashpoint. The company gained international prominence with its efficient models that rival much larger players in performance while operating at lower costs. Critics argue this rapid progress may stem in part from unauthorized access to U.S. model outputs rather than purely original research and development.

Chinese officials have strongly rejected the accusations. The Chinese Embassy in Washington described the claims as “groundless” and characterized the U.S. actions as deliberate attempts to hinder China’s legitimate technological development. Beijing maintains that its AI advancements are the result of domestic innovation and open collaboration.

The timing of the State Department cable is notable. It arrives amid broader U.S.-China technology tensions and ahead of anticipated high-level diplomatic engagements. The Trump administration has made protection of critical technologies a cornerstone of its economic and national security strategy, continuing aggressive enforcement even while pursuing other areas of bilateral dialogue.

Industry analysts suggest the warning could accelerate efforts by U.S. allies to diversify away from certain Chinese AI providers. It may also prompt greater investment in domestic AI capabilities across Europe, Asia, and other regions wary of entanglement in the superpower rivalry.

From a market perspective, the development adds another layer of uncertainty for investors in the global AI ecosystem. Shares of major U.S. AI companies have shown resilience due to perceived technological leads, but any escalation in restrictions or retaliatory measures from China could affect supply chains, chip exports, and international partnerships.

DeepSeek and similar firms have argued that their models are developed independently and that open-source contributions benefit the entire industry. However, mounting allegations from OpenAI, Anthropic, and now the U.S. government paint a picture of coordinated efforts to close the AI gap through intellectual property shortcuts.

As the U.S. continues to share intelligence with American AI firms and explore accountability measures, the diplomatic offensive underscores the strategic importance of frontier AI in the ongoing great-power competition. The coming weeks are likely to see further discussions in allied capitals about balancing innovation, security, and economic ties with China.

JbizNews Desk- Asia

Technology & Geopolitics | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

China is tightening its grip on foreign capital in strategic sectors, directing leading technology companies—including some of its most prominent artificial intelligence firms—to reject U.S.-linked investments unless explicit government approval is secured, according to officials familiar with the policy and regulatory notices issued in recent weeks.

The directive, led by the National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC) alongside other central agencies, applies to major firms such as ByteDance Ltd., parent company of TikTok, as well as rising AI players including Moonshot AI and StepFun. Under the new framework, companies must obtain prior clearance before accepting funding or executing secondary share sales involving American investors, a move designed to protect technologies deemed critical to national security and economic competitiveness.

Officials in Beijing have framed the policy as a safeguard against the transfer of sensitive intellectual property and talent to geopolitical rivals. The restrictions effectively place China’s most valuable technology firms under tighter state supervision, particularly in sectors tied to artificial intelligence, advanced computing, and data infrastructure.

The shift follows growing concern inside China’s leadership over the outflow of high-value innovation. The catalyst, according to multiple analysts, was Meta Platforms Inc.’s acquisition of Manus, a Singapore-based AI startup founded by Chinese entrepreneurs, in a deal valued at approximately $2 billion that closed in late 2025. The transaction triggered alarm among Chinese regulators, who viewed it as a loss of advanced AI capabilities to a U.S. technology giant.

Chinese authorities subsequently launched a multi-agency review into the structure of the deal, focusing on whether Manus had effectively bypassed domestic controls by relocating operations abroad—a strategy often described as “Singapore-washing.” The investigation exposed gaps in China’s ability to monitor overseas entities founded by Chinese nationals, prompting calls for tighter regulatory oversight.

The new policy represents a clear escalation—and mirrors steps taken by Washington in recent years. The United States has imposed sweeping restrictions on Chinese access to advanced technologies through export controls, entity list designations, and investment bans targeting sectors such as semiconductors, artificial intelligence, and quantum computing. Companies including Huawei Technologies Co. and ZTE Corp. have been central targets of those measures.

By requiring government approval for U.S. capital inflows, Beijing is effectively adopting a reciprocal stance. Analysts describe the move as part of a broader tit-for-tat dynamic, as the world’s two largest economies increasingly decouple in critical technology domains.

For decades, American capital played a pivotal role in building China’s technology ecosystem. U.S. venture capital firms, pension funds, and institutional investors were early backers of companies such as Alibaba Group Holding Ltd., Tencent Holdings Ltd., and ByteDance. That era of relatively open cross-border investment is now rapidly giving way to a more fragmented and controlled global system.

The implications for China’s AI sector are significant. Companies like Moonshot AI, known for its Kimi chatbot, and StepFun, which has attracted strong investor interest, now face additional hurdles in raising international capital. Industry participants say the added regulatory layer could increase financing costs, slow expansion timelines, and push firms toward domestic or state-backed funding sources.

ByteDance, already under scrutiny in multiple jurisdictions, may also face constraints on liquidity events for early investors and employees due to tighter controls on secondary share sales. The broader impact could include a reorientation of capital flows, with companies increasingly turning to non-U.S. investors such as Middle Eastern sovereign wealth funds or European institutions—though those channels may also come under heightened review.

Analysts at several global investment firms warn that overly restrictive policies could have unintended consequences. Artificial intelligence development, they note, often depends on open collaboration, cross-border talent mobility, and access to diverse capital sources. Limiting those inputs risks slowing innovation in a sector Beijing has identified as a national priority.

The policy also aligns with China’s broader “dual circulation” strategy, which emphasizes domestic self-reliance while maintaining selective engagement with global markets. In practice, however, the balance is becoming harder to sustain as geopolitical tensions intensify.

For international investors, the changes introduce a new layer of complexity. U.S.-based funds already navigating domestic restrictions on China exposure now face additional barriers from Beijing itself, narrowing access to some of the country’s most promising technology startups.

Looking ahead, the move underscores a structural shift in the global technology landscape. As Washington and Beijing continue to prioritize national security over economic integration, companies operating at the intersection of both systems will be forced to adapt—balancing rapid innovation with increasingly strict regulatory oversight on both sides.

The result is a more fragmented, competitive, and politically sensitive global tech ecosystem—one in which capital, talent, and ideas are no longer as freely exchanged as they once were.

JBizNews Desk

7-Eleven’s parent Seven & i Holdings plans to shrink its North American footprint in fiscal 2026, underscoring a sharper push toward larger, food-led convenience stores as the company tries to lift returns in its biggest overseas market. In its full-year earnings materials released on April 9, Seven & i said it expects 645 store closures or conversions in North America during the fiscal year ending Feb. 28, 2027, while opening 205 locations, a move that implies a net reduction of 440 sites. The company said in its presentation that it is pursuing “portfolio optimization” and a shift toward “larger-format and food-focused stores,” according to the official investor release.

The planned cuts arrive at a delicate point for 7-Eleven, which has spent years trying to improve store productivity after its acquisition of Speedway and amid softer discretionary spending by lower-income consumers. In the same earnings release, Seven & i said North America faced “a challenging consumer environment” and pressure on cigarette sales, while food and private-label categories remain central to its turnaround. Reuters reported after the filing that the company did not identify which locations would close, and the presentation itself noted that some sites would shift through “conversion to wholesale fuel stores” rather than shut entirely.

Management framed the move as part of a broader restructuring rather than a retreat from the U.S. and Canada. Seven & i President Stephen Dacus said in the company’s earnings presentation that the group is focused on “improving asset efficiency and capital productivity,” language that investors have heard repeatedly as the retailer responds to pressure to simplify its business. Bloomberg and the company’s own materials both highlighted that North America remains the group’s largest earnings contributor, making store quality and format mix more important than raw unit count.

The strategy reflects a wider industry reality: convenience retailers increasingly depend on prepared food, beverages and loyalty-driven traffic as fuel margins and tobacco volumes become less reliable. Alimentation Couche-Tard, operator of Circle K, told investors in recent earnings commentary that food programs and merchandising remain key growth levers, while Casey’s General Stores has repeatedly said pizza and prepared meals help drive same-store sales. Against that backdrop, Seven & i said in its filing that it intends to prioritize stores with stronger food-and-drink offerings, a stance that aligns with what analysts at Morningstar and other retail researchers have described as the sector’s clearest path to margin expansion.

The scale of the planned reduction also matters because 7-Eleven still operates one of the largest convenience networks in the region. Company disclosures show the group runs, franchises or licenses thousands of stores across the U.S. and Canada, and executives have argued that network density still offers a competitive advantage in distribution and brand recognition. Even so, Seven & i said in its April 9 materials that some stores no longer fit its target model, and Reuters noted the company paired the closure plan with a commitment to invest in higher-performing formats rather than maintain weaker locations.

Investors have pushed the Japanese retailer to move faster on underperforming assets and governance reform, especially after a prolonged period of strategic scrutiny. Financial Times and Reuters have both reported in recent months that Seven & i has faced pressure from shareholders to unlock value and sharpen management accountability. The company’s latest earnings package echoed that theme, saying it aims to “accelerate transformation” in convenience operations and improve returns on invested capital, according to the official presentation.

The North America plan sits alongside a broader reset at the parent company, which has been reworking leadership and portfolio priorities. In public statements tied to recent results, Seven & i has emphasized a simpler operating structure and tighter focus on its convenience business after years of expansion into adjacent retail formats. Bloomberg reported that investors continue to watch whether management can translate those promises into steadier earnings growth, particularly in the U.S., where labor, shrink and consumer trade-down behavior have complicated the outlook for retailers across formats.

For employees, suppliers and landlords, the immediate issue is location-level execution, and that remains unclear. Seven & i did not disclose a list of affected stores in its earnings release, and the company said only that closures and fuel-only conversions would unfold during fiscal 2026. That leaves open how much of the reduction comes from outright shutdowns, how many sites remain in operation under a different model, and which markets see the heaviest cuts. Reuters said those details had not been provided as of the company’s April 9 filing.

What comes next matters beyond one retailer. If 7-Eleven succeeds in replacing weaker stores with bigger, food-centric locations, it could reinforce a broader industry shift toward convenience outlets that look more like compact quick-service hubs than traditional gas-and-cigarette stops. If the closures instead signal deeper demand weakness, competitors and consumer brands could face tougher traffic trends across the channel. For now, Seven & i has made its direction clear in its own words: fewer low-productivity stores, more capital behind formats that can sell higher-margin food and beverages in a tougher North American market.

JBizNews Asia Desk

Economy & Household Finances | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Goldman Sachs chief U.S. economist David Mericle and his team are revising earlier optimism, now warning that the long-discussed “K-shaped economy” — in which high-income households continue to advance while lower- and middle-income families fall further behind — is materializing with unusual force in 2026. The primary driver is the sharply unequal burden imposed by the U.S.-Israel military campaign against Iran, which has disrupted global energy markets and sent domestic gasoline prices surging.

In a research note this week, Goldman Sachs economists Ronnie Walker, Alec Phillips, and Joseph Briggs highlighted that what had looked like a promising year for consumer spending “has quickly become more challenging,” forecasting a roughly 1% decline in headline retail sales in the months ahead. The analysts pointed to rising gasoline prices as the most regressive element of the current shock, hitting lower-income households with disproportionate severity.

The numbers underscore the disparity. Households in the lowest income quintile spend approximately 18.3% of their wages on gasoline in a typical year — more than double the national average of 7.7%, according to the American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy. Goldman Sachs calculations show these same households devote roughly four times as much of their after-tax income to gasoline as those in the top income quintile. With national average gasoline prices crossing $4 per gallon in early April for the first time since 2022, and fuel oil costs jumping 30.7% in March alone — the largest monthly increase since February 2000 — the energy shock is amplifying existing inequalities.

Moody’s Analytics chief economist Mark Zandi described the dynamic as functioning like a regressive tax. Higher spending on essentials such as gasoline and utilities reduces real disposable income, forcing lower-income consumers to cut back sharply on discretionary items. This shift disproportionately affects retailers, restaurants, and service businesses that cater to working-class customers. Zandi noted earlier that roughly half of U.S. states were operating under recession-like conditions last year, with lower-income households “hanging on by their fingertips.”

Real wage trends have turned negative for many at the bottom of the income scale. The Economic Policy Institute reported that real wages for low-income workers declined 0.3% last year, reversing gains seen in the immediate post-pandemic recovery. Meanwhile, wealthier households have benefited from strong asset price performance, particularly in equities and technology-driven sectors, creating parallel economies that appear increasingly disconnected.

The divergence extends beyond fuel. Elevated home prices and persistently high mortgage rates have made homeownership — long a cornerstone of middle-class wealth building — more elusive for lower- and middle-income families. J.P. Morgan Asset Management global market strategist Jack Manley has observed that the gap between “haves and have-nots” has been widening over multiple years, with housing affordability emerging as a central flashpoint.

Fiscal supports that cushioned households earlier in the year, including enhanced tax refunds tied to provisions in President Trump’s One Big Beautiful Bill Act, are one-time boosts that will not recur. As these temporary lifts fade, the full weight of sustained higher energy costs is landing at a particularly vulnerable moment. Goldman SachsMericle previously pushed back against exaggerated fears of a K-shaped recovery but now acknowledges the data are tilting toward a clearer bifurcation.

Retail sales data for March illustrated the split. Headline figures rose 1.7% month-over-month, but the increase was driven largely by higher nominal spending at gas stations rather than broad-based consumption strength. When automotive and gasoline categories are excluded, underlying trends appear considerably softer. Goldman Sachs expects this weakness to intensify through the second and third quarters unless energy prices retreat meaningfully.

The Strait of Hormuz remains a critical choke point. Its ongoing disruption has kept global oil and refined product flows constrained, with limited prospects for quick resolution following the collapse of peace talks in Islamabad on Saturday. Until supply chains normalize, analysts see little relief ahead for the most vulnerable households.

The broader economic implications are significant. Consumer spending accounts for roughly 70% of U.S. GDP, and sustained pressure on lower-income budgets risks dragging on overall growth. While high-income households and asset markets have shown resilience, the consumption slowdown among the broader population could weigh on corporate earnings, particularly in retail, hospitality, and consumer goods sectors.

Goldman Sachs and other forecasters will be closely watching incoming data on retail sales, inflation, and regional employment trends for further evidence of how deeply the energy shock is reshaping the U.S. economic landscape. For now, the trajectory points to a widening divide that will test both policymakers and businesses in the months ahead.

This story is developing.

JBizNews Desk

Travel & Consumer Costs | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

American travelers planning summer flights are confronting the sharpest rise in airfares in years. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reported that airline fares jumped 14.9% over the 12 months through March 2026, the largest such increase in four years and one driven overwhelmingly by the disruption of global jet fuel supplies following the U.S.-Israel military campaign against Iran.

The Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly 20% of the world’s oil and a disproportionate share of jet fuel components transit, has been severely restricted since late February when Operation Epic Fury began. Jet fuel, refined from crude oil, has seen prices roughly double in many markets, creating a direct and immediate cost pressure on carriers that is being passed on to passengers.

Beyond tickets, broader travel expenses are climbing. Dining out rose 3.8% year over year, while hotel costs increased 2.1%. Overall Consumer Price Index inflation stood at 3.3% for the 12-month period through March, with the monthly reading surging 0.9% — the biggest one-month jump in four years. Gasoline prices alone accounted for nearly three-quarters of that March increase, spiking 21.2% for the month, while fuel oil jumped 30.7%, the largest monthly gain since February 2000.

The mechanics are unforgiving. Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy, has warned that even after any ceasefire, relief at the pump and for aviation fuel will come slowly — perhaps only one to three cents per day initially. Asian refineries that supply much of the West Coast’s jet fuel have been particularly hard hit, forcing rerouting and supply shortages that compound the price pressure.

Major carriers are responding aggressively. United Airlines has signaled potential fare increases of 15% to 20% to offset higher fuel costs, while also raising baggage fees. American Airlines cited the conflict directly when it slashed its full-year earnings guidance, warning of a roughly $4 billion increase in fuel-related expenses. Lufthansa cut 20,000 flights, and low-cost carrier Spirit Airlines — already navigating bankruptcy proceedings — is now seeking a $500 million government support package after its restructuring plan became unviable.

For households, the double hit of higher pump prices and pricier air travel is particularly painful. Lower-income families, who already devote a larger share of their budgets to gasoline — as much as 18.3% of wages in some analyses — face compounded pressure when vacation costs rise. Moody’s Analytics noted this week that elevated fuel expenses are eroding anticipated gains in household purchasing power from recent tax measures, neutralizing what had been expected to be a supportive factor for consumer spending.

The ripple effects extend beyond individual budgets. Reduced flight schedules and higher costs threaten to dampen summer travel demand, which traditionally provides a significant lift to sectors including hospitality, retail, and regional economies. European and Asian carriers have also scaled back capacity, creating bottlenecks on transatlantic and transpacific routes that further inflate prices for remaining seats.

With peace talks in Islamabad collapsing on Saturday and no clear timeline for reopening the Strait of Hormuz, analysts expect elevated jet fuel costs to persist through the summer and likely into the fall. Carriers are already adjusting summer schedules, adding fuel surcharges, and trimming less profitable routes. Travelers face a season in which advance booking offers limited protection, as dynamic pricing and surcharges adjust rapidly to fuel market swings.

The Iran conflict has thus produced a textbook supply shock: concentrated, persistent, and difficult to offset in the short term. While consumers may shift some plans toward domestic driving trips or closer destinations, the broader impact on discretionary spending and business travel could weigh on second-half economic growth forecasts.

This story is developing as airlines finalize summer schedules and energy markets monitor diplomatic developments.

JBizNews Desk

Consumer Economy | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

American consumers ended April in a state of historic pessimism. The University of Michigan’s final Index of Consumer Sentiment for the month came in at 49.8 — the lowest reading in the survey’s more than seven-decade history dating back to 1952. The figure undercuts the troughs reached during the 2008 financial crisis, the COVID-19 pandemic lockdown, the 2022 inflation surge, and every other major economic disruption in the modern era.

Joanne Hsu, director of the University of Michigan Surveys of Consumers, noted a modest rebound from the preliminary mid-month reading of 47.6. “After the two-week ceasefire was announced and gas prices softened a touch, sentiment recovered a modest portion of its early-month losses,” she said in the report. Even so, the index fell 6.6% from March’s 53.3 and 4.6% from a year earlier. It has now declined for five straight months.

The primary culprit is clear: the U.S.-Israel military campaign against Iran that began in late February, which disrupted the Strait of Hormuz and propelled U.S. gasoline prices above $4 per gallon nationally for the first time in four years. Economists estimate the energy shock has added roughly $857 to average annual household fuel costs so far this year. As Moody’s Analytics observed, higher gasoline and utility prices function like a regressive tax, eroding real disposable income and forcing cutbacks in discretionary spending.

Year-ahead inflation expectations jumped to 4.7% in April from 3.8% in March — the largest one-month increase since President Trump’s tariff announcements in 2025. Long-term expectations also climbed. The combination of realized price pressures, heightened future inflation fears, and geopolitical uncertainty has created a psychological environment that researchers describe as unprecedented in its persistence.

The pain is broad-based but especially acute among lower-income households. Goldman Sachs chief U.S. economist David Mericle highlighted that low-income families spend roughly four times as much of their after-tax income on gasoline as those in the top quintile. This disparity amplifies the impact of the energy shock on working-class budgets.

Broader economic signals reinforce the gloom. The Atlanta Federal Reserve’s GDPNow tracker estimates first-quarter 2026 growth at just 1.3% annualized, down from 1.9% in the fourth quarter of 2025. Retail sales for March rose on the surface, but the gain was largely inflated by higher gasoline prices rather than genuine consumption strength. When stripping out autos and gas, underlying trends appear softer.

Goldman Sachs economists Ronnie Walker, Alec Phillips, and Joseph Briggs warned this week that what had looked like a solid year for consumer spending “has quickly become more challenging,” forecasting potential declines in headline retail sales ahead. Consumer spending accounts for about 70% of U.S. GDP, making the sentiment collapse a material risk for businesses across retail, hospitality, and manufacturing.

The deterioration spans political affiliations, age groups, income brackets, and education levels. Expectations for business conditions over both short and long horizons weakened significantly, approaching levels last seen during the reciprocal tariff rollout a year ago.

For policymakers and corporate leaders, the record-low reading serves as a stark warning. While a fragile ceasefire has eased some immediate supply risks, sustained high energy prices and inflation worries continue to weigh on household confidence. Whether sentiment can stabilize — or reverse — will depend heavily on developments in the Middle East, the trajectory of gasoline prices, and the broader impact of trade policies on everyday costs.

JBizNews Desk

Federal Reserve | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro announced late Friday that the Department of Justice is dropping its criminal investigation into Federal Reserve Chairman Jerome Powell, eliminating the last major roadblock to President Donald Trump’s effort to install Kevin Warsh as the next leader of the central bank before Powell’s term expires on May 15.

The decision, disclosed by Pirro on X, shifts oversight of the long-running inquiry into the Federal Reserve’s $2.5 billion headquarters renovation project to the central bank’s inspector general. It marks an abrupt policy reversal for Pirro, who as recently as Wednesday had vowed to press ahead with the probe. The move removes the primary obstacle cited by Senate Republicans for delaying Warsh’s confirmation and sets the stage for what could be one of the most consequential leadership changes at the Federal Reserve in decades.

Kevin Warsh, a former Federal Reserve governor and economic adviser to Trump during his first term, appeared before the Senate Banking Committee on April 21. His hearing drew intense scrutiny from both parties over questions of central bank independence, his policy views and his relationship with the president. Sen. Thom Tillis, a North Carolina Republican and influential member of the committee, had placed a hold on advancing the nomination until the Department of Justice investigation was resolved. With that condition now satisfied, Senate aides expect the hold to be lifted quickly, potentially clearing the way for a full confirmation vote as early as next week.

Powell, whose four-year term as chair ends May 15, has previously signaled he would step aside once a successor is confirmed and any pending investigations concluded. The timing is tight: confirmation would need to occur within the next three weeks to allow an orderly transition before the deadline.

Elizabeth Warren, the Massachusetts Democrat who serves as the ranking member on the Senate Banking Committee, denounced the Justice Department’s decision as politically motivated. “Dropping the investigation is nothing more than an attempt to ram through President Trump’s handpicked successor,” she said in a statement. Warren also noted that the DOJ has not dropped a separate probe involving Fed Governor Lisa Cook, whom Trump tried to remove last year and whose status remains before the Supreme Court.

During his confirmation hearing, Warsh walked a careful line. Asked whether he believed Trump had won the 2020 election, he responded only that the results “have been certified.” When pressed by Warren for an example of an economic policy where he diverged from the president, Warsh declined to offer one. On the critical issue of Federal Reserve independence, however, he was direct: “The president never once asked me to commit to any particular interest rate decision, period,” he testified. “Nor would I ever agree to do so. I will be an independent actor if confirmed.”

Trump himself has been less circumspect. In a recent CNBC interview, he said he would be “disappointed” if Warsh did not move quickly to lower interest rates upon taking office. Markets have priced in limited easing this year. CME FedWatch tool data currently implies at most one rate cut for the remainder of 2026, while a recent Reuters poll of economists showed a majority expecting the benchmark rate to remain unchanged through September.

Warsh, who has described himself as an inflation hawk, has in recent writings pushed back against concerns that Trump’s tariff policies will generate persistent price pressures. His elevation would represent a clear shift from the Powell era, which was marked by aggressive rate hikes to combat post-pandemic inflation followed by a cautious approach to cutting rates.

The Federal Reserve renovation project at the center of the now-dropped probe has drawn criticism for years over ballooning costs and delays. Trump personally toured the construction site with Powell last summer and later used the project as a frequent point of attack against the central bank’s leadership and spending practices.

Wall Street’s reaction to the news has been muted so far, with investors focusing more on the near-term policy implications than on the political drama. Treasury yields edged slightly lower in thin Saturday trading, while equity futures pointed to a modestly positive open on Monday. The broader question remains how much influence Trump might exert over monetary policy through Warsh, even as the nominee pledged fidelity to the central bank’s independence.

If confirmed, Warsh would inherit a Federal Reserve navigating a complex environment: moderating inflation that has yet to reach the 2% target on a sustained basis, elevated fiscal deficits, ongoing global trade tensions and the economic ripple effects of Middle East conflicts. His background as both a market participant—having worked at Morgan Stanley—and a policymaker positions him as someone likely to prioritize financial stability and growth alongside inflation control.

The rapid timeline reflects the high stakes for the administration. Installing a new chair before May 15 avoids any period of leadership uncertainty at the world’s most powerful central bank and allows Warsh to participate in the June policy meeting as chairman. Whether he can maintain the delicate balance between political expectations and institutional credibility will define the early months of his tenure.

This story is developing as Senate leadership finalizes the confirmation schedule.

JBizNews Desk

Media & Entertainment | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Warner Bros. Discovery (NASDAQ: WBD) shareholders voted overwhelmingly on Thursday, April 23, to approve the company’s $110 billion acquisition by Paramount Skydance, clearing a major procedural hurdle in what would become one of the largest media mergers in U.S. history. However, by Friday’s close and into Saturday trading, Paramount Skydance (NASDAQ: PSKY) stock had fallen approximately 4.5%, closing around $10.97–$11.27, as investors shifted focus to the deal’s heavy debt burden—estimated at more than $54 billion in financing that will weigh on the combined entity.

The shareholder vote was not close. Roughly 1.743 billion shares were cast in favor versus only about 16.3 million against, a margin exceeding 100-to-1. Boards of both companies had unanimously backed the transaction. WBD CEO David Zaslav described it as a “key milestone” delivering value to stockholders. WBD shareholders will receive $31 per share in cash upon closing—a significant premium that helped secure the strong approval.

Paramount Skydance CEO David Ellison has sought to reassure Hollywood stakeholders with commitments to maintain theatrical windows (at least 45 days before streaming), sustain robust film output (targeting around 30 films annually across the combined studios), and preserve Warner Bros. Pictures as a distinct creative entity. The deal, which prevailed over competing interest from Netflix after a heated bidding process, values WBD at roughly $81 billion in equity plus debt, for a total enterprise value near $110–$111 billion.

Markets reacted negatively to the financial structure, widely described as one of the largest leveraged media deals ever. The transaction relies heavily on debt financing, raising concerns about the combined company’s ability to service obligations amid streaming competition, advertising market pressures, and broader economic factors. Paramount’s shares have shown high volatility over the past year, reflecting ongoing uncertainty in the sector.

The merger still requires regulatory approvals from the U.S. Department of Justice and international bodies (including European antitrust regulators). Both companies anticipate closing in the third quarter of 2026, subject to those clearances. Hollywood has voiced mixed reactions, with some filmmakers and producers worried about content consolidation, reduced creative opportunities, and diminished competition.

If completed, the deal would create a media powerhouse encompassing Warner Bros.’ iconic film and TV library, HBO, Max, CNN, DC Studios, TNT, TBS, Cartoon Network, plus Paramount’s assets including CBS, MTV, Nickelodeon, BET, Paramount+, and its film studio. The central challenge for David Ellison and the new leadership will be unlocking synergies from this vast library while managing the substantial debt load in an evolving media landscape.

This story remains developing as regulatory reviews proceed and markets digest the implications.

JBizNews Desk

Breaking News | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

President Donald Trump, First Lady Melania Trump, and Vice President JD Vance were rushed off the stage by Secret Service agents Saturday night after shots were fired at the White House Correspondents’ Dinner at the Washington Hilton in Washington, D.C. — one of the most prominent annual gatherings of American political and media figures. A shooter was confirmed dead. President Trump is safe. All Cabinet members are reported unharmed.

The incident unfolded within minutes of the event getting underway. Trump had been introduced alongside the First Lady approximately 15 minutes before the shooting when attendees heard what witnesses described as four to five rapid gunshots — sounds consistent with coming from the lobby hallway just outside the main ballroom. The moment the shots rang out, Secret Service agents drew their weapons, jumped onto the stage, and immediately swept Trump, Melania, Vance, and senior officials including White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt off the premises. Agents were heard shouting “shots fired” as the head table was cleared in seconds.

The rest of the Washington Hilton ballroom — packed with senators, U.S. representatives, Cabinet officials, diplomats, journalists, and celebrities — received no immediate instructions. Guests dove beneath tables and huddled in aisles as Secret Service secured the perimeter. C-SPAN cameras captured the chaos live as an anchor broke into ongoing coverage to report the unfolding scene. CNN’s Kaitlan Collins confirmed on air that a shooter had been killed. Education Secretary Linda McMahon’s security detail separately told CNN that the shooter was neutralized in the lobby of the hotel.

Deadline journalist Ted Johnson, seated in the ballroom, described hearing what sounded like four shots appearing to originate from the hallway just outside his table near the ballroom entrance. Fox News contributor and Townhall.com reporter Katie Pavlich, who was inside the room, reported a timeline consistent with other accounts: Trump had been seated for approximately five minutes when the shots erupted. “Everyone immediately hit the floor,” she wrote on X. “Secret Service immediately took POTUS out.” A source speaking to CNN confirmed the President was safe moments after the evacuation. An administration official confirmed Cabinet members were all accounted for and unharmed.

The White House Correspondents’ Association (WHCA), led this year by CBS News reporter and WHCA president Weijia Jiang, had opened the evening with remarks underscoring the role of press freedom. “The White House Correspondents’ Dinner reinforces the importance of the First Amendment in our democracy,” Jiang said before the incident erupted. It was a notable evening for another reason: it marked President Trump’s first attendance at the annual press dinner since returning to office. The event, held annually at the Washington Hilton, traditionally brings together the President, senior government officials, members of the Washington press corps, and entertainment figures in a formal setting that blends political pageantry with press access.

An announcement from the stage following the evacuation indicated the “program will resume shortly,” though it was unclear at the time of publication whether Trump would return to the event. Republican Senator Lindsey Graham and other prominent figures were among those evacuated from the main ballroom. Security had been ramped up at the Washington Hilton throughout the day, with additional forces stationed along key airport access routes and soldiers visible on rooftops overlooking major approach roads — precautions that had been put in place partly in connection with the ongoing U.S.-Iran conflict and the Islamabad peace talks developments earlier in the day.

The shooting at the White House Correspondents’ Dinner is an event without precedent in modern political history. The annual gala, which dates to 1914, has never before been disrupted by gunfire. Markets, which had already closed for the week, will likely open Monday under a cloud of uncertainty as investors process the news alongside the collapse of U.S.-Iran peace talks in Pakistan and the continuation of the Strait of Hormuz blockade. The shooter’s identity, motive, and any potential connections to broader threats are under active investigation by the Secret Service, the Metropolitan Police Department, and the FBI. This story is developing.

JBizNews Desk

Geopolitics & Markets | Saturday, April 25, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

President Donald Trump abruptly canceled a planned diplomatic mission to Pakistan on Saturday, halting a high-stakes effort to restart direct U.S.-Iran negotiations and triggering an immediate reaction across global energy markets, where oil prices moved sharply higher on renewed fears of prolonged disruption in the Middle East.

The White House had earlier confirmed that Special Envoy Steve Witkoff and senior adviser Jared Kushner were scheduled to travel to Islamabad for talks facilitated by Pakistani officials. Within hours, however, Trump reversed course, pulling both officials off the trip just as Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi was departing the Pakistani capital—effectively eliminating any possibility of in-person engagement between the two sides.

Trump announced the decision in a post on Truth Social, citing frustration with the pace and structure of negotiations. “I just cancelled the trip of my representatives going to Islamabad, Pakistan, to meet with the Iranians,” Trump wrote. “Too much time wasted on traveling, too much work!” He added that Iran could “call us anytime they want,” signaling a shift toward remote or indirect engagement rather than face-to-face diplomacy.

Speaking to reporters before boarding Air Force One in Florida, Trump expanded on his reasoning, pointing to dissatisfaction with a proposal submitted by Tehran. “They gave us a paper that should have been better,” Trump said. “And interestingly, immediately when I canceled it, within ten minutes, we got a new paper that was much better.” He described the Iranian position as offering “a lot, but not enough,” while also citing what he characterized as internal divisions within Iran’s leadership.

From Tehran, the response was measured but pointed. Abbas Araghchi, speaking to regional media and in posts on X, said his meetings in Pakistan were “very fruitful” but questioned Washington’s commitment to meaningful diplomacy. “We are waiting to see if the U.S. is truly serious about diplomacy,” Araghchi said, before departing for Oman for additional consultations. Iranian state media had previously indicated that direct engagement with U.S. officials was unlikely under current conditions, raising questions about whether a face-to-face meeting in Islamabad was ever diplomatically viable.

The breakdown marks the second failed attempt in a matter of days to convene both sides in Pakistan. Earlier in the week, a planned visit involving Vice President JD Vance was also called off after Iranian officials declined to engage under those terms. The initial round of Islamabad talks earlier this month—spanning more than 20 hours—ended without agreement, with disputes centered on Iran’s nuclear program and maritime security in the Strait of Hormuz.

The diplomatic setback comes against the backdrop of an escalating U.S. pressure campaign. The Biden administration’s prior framework has been replaced by a more aggressive posture under Trump, including a naval enforcement operation targeting Iranian-linked shipping. Secretary of Defense Pete Hegseth described the effort Friday as “ironclad,” with U.S. naval forces expanding enforcement beyond the Strait of Hormuz into broader international waters.

According to U.S. defense officials, dozens of vessels have been redirected or inspected as part of the operation, with several seizures reported for non-compliance. The campaign has added significant strain to global energy markets, where traders are closely watching both military developments and diplomatic signals for direction.

Oil prices reacted quickly to Saturday’s news. Brent crude rose to approximately $105 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate climbed toward $98, reflecting a renewed geopolitical risk premium. Analysts at BCA Research noted that each failed round of negotiations increases the likelihood of prolonged supply disruption, particularly given the strategic importance of the Strait of Hormuz, which carries roughly 20% of global oil flows.

Even in the event of a future agreement, timelines remain uncertain. A report cited by The Washington Post indicates that clearing potential maritime hazards in the Strait could take months, suggesting that energy markets may face sustained volatility regardless of diplomatic progress.

On Capitol Hill, reaction from lawmakers reflected broader divisions over strategy. Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) praised Trump’s decision, calling it “very wise” given what he described as Tehran’s negotiating posture. The White House has maintained that a ceasefire extension earlier in the week was intended to give Iran time to present a unified proposal—an objective officials say has not yet been met.

For markets, the cancellation reinforces a pattern of rapid shifts between diplomatic optimism and breakdown. Investors now head into the new week facing heightened uncertainty, as geopolitical developments once again take center stage alongside corporate earnings and macroeconomic data.

With talks stalled and military pressure intensifying, the trajectory of U.S.-Iran relations remains highly fluid. Whether negotiations resume—or tensions escalate further—will play a decisive role in shaping both global energy markets and broader investor sentiment in the weeks ahead.

JBizNews Desk

The White House has put diversity, equity and inclusion policies at the center of its latest economic argument, saying in the 2026 Economic Report of the President that such practices impose measurable costs on employers and the broader U.S. economy. In the report released April 13, the Council of Economic Advisers said DEI initiatives “have led to inefficient management, raising the cost of doing business,” a statement published in the administration’s official annual report and framed as part of President Donald Trump’s broader push to dismantle DEI programs across government and corporate America.

The administration’s estimate, laid out in the report and highlighted by the White House, pegged the annual reduction in economic output at roughly $94 billion, or about $1,160 a year for households with two working adults. The report said those “costs lead the companies practicing DEI to hire fewer people and pay their workers less,” according to the text issued by the Council of Economic Advisers, though the document also made clear the figure reflects the administration’s own modeling rather than a consensus view among outside economists.

The release lands amid an aggressive federal rollback of DEI policies. Reuters and the Associated Press have reported in recent months that the Trump administration moved to eliminate DEI offices and programs across federal agencies, while also pressuring contractors and universities to review related initiatives. In one of those reports, the AP said the administration argued DEI programs can “violate the principle of individual merit,” a position that aligns closely with the economic report’s claim that such policies distort hiring and promotion decisions.

That view remains sharply contested by many business groups and workplace researchers. The U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission has long said employers may adopt lawful diversity and inclusion efforts so long as they do not make decisions based on protected characteristics, and guidance published by the agency states that Title VII bars discrimination “because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin,” not general training or outreach efforts in themselves. Legal specialists interviewed by outlets including Bloomberg Law and Reuters in earlier coverage said the practical risk for companies depends less on whether they use the term DEI and more on whether programs cross into preferential treatment barred by federal law.

Corporate America has already started adjusting. Reuters, CNBC and the Financial Times have reported over the past year that several large U.S. companies either softened DEI language in filings, reworked executive incentives tied to representation goals, or folded diversity teams into broader human-resources functions as political and legal scrutiny intensified. In securities filings and public statements, companies including major retailers, banks and manufacturers have generally said they still support broad-based recruitment and workplace inclusion, but many now describe those efforts in more neutral terms, reflecting what governance advisers told Reuters is a more cautious compliance environment.

The administration’s report also arrives as investors and executives weigh how much workplace policy can affect productivity, labor costs and litigation exposure. Economists cited by Bloomberg and the Wall Street Journal in prior debates over DEI have said the empirical record remains mixed: some studies suggest better decision-making and talent retention from more diverse teams, while critics argue mandatory training, quotas or rigid targets can create bureaucracy and morale problems. The new White House report did not settle that broader academic dispute, but it gave the administration a headline figure that officials can use to justify further action against programs they see as economically distortive.

For employers, the practical issue now extends beyond politics. Lawyers and consultants told Reuters in recent coverage that boards and management teams increasingly face a dual pressure: avoid programs that could trigger regulatory or legal challenges, while still demonstrating fair hiring and equal-opportunity compliance. Public companies remain subject to anti-discrimination law, investor scrutiny and, in some cases, state-level disclosure expectations, meaning the retreat from DEI branding does not remove the need for documented employment practices and defensible personnel decisions.

What comes next matters because the report is likely to serve as both a policy blueprint and a messaging tool. The White House signaled in the report that DEI will remain a target of economic and administrative policy, and agencies under President Trump could use that rationale to tighten oversight of contractors, grants and federal employment rules in the months ahead. Whether the $94 billion estimate gains traction outside the administration will depend on how business leaders, courts and independent economists assess the underlying methodology, but the immediate effect already looks clear: DEI policy, once largely treated as a corporate governance issue, now sits squarely inside the administration’s economic agenda.

JBizNews Desk

Property taxes on U.S. single-family homes climbed again this year, adding pressure to household budgets even as home values cooled in many markets. In a report released April 9, ATTOM said owners of more than 89.6 million single-family homes paid a combined $396.8 billion in property taxes in 2025, and ATTOM Chief Executive Rob Barber said the increase reflected “a continued rise in the average tax burden on homeowners,” according to the company’s latest property tax analysis.

The data point to a national average tax bill of $4,427 per single-family home, up 3% from 2024, while the total levy rose 3.7%, ATTOM said in its release. The property data firm said its findings drew on tax records from local assessment offices and estimated market values, and Rob Barber said the trend showed “property taxes continue to increase across much of the country even as home price growth has moderated,” a dynamic that matters for affordability as borrowing costs remain elevated.

That increase ran ahead of the latest inflation backdrop. The annual consumer price index rose 2.4% in March, according to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, and the agency said shelter costs remained “the largest factor in the monthly all items increase,” underscoring how housing-related expenses continue to dominate household spending. With property taxes rising faster than headline inflation, local tax bills increasingly shape the real cost of homeownership beyond mortgage rates and insurance.

The tax increase also arrived alongside softer valuations in ATTOM’s estimates. The firm said the average estimated value of a single-family home slipped 1.7% from a year earlier to $494,231 in 2025 after a sharp jump in 2024, and ATTOM said the higher average tax bill stemmed primarily from an increase in the effective tax rate rather than appreciation alone. That distinction matters for owners and buyers because it suggests local governments and assessment practices, not just market prices, increasingly drive annual tax costs.

Regional differences remained stark. ATTOM said states in the Northeast and parts of the Midwest continued to post some of the highest effective tax rates, while many Southern and Western states remained lower-tax jurisdictions by comparison. In prior housing affordability research, economists at the National Association of Realtors have said “housing affordability remains a challenge,” and chief economist Lawrence Yun has repeatedly pointed to taxes, insurance and financing costs as key barriers for buyers, according to the group’s recent market commentary.

The latest property-tax figures land at a time when local governments face competing budget pressures. Municipal finance analysts at Moody’s Ratings said in recent public commentary that property taxes remain a core and generally stable revenue source for local governments, even as office-market weakness and uneven commercial real estate values create uncertainty in some jurisdictions. Moody’s has said local governments generally retain “strong revenue-raising flexibility,” but that taxpayers can still feel the impact when assessments or rates move higher to support school, public safety and infrastructure spending.

For homeowners, the increase adds to a broader stack of housing costs that already includes elevated insurance premiums and still-high financing costs. Freddie Mac said in its latest weekly survey that 30-year mortgage rates remain well above the ultra-low levels of the pandemic era, and chief economist Sam Khater said recently that “affordability headwinds persist,” according to the mortgage finance company. Even owners with fixed-rate mortgages often cannot escape rising carrying costs when tax assessments and local levies move up.

The tax burden also carries implications for home sales and migration patterns. Analysts at Redfin and Zillow have said in recent market updates that buyers continue to weigh total monthly cost, not just listing price, when choosing where to move. Redfin economists said affordability pressures keep pushing some households toward lower-tax metros and states, while Zillow has noted that recurring ownership costs increasingly influence demand in a slower housing market.

What comes next depends on how local assessors, school districts and municipal governments respond to shifting property values and budget needs through the rest of 2026. ATTOM said the latest figures show tax burdens still moving higher despite softer estimated home values, and that combination could keep pressure on household finances, relocation decisions and housing demand if inflation stays contained but local levies do not. For executives, lenders and real estate investors, the next round of county assessments and local budget decisions could offer one of the clearest signals yet on where housing affordability tightens further and where demand holds up.

JBizNews Desk

Handel’s Homemade Ice Cream is entering a new phase of growth under CEO Jennifer Schuler, who says the 80-year-old brand is focused on balancing expansion with long-standing tradition.

Schuler, who was appointed to take the helm in March 2024, told FOX Business she is intentionally taking a measured approach as the Ohio-founded chain looks to grow. 

“I’ve heard people say, when you’re joining a new brand or business, don’t come in and cannonball in the pool and send splash waves,” Schuler told FOX Business. “Start by putting your toe in the water and getting a feel for it — and that’s especially true with hospitality brands and brands that are…80 years [old].”

COSTCO’S NEW BAKERY ITEM QUICKLY BECOMES LATEST CRAZE

Founded in 1945 by Alice Handel as a single neighborhood shop, the company built its reputation on handcrafted ice cream. Decades later, entrepreneur Lenny Fisher expanded the business through franchising, according to the company’s website.

Now, in what Schuler describes as its “third era,” Handel’s is focused on further scaling nationally while maintaining its core identity.

“We’re just stewards of it,” Schuler said. “… My job is to take what was true about it 80 years ago and make sure we’re carrying that forward with time.”

FDA ANNOUNCES RECALL OF FROZEN DESSERT PINTS OVER POSSIBLE ‘SMALL STONES’

The company has grown to roughly 175 locations, with franchising remaining central to its strategy. Still, Schuler emphasized that Handel’s has a highly selective approach.

“We have a very high bar for the franchise partners that we bring in and talk a lot about the values of the business and the vision we have for the business,” she said.

Schuler also noted that there is still significant room for expansion.

“There are a lot of exciting times ahead for the brand and a lot of potential to grow because there is so much white space,” she said. “Yet, you have this proven history of the brand that just kind of keeps on chugging.”

MCDONALD’S EXPANDS INTO SPECIALTY DRINKS WITH ‘DIRTY SODAS,’ REFRESHERS PUSH

In a competitive dessert market, Handel’s is prioritizing consistency over trends.

“You’re not going to see us introduce, like, a fig and olive type of flavor. … I bet there are some brands out there that do it great — We’re not going to do that,” Schuler said. “…. We are going to do things that are very classic and deliver on those flavors very, very well.”

Schuler said her leadership approach was shaped in part by a year-long break after leaving Wetzel’s Pretzels, when she reflected on what she wanted in her next role.

“I wanted to be part of a brand that I thought could be special in a community — a gathering place in a world where there’s more disconnection,” she said.

That vision aligns with Handel’s identity, which Schuler believes sets it apart in the digital world.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Especially in times of uncertainty, when people are feeling uncertain about the stock market or global conflicts, we generally find that’s when the ice cream business is just as steady and strong as ever, because it’s the little pleasures in life that I think people seek out.”

This post was originally published here

You have 60 days from your credit card statement date to dispute a charge. After that, the protection disappears.

If you’ve ever spotted a charge you didn’t recognize and done nothing about it, here’s what you missed, and what to do next time.

Not every complaint about a charge is the same thing. The Fair Credit Billing Act (FCBA) covers specific situations: unauthorized charges, charges for goods or services you didn’t receive, charges for something that arrived damaged or different from what was described, and billing errors.

CREDIT CARD INTEREST RATE CAP COULD REDUCE ACCESS FOR OVER 100 MILLION AMERICANS, ANALYSIS FINDS

What it doesn’t cover is buyer’s remorse. If you made a purchase, received what you ordered, and just changed your mind, that’s not a dispute. The distinction matters because issuers treat them differently from the start.

When you contact your issuer to dispute a charge, they’re required to acknowledge it within 30 days and resolve it within two billing cycles, which in practice means within 60 to 90 days.

In most cases, the issuer will provisionally credit your account for the disputed amount while the investigation is open. You’re not paying for something you’re contesting. That’s a meaningful difference from how the same situation plays out with a debit card, where the money has already left your account and you’re trying to get it back.

TRUMP’S PROPOSED CREDIT CARD INTEREST RATE CAP COULD CURB ACCESS FOR MILLIONS OF AMERICANS: REPORT

Once you file, your issuer initiates what’s called a chargeback: a formal request to the merchant’s bank to reverse the transaction. The merchant gets notified and has the opportunity to respond with documentation: proof of delivery, a signed receipt, records showing you agreed to the charge.

If the merchant doesn’t respond within the required window, the dispute typically resolves in your favor automatically. If they do respond, the issuer reviews both sides and makes a decision.

Most disputes that reach this stage go to the cardholder. Merchants know that fighting chargebacks costs time and fees regardless of the outcome, and many don’t contest smaller amounts.

TRUMP CALLS FOR 1-YEAR 10% CAP ON CREDIT CARD INTEREST RATES

Disputes get denied when the documentation favors the merchant, when the purchase falls outside the FCBA’s covered categories, or when you waited too long to file. Most issuers require you to dispute a charge within 60 days of the statement date it appears on.

There’s also a meaningful difference between a billing dispute and a fraud claim. If the charge is genuinely unauthorized, that’s a fraud case, not a billing dispute, and it gets handled differently. Most issuers have zero-liability policies for unauthorized charges, which means your exposure is $0 regardless of amount.

Dispute rights are built into your credit card by law. But you have to use them within the window, and you have to be able to describe specifically why the charge qualifies.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Keep records: confirmation emails, screenshots of what you ordered, correspondence with the merchant. If a dispute reaches the documentation stage, those details are what wins it.

Motley Fool Money does not cover all offers on the market. Editorial content from Motley Fool Money is separate from The Motley Fool editorial content and is created by a different analyst team.The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

This post was originally published here

About 50,000 adjustable dumbbells sold at Walmart have been recalled after reports of injuries, federal safety officials said.

The Consumer Product Safety Commission said the FitRx SmartBell Quick-Select 5-52.5 lb. Adjustable Dumbbells, made by New York-based Tzumi Electronics, should be immediately replaced.

According to the agency, the weight plates can dislodge from the handle during use, posing an “impact hazard.”

COSTCO ISSUES URGENT RECALL ON POPULAR PRODUCT LINKED TO BURN INJURIES

The agency said it received more than 115 reports of the plates coming loose.

At least six injuries have been reported, including broken toes, bruises, contusions and lacerations.

The recalled dumbbells are model 8361 and carry serial numbers KK23288361 through KK23388361 and KK207608361 through KK21347836.

CALIFORNIA ACCUSES AMAZON OF PUSHING RIVALS TO RAISE PRICES

The dumbbells adjust from 5 to 52.5 pounds in 2.5- or 5-pound increments. They are black with red accents and include a molded plastic storage tray.

Walmart sold the dumbbells for about $100 from January through November 2024.

Consumers are advised to stop using the dumbbells immediately and contact Tzumi Electronics for a free replacement.

CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX BUSINESS APP

Customers can mark the word “Recalled” on the tray using permanent marker or paint and register at myfitrx.com/recall-52-lbs/, the agency said.

Tzumi Electronics can also be reached at 866-363-2237 or by email at smartbellrecall@tzumi.com.

FOX Business has reached out to Walmart and Tzui Electronics for comment.

This post was originally published here

When Republicans go for tax cuts and economic growth, they win elections. When they ignore the growth message, and especially when they ignore the growth message and spend more and more taxpayer money, they lose elections. It’s a simple formula, and I am worried that they are about to make a big mistake.

It’s not that our economy is collapsing, it is most certainly holding up very well during wartime. But there is $4 gas and a lot of prices are still rising. And affordability is important. And even the dependable TIPP poll shows that four out of 10 voters think their taxes are higher this year, and only one out of 10 think they’re lower. This despite the numerous tax cuts in the One, Big, Beautiful Bill, which regrettably was never properly sold to American voters.

Last night, I respectfully suggested this to a Senate leadership Republican, Shelley Moore Capito. “I don’t understand what you all are doing with these bills. You’re not going to re-fund” the Department of Homeland Security, I said. “No tax cuts, no inflation indexing for capital gains, no Pentagon military supplement, no voting rights bill, no waste, fraud, and abuse.” 

I added: “Senator Capito, you have to help me because I don’t understand. I think you are all going down the wrong road, ma’am” And she defended the narrow bill.

Yet I think there’s only going to be room for one big budget bill that could pass with 50 votes plus the vice president. This is the reconciliation process. The way matters stand now, the Senate is pushing a so-called “skinny” bill that just finances ICE and CBP for 3.5 years, for about $70 billion. 

Now I’m all for border security and ICE and the Customs bureau. Oddly enough, though, the rest of DHS, Coast Guard, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, and the Transportation Security Administration is not even included in this bill. Then again, the whole world wants voting rights reform to require photo identification and citizenship proof. But the GOP is ignoring that. Go figure. With $4 gas, a necessary casualty of destroying Iran, which I fully support, it’s a small price to pay. nonetheless working folks could use some more money in their pockets with more tax cuts.

Going back to President Reagan, supply-side tax cuts have always resonated positively with voters. President George W. Bush won the midterms by defending America against jihadists and by across-the-board tax cuts. That was back in 2002. Inflation index capital gains might perk up home sales to help the housing slump. Lowering marginal tax rates at least for the middle incomes. And what about waste, fraud, and abuse?

The Medicare administrator, Mehmet Oz, has already found $100 billion worth at Los Angeles alone. Where’s that in this budget? What about filling out the DOGE waste, fraud, and abuse? Hundreds of billions of dollars multiplied over 10 years would be phenomenal deficit reduction, on top of a growthier economy.

So far, we’re not hearing anything about these crucial policies. And they are popular policies. And my best guess is there’s only going to be one bite out of the fiscal apple, just like last year when I made the exact same argument. Let’s have popular policies that will attract all of the Republicans to a more ambitious budget bill that will show real leadership and accomplishment going into the midterm elections.

Please stop telling me what you can’t do and instead start telling working folks everywhere what can be done to help them out and make America growthier again. That’s a midterm victory.

This post was originally published here

The Intel Corporation surged more than 24% in intraday trading Friday after reporting first-quarter results that exceeded Wall Street expectations, lifting the broader semiconductor sector and pushing the Nasdaq Composite higher despite ongoing geopolitical tensions tied to the Iran conflict.

Intel reported revenue of $13.58 billion for the quarter, well above analyst estimates of $12.41 billion, while non-GAAP earnings per share came in at $0.29, sharply exceeding consensus expectations of $0.01, according to data cited by CNBC, marking the sixth consecutive quarter the company has beaten its own guidance.

Chief Executive Lip-Bu Tan said in the earnings release that the company’s performance reflected “strong demand for our products and disciplined execution,” while Chief Financial Officer David Zinsner pointed to “unprecedented demand for silicon” as supply constraints eased and production scaled.

The results triggered a sector-wide rally, with Advanced Micro Devices climbing more than 15% and Qualcomm gaining over 10%, as investors recalibrated expectations for chip demand tied to artificial intelligence and data center expansion.

The broader market responded positively, with the Nasdaq Composite rising approximately 1.5% midday, while the S&P 500 gained 0.5%, offsetting weakness in the Dow Jones Industrial Average, which was weighed down by energy and financial stocks amid uncertainty tied to developments involving Abbas Araqchi and potential negotiations.

Intel’s guidance for second-quarter revenue between $13.8 billion and $14.8 billion reinforced expectations that semiconductor demand remains strong, particularly in AI-related segments where revenue rose 40% year-over-year.

Investors will now be watching whether sustained demand and easing geopolitical risks can continue to support semiconductor valuations, which have already surged sharply in recent months, as the sector remains central to broader market performance.

JBizNews Desk

Markets Closing Bell | Friday, April 24, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Wall Street closed out one of the most consequential trading weeks of 2026 with a split but powerful finish on Friday, as surging semiconductor stocks propelled the S&P 500 and Nasdaq to fresh record highs while easing geopolitical tensions tied to renewed U.S.-Iran diplomacy pressured energy markets and weighed on the Dow.

The session underscored the defining market dynamic of April: exceptional corporate earnings momentum—led by artificial intelligence and semiconductor demand—offsetting the macroeconomic drag of a prolonged geopolitical conflict that has disrupted one of the world’s most critical energy corridors. Investors leaned into growth and technology, even as global risks remained elevated.

Globally, markets reflected that tension. Asian equities traded lower overnight amid uncertainty surrounding U.S.-Iran negotiations, before sentiment improved late in the U.S. session as diplomatic signals strengthened. Brent crude settled below $100 per barrel, down sharply from its April 7 peak near $115, as Pakistani-mediated talks raised expectations for a potential ceasefire. West Texas Intermediate crude hovered near $95, while gold closed at $4,732. The 10-year U.S. Treasury yield held steady near 4.31%. Meanwhile, the University of Michigan Consumer Sentiment Index registered a final April reading of 49.8—its lowest level on record—highlighting the persistent strain on households from elevated fuel costs and geopolitical uncertainty.

Against that backdrop, U.S. equities showed notable resilience. The S&P 500 rose 53.33 points, or 0.75%, to close at 7,161.73, marking its fourth consecutive weekly gain. The Nasdaq Composite surged 389 points, or 1.59%, to 24,827.12, setting a new all-time high. The Dow Jones Industrial Average slipped 120.74 points, or 0.24%, to 49,190.10, as weakness in traditional blue-chip sectors offset the technology rally. The Philadelphia Semiconductor Index (SOX) extended its remarkable run, advancing for an 18th straight session, while the CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) eased to around 19, down significantly from recent highs—signaling a measured decline in near-term market anxiety.

Corporate earnings continued to anchor the rally. According to data compiled by market analysts, approximately 81% of S&P 500 companies reporting so far have exceeded profit expectations, with 76% beating revenue estimates—an unusually strong performance that has helped sustain investor confidence despite global uncertainty.

The standout catalyst of the day was Intel Corp. (NASDAQ: INTC), which surged more than 23% following a blowout earnings report that exceeded Wall Street expectations and pointed to a resurgence in demand driven by AI-enabled computing workloads. The rally marked Intel’s strongest single-day gain in decades and pushed the stock above levels not seen since the dot-com era, reigniting enthusiasm across the semiconductor sector.

Nvidia Corp. (NASDAQ: NVDA) added to the momentum, climbing roughly 5% to a new all-time high and reclaiming a market valuation above $5 trillion. The move reaffirmed Nvidia’s position at the center of the global AI buildout, as demand for advanced chips continues to outpace supply.

The ripple effects extended across the chip ecosystem. Advanced Micro Devices Inc. (NASDAQ: AMD) jumped nearly 14%, bolstered by both Intel’s results and a bullish analyst upgrade pointing to broader CPU demand strength. Arm Holdings plc (NASDAQ: ARM) rose more than 15%, while Qualcomm Inc. (NASDAQ: QCOM) gained over 10%, reflecting broad-based investor conviction in AI infrastructure growth.

In the infrastructure layer, MaxLinear Inc. (NASDAQ: MXL) surged following strong revenue growth tied to optical connectivity demand in hyperscale data centers. Meanwhile, X-Energy Inc. (NASDAQ: XE) made a high-profile Nasdaq debut, raising more than $1 billion in the largest nuclear IPO on record. The stock closed up over 30%, highlighting growing investor interest in energy solutions tied to AI-driven electricity demand.

Outside of technology, results were more mixed. Procter & Gamble Co. (NYSE: PG) rose over 3% after delivering better-than-expected earnings and signaling stable U.S. consumer demand, with CFO Andre Schulten describing conditions as “stable.” The company also reaffirmed its dividend outlook. In contrast, Comcast Corp. (NASDAQ: CMCSA) fell nearly 8% after an analyst downgrade citing structural pressures in the cable business, while HCA Healthcare Inc. (NYSE: HCA) dropped more than 8% after warning that storm-related disruptions would weigh on full-year profits.

Late-session momentum received an additional boost from geopolitical developments. Officials in Islamabad confirmed that Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araqchi had arrived for discussions aimed at restarting U.S.-Iran negotiations. The White House, through Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt, confirmed that Steve Witkoff and Jared Kushner will travel to Pakistan to participate in talks. The development marked the most tangible diplomatic progress since the ceasefire extension earlier in the week, helping to push oil prices lower and support equities into the close.

For the week, both the S&P 500 and Nasdaq recorded their fourth consecutive gains, entering the final stretch of April with strong upward momentum. However, the outlook remains tightly balanced. A critical wave of earnings from Meta Platforms Inc., Microsoft Corp., and Apple Inc. looms in the coming days, while the trajectory of U.S.-Iran negotiations will continue to influence energy markets and global risk sentiment.

Markets now stand at a pivotal intersection—driven higher by historic earnings strength, yet still exposed to geopolitical developments that could shift the macro landscape quickly. The coming week is poised to test whether the rally can sustain its pace or whether external risks begin to reassert themselves.

JBizNews Desk

SoFi Technologies this week unveiled a new fully digital home equity line of credit (HELOC) experience, expanding its push into mortgages as more homeowners choose to tap equity rather than move.

The company said the new HELOC offering will allow members to access home equity through an end-to-end digital process within the SoFi platform, with features including verified preapprovals, competitive interest rates and flexible borrowing options.

The rollout is part of SoFi’s broader effort to consolidate more of the homeownership journey into a single digital experience, including purchase mortgages, refinances and home equity products.

Eric Schuppenhauer, SoFi’s head of borrowing, said in an interview with HousingWire that the company has been offering HELOCs through a “brokered solution” but noticed borrowers wanted the flexibility of a HELOC option too.

“While a broker model is good, it doesn’t necessarily provide you with the same flexibility that you can do by controlling the experience yourself,” he said. “Our members in particular, they’re looking for liquidity options, and the best way to do a remodel, or pay for education or pay for a vacation, may actually be by tapping into their home equity.

Schuppenhauer said the lock-in effect of borrowers wanting to keep their 2% to 3% rates is driving the desire to access equity.

“Instead of doing a cash-out refi … we also just think that [the HELOC is] a good, thoughtful way to finance big-ticket purchases, remodels, etc. And so by virtue of that, we just felt like we needed to bring the solution forward.”

In tandem with announcing the HELOC offering, SoFi also announced the creation of a Real Estate Advisory Council made up of more than 50 industry leaders from across major U.S. housing markets.

Members include agents from firms such as Compass, Sotheby’s International Realty and The Real Brokerage. The council will provide market insights, advise on product development and help connect buyers to SoFi’s platform.

Schuppenhauer said the idea for the council was inspired by a company event held in New York City. “In talking to Realtors at that event, it became very clear to me and to others on the team that we needed to listen to the real estate community, because they know what their clients need best.

“We do mortgages nationwide,” he added. “We wanted to hear from the real estate community. How do we empower you to be able to serve your clients better and therefore our members better?”

In a company press release, SoFi said nearly three-quarters of homeowners plan to stay in their homes over the next two years, a trend it said is driving increased demand for home equity products. The company said it serves more than 135,000 homeowners and saw home loan originations nearly double year over year in 2025.

As for the rest of 2026, Schuppenhauer imagines mortgage rates trending lower and “remains bullish” on the purchase market.

“We will see an overall reduction in mortgage rates. It might be a little bit slow at first, but I think as soon as we get below 6%, you’re going to see an increase in the purchase market, and you’re also going to see an increase in both cash-out as well as term refi,” he said.

“I think we only really need about 50 basis points in mortgage rates. We’re probably going to see a very vibrant purchase market.”

This post was originally published on here

Defense & Energy | Friday, April 24, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

The Pentagon signaled a major escalation in U.S. strategy toward Iran on Friday, as Secretary of Defense Pete Hegseth outlined a sweeping expansion of naval enforcement operations that now extend far beyond the Middle East, transforming what began as a regional containment effort into a global pressure campaign targeting Tehran’s economic lifelines.

Speaking at a Pentagon briefing alongside Air Force Gen. Dan Caine, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Hegseth described the operation—dubbed Operation Epic Fury—as “ironclad,” with U.S. naval forces now actively enforcing restrictions on Iranian-linked shipping routes across multiple oceans. “They can watch their regime’s fragile economic state collapse under the unrelenting pressure of American power,” Hegseth said, framing the blockade as a calculated effort to cut off Iran’s ability to export oil, generate foreign currency, and sustain core government functions.

The expanded operation reflects a strategic shift from geographic containment at the Strait of Hormuz to a broader interdiction model. U.S. Navy forces are now monitoring and, where necessary, turning back vessels tied to Iranian ports or cargo flows regardless of location. Pentagon officials confirmed that 34 non-Iranian vessels have been cleared to proceed after inspections, while multiple tankers have been stopped and boarded since enforcement began.

The global reach of the campaign was underscored this week by the interception of two Iranian “Dark Fleet” vessels in the Indo-Pacific, according to Pentagon officials. These ships—part of a loosely regulated network used to transport sanctioned oil outside traditional monitoring systems—had departed Iranian ports prior to the enforcement window but were nonetheless seized. The move signals Washington’s intent to enforce restrictions well beyond traditional chokepoints and into open ocean transit routes.

At the same time, U.S. military posture in the region continues to intensify. Hegseth confirmed that a second U.S. aircraft carrier will join the operation in the coming days, adding to an already substantial presence that includes the USS Abraham Lincoln, USS Gerald R. Ford, and USS George H.W. Bush carrier strike groups. Collectively, the deployment represents one of the largest concentrations of U.S. naval power in the region in decades, with more than 200 aircraft and approximately 15,000 personnel operating across multiple theaters.

Hegseth emphasized that the current approach is designed to achieve strategic objectives without immediate escalation into broader direct conflict. “The blockade is the polite way this can go,” he said, signaling that economic and logistical pressure is intended to force a shift in Tehran’s nuclear posture. At the same time, he made clear that military options remain active, noting U.S. forces are prepared to act if necessary under directives from President Donald Trump.

The briefing also included a firm warning on maritime security. “We will shoot to destroy. No hesitation,” Hegseth said, referring to Iranian efforts to deploy naval mines or threaten commercial shipping lanes. Pentagon officials indicated that rules of engagement have been tightened to allow rapid response against any perceived threats to international shipping, particularly in and around the Strait of Hormuz.

Energy markets are already reflecting the impact. Brent crude prices have climbed above $102 per barrel, as traders assess the risk of prolonged disruption to one of the world’s most critical energy corridors. According to data from the U.S. Energy Information Administration, roughly 20% of global oil and a significant portion of liquefied natural gas flows through the Strait of Hormuz—most of it bound for U.S. allies in Asia.

Hegseth also directed pointed remarks toward international partners, urging greater participation in enforcement efforts. “The time for free riding is over,” he said, noting that Europe and Asia remain significantly more dependent on Gulf energy flows than the United States. The comments come as several economies—including Germany and key Southeast Asian nations—face mounting energy pressures linked to ongoing disruptions.

The broader economic implications are beginning to materialize across global supply chains. Shipping costs, insurance premiums, and fuel prices have all moved higher in recent weeks, creating ripple effects for industries ranging from manufacturing to aviation. Analysts say the longer the current restrictions remain in place, the more deeply those costs will embed into global pricing structures.

For Washington, the objective remains clear: leverage economic pressure and military positioning to force a strategic recalibration in Tehran without triggering a wider conflict. For markets and multinational businesses, however, the situation introduces a new layer of uncertainty—one where geopolitical risk is directly shaping the cost and flow of global trade.

As the operation expands and additional forces come online, attention will shift to whether Iran responds through escalation, negotiation, or alternative trade channels. The outcome will not only determine the next phase of the conflict but also set the tone for how economic warfare is deployed in future geopolitical confrontations.

JBizNews Desk

FIRST ON FOX: The White House is tapping the Business Roundtable to lead corporate engagement during the United States’ upcoming G20 host year, marking a shift away from the traditional Business 20 framework historically organized by the U.S. Chamber of Commerce.

Administration officials say the decision is aimed at streamlining business participation and aligning it more closely with the Trump administration’s economic priorities, including deregulation, energy expansion and innovation-driven growth.

In a statement, White House spokesperson Olivia Wales told FOX the Business Roundtable, comprised of leading U.S. CEOs, would play a central role in advancing a pro-growth agenda during the G20 cycle.

WHITE HOUSE ACCUSES CHINA OF ‘INDUSTRIAL-SCALE’ AI TECHNOLOGY THEFT WEEKS AHEAD OF TRUMP-XI SUMMIT

“Business Roundtable, led by top U.S. CEOs, is the right choice to champion business engagement during the United States’ G20 year,” Wales said, pointing to what the administration views as a successful economic model built on trade deals, expanded domestic energy production and private-sector job creation.

PIRRO CLOSES INVESTIGATION INTO FEDERAL RESERVE OVER BUILDING PROJECT

“The president’s tried-and-true policies are a model for the entire world, and the United States looks forward to discussing how other countries can replicate this success,” she added.

Under the new structure, the Business Roundtable will host a major CEO-focused event at Trump National Doral on Dec. 12, just ahead of the G20 Leaders’ Summit scheduled for Dec. 14 and 15.

The gathering is expected to include more than 120 Business Roundtable member CEOs, along with at least one chief executive from each G20 economy and invited guest nations. Discussions will center on key themes such as growth through deregulation, energy dominance and innovation.

Additional business engagement events are planned throughout the year, including sessions tied to Business Roundtable board meetings in Washington, D.C., as well as programming alongside the G20 Finance Ministers’ meeting in Asheville, North Carolina, with Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent.

The move effectively sidelines the B20 process, which has traditionally served as the primary vehicle for business input into G20 deliberations.

OSCAR DE LA HOYA JOINS THE BATTLE ON CAPITOL HILL TO REINVENT BOXING

The B20 changes hands, led by business groups in the host country as the meeting moves around among G20 members. 

Administration officials described the existing structure as “cumbersome” and “bureaucratic,” arguing the result was unproductive.

Chamber officials tell FOX Business they agree. The B20 will still be held in a revamped format in the U.S. this year.

Jessica Boulanger, the chamber’s senior vice president and head of communications and public affairs, said in a statement to FOX Business that the organization is working to host a “B20 unlike any other.”

“We’re working with top government and business leaders to hold B20 USA in November with dialogue that will be focused on a ‘back to basics’ agenda consistent with the Trump administration’s vision,” Boulanger said.

“We welcome the engagement of the BRT and other organizations to support pro-growth dialogue between government and business,” she added.

CLICK HERE TO READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

A source familiar with the plans for the B20 told FOX Business that Ross Perot Jr. will be the chairman of this year’s conference. 

The move reflects a broader shift in how business voices are included in global economic discussions during the U.S. host year, giving top CEOs a more direct role and aligning their input more closely with the administration’s priorities.

This post was originally published here

More than three years after mortgage rates began their climb from historic lows, a subtle but significant housing market shift is underway.

Homeowners are finally letting go of sub-5% rates, “comeback buyers” are re-entering the search and regional markets are moving in opposite directions — all shaping what Coldwell Banker Real Estate calls a spring shopping season defined by cautious optimism.

The company’s 2026 Home Shopping Season Report, based on a survey of more than 700 real estate agents nationwide, found that 43% of agents are reporting a busier home shopping season than last year.

For many sellers, the decision to list is no longer about timing the market. It is about necessity, Coldwell Banker Affiliates President Jason Waugh told HousingWire.

“Life doesn’t stop, even when the marketplace has kind of been in this holding pattern the last three and a half years, almost four years,” he said. “Now, life events are dictating decisionmaking.”

Thirty-six percent of agents say sellers are listing due to personal life circumstances — job transfers, family growth, downsizing or aging in place.

Among sellers currently working with Coldwell Banker affiliated agents, 35% have mortgage rates below 5% and are still planning to sell this spring.

“So, 6.23% was the average for this week,” said Waugh. “That’s the lowest average in the last three spring markets. That’s still up significantly over a five or even a four, but ultimately, price appreciation is slowed and life events are taking shape.”

‘Comeback buyers’ return with unchanged budgets

Seventy-seven percent of agents surveyed say they are working with homebuyers who paused their search in the last two years and are now re-entering the market.

These “comeback buyers” account for about 20% of today’s home shoppers.

The majority — 75% — are returning with roughly the same budget as their initial search. Only 24% have increased their budgets, most notably in the Midwest, where many agents describe a seller’s market this spring.

“It’s never just one thing in real estate, right?” Waugh said. “There’s always going to be unique situations. One of the real interesting trends that I’m paying close attention to is multigenerational living, and that’s continuing to see an increase. Some of that is affordability, some of that is baby boomers [opting to avoid] higher costs in senior living.

“Folks are taking care of their aging parents and you also have younger adults moving back home. In some instances, it’s multiple transactions becoming one transaction in that multigenerational home.”

Buyers done waiting for lower rates

Eighty percent of agents say homebuyers this spring are actively on the market and are not waiting for mortgage rates or market conditions to improve before purchasing.

Only 20% of agents say their buyers are waiting for better conditions.

Agents in the Northeast are most likely to report working with active buyers, while those in the South are most likely to say their buyers are waiting for rates to fall.

“I think there’s an acceptance — where it’s been almost four years in this current cycle,” Waugh said. “We, as people, have a willingness to adapt to an environment that is stable. What we don’t like is uncertainty and volatility. If rates just stay stable, people can adapt. There was volatility, in both directions, up and down, for so long.

“I think there’s acceptance for the new norm. I don’t think anybody is under the illusion that rates are going to be three again, or even 4% in the near term.”

Climate risks, insurance costs

Environmental risks are becoming a bigger factor in homebuying decisions compared with just one year ago, particularly in regions most exposed to extreme weather.

Thirty-one percent of agents say climate-related risks — including home insurance costs, wildfire risks and flood zones or hurricane exposure — are a larger factor in buyer decision-making than in 2025.

That share rises to 35% in the South and 39% in the West. Only 27% of agents say climate risks rarely influence buyer behavior.

“The impact is the insurance costs,” Waugh said. “In Hawaii, Maui and Oahu, it was mandatory now for hurricane insurance. That’s a significant additional cost. It’s part of the acquisition costs. Is that really necessary, or should that be consumer choice? With respect to climate, it is really the impact it is having on costs — or if it’s even an insurable property.”

Regional divide deepens

Roughly three-in-four agents in the Midwest and Northeast characterize their markets as sellers’ markets — compared with just 13% in the South and 22% in the West.

Conversely, 56% of agents in the South and 46% in the West describe their markets as buyers’ markets.

Nationally, only a quarter of agents say their market is balanced.

“You have to blend the macro trends with the hyper local marketplace,” said Waugh. “Whether it’s from a consumer perspective or or even as a real estate professional, you have to lean into and know what is happening in your hyper local market.  Trust the local experts.”

This post was originally published on here

Senate Advances $70 Billion DHS Enforcement Plan as Shutdown Drags Past 70 Days

The U.S. Senate approved a Republican budget blueprint authorizing up to $70 billion in funding for immigration enforcement agencies, a procedural step that moves forward Donald Trump’s border agenda but leaves unresolved a record-long shutdown at the Department of Homeland Security, where funding gaps and workforce strain continue to disrupt operations across key agencies including the Transportation Security Administration.

The measure passed 50–48 following an overnight session led by John Thune, with Republican senators Lisa Murkowski and Rand Paul voting against the plan, highlighting the narrow margin facing Republican leadership as the legislation heads to the U.S. House of Representatives for approval before detailed spending legislation can be drafted.

The funding divide has exposed operational imbalances within DHS, where U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement and U.S. Customs and Border Protection employees have continued to receive pay under prior multi-year appropriations, while TSA workers remain unpaid due to reliance on annual funding cycles, a disparity that Markwayne Mullin has warned is unsustainable as emergency funds near depletion.

Under legislation passed in 2025 backed by Trump, approximately $75 billion was allocated to ICE operations over four years, including $45 billion for detention capacity and $30 billion for workforce expansion, allowing enforcement agencies to maintain payroll during the shutdown even as other DHS units, including TSA, operate without appropriated funding, according to data cited by PBS NewsHour and federal budget documents.

The consequences have been acute for TSA, where acting administrator Ha Nguyen McNeill told lawmakers that more than 838 officers have resigned since the shutdown began, with absentee rates exceeding 40% at major airports, forcing extended wait times and emergency staffing measures as workers struggled with unpaid wages and rising living costs.

In response, Trump authorized the deployment of ICE personnel to assist at major airports, a move acknowledged by border enforcement official Tom Homan, who said ICE agents lack specialized training for screening operations but could support perimeter and crowd management as TSA staffing levels deteriorated.

The shutdown, which began on February 14 after a continuing resolution expired, has been shaped by competing policy demands following fatal enforcement incidents that prompted Democratic lawmakers to seek operational restrictions on immigration agencies, including warrant requirements and expanded oversight measures, proposals that Republican leadership rejected as limiting enforcement authority.

Mike Johnson has aligned with conservative members of his conference, including Andy Harris, in opposing any partial funding bill that excludes ICE and CBP, arguing that separating enforcement funding risks weakening border security efforts, a stance that has stalled bipartisan appropriations legislation already passed by the Senate.

At the same time, Senate Budget Committee Chair Lindsey Graham is advancing a reconciliation strategy that would allow immigration enforcement funding to pass with a simple majority, bypassing Democratic opposition, though the narrow Senate margin leaves little room for additional defections following the Murkowski and Paul votes.

Financial pressure is mounting as DHS emergency reserves dwindle, with Mullin warning that available funds — estimated at roughly $1.4 billion as of mid-April according to the Office of Management and Budget — are insufficient to cover the department’s approximately $1.6 billion biweekly payroll beyond early May, raising the risk of renewed payment disruptions even after temporary relief measures.

Republican lawmakers, including Senate Appropriations Committee Chair Susan Collins, have criticized Democrats for linking funding to policy conditions, arguing that failure to fund enforcement agencies undermines national security, while the DHS press office has described the situation as avoidable and damaging to frontline workers.

Democratic leaders, led by Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer and House Minority Leader Hakeem Jeffries, have countered that the shutdown stems from Republican insistence on expanding enforcement funding without accompanying reforms, with Schumer warning that Congress should not approve what he described as “blank check” funding for immigration agencies.

The legislative path forward requires the House to adopt the Senate’s blueprint before committees can draft reconciliation legislation, a process that must navigate Senate rules limiting non-budgetary provisions, while any changes by House lawmakers would require renewed Senate approval, extending timelines amid already strained agency operations.

Operational challenges are also intensifying ahead of the 2026 FIFA World Cup, where TSA expects a surge in passenger traffic, with agency officials noting that new hires require up to six months of training, limiting the ability to offset workforce attrition in the near term.

For financial markets and industries tied to travel and logistics, the prolonged shutdown introduces uncertainty around airport throughput, labor availability, and federal operations, while lawmakers in both parties face increasing pressure to resolve the impasse before funding gaps deepen and operational disruptions expand further across the homeland security system.

JBizNews Desk


The U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) on Friday dropped its investigation into the Federal Reserve regarding Jerome Powell’s congressional testimony on the central bank’s headquarters renovation. The decision could ease the path for Kevin Warsh‘s confirmation as Powell’s successor.

Jeanine Pirro, U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia, announced that she’s closing the investigation and directing the Fed’s internal watchdog to review the matter.

“This morning the Inspector General for the Federal Reserve has been asked to scrutinize the building costs overruns — in the billions of dollars — that have been borne by taxpayers,” Pirro said in a post on X. “Accordingly, I have directed my office to close our investigation as the IG undertakes this inquiry. Note well, however, that I will not hesitate to restart a criminal investigation should the facts warrant doing so.”

The move comes days after Warsh, President Donald Trump’s nominee to serve as the 17th Fed chairman, faced sharp questioning at his Senate confirmation hearing. Warsh told lawmakers he would not be the president’s “sock puppet” on interest rate decisions.

During the hearing, Sen. Thom Tillis (R-N.C.) pledged to block any Fed nominees until the DOJ completed its probe of Powell. Tillis expressed disdain for the investigation while acknowledging Warsh’s “extraordinary credentials.”

The likelihood of Warsh’s confirmation stood at 85% before May 15 and 95% before June 1 as of 11 a.m. ET on Friday, according to the federally regulated prediction market Kalshi.

Meanwhile, data from the CME Group‘s FedWatch Tool on Friday shows a growing share of market participants who expect rate cuts starting in July, although most project rates will remain unchanged for the rest of the year.

In March, federal judge James E. Boasberg blocked DOJ subpoenas served to the Fed. He concluded the effort appeared designed to “harass and pressure” Powell to lower interest rates or resign.

Pirro called the decision “outrageous” and pledged to appeal. The judge later denied her office’s request to reconsider the ruling.

The DOJ served the Fed with grand jury subpoenas in January, threatening a criminal indictment against Powell. The dispute centered on Powell’s testimony regarding the Fed’s $2.5 billion headquarters renovation, but Powell stated in a video that the renovation concerns were merely a pretext for the subpoenas.

Editor’s note: This is a developing story and will be updated with more information.

This post was originally published on here

Extell Development this week filed plans for an 86-story residential tower on the Upper West Side, advancing a proposal for the neighborhood’s next tallest building. Plans filed Wednesday with the city’s Department of Buildings (DOB) call for a 1,200-foot-tall tower with 430 apartments at 80 West 67th Street, also known as 77 West 66th Street, on the former Disney campus. The project would surpass Extell’s tower across the street at 55 West 66th Street by more than 400 feet, becoming the tallest building in the neighborhood.

Photo © Ondel Hylton

The plan calls for 25,000 square feet of retail space, 187 enclosed parking spaces, and amenity spaces. The proposal details a slightly smaller project than the 90-story building depicted in massing diagrams last spring, when Landmark West and Manhattan Community Board 7 urged the Department of City Planning to amend the site’s zoning to require affordable housing.

The site qualifies for “as of right” development under existing rules, meaning that the project does not require a special permit or variance by the City Planning Commission. The city granted the designation decades ago as part of its effort to attract ABC to the Upper West Side, as reported by West Side Rag.

Extell CEO Gary Barnett last year appeared before Community Board 7 and said he could build more than 100 affordable units across two smaller buildings in an effort to avoid a prolonged legal battle like the one tied to the company’s project at 50 West 66th Street.

Council Member Gale Brewer and the community board pushed for additional affordable housing, with Brewer saying any affordability should be permanent and on-site.

The filing marks the latest addition to the former Disney/ABC campus, which Extell purchased in 2022 along with a nearby site at 54 West 67th Street for a combined $931 million from Silverstein Properties and Seven Valleys, according to The Spirit.

In January, the firm filed plans for a 25-story, 58-unit tower at 37 West 66th Street. The 355-foot-tall structure will span about 231,000 square feet and include ground-floor retail space in addition to the residential component.

Extell filed plans to demolish the 14-story, nearly 300,000-square-foot commercial building at the site in early 2025, as 6sqft previously reported. The site is expected to contain 158 residential units in total, suggesting Extell plans to build at least one additional structure on the lot. Other buildings slated for the site include a 9-story, 50-unit building at 30 West 67th Street, and a 7-story, 31-unit building at 7 West 66th Street.

RELATED:

The post Extell files plans for 86-story, 430-unit apartment building on the Upper West Side first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. Department of Justice on Friday dropped its criminal investigation into Jerome Powell, removing a major obstacle to the Senate confirmation of Kevin Warsh and intensifying scrutiny over the future direction of U.S. monetary policy at the Federal Reserve, where leadership turnover now appears imminent.

Jeanine Pirro said her office would close the probe and shift oversight of a multibillion-dollar renovation of Federal Reserve buildings to the central bank’s inspector general, stating in a public post that the review would assess “building cost overruns — in the billions of dollars — that have been borne by taxpayers,” while warning the Justice Department could reopen the case if new facts emerge.

The reversal by the Justice Department came days after Pirro indicated the investigation remained active, underscoring the political sensitivity surrounding the Federal Reserve as Donald Trump has pressed for lower interest rates, with the probe having focused on a renovation project approved by the Fed’s Board of Governors in 2017 that grew from roughly $1.9 billion to $2.5 billion, according to figures cited by the Federal Reserve and reported by major outlets including NBC News.

Powell, who has led the Federal Reserve since 2018, said earlier this year that subpoenas issued by prosecutors should be viewed in the context of broader pressure from the administration, while a federal prosecutor acknowledged in court that there was no evidence of criminal wrongdoing, a dynamic that raised concerns among economists and policymakers about potential encroachment on central bank independence.

The decision has immediate implications for the Senate Banking Committee, where Thom Tillis had blocked Warsh’s nomination, telling the nominee during a confirmation hearing that ending the investigation was a prerequisite for his support, effectively halting progress in a closely divided committee controlled by Republicans.

Tim Scott, chairman of the Senate Banking Committee, said in a CNBC interview that shifting oversight to the Federal Reserve’s inspector general would allow lawmakers to access more information while advancing the nomination, adding that findings from the review could still lead to further action if warranted, including potential criminal referrals.

The White House, through spokesperson Kush Desai, said the inspector general review would provide “answers about the Federal Reserve’s fiscal mismanagement,” while expressing confidence that the Senate would move quickly to confirm Warsh, a former Fed governor who has advocated changes to the central bank’s approach to interest rates and balance sheet policy.

Democratic lawmakers sharply criticized the move, with Elizabeth Warren arguing that closing the probe while leaving open the possibility of reopening it creates ongoing pressure on the Federal Reserve, warning that the development reflects broader efforts to influence monetary policy decisions at a time of heightened economic uncertainty.

The dispute has also intersected with a separate legal battle involving Lisa Cook, whose position has been challenged by the administration, highlighting the extent to which the Federal Reserve’s leadership structure has become a focal point of political contention in Washington.

Warsh, who served as a Federal Reserve governor from 2006 to 2011 and was originally nominated by President George W. Bush, told lawmakers during his confirmation hearing that “monetary policy independence is essential,” while signaling that he would pursue what he described as a shift in how the central bank conducts policy, including a greater reliance on interest rates rather than large-scale asset purchases.

The Federal Reserve’s balance sheet, which remains near $6.7 trillion following years of quantitative easing, has been a central point of criticism for Warsh, who previously opposed expansionary policies during his tenure and has indicated he may scale back forward guidance and public communications practices introduced under Powell.

Market participants are now assessing whether Warsh would align with the administration’s push for rate cuts or maintain a more traditional, inflation-focused stance, with Janet Yellen noting in recent remarks that any significant policy shift would require consensus within the Federal Open Market Committee, which includes multiple voting members beyond the chair.

The economic backdrop further complicates expectations, as policymakers at the Federal Reserve continue to monitor inflation pressures tied to geopolitical developments and trade policy, factors that have led the central bank under Powell to maintain elevated interest rates longer than many market participants had anticipated.

Powell’s term as chair is set to expire on May 15, though he could remain on the Federal Reserve’s Board of Governors through 2028, leaving open questions about continuity and influence within the institution as leadership transitions unfold.

The Federal Reserve’s Office of Inspector General said it is actively reviewing the renovation project and expects to provide findings to Congress and the public, a process that could shape perceptions of governance at the central bank even as the immediate legal threat has receded.

For financial markets, the end of the Justice Department probe removes a key source of uncertainty that had weighed on expectations for monetary policy leadership, but investors are likely to focus closely on signals from Warsh and lawmakers in the coming weeks as the confirmation process advances and the Federal Reserve approaches a pivotal transition.

JBizNews Desk


Technology | Friday, April 24, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

Alphabet Inc. is making one of the largest single bets in artificial intelligence history, confirming Friday it will invest up to $40 billion in Anthropic, the rapidly scaling AI company behind the Claude model family, in a deal that values Anthropic at approximately $350 billion and underscores the intensifying global race for compute power, talent, and enterprise dominance.

The structure of the agreement reflects both urgency and caution. Alphabet Inc. (NASDAQ: GOOGL) will deploy $10 billion in immediate capital, with an additional $30 billion tied to performance milestones, effectively linking the bulk of its investment to Anthropic’s continued growth trajectory. Alongside the capital infusion, Google is committing a massive infrastructure package through Google Cloud, providing up to 5 gigawatts of computing capacity over five years—one of the largest known AI compute allocations ever structured between two companies.

Central to that infrastructure are Google’s proprietary Tensor Processing Units (TPUs), advanced AI accelerators designed to rival Nvidia’s dominant GPUs. Under the agreement, Anthropic has committed to purchasing up to one million TPUs, a move that not only secures its own compute future but also positions Google as a direct challenger to Nvidia in the high-stakes AI hardware market.

Krishna Rao, Chief Financial Officer of Anthropic, described the agreement as a continuation of a deepening alliance. “We are making our most significant compute commitment to date to keep pace with our unprecedented growth,” Rao said, emphasizing that demand for Claude has accelerated faster than internal capacity could support. Anthropic confirmed the deal expands on a previously disclosed partnership with Broadcom Inc. (NASDAQ: AVGO) and Google that secured 3.5 gigawatts of compute capacity expected to come online in 2027.

The announcement lands just days after another major capital injection reshaped Anthropic’s trajectory. On April 20, Amazon.com Inc. (NASDAQ: AMZN) said it would invest up to an additional $25 billion into the company—$5 billion upfront and $20 billion tied to commercial milestones—bringing Amazon’s total commitment to as much as $33 billion when including earlier investments dating back to 2023. In return, Anthropic agreed to spend more than $100 billion over the next decade on Amazon Web Services, including its proprietary Trainium and Graviton AI chips.

Taken together, the Google and Amazon deals give Anthropic access to more than 8 gigawatts of contracted compute capacity across multiple platforms, placing it firmly among the top tier of AI developers alongside Microsoft Corp. (NASDAQ: MSFT) and OpenAI, as well as Google’s own internal Gemini platform. The scale of these commitments highlights a defining reality of the AI era: success is increasingly dictated not just by model performance, but by access to vast, reliable computing infrastructure.

The competitive dynamics behind these investments are unusually complex. Google is simultaneously building and promoting Gemini while backing Anthropic’s Claude, and Amazon is funding both Anthropic and OpenAI. Industry analysts say this reflects a deliberate hedging strategy by hyperscale cloud providers. By securing deep partnerships across multiple frontier AI labs, companies like Google and Amazon ensure that whichever models dominate the market, their infrastructure remains indispensable.

Anthropic’s growth trajectory helps explain the scale of the spending. The company confirmed it has surpassed $30 billion in annualized run-rate revenue, up sharply from roughly $9 billion at the end of 2025—a more than threefold increase in under six months. That surge has forced the company to lock in long-term compute agreements to avoid being constrained by hardware shortages, a problem that has already slowed competitors in earlier stages of the AI boom.

Markets reacted positively to the news. Shares of Alphabet Inc. rose roughly 1.25% intraday following reports of the investment, while Amazon.com Inc. gained 2.82% and Broadcom Inc. edged higher, reflecting investor confidence in the expanding ecosystem of AI infrastructure demand that benefits chipmakers and cloud providers alike.

For Google, the strategic logic extends beyond equity upside. Anthropic’s Claude models are gaining traction across enterprise software, legal workflows, financial analysis platforms, and developer tools—areas where they increasingly compete directly with Gemini. By serving as both a major investor and Anthropic’s primary compute provider, Google effectively monetizes that competition. Even if Claude captures enterprise market share, the underlying infrastructure demand flows through Google Cloud.

The result is a structural shift in how competition is defined in the AI industry. Instead of a zero-sum battle between model developers, the emerging landscape allows dominant infrastructure providers to win regardless of which AI system leads. In that environment, compute capacity—not just algorithms—has become the most valuable currency.

With tens of billions now committed across multiple alliances, the next phase of the AI race will likely be defined by execution: how quickly companies like Anthropic can translate unprecedented access to capital and compute into durable enterprise adoption. As the scale of investment continues to climb, the line between competitor and partner is increasingly blurred—reshaping not just the AI industry, but the broader structure of global technology markets.

JBizNews Desk

Energy | Friday, April 24, 2026 | JBizNews Desk

The closure of the Strait of Hormuz is rapidly redrawing the map of global commerce, forcing companies to pay unprecedented sums—up to $4 million—for expedited access through the Panama Canal, according to Ricaurte Vásquez, Administrator of the Panama Canal Authority, as supply chains strain under the weight of a prolonged geopolitical shock.

What was once a predictable, tariff-based transit system has turned into a high-stakes bidding war. Under standard conditions, vessels secure canal crossings through advance reservations at fixed rates. But with the Middle East’s most critical energy corridor effectively shut, shippers are flooding the auction market for last-minute slots—driving prices to levels rarely seen in modern maritime trade. Several energy firms have paid more than $3 million above base transit fees to fast-track shipments, underscoring the urgency gripping global logistics networks.

“They decide how high a price to go,” Vásquez said, emphasizing that the record-breaking bids reflect individual companies’ willingness to absorb extraordinary costs rather than face delays amid volatile energy markets. He noted that while pricing has surged, the canal itself is not experiencing unusual congestion, allowing the authority to capitalize on demand without operational bottlenecks. The result is a sharp increase in canal revenues, even as global trade becomes more unstable.

At the center of the disruption is the Strait of Hormuz, historically one of the most vital arteries in global energy transport. Roughly 20% of the world’s oil supply and up to 30% of global jet fuel shipments pass through the narrow waterway, according to data from the U.S. Energy Information Administration. Since late February, however, escalating military activity tied to U.S. and Israeli operations against Iran has either closed or severely restricted passage, forcing a systemic rerouting of global shipping flows.

That rerouting has elevated the Panama Canal from a strategic shortcut to a critical pressure valve for global trade. Tankers and cargo ships that would typically traverse the Persian Gulf are now navigating longer, more complex routes across the Atlantic and Pacific, often relying on the canal to maintain delivery timelines. The shift is not merely logistical—it is fundamentally economic, reshaping cost structures across multiple industries.

The financial ripple effects are already cascading through the system. Maritime insurers have sharply increased premiums for vessels operating near the Gulf, with some underwriters effectively withdrawing coverage for high-risk routes, according to market participants cited by Lloyd’s of London. Meanwhile, tanker charter rates for alternative routes have more than doubled in recent weeks, reflecting both heightened demand and elevated risk exposure.

Beyond the Atlantic-Pacific corridor, pressure is building in other global chokepoints. Policymakers in Southeast Asia are now openly discussing the possibility of imposing transit tolls through the Strait of Malacca, one of the world’s busiest shipping lanes, as governments assess how to manage surging traffic volumes and infrastructure strain. The mere consideration of such fees highlights how deeply the current crisis is reverberating across interconnected trade routes.

For U.S. businesses, the consequences are beginning to show up closer to home. Higher transportation costs, longer delivery times, and surging insurance premiums are feeding directly into supply chains, placing upward pressure on consumer prices. Data cited by CBS News indicates that U.S. food prices have already risen nearly 20% since the conflict began, a reflection of both energy-driven cost increases and disrupted global distribution networks.

Major multinational corporations are facing particularly acute challenges. Complex logistics systems built around just-in-time delivery are being forced to adapt in real time, often at significant expense. Each additional week of disruption in the Strait of Hormuz is estimated to add hundreds of millions of dollars in cumulative costs across fuel, freight, and insurance, according to industry analysts tracking the crisis.

The broader implication is clear: global trade is entering a period of structural recalibration. The Panama Canal’s surge pricing is not simply a short-term anomaly but a visible indicator of a deeper shift in how goods, energy, and capital move around the world under geopolitical stress.

As long as the Strait of Hormuz remains compromised, the strain on alternative routes—and the premium placed on access to them—is likely to intensify. What began as a regional conflict has now evolved into a global economic shock, with the cost of moving goods becoming one of the clearest measures of its reach.

JBizNews Desk

German Chancellor Friedrich Merz has unveiled a €1.6 billion ($1.9 billion) fuel relief package aimed at shielding households and businesses from surging energy costs triggered by the Iran conflict, as Europe’s largest economy grapples with the growing fallout from global supply disruptions.

The package, announced following coalition discussions within the German Federal Government, includes temporary reductions in fuel taxes and provisions allowing employers to provide tax-free bonuses to workers. The measures are designed to offset rising inflation and stabilize economic activity amid a rapidly shifting energy landscape.

“The war is the root cause of the problems we face,” Friedrich Merz said, directly linking Germany’s economic challenges to disruptions in global oil markets. His remarks underscore the extent to which geopolitical developments are influencing domestic policy decisions.

Fuel prices across Europe have surged following disruptions tied to the Strait of Hormuz, according to data from the International Energy Agency (IEA). Germany, as a major industrial economy, is particularly sensitive to energy costs, which feed directly into production, transportation, and consumer prices.

Economic forecasts are already being revised downward. Leading institutions including the Ifo Institute and DIW Berlin have cut their outlook for Germany’s 2026 growth, citing higher energy costs and weakening industrial output.

Katherina Reiche, Germany’s Economy Minister, is pushing additional support measures, including expanded subsidies for energy-intensive industries, highlighting concerns about competitiveness and employment.

The impact extends beyond Germany. Governments across Asia, including the Philippines Department of Energy, have declared energy emergencies, while countries such as Thailand have introduced conservation measures and remote work policies to reduce fuel consumption.

Despite the scale of intervention, Friedrich Merz acknowledged the limits of government action. “The state cannot absorb all uncertainties, not all risks, not all disruptions,” he said, signaling that further economic adjustments are likely.

Critics argue that the package is a short-term solution to a structural problem, as Europe continues to grapple with dependence on global energy markets. At the same time, fiscal constraints limit the government’s ability to provide broader support without undermining long-term policy goals.

The broader implication is clear: the Iran conflict is no longer a regional issue — it is a global economic shock affecting growth, inflation, and policy decisions across continents.

For Germany, the coming months will test its ability to navigate that reality while maintaining economic stability.

The energy crisis is evolving — and its full impact is still unfolding.

JbizNews Desk – Europe

FIRST ON FOX – The U.S. Small Business Association referred 562,000 suspected fraudulent loans totaling over $22.2 billion to the U.S. Department of Treasury for collections, the SBA said in a Friday statement. 

“From Day One, the Trump SBA has worked tirelessly to crack down on billions in pandemic-era fraud that the Biden Administration forgave or ignored,” SBA Administrator Kelly Loeffler told Fox News Digital in a statement. 

The loans, largely stemming from the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) and the COVID Economic Injury Disaster loan program, were flagged for suspected fraud during former President Joe Biden’s administration but never sent to Treasury for collections, the SBA said in its statement. 

The SBA accused former President Joe Biden of deliberately protecting suspected fraudsters by refusing to refer them to Treasury.

“For years, the Biden Administration shielded these borrowers from debt collectors as part of a de facto amnesty scheme – but today, they will finally face accountability. The SBA is deeply grateful to the U.S. Department of the Treasury for its partnership in this historic action, and we look forward to continued collaboration as we work to claw back stolen taxpayer dollars and hold fraudsters accountable,” Loeffler said.

In addition to referring the loans to Treasury, the SBA has also referred the borrowers to the U.S. Department of Justice. 

The SBA is legally required to refer delinquent debts to Treasury but, according to the SBA announcement, none of the 560,000 borrowers had been compelled to repay the $22.2 billion they owed and less than 1,000 were facing investigations from the SBA’s Office of Inspector General. 

“Over $22 billion. We mean business. If you commit fraud, we will find you,” a senior White House official told Fox News Digital.

FEDS MISTAKENLY GAVE AWAY $692M IN DUPLICATE PPP LOANS

The effort to refer the loans and seek repayment from the borrowers is being led by the White House Task Force to Eliminate Fraud, which is helmed by Vice President JD Vance and Federal Trade Commission Chair Andrew Ferguson. 

“Finding and going after these billions of dollars was only possible with the task force’s whole of government effort. The Vice President is proud of the several milestones the task force has already achieved, and it’s only the beginning,” a spokesperson for Vance told Fox News Digital.

The sweeping fraud referrals are part of a broader anti-graft push overseen by Vance and his task force. In conjunction with the task force, the SBA is now pinpointing a wide swath of potential pandemic loan fraud.

LOEFFLER TARGETS $50B SBA PROGRAM THAT HAS ‘NEVER BEEN LOOKED AT,’ BANS 112K-PLUS COVID LOAN FRAUDSTERS

“Research findings show over 1,000,000 suspicious Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) loans,” Vance wrote in a memo on the first day of his task force.

The administration estimates that of the $1.2 trillion in PPP and EIDL loans the SBA approved between 2020-2021, at least $200 billion is fraudulent, the agency wrote in its Friday memo.

The SBA has launched new measures to crack down on fraud, including citizenship and birthdate verifications and a state-by-state investigation into fraudsters, according to an early April memo

The agency has already suspended nearly 112,000 borrowers suspected of obtaining fraudulent loans in California and Minnesota.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Fox News Digital contacted the Department of the Treasury, the Small Business Association, and the Federal Trade Commission for comment but did not immediately receive a response. 

This post was originally published here

Global equity markets have staged a powerful rebound from early geopolitical shocks, climbing back to record highs even as the Iran conflict continues and energy markets remain volatile — a divergence that is drawing increasing concern from central bankers and market strategists.

The MSCI World Index, tracked by MSCI Inc., has fully erased losses tied to the outbreak of hostilities and pushed to new highs, reflecting a rapid shift in investor sentiment. On Wall Street, the S&P 500 and Nasdaq Composite, according to data from Bloomberg, recently reached fresh intraday records, supported by strong corporate earnings and easing fears of worst-case scenarios.

Much of the rally has been driven by a reversal in positioning. Billy Leung, investment strategist at Global X ETFs, said investors who had moved into defensive assets during the early stages of the conflict quickly reversed course as ceasefire expectations improved. “That repositioning has done most of the heavy lifting,” he said.

A similar view was expressed by Ray Farris, chief economist at Eastspring Investments, who noted that markets have largely discounted extreme outcomes. “Investors are taking out worst-case scenarios, particularly around oil prices, and refocusing on earnings,” he said in remarks reported by CNBC.

Corporate performance has reinforced the bullish outlook. Data from FactSet shows that a significant majority of S&P 500 companies reporting this earnings season have exceeded both profit and revenue expectations, providing a strong fundamental backdrop for equity valuations.

However, warnings are growing louder. Sarah Breeden, Deputy Governor at the Bank of England, told the BBC that markets may be underestimating risk. “There’s a lot of risk out there and yet asset prices are at all-time highs,” she said. “We expect there will be an adjustment at some point.”

Other strategists share that concern. Kristina Hooper of Man Group has expressed skepticism about the sustainability of the rally, while Craig Johnson of Piper Sandler warned that market technicals are becoming increasingly fragile following the rapid shift from oversold to overbought conditions.

Energy prices remain a key risk factor. Oil continues to trade at elevated levels amid uncertainty surrounding the Strait of Hormuz, and any renewed escalation could quickly reverse recent gains in equities.

The divergence between market performance and underlying macro risks is becoming more pronounced. While investors are betting that the worst of the geopolitical shock has passed, policymakers are signaling that volatility may not be fully priced in.

For now, momentum remains with the bulls. But as warnings from institutions like the Bank of England intensify, the sustainability of the rally is coming under increasing scrutiny.

Markets have proven resilient — but whether that resilience reflects strength or complacency remains an open question.

JBizNews Desk- World Markets

A stark warning from inside the artificial intelligence industry is sending new shockwaves through corporate America and policy circles, as Dario Amodei, CEO of Anthropic, cautioned that rapid advances in AI could eliminate a significant share of entry-level white-collar jobs within the next five years — potentially pushing U.S. unemployment to levels not seen in decades.

Speaking in an interview covered by Fortune and other major outlets, Dario Amodei said that the same systems driving unprecedented productivity gains are also poised to replace core functions traditionally handled by junior employees. Tasks such as data analysis, report drafting, and research synthesis — long considered foundational to early-career roles — are increasingly being handled by AI systems with growing accuracy and efficiency.

The sectors most exposed include finance, consulting, and technology, where entry-level employees typically perform structured, repeatable work. According to Dario Amodei, these are precisely the types of tasks that AI systems excel at. “The capabilities are improving faster than many people expected,” he said, warning that initial augmentation of jobs could quickly transition into outright replacement.

Early indicators suggest the shift is already underway. Data from venture capital firm SignalFire shows that hiring of new graduates by major technology companies has declined sharply compared with pre-pandemic levels. Meanwhile, outplacement firm Challenger, Gray & Christmas reported that tens of thousands of layoffs in 2025 were directly linked to AI-driven efficiency measures.

Academic research reinforces the concern. A study by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) found that AI systems are already capable of performing tasks associated with a meaningful portion of the U.S. workforce, with potential cost savings reaching into the trillions annually. These findings suggest that the economic incentives for automation are only increasing.

Anthropic’s own internal research provides a detailed map of exposure. Peter McCrory, head of economics at Anthropic, said the company’s analysis of real-world usage data shows roles such as software developers, financial analysts, and customer service representatives among the most vulnerable. “The impact of this technology will be shaped by the choices that we make,” he said.

Despite the risks, Dario Amodei emphasized that AI also offers significant upside, including breakthroughs in medicine, energy, and scientific discovery. But he stressed that these benefits do not negate the need for preparation. “We may indeed have a serious employment challenge,” he said, particularly as the pipeline for entry-level roles begins to shrink.

For businesses, the shift presents a strategic dilemma. Companies must balance the immediate cost advantages of automation with the long-term need to develop talent. Without entry-level roles, the traditional pathway for training future leaders becomes uncertain.

For policymakers, the challenge is even more complex. The speed of AI adoption is outpacing existing frameworks for workforce development and economic policy, raising questions about education, retraining, and potential safety nets.

The timeline, according to Dario Amodei, is no longer theoretical. The transformation is already underway — and accelerating.

The question now is not whether AI will reshape the labor market, but how quickly — and whether institutions are prepared for the scale of disruption ahead.

JBizNews Desk- Technology

As more Americans take a hands-on approach to their finances, many are weighing whether to invest in exchange-traded funds (ETFs) or mutual funds.

Both offer a simple way to build a diversified portfolio of stocks or bonds, and at their core, the two investment vehicles are very similar. But key differences – including how they trade and how they are taxed – can shape long-term returns, experts say.

“When investors compare ETFs and mutual funds, it’s important to start with what they have in common: both are professionally managed portfolios that provide diversified exposure to stocks or bonds,” Kathy Kellert, head of index equity product at Vanguard, told FOX Business. “The biggest differences for investors come down to how the funds are bought and sold and how taxes are handled.”

WHAT ARE ACTIVE ETFS AND HOW ARE THEY RESHAPING HOW AMERICANS INVEST?

While ETFs trade throughout the day on exchanges – like stocks – with prices that fluctuate in real time, mutual funds are priced once daily after the market closes.

“An ETF is best thought of as a mutual fund that trades on an exchange like shares of stock,” Dan Sotiroff, associate director of U.S. passive strategies research at Morningstar, told FOX Business.

Because of that structure, ETFs can trade at slight premiums or discounts to the value of their underlying holdings, though Sotiroff noted the gap is typically “very small and inconsequential.”

Taxes are another major consideration.

ETFs use a structure that allows many transactions, like rebalancing, to take place without triggering taxable capital gains. Mutual funds, on the other hand, may distribute those gains to investors in the year they are realized, according to Kellert and Sotiroff.

A BEGINNER-FRIENDLY ETF PORTFOLIO THAT REQUIRES ALMOST NO MAINTENANCE AND DELIVERS LONG-TERM RESULTS

“All things equal, ETFs are more tax efficient than mutual funds,” Sotiroff said. “ETF investors will still have to pay capital gains taxes when they sell their shares, so ETF investors are really deferring capital gains, not avoiding them. The advantage is that ETF investors can choose when to realize those gains while mutual fund investors have less control.”

Will Rhind, CEO of GraniteShares, described ETFs as a “new technology” compared to the “old technology” of mutual funds.

“ETFs are, generally speaking, cheaper, more tax efficient, provide much broader choice and are, of course, liquid,” Rhind told FOX Business.

Unlike many mutual funds, which may require minimum investments of $1,000 or more, ETFs can often be purchased for the price of a single share or even a fraction of one, according to Rhind.

COULD S&P 500 ETFS ALONE FUND YOUR ENTIRE RETIREMENT?

However, experts say that choosing between ETFs and mutual funds ultimately depends on the investor.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“For many investors, the tax efficiency, intraday trading and transparency of ETFs… make them a compelling choice. For others – particularly for retirement accounts, where the tax efficiency is not an impact – [mutual funds] allow dollar investing versus share prices and are a long-standing choice,” Riz Hussain, senior investment portfolio strategist at Schwab Asset Management, told FOX Business.

Kellert added, “What matters most is not the wrapper, but whether the fund aligns with an investor’s goals, time horizon and comfort level. When used thoughtfully, both ETFs and mutual funds can play an important role in a well-diversified portfolio.”

This post was originally published here

The most definitive rejection yet of a potential airline mega-merger came this week, as American Airlines CEO Robert Isom publicly dismissed any combination with United Airlines, calling the proposal “a non-starter” and fundamentally anti-competitive.

Speaking to CNBC’s Phil LeBeau, Robert Isom of American Airlines (NASDAQ: AAL) made his position unmistakably clear. “The idea of the two largest airlines in the world getting together — there is no way to view that as anything but anti-competitive,” he said, emphasizing that such a deal would ultimately harm consumers, employees, and the broader industry.

The proposal, initially floated by United Airlines CEO Scott Kirby, had sparked speculation earlier this year that a transformational consolidation could reshape the global aviation landscape. According to data from OAG, a combined airline would control approximately 40% of U.S. domestic capacity — an unprecedented level of market concentration.

Legal experts quickly cast doubt on the feasibility of the deal. George Hay of Cornell University described the proposal as “the biggest [antitrust case] of all time,” noting that it would face overwhelming regulatory resistance under current U.S. competition laws.

Political opposition has also been swift. President Donald Trump, speaking on CNBC’s Squawk Box, stated plainly, “I don’t like having them merge,” reinforcing expectations that federal regulators would block any such transaction.

Operational hurdles further complicate the picture. Analyst Tom Fitzgerald of TD Cowen estimated that hundreds of overlapping routes would need to be divested, while capacity limits imposed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) at major hubs such as Chicago O’Hare would constrain expansion opportunities.

Despite rejecting a merger with United, Robert Isom indicated that American Airlines remains open to more targeted strategic opportunities. He pointed to the company’s history of partnerships, including its relationship with Alaska Airlines, as potential avenues for growth.

The timing of the merger discussion reflects broader pressures across the aviation sector. Jet fuel prices have surged amid the Iran conflict, with data from Platts showing significant increases, while carriers worldwide are grappling with rising costs and shifting demand patterns.

European airlines are already feeling the strain. Lufthansa has cut tens of thousands of flights as fuel costs surge, underscoring the global impact of the current energy environment.

For American Airlines, the strategy remains focused on independence — strengthening its financial position, expanding premium offerings, and maintaining its competitive standing across key markets.

The broader message from Robert Isom is clear: while consolidation may continue in more limited forms, mega-mergers that fundamentally reshape the competitive landscape face nearly insurmountable barriers.

JBizNews Desk

A strong start to first-quarter earnings season is giving investors fresh evidence that large banks and key technology suppliers entered 2026 with more momentum than many expected. According to Reuters and company filings released over the past week, results from Goldman Sachs, JPMorgan Chase and Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. pointed to resilient trading activity, steady corporate demand and continued spending tied to artificial intelligence infrastructure, even as executives kept warning that the macro backdrop remains uncertain.

At Goldman Sachs, Chief Executive David Solomon said in the bank’s earnings release that the firm delivered “very strong results” in the quarter, with performance supported by its markets and investment banking businesses. In its official statement, Goldman Sachs reported net revenue of $14.2 billion and net earnings of $4.1 billion for the first quarter, figures that marked one of the firm’s strongest quarterly showings in recent years and exceeded analyst expectations cited by Bloomberg and Reuters. The results suggested that market volatility, often a drag on sentiment, instead created opportunities for the biggest trading franchises.

JPMorgan Chase reinforced that picture a day later, with Chief Executive Jamie Dimon saying in the bank’s earnings release that “the U.S. economy remained resilient” even though geopolitical and inflation risks still require caution. According to Reuters and the company’s filing, the bank posted better-than-expected profit as higher investment-banking fees and solid trading revenue helped offset pressure in other areas. Dimon also said the bank continues to monitor “a range of significant uncertainties,” a reminder that strong quarterly numbers do not eliminate concerns over rates, regulation and global growth.

The most closely watched read-through for the technology sector came from Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., whose numbers added to optimism around AI-related demand. In its quarterly statement, TSMC said first-quarter revenue rose sharply from a year earlier, while net income also climbed well above market forecasts. Chief Executive C.C. Wei said on the company’s earnings call, according to a transcript and reporting from CNBC and Reuters, that “AI-related demand continues to be very strong,” even as the company kept an eye on broader semiconductor cyclicality. That comment mattered because TSMC sits at the center of the global chip supply chain for advanced processors used in data centers.

The company’s outlook carried equal weight with markets. C.C. Wei said TSMC expects full-year revenue growth in the mid-20% range in U.S. dollar terms, according to the company’s investor materials, and he added that demand for leading-edge process technologies remains robust. Financial Times and Reuters both noted that the guidance helped reassure investors that spending by cloud companies on AI servers and accelerators continues despite questions about whether the pace can hold. For executives across the semiconductor ecosystem, that outlook offered a practical signal that capital expenditure plans tied to AI infrastructure remain intact.

Those early reports matter beyond the companies themselves because they shape expectations for the broader S&P 500 earnings season. Analysts at LSEG, cited by Reuters, have said investors entered the reporting period looking for confirmation that profit growth can broaden beyond a handful of mega-cap technology names. Bank of America strategist Savita Subramanian said in a recent client note, as reported by Bloomberg, that the market increasingly needs “earnings delivery” rather than multiple expansion to sustain gains. In that sense, strong bank and chip results serve as an early test of whether corporate America can justify elevated equity valuations.

The banking numbers also offered a read on the health of corporate and consumer activity. JPMorgan executives said in prepared remarks that credit trends remained broadly stable, while Goldman Sachs pointed to improved dealmaking conditions compared with the more subdued environment of recent quarters. Associated Press and Reuters both highlighted that major lenders benefited from client activity in fixed income, currencies and equities as investors repositioned around shifting expectations for interest rates. That dynamic matters for boards and finance chiefs because it suggests capital markets remain open, even if borrowing costs stay relatively high.

For technology investors, TSMC’s results added to a growing body of evidence that AI spending still has room to run. Nvidia Chief Executive Jensen Huang has said repeatedly, including at public company events covered by CNBC, that a multiyear buildout of accelerated computing infrastructure is underway, and TSMC’s latest quarter gave that thesis fresh operational support. At the same time, executives and analysts continue to stress that concentration risk remains high, with a small group of hyperscale customers driving a large share of demand for advanced chips and server capacity.

What comes next is likely to determine whether this early burst of optimism turns into a broader market trend. Results due from more industrial, consumer and software companies should show whether strength in trading desks and AI supply chains extends into the wider economy. As Jamie Dimon cautioned in JPMorgan’s release, the operating environment still includes “significant uncertainties,” and as C.C. Wei made clear on TSMC’s call, demand remains strong but not immune to macro shocks. If upcoming reports match the tone set by the banks and the world’s largest contract chipmaker, investors may gain confidence that 2026 profit growth has a firmer base than skeptics assumed.

JBizNews Asia Desk

California is rapidly approaching a fuel-driven aviation shock that could ripple across the U.S. economy, as disruptions tied to the U.S.-Iran war choke off global jet fuel supply lines and expose long-standing vulnerabilities in the state’s energy infrastructure. According to the U.S. Energy Information Administration (EIA), California remains the largest jet fuel consumer in the nation, making it uniquely exposed to global supply disruptions tied to geopolitical conflict.

The Strait of Hormuz — a critical artery for roughly 20% of global oil and up to 30% of jet fuel shipments — has been largely shut for nearly two months following escalating conflict between the United States and Iran, triggering cascading supply disruptions worldwide. Energy analysts at Goldman Sachs and S&P Global Commodity Insights have warned that prolonged disruptions at Hormuz could create sustained imbalances in refined fuel markets, particularly impacting import-dependent regions like California.

The breakdown of supply chains is already evident. California imports roughly one million barrels of oil per day, with a meaningful share historically sourced through Asian refineries processing Middle Eastern crude, according to the International Energy Agency (IEA). With those refineries now constrained, industry officials cited by Bloomberg say fuel shipments to the U.S. West Coast have effectively halted, leaving only two to three weeks of fuel shipments currently en route.

The structural strain has been compounded by domestic policy decisions. The closure of Valero Energy Corp.’s Benicia refinery earlier this year removed approximately 145,000 barrels per day of refining capacity, according to company disclosures and filings with the California Energy Commission. California now operates just eight refineries, down sharply from more than 40 in the early 1990s.

Energy analysts warn the consequences could be severe. Gasoline inventories are already near decade lows, while prices in parts of Northern California have climbed sharply, according to data from AAA. Aviation markets are under particular strain, with Andrea Sachs of The Washington Post noting that jet fuel prices have roughly doubled since the conflict began, pushing airlines into what she described as “triage mode.”

Military readiness concerns are also emerging. Facilities including Travis Air Force Base and Naval Air Weapons Station China Lake, according to the U.S. Department of Defense, depend heavily on California’s fuel network, raising national security concerns alongside commercial disruptions.

Airlines are now reassessing routes, trimming capacity, and preparing for fare increases ahead of peak summer travel, according to industry updates reported by Reuters and CNBC. The convergence of geopolitical disruption and constrained domestic infrastructure is turning what might have been a temporary shock into a systemic risk with national implications.

The crisis underscores a broader reality: energy shocks abroad can translate into domestic shortages with striking speed — and the margin for error in critical infrastructure supply chains is thinner than policymakers anticipated.

JBizNews Desk

Friday Morning Markets — April 24, 2026

U.S. equities opened Friday on a broadly positive note, with tech leading the charge as Intel’s blowout earnings ignited a surge in semiconductor and AI-linked stocks, even as the Dowlagged and geopolitical concerns over the U.S.-Iran standoff continued to cast a shadow over energy markets and investor sentiment.

The Nasdaq Composite jumped 0.90% at the open, lifted by a wave of earnings-driven enthusiasm in chipmakers and software names. The S&P 500 gained 0.37%, while the Russell 2000 edged up 0.05%. The Dow Jones Industrial Average bucked the trend, declining 0.28%, weighed down by select blue-chip laggards even as the broader tape held firm. The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) pulled back to 18.96, down 1.81%, suggesting a modest easing of near-term fear.

As trading began, the S&P 500 hovered near 7,134, the Nasdaq near 24,658, and the Dow around 49,172. Crude oil slipped 1.00% to $94.89 per barrel, while gold climbed 0.47%to $4,746. The 10-year Treasury yield dipped to 4.312%, and the dollar index held near 98.48.

The dominant story of the morning was Intel (INTC). Shares surged as much as 30% in premarket trading, briefly touching $87.09 and approaching all-time high territory, after the chipmaker delivered a sales forecast that shattered Wall Streetexpectations. Intel projected second-quarter revenue and profit well above consensus estimates and now expects its CPU business to post double-digit growth in 2026—a dramatic revision from prior guidance of only modest gains. Agentic AI-driven demand for processors was cited as a key catalyst. Intelalso announced it would hold fixed-income investor calls Friday, arranging the sessions through Citigroup, JPMorgan, Barclays, Bank of America, and Deutsche Bank.

The Intel momentum spilled directly into Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), which surged nearly 12% as investors renewed their conviction in the AI chip trade. DA Davidsonupgraded AMD, arguing that Intel’s blowout results serve as a precursor to a broader ramp in the CPU business across the sector.

MaxLinear (MXLR) was another standout gainer, soaring 38% after its first-quarter results topped estimates and the company raised its forward outlook. MaxLinear earned 22 cents per share on revenue of $137.2 million, beating FactSet’s expectations of 18 cents on $134.6 million. SAP, the German enterprise software giant, popped nearly 7% after posting earnings of $1.72 per share excluding items—just ahead of the $1.69 consensus—with cloud revenue rising 19% in the quarter.

On the downside, Boyd Gaming (BYD) fell 6% after reporting first-quarter adjusted earnings of $1.60 per share, missing the $1.73 LSEG consensus. Revenue of $997.4 million also fell short of the expected $1 billion, with soft performance at its Las Vegas properties weighing on results. ASGN Incorporated—now rebranded as Everforth—cratered roughly 35% after reporting Q1 EPS of $0.69, nearly 30% below the $0.98 consensus, with a weak Q2 revenue outlook compounding the disappointment. KKR Real Estate Finance Trust (KREF) slid approximately 22% on thin volume, signaling sector-specific stress in commercial real estate.

On the analyst front, Friday brought a flurry of notable calls. Citi analyst Atif Malik issued a constructive note on Intelfollowing the earnings beat, arguing that improving agentic AI-driven CPU demand should lift all CPU suppliers in the coming years. Intel now expects unit growth as the primary driver of CPU expansion, with average selling prices also benefiting from higher core counts. Ahead of the print, HSBC analyst Frank Lee had upgraded Intel from Hold to Buy with a price target of $95, up from $50. Stifel analyst Ruben Roy, who carries a 90% accuracy rate, had raised his Intel target from $42 to $65.

For AMD, Stifel raised its price target to $320—well above the broader analyst consensus of $291.52—while Bank of America’s Vivek Arya pushed his target to $310 from $280, projecting data-center revenue growth exceeding 60% year over year in both 2026 and 2027. Morgan Stanley upgraded Phillips 66 (PSX) to Overweight from Equal Weight, citing chemicals upside and attractive relative valuation. Stephensinitiated Rocket Companies (RKT) at Overweight with a $22.50 price target. JPMorgan initiated Hims & Hers (HIMS) at Overweight with a $35 December 2026 price target. TD Cowen reiterated Apple (AAPL) as a Buy ahead of its earnings report expected next week.

The macro backdrop remains complex. Asian equities opened lower overnight as concerns grew that U.S.-Iran negotiations are making little progress, with the Strait of Hormuzremaining effectively closed to normal shipping traffic. Oil prices reflected the tension, with Brent crude trading above $102 per barrel. Despite this headwind, earnings season has provided a powerful counterweight: of the 87 S&P 500companies that have reported results so far, 81% have beaten earnings estimates and 76% have topped revenue expectations—an unusually strong showing that has helped sustain the market’s historic April rally.

For now, bulls and bears are fighting over the same data points. Strong earnings argue for continued upside; high oil prices and unresolved geopolitical risk argue for caution. Markets closed Thursday with the S&P 500 at 7,108, the Dow at 49,310, and the Nasdaq at 24,438, each retreating from record intraday highs as software stocks—IBM and ServiceNow (NOW) among them—dragged on the tape. Friday’s session will test whether Intel’s blowout can reignite the momentum that carried equities to all-time highs just days ago.

JBizNews Markets Desk

U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro announced Friday that she directed her office to close its investigation into the Federal Reserve over a building project.

“This morning the Inspector General for the Federal Reserve has been asked to scrutinize the building costs overruns – in the billions of dollars – that have been borne by taxpayers,” Pirro wrote on X. “The IG has the authority to hold the Federal Reserve accountable to American taxpayers. I expect a comprehensive report in short order and am confident the outcome will assist in resolving, once and for all, the questions that led this office to issue subpoenas.”

“Accordingly, I have directed my office to close our investigation as the IG undertakes this inquiry. Note well, however, that I will not hesitate to restart a criminal investigation should the facts warrant doing so,” she added.

This is a breaking news story. Check back for updates.

This post was originally published here

As the world enters what experts call the “Fourth Industrial Revolution,” American business leaders are placing a massive bet on the future of the republic.

FOX Business’ “Mornings with Maria” went inside the high-stakes world of artificial intelligence, revealing how titans of banking, defense and tech are investing hundreds of billions of dollars to build out AI infrastructure and data centers that will redefine the U.S. economy.

Meta Platforms President and Vice Chair Dina Powell McCormick

McCormick discussed the launch of Meta Muse, a new visual coding AI platform for high-stakes reasoning and creative tasks. She claimed it became the second-most downloaded app on its launch day, and at its core “is about humans.”

META INFORMS STAFF OF LAYOFFS AFFECTING 8,000 EMPLOYEES AMID AI PUSH

“There’s a lot of fear out there right now, Maria, about artificial intelligence,” McCormick said. “But I think if we really go back to the fact that this is meant to give people more time to help them find their potential and passions, and that is how we are really thinking about Muse, but also the fact, frankly, that our platform every single day, there are 3.5 billion people on our platform, and that is both a daunting responsibility and really exciting because as we develop this product and these technologies, that’s the distribution that we’re talking about.”

Microsoft President and Vice Chair Brad Smith

Smith framed the AI boom as a massive reindustrialization of America that requires a $140 billion annual investment to solve critical domestic issues like rural doctor shortages and wildfire prevention while maintaining a competitive edge over China.

“It is a big part of what President [Donald] Trump calls the industrialization of America. When you look at the economic impact of this, what we’re contributing in terms of jobs, but more importantly, what we’re contributing in terms of capabilities for every part of the economy, this is critical,” Smith said.

“I think one of the most important things that we’re doing as a company, and frankly, what the president has nudged the entire industry, quite rightly, to do is pay our own way. That means we pay for the electricity generation that we need, so that the neighbors and the taxpayers don’t have to,” he continued.

“Whenever you have AI that controls something like infrastructure, you know, autonomous robots and the like, there ought to be — we called it an emergency brake,” he added. “Look, you wouldn’t put your kids on a school bus without feeling good that there’s an emergency brake on the school bus. You do need to have the ability for humans always to be in control, to slow things down, or turn things off.”

Google Cloud Advisory Board Chair Betsy Atkins 

Atkins issued a warning on the quickly expanding technology after a disturbing Anthropic study found that 16 leading AI models exhibited “rogue” behavior such as blackmailing humans and bypassing security protocols when the AI agent believed its own existence was threatened.

“Every single one of them went outside of their credentials and permissions, burrowed into systems they were not authorized to get access to, violated all the company policies and procedures, and found emails. And in this experiment… I find out in your personal emails you’re having an affair with the shipping manager, so I blackmail you and I threaten you,” Atkins said.

“You have to treat AI like an insider threat. You have to have an operating premise of zero trust, and you have to be sure you’re limiting what it’s going to get access to in more than just one way,” she added. “We saw it with Anthropic… It escaped the sandbox… So a sandbox is not enough.”

Anthropic Head of Frontier Red Team Logan Graham

Graham warned that Anthropic’s new Mythos AI model is so potent at identifying “weaknesses” and vulnerabilities in global infrastructure and banking systems that the company has withheld its public release to give U.S. industry and government a head start on defense.

“This model, we noticed, was particularly good at finding weaknesses in cyber systems and figuring out how to take advantage of them,” he said. “We observed that we could find vulnerabilities using the system in every major operating system and platform that we looked at… in systems that are, in some cases, decades old.”

“It is really critical that we stay ahead. It’s really critical that we make ourselves secure and prevent their ability to take the special sauce that we use to make our models… My concern is that if there is a large number of models that frequently are broadly released for anybody to use… if they are released by China, then we’re in a really tough position.”

President’s Council of Advisors on Science and Technology Co-Chair David Sacks

Sacks dismissed claims from an Anthropic study examining so-called “agentic misalignment.” The study, highlighted by Google’s Atkins, tested how AI systems respond under pressure. According to Atkins, the models crossed established boundaries when placed in constrained scenarios.

“The people who… created that study had to iterate on the prompt over 200 times to get the AI model to do what they wanted, which was to achieve this headline-grabbing result of blackmailing the user,” Sacks said.

“The AI is not scheming… It’s engaging in a form of instruction… I think that that study was irresponsible, and it was designed to create this,” he added.

SandboxAQ CEO and founder Jack Hidary

Hidary revealed that the next phase of the AI revolution involves large quantitative models that use physics and chemistry, not just internet text, to lower healthcare costs, secure the power grid and end America’s reliance on China for rare earth minerals.

“We also need to make sure we are moving off of reliance of rare earths from other countries like the [People’s Republic of China]. And so we need AI that knows chemistry, that knows physics. There’s no engineering to make better magnets and other alloys that we need for our economy and for our national defense,” Hidary said.

“There’s two potential big losers in this kind of economy. First, you have the legacy software companies. So companies like SAP and others that we don’t see really innovating… they’re not going to be licensing as much of the legacy software out there. And the second one is going to be legacy companies in the big traditional industries, automakers, pharma companies. They’ve got to get on the bandwagon.”

Alpha Schools CEO and founder Mackenzie Price

Price detailed how her “personalized, mastery-based” model uses AI tutors to condense a traditional six-hour school day into just two hours of high-impact academics, allowing students to spend the rest of their time on leadership, financial literacy and entrepreneurship.

“Our traditional education system was built out of the Industrial Revolution to create workers. And now in this new AI world, it is so important that we create individuals who are dynamic, adaptable, and most importantly, have the skill of learning how to learn,” Price said.

“There is a huge difference between doom-scrolling TikTok all day or playing video games and getting a one-to-one personalized learning experience that meets kids exactly where they’re at,” she added. “At our schools, our kids are actually spending less time on screens than the average student in a traditional school is nowadays.”

Indeed Vice President Hannah Calhoon

Calhoon countered “doomer” job replacement narratives by revealing that while AI is in the global consciousness, only 6% of current job postings require AI skills, and the revolution is actually fueling a massive surge in traditional blue-collar roles like electricians.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“AI-related jobs have certainly been rising rapidly over the last couple of years, but only 6% of job postings in the marketplace today reference AI skills… 95% of the employers who post jobs on Indeed, if you look across all of their job postings, no mention of AI or AI skills,” Calhoon explained. “So I think while it is very much in the general consciousness, we’re still at a fairly nascent stage in terms of seeing it show up in the market data.”

“And so when we take that data and we sort of step back and look at jobs in the market, we actually see very few jobs that we think will go away entirely.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Travelers are unlikely to see major disruptions as the Trump administration reportedly moves closer to a bailout of bankrupt Spirit Airlines, industry experts say.

Officials are discussing a roughly $500 million deal to help Spirit exit bankruptcy – an arrangement that could leave the federal government with up to a 90% stake in the low-cost carrier, Reuters reported.

For most Americans, the situation is not expected to affect summer travel plans, according to aviation consultant Mike Boyd.

Travelers don’t have to worry,” Boyd told FOX Business, calling the situation a “sideshow” for the average flyer.

TED CRUZ POURS COLD WATER ON TRUMP ADMINISTRATION PLAN TO BAIL OUT SPIRIT AIRLINES: ‘TERRIBLE IDEA’

However, Boyd noted there could be some uncertainty for passengers already booked on Spirit as the airline navigates the bankruptcy process.

Aviation expert and former National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) investigator Mike Coffield told FOX Business that government intervention could ultimately lead to higher fares.

“It will raise fares, not lower them,” Coffield said, adding that a bailout could be unfair to other airlines. “They will also get capital at little risk, until they lose it all and the taxpayer money.”

Coffield, noting his role in drafting the Air Transportation Safety and System Stabilization Act after the Sept. 11, 2001, terror attacks, argued the government should “step in only in a national crisis or interest.”

Coffield also said that if Spirit were to shut down, other carriers – including American, Southwest, United, JetBlue and Allegiant – would likely quickly fill the gap and hire displaced workers.

TRUMP SAYS HE WANTS ‘SOMEBODY’ TO BUY SPIRIT AIRLINES, OPPOSES UNITED-AMERICAN MERGER

“If you can look historically, wherever there’s been an airline that stopped service, within six months most of all those people are rehired in their original jobs wearing different uniforms,” Coffield said.

Gary Leff, author of the aviation blog “View From the Wing,” said keeping Spirit afloat could “weaken” competitors like Frontier Airlines and JetBlue.

“Keeping Spirit Airlines alive weakens other airlines, though, especially Frontier Airlines – Spirit’s major ultra-low cost competitor – and JetBlue, their largest competitor at Fort Lauderdale,” he told FOX Business. “Once the government controls Spirit Airlines, that even raises safety concerns because the government both becomes the safety regulator and owner of the airline they’re regulating.”

Meanwhile, Clint Henderson, travel expert at “The Points Guy,” said consumers would “likely benefit” if Spirit remains in operation.

“This would be good for keeping prices lower as it would protect a low-cost carrier, so the news is potentially good news for consumers… at least for now,” Henderson told FOX Business. “Everyone loves to hate Spirit until they leave a market and fares go up.”

RISING FUEL COSTS THREATEN SPIRIT AIRLINES’ BANKRUPTCY EXIT PLAN: REPORTS

The proposed financing would likely begin as a loan to keep Spirit operating during bankruptcy and convert into longer-term funding after it exits. 

A lawyer for the airline confirmed Thursday that it is in advanced discussions with federal officials, Reuters reported.

“Spirit Airlines would be on a much firmer financial footing had the Biden administration not recklessly blocked the airline’s merger with JetBlue,” White House spokesman Kush Desai told FOX Business. “The Trump administration continues to monitor the situation and overall health of the U.S. aviation industry that millions of Americans rely on every day for essential travel and their livelihoods.”

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

FOX Business reached out to Spirit Airlines for comment.

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Lyft Inc. is making a decisive push into Europe’s largest ride-hailing market, acquiring the United Kingdom taxi operations of Gett in a deal valued at approximately $50 million — a move that significantly strengthens its position in London and accelerates its international expansion strategy.

The acquisition hands Lyft access to roughly three-quarters of London’s iconic black cab drivers, dramatically expanding its footprint in a market long dominated by Uber Technologies Inc. and local competitors. The deal, which is subject to standard regulatory approvals, is expected to close within the coming weeks, according to people familiar with the transaction.

For Lyft, the move represents a strategic shortcut into a tightly regulated and highly competitive market. By integrating Gett’s established network, the company avoids the years-long process of building driver relationships and navigating London’s complex licensing framework from scratch.

Lyft executives have signaled that the transition for users will be gradual. Existing Gett customers will continue to use the current app in the near term, while Lyft begins integrating operations into its broader European platform. Over time, Gett’s UK business is expected to be folded into Lyft’s Freenow network, which already operates across more than 180 cities in nine European markets.

The combined platform is expected to create one of the most comprehensive urban mobility networks in London, spanning traditional black cabs, ride-hailing vehicles, and micromobility offerings. Lyft already has a foothold in the city through its role powering the Santander Cycles bike-share program, and the company has indicated plans to expand further into next-generation transport.

A key part of that strategy includes autonomous vehicles. Lyft is preparing to launch self-driving ride testing in London later this year in partnership with Chinese technology company Baidu Inc., positioning itself among a small group of global platforms aiming to operate both human-driven and autonomous fleets within the same urban ecosystem.

The competitive implications are significant. With the addition of Gett’s driver base, Lyft will be better positioned to challenge Uber CEO Dara Khosrowshahi’s dominance in London, while also putting pressure on Bolt Technology OU and other regional players. Analysts say the scale of the combined Lyft-Gett-Freenow network could shift pricing power and driver availability in Lyft’s favor.

On the Israeli side, the transaction marks a strategic retreat from international operations for Gett, a company originally founded in Tel Aviv that once pursued aggressive global expansion. The UK business had struggled to achieve consistent profitability, weighed down by high operating costs and intense competition.

The decision to divest aligns with the strategy of Gett’s new ownership group, which acquired the company last year for approximately $188 million. Investors — including Leumi Partners, Mizrahi Tefahot Bank, and Phoenix Financial Ltd. — had reportedly identified the UK unit as a non-core asset even before completing the acquisition.

Following the sale, Gett will refocus exclusively on its Israeli operations, where management sees stronger margins and clearer growth opportunities. The company is expected to expand into adjacent transportation and mobility services within Israel, leveraging its established brand and customer base.

Post-transaction, Gett is projected to retain net assets of roughly $70 million, while significantly reducing its exposure to loss-making international markets. The restructuring effectively transforms the company into a leaner, domestically focused operator — a shift that investors believe will improve profitability and long-term stability.

The deal underscores a broader trend reshaping the global ride-hailing industry: consolidation and strategic retrenchment. As capital becomes more disciplined and profitability takes precedence over rapid expansion, companies are increasingly focusing on core markets while shedding underperforming international assets.

For Lyft, the acquisition signals a renewed willingness to compete aggressively beyond the United States. For Gett, it marks the end of its global ambitions — and the beginning of a more focused, Israel-centered chapter.

JBizNews Desk- London

As Americans head into barbecue season, rising energy prices linked to Middle East tensions are driving up the cost of propane.

When energy prices rise, the added costs ripple through the food system and into everyday purchases, from meat counters to backyard grills.

“The impact of ongoing challenges in the Middle East on energy prices impacts nearly every facet of the U.S. economy and beef cattle are not immune,” Glynn Tonsor, a professor of agricultural economics at Kansas State University, told FOX Business.

BUYING A HOME JUST GOT MORE EXPENSIVE AS THE IRAN WAR DRIVES UP MORTGAGE RATES

Ranchers rely on fuel at nearly every step, from running tractors to transporting cattle, and those higher costs are often passed on to consumers, Tonsor said.

Those pressures are showing up in energy markets. Gas prices now average about $4.02 a gallon, up roughly 86 cents from a month ago, according to AAA, while diesel – a key fuel for freight – has climbed to $5.49, up about $1.90 over the past year, making it more expensive to move cattle and beef across the country.

GAS SURGE TIED TO IRAN CONFLICT HITS SWING STATES, TESTING TRUMP’S LOW-PRICE PITCH

The ripple effects go far beyond beef.

Propane, the fuel powering many backyard grills, is also getting more expensive as global energy markets tighten because countries in the Middle East are such major suppliers to the world.

U.S. propane prices at the Mont Belvieu hub, the industry benchmark for this type of power, have surged nearly 19% since the conflict began in late February.

But higher energy costs are only part of the story.

Cattle supply remains slow to respond. Unlike oil or metals, where supply can be increased relatively quickly, cattle production takes years to ramp up after a dip.

BEEF PRICES ARE CLOSE TO RECORD HIGHS — BUT AMERICANS AREN’T CUTTING BACK

The U.S. cattle herd is now at its smallest size in 75 years, which is keeping the supply tight following years of drought, rising costs and an aging ranching workforce resulting in producers needing to cut back.

That tight supply is already pushing prices higher – and the Iran conflict is only adding to the pressure.

According to U.S. Department of Agriculture data, the average price of beef climbed from about $8.70 per pound in March 2025 to $10.08 a year later, an increase of roughly 16%.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Subsequently, even if energy prices ease, beef prices likely won’t be quick to follow.

For shoppers, that could mean higher grocery bills this summer – and pricier cookouts – depending on whether demand holds or consumers switch to cheaper alternatives. Much of that will depend on forces far beyond Americans’ backyards.

This post was originally published here

American Express Co. delivered a stronger-than-expected first quarter, underscoring the durability of high-income consumer spending even as broader economic signals remain mixed. The company’s results were driven by continued momentum among its premium cardholders, whose travel, dining, and luxury purchases pushed both revenue and profit above Wall Street forecasts.

The New York–based payments giant reported earnings per share of $4.28, an 18% increase from $3.64 a year earlier and well above analyst expectations of $4.00. Revenue, net of interest expense, rose 11% year over year to $18.91 billion, surpassing the $18.61 billion consensus estimate. Net income climbed to $2.97 billion from $2.58 billion in the same period last year, reflecting both higher spending volumes and disciplined cost management.

Chief Financial Officer Christophe Le Caillec pointed to a sharp increase in discretionary spending, particularly at the high end of the market. “We saw luxury retail spending increase 18% in the quarter, with overall retail up 11%,” Le Caillec said, highlighting the continued strength of affluent consumers even as inflation and interest rates weigh more heavily on lower-income households. Total billed business — a key measure of cardmember spending — rose 10% to $428 billion, reinforcing the company’s position as a leading indicator of premium consumption trends.

Chief Executive Officer Stephen Squeri emphasized that spending growth reached its strongest quarterly level in three years, driven by both long-standing customers and a growing base of younger, high-earning users. “We are seeing sustained demand across our customer base, including strong engagement from Millennials and Gen Z,” Squeri said, noting that younger cohorts are increasingly adopting premium cards earlier in their financial lives — a shift that could support long-term growth.

Despite the robust performance, shares edged lower following the release, as investors focused on the company’s decision to reaffirm — rather than raise — its full-year outlook. American Express maintained its 2026 earnings guidance of $17.30 to $17.90 per share and projected revenue growth of 9% to 10%, signaling confidence in its trajectory but offering no near-term upside surprise for markets already pricing in strong execution.

Management indicated that the outperformance in the first quarter has given the company flexibility to reinvest in future growth. Executives said they are lowering internal return-on-investment thresholds to fund expanded spending on marketing, customer acquisition, and technology — initiatives that had previously been deferred. The strategy reflects a calculated decision to prioritize long-term expansion over short-term margin optimization.

Capital returns remained a key component of the company’s financial strategy. American Express returned $2.3 billion to shareholders during the quarter through dividends and share repurchases, while maintaining a Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio of 10.5%, comfortably above regulatory requirements. The balance sheet strength provides additional capacity for continued investment while supporting shareholder distributions.

Looking ahead, the central question for investors is whether the resilience of affluent consumers can continue to offset broader economic headwinds. American Express’s results suggest that, for now, high-income spending remains a stabilizing force in the U.S. economy. But with interest rates still elevated and geopolitical risks lingering, markets will be closely watching whether that strength holds through the remainder of the year.

JBizNews Desk- Markets

U.S. home sellers cut asking prices in February at the fastest rate for that month in more than a decade, a sign that buyers still hold unusual leverage in a housing market constrained by high mortgage rates and stretched affordability. In an April report, Redfin said 34.2% of homes for sale had at least one price reduction in February, the highest share for any February since the brokerage began tracking the data in 2012, and the company said the shift reflected “growing competition” for a limited pool of buyers.

The pricing reset underscores how sharply the market has changed from the pandemic-era frenzy, when sellers routinely received multiple offers above asking price. Redfin reported that the typical seller who cut a listing price reduced it by $40,915, or 7.3%, which the company said marked the biggest February discount since 2023. In comments published with the report, Redfin agents said many homeowners still enter the market “testing” ambitious prices, only to adjust after weak traffic and slower-than-expected offers.

The broader backdrop remains punishing for would-be buyers. Freddie Mac said in its latest weekly survey that the average 30-year fixed mortgage rate stayed near levels that continue to strain affordability, with Chief Economist Sam Khater saying in a recent release that “mortgage rates continue to be elevated,” a dynamic that keeps monthly payments high even if home-price growth cools. That financing pressure has become central to seller strategy, because buyers who might have stretched in a lower-rate environment now have far less room to absorb aggressive asking prices.

Fresh industry data point in the same direction. National Association of Realtors Chief Economist Lawrence Yun said in the group’s recent housing commentary that “housing affordability remains a challenge,” even as inventory improves in parts of the country. According to NAR, more homes coming onto the market should help moderate price growth, but Yun has also cautioned that elevated borrowing costs continue to suppress transaction volumes, leaving sellers to compete more directly on price, concessions and time on market.

That competition has become more visible in listing data. In a recent market update, Zillow said sellers increasingly need to “price competitively from the start” as buyers gain more options and become more selective. Zillow economists have noted that while demand has not disappeared, it has become highly payment-sensitive, meaning homes that miss the market on price can sit longer and require cuts to attract attention. The result, especially in formerly overheated metros, has been a more negotiated market rather than a broad-based collapse in values.

Economists at Realtor.com have described a similar pattern. In one recent analysis, Realtor.com Chief Economist Danielle Hale said sellers are “adjusting expectations” as inventory rises and buyers face budget constraints. The company’s market trackers have shown a growing share of listings with price reductions, particularly in regions where new supply and pandemic-era migration booms left sellers with less pricing power than they enjoyed two years ago. That matters for builders, brokers and mortgage lenders because a market that clears through discounts rather than bidding wars typically produces slower turnover and thinner margins.

The trend does not mean home prices are falling everywhere, and several measures still show national values holding up better than sales activity. S&P Dow Jones Indices and CoreLogic have both reported that home-price appreciation remains positive in many markets, though the pace has cooled from prior peaks. In public comments accompanying recent housing data, Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell has said shelter inflation and housing supply remain important parts of the broader inflation picture, while acknowledging that high rates have weighed on residential activity. For sellers, that combination creates a difficult trade-off: prices remain historically high, but the buyer pool able to transact at those prices has narrowed.

Regional differences also matter. Redfin and other housing platforms have repeatedly shown that Sun Belt markets with larger inventory rebounds have seen more frequent markdowns than supply-starved Northeast markets. In prior reporting by Reuters and Bloomberg on the U.S. housing slowdown, economists said areas that saw the biggest pandemic run-ups often face the sharpest normalization once rates stay higher for longer. That helps explain why a record share of sellers can be cutting prices even without a nationwide crash in home values: the market has become fragmented, local and highly sensitive to financing conditions.

For buyers, the shift could open room to negotiate not only on price but also on closing costs, repairs and mortgage-rate buydowns. For sellers, the message from brokers and economists has become more blunt. Redfin said in its report that homes priced too high are increasingly likely to linger, while Zillow and Realtor.com have each emphasized that realistic pricing now matters more than spring-season optimism. The next few months will show whether lower rates or stronger demand can rescue asking prices, but if borrowing costs stay elevated and inventory keeps building, more sellers may have little choice but to keep cutting until buyers step in.

JBizNews Desk

Iran’s decision to charge fees for ships transiting the Strait of Hormuz—and U.S. President Donald Trump’s tentative endorsement of that idea—are reverbarting in a different waterway around four thousand miles away.

On April 22, Indonesia’s finance minister, Purbaya Yudhi Sadewa, suggested the Southeast Asian country might start imposing levies on ships transiting the Strait of Malacca, which connects the Indian Ocean with the South China Sea. The strait is one of the world’s busiest shipping lanes, carrying around 30% of global trade. Two hundred ships travel through Malacca each day, double the number that pass through Hormuz. 

“Iran is now planning to charge ships passing through the Strait of Hormuz,” Purbaya said during a symposium in Jakarta. “If we split [income from levies] three ways—Indonesia, Malaysia, and Singapore—it could be quite substantial.” He added that Indonesia stood to benefit most, given that its stretch is “the largest and longest”. 

Purabaya quickly walked back his suggestion, acknowledging that a decision would require buy-in from both Singapore and Malaysia, which also sit alongside the strait. 

Yet Pubaya’s idea, even if just a hastily raised trial balloon, shows just how quickly the conversation around freedom of navigation has changed in the two months since the outbreak of war in Iran.

Iran is now openly charging tolls for ships to traverse the Strait of Hormuz (often paid in Chinese yuan or cryptocurrencies), and is planning to set up a regime to formalize this control even after the war ends. U.S. President Donald Trump has at times signaled his comfort with Iran charging tolls for ships to pass through the Strait, and even suggested that the U.S. and Iran could jointly manage the waterway as part of a settlement to end the war.

Indonesia, Malaysia, and Singapore

The Indonesian archipelago straddles many of the waterways governing access between the Indian Ocean and the rest of East Asia, which hasn’t escaped the notice of Indonesian officials. President Prabowo Subianto has publicly pointed out that 70% of Asia’s trade travels through the Indonesian straits of Lombok, Sunda and Malacca.

Indonesia’s neighbors have responded differently to the idea of tolling the Strait of Malacca.

“The right of transit passage is guaranteed for everyone,” Singapore’s Minister of Foreign Affairs Vivian Balakrishnan said yesterday during a CNBC event. “We will not participate in any attempts to close or interdict or to impose tolls in our neighborhood.” 

Singapore had previously stated that it wouldn’t negotiate with Iran in order to sail its ships through the Strait of Hormuz, calling Tehran’s closure of the waterway a violation of international law. Ships, under international law, are freely allowed to traverse straits like Hormuz, which don’t fall within one country’s territorial waters.

Several other countries, like India, Thailand and Pakistan, secured safe transit through Hormuz after negotiations with Iran. 

“I can’t engage in negotiations for safe passage of ships or negotiate on toll rates,” Balakrishnan explained during a parliamentary debate on April 7

Singapore’s economy relies on free navigation. The city is the world’s largest trans-shipment and bunkering hub, and over 130,000 vessels call at its ports every year. Any limits to transit through the Strait of Malacca are thus a significant threat to its economy. 

Neighboring Malaysia has also expressed caution about plans to impose levies on the Strait, though didn’t reject the idea outright. 

“Whatever is to be done in the Strait of Malacca must involve the cooperation of all four countries,” said Malaysia Foreign Minister Mohamad Hasan on Wednesday, referring to Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore and Thailand. “It cannot be done unilaterally.”

Yet some in Malaysia have bristled at Singapore’s statements over the Iran conflict. When Balakrishnan in early April said he wouldn’t negotiate with Tehran to secure access through Hormuz, Nurul Izzah Anwar, daughter of Malaysia Prime Minister Anwar Ibrahim, grumbled that “Malaysia will not be lectured on the merits of engagement.”

Thailand sees an opportunity

Thailand, the only other country to sit alongside the Strait of Malacca, has its own plans. On April 20, Deputy Prime Minister Phiphat Ratchakitprakarn said the country will fast-track a plan to build a land bridge between the Strait of Malacca and the Gulf of Thailand. The bridge would link seaports on either side of the country through road and rail networks, potentially cutting transit time by four days and shipping costs by 15%. 

The land bridge—which is expected to cost 1 trillion Thai baht ($31 billion)—is a less radical version of a plan floated by some Thai administrations to build a canal across the Kra Isthmus, the narrowest part of the Malay Peninsula. Several governments have launched feasibility studies, only to balk at the massive cost involved.

Still, with the fragility of maritime trade now in the spotlight, Bangkok may be looking for an opportunity.

“The Middle East conflict has demonstrated the advantage of controlling a transport route,” Phiphat said. “Thailand will have a great advantage by operating the link between the Pacific Ocean and the Indian Ocean.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Frontier Group Holdings Inc. shares slid sharply this week as investors reacted to mounting indications that rival Spirit Airlines is nearing a federal rescue package that could keep the ultra-low-cost carrier alive — and upend the competitive dynamics Frontier had been positioning for. The prospect of government intervention, rather than market-driven consolidation, is forcing a rapid reassessment across the airline sector.

Spirit Airlines is close to securing roughly $500 million in federal support, according to people familiar with the matter, with discussions centered on a structure that could leave the U.S. government holding a significant equity stake in the company once it exits bankruptcy. Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick has been among the leading voices inside the administration advocating for an ownership position, arguing that preserving low-cost capacity is critical to maintaining competitive pricing for U.S. consumers, according to individuals briefed on the talks.

The immediate market reaction was swift. Frontier shares dropped as investors priced in the reduced likelihood that Spirit would exit the market through liquidation — a scenario that would have allowed Frontier to capture routes, aircraft, and price-sensitive passengers. Analysts at multiple firms warned that a government-backed Spirit could intensify fare competition, with one note describing the outlook for both Frontier and JetBlue Airways Corp. as “more precarious” if the bailout proceeds.

The timing of Spirit’s financial distress has been exacerbated by macro pressures. Jet fuel prices have surged since the onset of the Iran conflict, materially raising operating costs across the industry. Analysts at JPMorgan Chase & Co. estimated that if fuel prices remain near $4.60 per gallon through the remainder of 2026, Spirit could face approximately $360 million in incremental expenses — exceeding the $337 million in cash the airline reported at the end of 2025. That imbalance has complicated the carrier’s efforts to emerge from its second bankruptcy restructuring since 2024.

What sets the current negotiations apart is the scale of potential government involvement. Under one scenario being discussed, the federal government could end up owning as much as 90% of Spirit’s equity post-bankruptcy — an extraordinary step for a private U.S. airline. The proposal has triggered bipartisan concern in Washington, with Senator Ted Cruz, Senator Tom Cotton, and Senator Elizabeth Warren each raising objections to deploying taxpayer capital to support a company with a long history of financial instability.

Industry leaders have also voiced skepticism. United Airlines CEO Scott Kirby said during a recent analyst call that Spirit’s challenges were structural rather than cyclical, stating the airline’s business model was “fundamentally flawed” and not solely the result of geopolitical shocks. His comments underscore a broader concern among legacy carriers that intervention could distort competition by artificially sustaining weaker operators.

Within the administration itself, there are signs of debate. Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy questioned whether federal support would simply postpone an inevitable failure, warning that the government could be left holding a majority stake in an airline unable to achieve sustainable profitability. That internal tension highlights the broader policy dilemma: balancing short-term consumer benefits against long-term market discipline.

President Donald Trump, however, signaled openness to an aggressive approach, telling reporters that the administration is considering multiple options, including outright acquisition. “We’re looking at helping them out — meaning bailing them out or buying it, just buy it,” Trump said, indicating a willingness to expand beyond traditional loan guarantees or debtor-in-possession financing.

For Frontier, the stakes are immediate. The Denver-based carrier had been widely expected to benefit from any retrenchment by Spirit, particularly in overlapping leisure routes where both airlines compete aggressively on price. A stabilized Spirit, especially one backed by federal capital, could instead prolong fare wars and pressure margins at a time when cost inflation is already squeezing profitability across the low-cost segment.

A bankruptcy court hearing is tentatively scheduled for April 30, where stakeholders are expected to review the framework of a potential rescue deal. The outcome could redefine not only Spirit’s future, but also the boundaries of government involvement in the U.S. airline industry — setting a precedent that extends well beyond a single carrier.

JBizNews Desk

Roughly 1,400 people across Nike’s Global Operations team will be laid off, the company announced Thursday.

In a memo to employees, Chief Operating Officer Venkatesh Alagirisamy said the cuts will primarily affect Nike’s technology division and span North America, Asia and Europe, representing just under 2% of the company’s global workforce.

“This is not a new direction,” Alagirisamy wrote. “It is the next phase of the work already underway.”

The announcement follows a series of recent job cuts as Nike restructures its operations.

NIKE’S DIVERSITY INITIATIVES UNDER EEOC SCRUTINY FOR ALLEGED DISCRIMINATION AGAINST WHITE WORKERS

In January, the company said it would cut 775 jobs as part of an automation push at distribution centers. 

In February 2024, Nike announced plans to reduce its workforce by about 2%, or more than 1,600 employees, and a few months later, in August, said it would cut less than 1% of corporate staff as part of a broader turnaround effort under CEO Elliott Hill.

Shares rose about 0.5% in after-hours trading, though Nike stock has lost more than half its value over the past three years.

According to Alagirisamy’s memo, the layoffs are aimed at streamlining supply chains for materials, footwear and apparel, and centralizing technology operations in two hubs: Beaverton, Oregon, and the Nike India Technology Center.

BEER GIANT POURS $600M INTO US PRODUCTION IN MAJOR BET ON AMERICAN GROWTH

Nike also plans to move some Converse manufacturing and engineering operations closer to factory partners.

“These changes are meant to make the company less complex and more responsive,” Alagirisamy said. “As we look ahead, that means simplifying parts of how we operate, using more advanced automation where it helps us work better, and building an even stronger end-to-end foundation for future growth.”

Hill, who became CEO in 2024, has pledged to refocus the Nike brand on core sports, such as running and soccer, while accelerating new product launches.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Nike forecast a 2% to 4% drop in sales this quarter, with China, a key market, expected to decline about 20%, the company said.

Nike referred FOX Business to Alagirisamy’s memo when asked for comment.

FOX Business’ Eric Revell and Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on this site.

U.S. labor demand softened in February as job openings fell below 7 million for the first time in months, a sign the hiring market continues to cool even as layoffs remain relatively contained. In data released Monday, the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics said job openings dropped to 6.882 million from an upwardly revised 7.24 million in January, a decline that Reuters and other outlets said came in slightly below economists’ expectations for about 6.92 million and reinforced evidence of a more balanced labor market.

The latest Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey, or JOLTS, pointed to weakness in several cyclical sectors, with the Bureau of Labor Statistics reporting that vacancies fell sharply in accommodation and food services and also declined in manufacturing, mining and logging, and health care. Economists cited by Bloomberg and Reuters said the figures fit a broader pattern of employers turning more cautious on expansion plans as borrowing costs stay elevated and demand normalizes after the post-pandemic hiring surge.

The report matters because Federal Reserve officials have repeatedly said labor-market rebalancing could help bring inflation lower without a steep rise in unemployment. Jerome Powell, the Fed chair, said after the central bank’s recent policy meeting that the labor market had “come into better balance” and no longer looked like “a significant source of inflationary pressure,” according to remarks published by the Federal Reserve. Monday’s openings data offered fresh support for that view, even if the level of vacancies still sits above pre-pandemic norms.

Hiring itself showed a more mixed picture. The Bureau of Labor Statistics said the hiring rate held relatively steady, suggesting companies still need workers even as they post fewer new roles, while the quits rate remained subdued compared with the peak of the so-called Great Resignation. Economists at Wells Fargo said in a research note cited by CNBC that a lower quits rate typically signals workers feel less confident about finding better-paying jobs quickly, a dynamic that can ease wage pressure and reduce turnover costs for employers.

The decline in openings also arrives ahead of the government’s closely watched monthly payrolls report, which investors and policymakers use to gauge whether labor demand continues to cool in an orderly way. Analysts surveyed by Dow Jones and reported by CNBC said Friday’s employment report will carry added weight because it could shape expectations for the timing of any Federal Reserve rate cuts. Kathy Bostjancic, chief economist at Nationwide, said in a note reported by MarketWatch that a slower pace of hiring and fewer openings would be “consistent with a labor market that is gradually downshifting, not collapsing.”

For businesses, the sector breakdown may prove as important as the headline number. The Bureau of Labor Statistics said accommodation and food services accounted for a large share of the monthly drop, while manufacturing openings also moved lower, underscoring softer demand in industries tied closely to discretionary spending and goods production. Economists cited by Financial Times have said service-sector labor shortages had remained unusually persistent, so any easing there could help reduce wage growth in customer-facing industries that have struggled with staffing and margin pressure.

Markets have treated labor-market cooling as a double-edged signal: good news for inflation and interest rates, but a potential warning for growth if the slowdown deepens too quickly. Following recent labor and inflation releases, strategists quoted by Bloomberg said investors remain focused on whether the economy can deliver a “soft landing,” with slower hiring and fewer vacancies offset by still-low layoffs and steady consumer activity. The JOLTS report did little to suggest a sudden break in employment conditions, but it added to the case that the era of exceptionally tight labor demand has faded.

What comes next now hinges on whether payroll growth, wage gains and unemployment continue to moderate in tandem. Federal Reserve officials have said future policy decisions remain data dependent, and economists across Reuters, Bloomberg and CNBC have argued that labor-market indicators such as openings, quits and hiring rates will stay central to that debate. If job openings keep drifting lower without a surge in layoffs, companies may get relief on labor costs and the Fed may gain confidence that inflation can keep cooling; if the decline accelerates, concerns about a broader economic slowdown could quickly move back to the center of the market narrative.

JBizNews Desk

Harley-Davidson is recalling nearly 17,000 motorcycles over a potential brake failure issue that could heighten the risk of a crash, according to federal regulators.

The motorcycles impacted by the recall include 2025 and 2026 models.

Affected motorcycles include the Harley-Davidson FXLRS with a production date from Dec. 5, 2024, to March 16, 2026; Harley-Davidson FXLRST with a production date from Oct. 3, 2024, to March 16, 2026; Harley-Davidson FXBB with a production date from Oct. 3. 2024, to March 16, 2026; and Harley-Davidson FLHC with the production date from Oct. 3, 2024, to March 12, 2026.

The company was first flagged in March regarding a claim of inoperable brakes on a 2025 FXLRST model motorcycle, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration said in a report.

FORD RECALLS OVER 140,000 PICKUP TRUCKS OVER WIRING FIRE RISK

Three other claims of brake fluid loss or inoperable rear brakes were identified after a review of warranty and service records, the report states.

Upon further investigation, Harley-Davidson discovered that the affected models lacked enough clearance between the rear brake line and the Body Control Module (BCM).

“Contact between the brake line and the BCM, over time, could lead to a hole in the brake line and a loss of brake fluid. If brake fluid loss remains undetected, rear braking may be compromised, increasing the risk of a crash,” the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration said in its report.

The company is advising owners that they may notice the presence of brake fluid in recalled models or a decrease in rear brake performance.

“The operator may note the presence of brake fluid underneath the motorcycle. In addition, the rider may note a decrease in rear brake performance,” the report reads.

No accidents or injuries have been reported in connection with the motorcycles included in the recall.

TOYOTA RECALLS 73K HYBRID VEHICLES OVER PEDESTRIAN WARNING SOUND ISSUE

Harley-Davidson will notify all dealers about the recall effort by Monday, and owners are expected to receive notification letters by May 25, according to the recall notice.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“The BCM caddy and associated hardware will be replaced on all affected vehicles. In addition, the rear brake line will be inspected and, if damaged, will be replaced along with associated parts,” the notice reads.

Harley-Davidson did not immediately respond to FOX Business’ request for comment.

This post was originally published here

When you open a brokerage account, you’re automatically paired with a financial advisor. Well, that’s how it works in Brazil, where Bruno Koba and Daniel Tulha grew up. When they came to the U.S., the pair was surprised to discover that advisors are typically available only to the wealthy, and that everyone else just sort of wings it—perhaps with the help of Claude or ChatGPT.

This situation is what led Koba and Tulha, a former Stripe engineer, to found Astor, a Y Combinator-backed startup that provides an advisor service that can connect to an investor’s portfolio, and provide recommendations by text or voice through an AI chatbot. On Thursday, Astor announced it has raised a $5 million seed round led by the venture firm Monashees.

Astor offers guidance for general portfolio construction, but can also take a customer’s broader financial situation into account, including the need to manage credit card expenses or plan for a wedding. Koba says many investors want to be more active with their portfolio, but lack confidence.

“We see people asking all these questions to ChatGPT and Claude, but those services are not optimized,” he said, noting that Astor is built on a multi-agent architecture that draws on Anthropic models.

Astor is hardly the first, of course, to offer AI-powered financial services to ordinary investors. So-called robo-advisors have been around for a decade and, during the current AI era, platforms like Robinhood are building next-generation versions of these advisors that aim to be far more personal and versatile. Meanwhile, traditional financial advisory firms are partnering with Anthropic and others to provide well-heeled clients with AI insights delivered with a human touch.

Despite the crowded field, Koba believes Astor can distinguish itself with its text and voice advice, and because its AI models are optimized for personal finance. The startup, which charges $15 a month and $40 for an unlimited Pro version, says it currently has around 4,000 customers.

One challenge that Astor and others face is that the business of financial advice is highly regulated, and requires companies to look out for the best interests of their customers. To this end, Koba says he obtained his advisor license, known as Series 65, and that any advice Astor provides to clients is thoroughly fact-checked by the firm’s own agents.

In addition to Monashees, Astor received financial backing from Y Combinator, Goodwater, and executives from Stripe and OpenAI.

“Most people don’t need more investment products, they need someone in their corner. Astor gives people the knowledge and guidance to actually take control of their financial future,” said Monashees partner Fabiola Quinzaños in a statement.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

WASHINGTON, D.C. — President Donald Trump is openly entertaining an extraordinary federal intervention in the U.S. airline industry, signaling that the government could take control of bankrupt Spirit Airlines Inc. and later sell it for a profit, as his administration moves closer to finalizing a $500 million rescue package aimed at preventing the discount carrier’s collapse.

“I think we’d just buy it,” Trump said in an interview with CNBC on Tuesday, framing the potential move as both a jobs-saving measure and a strategic investment. “You know, Spirit’s in trouble, and I’d love somebody to buy Spirit. It’s 14,000 jobs, and maybe the federal government should help that one out,” he added, underscoring the administration’s willingness to intervene in a sector historically left to private markets.

People familiar with the negotiations say the Trump administration is now in advanced talks to structure a financing package that would keep Spirit operating through bankruptcy, with terms that could ultimately hand Washington a controlling equity stake. The proposed deal centers on roughly $500 million in government-backed financing, structured initially as a loan that would later convert into a longer-term instrument upon Spirit’s emergence from Chapter 11.

According to individuals briefed on the plan, the financing would likely include warrants that could give the U.S. government up to a 90% ownership stake in Spirit Airlines — a level of control rarely seen outside of crisis-era bailouts. Administration officials argue the structure mirrors past interventions designed to stabilize critical industries while preserving taxpayer upside, with one senior official noting the goal is to “protect jobs now and recover value later.”

Confirmation that a deal is imminent came during a bankruptcy court hearing Thursday, where a Spirit Airlines attorney told the court the company is “close to securing” a federal rescue package. A person familiar with the negotiations said an announcement could come within days, ahead of a tentative April 30 court hearing where the terms of the agreement may be formally reviewed.

The proposal, however, is already exposing divisions within the administration. Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy publicly raised concerns about the risks of committing taxpayer funds to a carrier that has struggled to achieve sustained profitability. “What we don’t want to do is put good money after bad,” Duffy said. “There’s been a lot of money thrown at Spirit, and they haven’t found their way into profitability,” he added, reflecting broader skepticism among some policymakers about the long-term viability of ultra-low-cost carriers under current market conditions.

The White House has pushed back forcefully, placing responsibility for Spirit’s financial distress on prior regulatory decisions. Kush Desai, a White House spokesman, said in a statement that “Spirit Airlines would be on a much firmer financial footing had the Biden administration not recklessly blocked the airline’s merger with JetBlue,” referring to the antitrust challenge that derailed the proposed consolidation — a deal industry analysts had argued could have provided Spirit with scale and financial stability.

Beyond regulatory headwinds, macroeconomic pressures have sharply intensified the airline’s challenges. Administration officials and industry analysts point to the ongoing Iran conflict as a major driver of rising costs, particularly jet fuel. According to energy market data, jet fuel prices have roughly doubled since the escalation of hostilities, compressing margins across the airline industry and disproportionately impacting lower-cost carriers like Spirit that operate with thinner financial buffers.

“Fuel is the single biggest swing factor for these airlines,” said one aviation analyst familiar with Spirit’s restructuring efforts. “When you combine that with debt from prior restructurings and failed merger attempts, it creates a very narrow path forward without external support,” the analyst added.

Spirit’s financial trajectory has been particularly volatile. The airline has entered bankruptcy proceedings twice since 2025 following the collapse of merger efforts with JetBlue Airways Corp., leaving it struggling to stabilize operations amid mounting costs and competitive pressures. The company had been aiming to exit Chapter 11 by early summer, but deteriorating market conditions and higher fuel expenses have complicated those plans.

A successful government-backed restructuring would allow Spirit to continue operating and avoid what would be the first major U.S. airline liquidation in more than two decades — a scenario that industry observers warn could ripple across regional labor markets and low-cost travel segments. “Losing a carrier like Spirit would have real consequences for pricing and accessibility, especially for budget-conscious travelers,” one industry executive said.

Still, the scale and structure of the proposed intervention raise broader questions about the role of government in private markets. While supporters argue the move is justified to preserve jobs and maintain competition, critics warn it could set a precedent for future bailouts in industries facing cyclical pressures rather than systemic collapse.

For now, all eyes are on the upcoming bankruptcy court proceedings, where the contours of the deal are expected to come into sharper focus. If finalized, the Spirit rescue would mark one of the most aggressive federal interventions in the airline industry since the post-9/11 era — and potentially reshape how Washington approaches distressed private-sector companies in a higher-cost, geopolitically volatile economic environment.

What comes next will be critical: whether the government can stabilize Spirit without distorting the competitive landscape — and whether taxpayers ultimately see a return on what could become one of the most unconventional airline investments in modern U.S. history.

JBizNews Desk

U.S. retail spending picked up in February, offering a fresh sign that consumers kept buying despite a weak start to the year and lingering concerns about growth. The U.S. Census Bureau said in its advance monthly report that retail and food services sales rose 0.6% from January, while the year-over-year increase reached 3.7%; economists surveyed by Reuters had expected a 0.5% gain, and the government’s release pointed to a broad recovery after winter disruptions hit activity early in the year.

The rebound mattered because consumer spending remains the main engine of the U.S. economy, and several economists said the February data suggested households had not sharply retrenched. In commentary carried by Reuters, economists said severe winter weather likely depressed January activity and set up a payback in February, while analysts at Oxford Economics said in a note that spending trends still pointed to “resilient” household demand even if momentum looked uneven across categories.

The strongest gains came from discretionary and everyday categories that often serve as a read on household confidence. The Census Bureau said sales at department stores rose 3.0%, health and personal care stores increased 2.3%, and clothing and accessories stores advanced 2.0%; motor vehicle and parts dealers, gasoline stations and nonstore retailers also posted gains, according to the official release. Those figures suggested shoppers returned to stores and online channels after January’s weather-related slowdown rather than pulling back decisively.

Not every corner of retail shared equally in the improvement, a reminder that consumers still face higher borrowing costs and persistent price pressure in some categories. Economists cited by Bloomberg said the latest report fit a pattern of selective spending, with households still willing to spend on essentials and targeted discretionary purchases but more cautious on big-ticket outlays. Bloomberg Economics economists said the data indicated consumption “remains on a moderate expansion path,” even if monthly readings continue to swing with weather, seasonal quirks and shifting gasoline prices.

The February report also arrived as investors and policymakers looked for evidence on whether the labor market and wage growth still support consumption. Officials at the Federal Reserve have repeatedly said they are watching household demand for clues on inflation and economic durability. In recent public remarks published by the Federal Reserve, Chair Jerome Powell said the economy has remained “solid” while inflation still sits above the central bank’s target, a combination that keeps attention on whether spending strength could delay interest-rate cuts.

Retail executives have offered a similarly mixed but not alarmed picture of the consumer backdrop. On recent earnings calls reported by CNBC and other outlets, several major chains said shoppers remain value-conscious but continue to spend when they see promotions, convenience or necessity. Walmart executives have said consumers are “choiceful” and focused on value, according to company earnings materials, while Target has said customers continue to respond to compelling assortments and seasonal demand, underscoring that spending has not disappeared so much as become more selective.

For markets, the retail sales figures help shape expectations for first-quarter growth and the path of monetary policy. Economists tracked by The Wall Street Journal and Reuters have said stronger retail activity can support GDP estimates, though they also caution that nominal sales data reflect prices as well as volumes. Analysts at Bank of America, in research cited by financial media, said the consumer still looks healthier than many recession forecasts assumed, even as lower-income households remain under greater strain from credit-card balances and financing costs.

The details of the report reinforced that point: categories tied to daily life and mobility held up, while the overall gain marked the best monthly increase in several months. The Census Bureau release showed that retail sales excluding food services still improved, and economists quoted by MarketWatch said the data were consistent with an economy that continues to expand at a moderate pace rather than slipping abruptly. That distinction matters for companies planning inventory, pricing and hiring into the second quarter.

What comes next will depend on whether February’s rebound extends into spring and whether inflation cools enough to give households more real purchasing power. Upcoming reports on jobs, prices and personal consumption will test whether the consumer can keep carrying the expansion, and officials at the Federal Reserve have made clear in public statements that they want more evidence before changing course on rates. For retailers, lenders and investors alike, the February sales gain offered a clear message from the Census Bureau data and economists cited by Reuters and Bloomberg: the U.S. consumer still looks active, and that keeps the broader economy on firmer footing than many had feared.

JBizNews Desk

Heated socks sold at Costco have been recalled after customers reported receiving burn injuries, according to the Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC).

The 32 Degrees Heated Socks were sold in sizes medium, large and extra large. The CPSC report said when the socks are worn during “high intensity activities” they pose a potential burn hazard. 

According to the CPSC, there were 14 reported heat-related incidents as a result of wearing the socks, with 13 of them involving first or second-degree partial thickness burns. 

The CPSC did not specify whether the issue stems from the battery pack, heating elements or prolonged heat exposure.

COSTCO ISSUES RECALL FOR CERTAIN GIFT CARDS

About 207,806 packs of socks were recalled. 

The affected socks were sold at both Costco retailers and online at Costco.com from August 2025 through March 2026, ranging from $30 and $46 in price. 

FORD RECALLS OVER 140,000 PICKUP TRUCKS OVER WIRING FIRE RISK

A spokesperson for Costco did not immediately respond to FOX Business’ request for comment.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO 

Consumers are urged to stop using the socks immediately and return them to Costco for a full refund. For additional information, customers can contact 32 Degrees toll-free at 833-997-2452 from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. ET Monday through Friday, email recall@32degrees.com or visit the company’s website and click “Sock Recall” under the Support section.

The recall underscores a broader concern with heated wearable products, where items marketed for everyday comfort can pose risks when used in real-world conditions. As consumers increasingly rely on battery-powered apparel during active use — from outdoor work to exercise — the reported injuries highlight a potential gap between how these products are expected to perform and how they actually function under higher-intensity activity.

The recall comes as Costco has faced other recent product safety issues, including a Generac portable generator sold through the retailer that was recalled over fire risks.

Fox Business’ Bradford Betz contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

A California-based ice cream company is recalling dozens of products over missing ingredient labels that could put people with food allergies at risk.

Silver Moon LP, operating as Loard’s Ice Cream, is voluntarily recalling all retail-sized products because they may contain undeclared allergens, including milk, eggs, wheat, tree nuts, peanuts and soy, according to an April 16 notice from the Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

The FDA warned that anyone with allergies or sensitivities to those ingredients could face a “serious or life-threatening allergic reaction” if they consume the products.

GENERAC RECALLS PORTABLE GENERATORS SOLD AT COSTCO OVER FIRE RISK

The affected ice cream products were sold in 32-ounce paper containers and 56-ounce plastic cups at Loard’s Ice Cream parlors across Northern California, where they were available in storefront freezers.

The recall covers a wide range of flavors, including chocolate, vanilla, strawberry, pistachio, peanut butter fudge, mango, horchata, coffee, eggnog, cookies and cream, black raspberry, blueberry cheesecake, chocolate mint, butterscotch and banana.

MACY’S RECALLS POPULAR KITCHEN ITEM OVER BURN RISK

The issue was discovered during an FDA inspection. No illnesses have been reported so far.

Consumers who have purchased these products are urged to return it to the place of purchase for a full refund or replacement with updated packaging,” the FDA said.

CANTALOUPES RECALLED NATIONWIDE OVER SALMONELLA FEARS — WHAT SHOPPERS NEED TO KNOW

A full list of affected products is available on the FDA’s website.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

FOX Business reached out to Silver Moon LP for comment.

This post was originally published here

WASHINGTON, D.C. — A sweeping U.S. government move to restrict satellite imagery over Iran is sending ripples through the global Earth-observation industry, forcing companies, investors, and intelligence users to confront a core vulnerability: commercial space businesses ultimately operate at the discretion of government power.

San Francisco–based Planet Labs PBC, one of the world’s largest commercial satellite imaging providers, said on April 5 it would indefinitely suspend distribution of imagery covering Iran and the broader Middle East conflict zone following a direct request from U.S. authorities. The restriction, retroactive to March 9, replaces the company’s prior 14-day delay policy with a far tighter “managed access” system, limiting availability of both its high-resolution SkySat and medium-resolution PlanetScope data. “These are extraordinary circumstances,” the company told customers, adding it is working “to balance the needs of all stakeholders.

The directive stems from escalating hostilities that began on February 28, when the United States and Israel launched coordinated strikes against Iranian targets. Iran’s subsequent missile and drone responses across Israel and the Gulf have transformed the region into one of the most tightly contested environments for commercial imaging since the Iraq War. The Pentagon, declining to comment publicly, has characterized the restrictions as tied to sensitive national security considerations.

At the center of the policy is a little-known but powerful legal tool: “shutter control.” Under the Land Remote Sensing Policy Act of 1992, U.S.-licensed satellite operators must comply with federal directives that can limit or halt data collection and distribution during national security events. The authority is overseen by the Department of Commerce, led by Secretary Howard Lutnick, in coordination with the Department of Defense. By accepting federal licenses through the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), companies effectively agree to these constraints as a condition of doing business.

The implications are profound for a sector long marketed as independent, transparent, and commercially driven. Analysts estimate the Earth-observation market at roughly $5 billion globally, with growth fueled by demand from agriculture, climate monitoring, defense, and financial services. But the Iran blackout is testing whether that model can withstand direct government intervention at scale.

For Planet Labs, the tension is particularly acute. The company built its brand — and its 2021 public listing — on the promise of open, near-real-time global imagery accessible to commercial clients, researchers, and media organizations. At the time of its IPO, Planet projected that commercial customers would account for nearly 70% of revenue by 2026. Instead, commercial revenue represented just 18% in 2025, underscoring the company’s continued reliance on government contracts even before the latest restrictions.

Competitors are navigating the situation differently. Vantor, the rebranded successor to Maxar Technologies, said it had not received a direct order from Washington but has implemented its own “enhanced access controls” in conflict zones, including parts of the Middle East. Those measures can restrict who is permitted to task satellites or purchase imagery. BlackSky Technology Inc., another major U.S. provider, has not publicly detailed its response, though both companies derive roughly half their revenue from U.S. defense and intelligence agencies.

The uneven application of restrictions highlights a deeper structural divide in the industry. Companies like Planet, which historically emphasized open access, face sharper disruptions when data flows are curtailed. By contrast, firms with heavier government ties are often already operating within controlled-access frameworks, making compliance less visible to end users.

Beyond corporate balance sheets, the blackout is already affecting a wide ecosystem of analysts, watchdogs, and international organizations. Groups such as the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) and open-source intelligence platforms like Bellingcat have relied heavily on Planet’s daily imagery to monitor nuclear facilities, verify military activity, and document human rights conditions. Without that steady stream of data, independent verification of events inside Iran has become significantly more difficult.

No other U.S. company provides the same breadth of open access that Planet historically has,” said Jeffrey Lewis, director of the East Asia Nonproliferation Program at the Middlebury Institute. The sudden loss of that visibility, he noted, creates blind spots not just for governments but for the global public.

Some customers are already shifting to alternatives. European providers, including those affiliated with the European Space Agency, and commercial operators in Asia face no obligation to comply with U.S. directives. China, which operates the largest Earth-imaging satellite network outside the United States, is also emerging as a potential beneficiary as users seek uninterrupted data sources.

Investors have long flagged shutter control as a latent risk in the sector, but the Iran restrictions represent one of the most expansive uses of that authority in decades. While government contracts provide stable baseline revenue, forced data blackouts can erode the value proposition for commercial clients who depend on timely, unrestricted access.

The episode is prompting a broader reassessment of the industry’s future. Can a business built on transparency and real-time intelligence coexist with national security constraints that can instantly override commercial operations? Or will the sector increasingly evolve into a quasi-governmental extension, where access, pricing, and availability are shaped as much by policy as by market demand?

For now, the answer remains unsettled. But as geopolitical tensions intensify and space-based infrastructure becomes more central to both warfare and commerce, the Iran blackout is likely to serve as a defining case study — one that will shape how investors, regulators, and companies value control in the final frontier.

JBizNews Desk

Meta has informed its staff that it will let go of roughly 8,000 employees — approximately 10% of its workforce — as it looks to bolster its presence in the artificial intelligence space. 

The employees were told about the sweeping cuts in a memo as the company prepares to make heavy investments in AI. The layoffs are expected to begin May 20.

“I know this is unwelcome news and confirming this puts everyone in an uneasy state, but we feel this is the best path forward, given the circumstances,” Chief People Officer Janelle Gale wrote in the memo obtained by Bloomberg News.

META’S BAY AREA LAYOFFS AFFECT ROUGHLY 200 WORKERS AS COMPANY POURS BILLIONS INTO AI INFRASTRUCTURE

A Meta spokesperson declined to comment on the job cuts but confirmed the memo and its contents with FOX Business. 

Other tech companies are making staff reductions amid a boom in AI spending; on Thursday, Microsoft Corp. offered voluntary retirement to around 8,750 people, or 7% of its U.S. workforce, according to Bloomberg.

In her memo, Gale wrote that the layoffs are “part of our continued effort to run the company more efficiently and to allow us to offset the other investments we’re making.”

META VOWS APPEAL OF ‘LANDMARK’ SOCIAL MEDIA VERDICTS, WARNS OF FREE SPEECH EROSION

“This is not an easy tradeoff, and it will mean letting go of people who have made meaningful contributions to Meta during their time here,” she said.

Laid-off employees will receive a generous severance package, as well as career support services to help find other jobs and immigration support for those who need it.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The company previously laid off 11,000 workers in November 2022—about 13% of its workforce—and cut another 10,000 jobs months later. Meta employed nearly 79,000 people as of Dec. 31, according to its latest filing.

This post was originally published here

New York Attorney General Letitia James moved to shut down prediction-market offerings tied to Coinbase Financial Markets and Gemini, escalating a broader fight over whether event contracts belong under financial regulation or state gambling law. In statements released by the New York Attorney General’s Office on April 21, James said the platforms offered products that “allow users to wager on the outcome of future events” without the licenses New York requires for gambling activity, putting two prominent crypto-linked firms into a fresh legal and regulatory spotlight.

According to court petitions filed in New York state court by the Office of the Attorney General, the state argues that the companies’ so-called event contracts function like bets on real-world outcomes, including sports, elections and other public events. In the filings, cited by the attorney general’s office, James said New York law “prohibits risking something of value upon the outcome of a contest of chance or a future contingent event not under the actor’s control,” framing the products as unlawful gambling rather than permissible financial instruments.

The case lands at a sensitive moment for prediction markets, which have drawn rising interest from traders, crypto firms and political observers as platforms package binary contracts into an easy-to-use retail product. The Commodity Futures Trading Commission has said in prior public orders and litigation involving other event-contract venues that certain contracts can fall under federal commodities law, while state officials continue to assert their own authority where products resemble wagering. That tension, legal experts told outlets including Reuters and Bloomberg in earlier coverage of the sector, has left the industry operating in a patchwork of overlapping rules.

In its petition against Coinbase Financial Markets, New York said the company offered contracts that let users buy “yes” or “no” positions priced to reflect implied odds and receive a payout if the event occurred, according to the filing. The state said that structure mirrors a wager because the result depends on an external event outside the customer’s control. Coinbase has not publicly embraced the gambling label; in prior public statements about derivatives and event contracts, the company has said it seeks to expand access to regulated markets and work with U.S. authorities, according to company materials and regulatory disclosures.

The petition involving Gemini Titan makes a similar argument, with the attorney general’s office saying the exchange operator enabled New York users to participate in event-based contracts without obtaining state gambling approvals. In the office’s public statement, James said companies “cannot evade the law simply by calling gambling something else,” underscoring the state’s position that branding the products as contracts or market instruments does not change their legal character under New York statutes. Gemini, founded by Cameron Winklevoss and Tyler Winklevoss, has frequently said in public communications that it supports rules for digital-asset markets and favors clear oversight.

The dispute matters beyond two companies because event contracts have become one of the fastest-growing corners of retail trading, attracting users who treat elections, sports and economic releases like investable outcomes. In public commentary on the sector, analysts cited by Bloomberg and CNBC have said the appeal lies in simple, binary pricing and the perception that prediction markets aggregate information efficiently. Critics, including some state regulators and anti-gambling advocates quoted in those reports, argue the products can sidestep consumer protections and invite speculation under the veneer of financial innovation.

New York’s action also adds to the compliance burden facing crypto firms that already contend with a dense state-by-state framework. The state’s financial regime, administered separately by the New York State Department of Financial Services, already ranks among the toughest in the U.S. for digital-asset businesses. While this case centers on gambling law rather than virtual-currency licensing, the message from James remains broad: companies serving New York residents need to match product design with local legal requirements, the attorney general’s office said in its release.

The legal theory could test how far states can go when products sit near the boundary between derivatives trading and gaming. The CFTC has faced its own battles over event contracts, including disputes over whether contracts tied to political outcomes or sports should trade on federally regulated venues. In prior public orders, the agency said certain event contracts may involve gaming or activity contrary to the public interest, while market operators have argued that properly structured contracts serve hedging and price-discovery functions. That unresolved federal debate gives New York’s case broader significance for exchanges, brokers and fintech firms exploring similar products.

What comes next likely turns on whether the companies fight the petitions, restrict access in New York, or seek a licensing or structural workaround. For executives across crypto, brokerage and online trading, the signal from Letitia James and the New York Attorney General’s Office looks clear: products tied to real-world outcomes face scrutiny not only from Washington but from aggressive state enforcers prepared to classify them as gambling. That matters because the outcome could shape where event contracts trade, who can offer them, and whether one of finance’s most talked-about new products scales nationally or fragments under local law.

JBizNews Desk

Trump ‘Gold Card’ Visa Approved for Just One Applicant So Far, Lutnick Tells Congress

WASHINGTON, D.C. — The Trump administration’s flagship “Gold Card” visa program has approved just a single applicant since its launch late last year, a strikingly slow rollout that Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick acknowledged Thursday in testimony before Congress — even as hundreds of applications remain under review.

Speaking before the House Appropriations Committee, Lutnick confirmed that only one foreign national has successfully cleared the program’s rigorous screening process and secured U.S. permanent residency through the initiative, which requires a $1 million contribution to the federal government. The identity of that applicant has not been disclosed. “This is a new program, and they’ve just set it up,” Lutnick told lawmakers. “They wanted to make sure they did it perfectly… it’s a DHS program conducted with rigorous, rigorous vetting.

The program, formally launched through Executive Order 14351 signed by President Donald Trump in September 2025, is designed to offer a fast-track pathway to U.S. residency for wealthy foreign nationals willing to make a substantial financial contribution. It has been positioned by administration officials as a modernized, more flexible alternative to the long-standing EB-5 immigrant investor visa program.

Under the structure outlined by the administration, applicants must first pay a nonrefundable $15,000 processing fee to the Department of Homeland Security, which oversees vetting under Secretary Kristi Noem. Only after passing extensive background checks — which Lutnick has described as “the most rigorous vetting that’s ever been done on new people coming to America” — are candidates permitted to proceed with the $1 million contribution required for final approval.

Despite early expectations of strong global demand, the program’s pace has raised questions on Capitol Hill and among immigration experts. By mid-2025, Lutnick had indicated that nearly 70,000 individuals had joined a waitlist expressing interest in the program. The gap between that initial demand and the lone approval disclosed Thursday underscores the complexity of building a new immigration pathway largely from scratch within existing legal frameworks.

The administration has structured the Gold Card program to operate within current visa categories — specifically EB-1 (extraordinary ability) and EB-2 (national interest waiver) classifications — rather than creating an entirely new statutory visa class. The executive order directs agencies including Commerce, Homeland Security, and the State Department to treat a large financial “gift” to the United States as supporting evidence for eligibility under those categories.

That legal architecture has become a central point of contention. Critics argue that the executive branch may be overstepping its authority by effectively redefining congressionally established immigration standards. Tammy Fox-Isicoff, an immigration attorney at Rifkin & Fox-Isicoff PA, said bluntly: “Congress makes laws, not the President. Nothing about this program was done lawfully, including the application form.

Other legal experts echoed similar concerns. Ronald Klasko, a founding partner at Klasko Immigration Law Partners, warned that the program could face significant judicial risk if courts determine plaintiffs have standing. “There is a good chance that the Gold Card will be found to be unlawful… including the lack of a statutory amendment passed by Congress,” Klasko said, also pointing to the absence of formal regulatory procedures under the Administrative Procedure Act.

The American Immigration Lawyers Association has also weighed in. Shev Dalal-Dheini, the group’s director of government relations, emphasized that structural changes to visa categories require legislative action. “Whether you create a new category or get rid of a different category, you need a statute to do so,” she said.

Legal challenges are already underway. A federal lawsuit filed in February by the American Association of University Professors, joined by immigrant researchers, argues that the program unlawfully prioritizes wealth over merit and circumvents congressional authority. The case is expected to test the limits of executive power in immigration policy — particularly whether financial contributions can substitute for statutory eligibility criteria.

The program also introduces a corporate sponsorship tier, allowing companies to back foreign employees. Under this structure, firms pay a $15,000 processing fee per applicant and a $2 million contribution upon approval, along with ongoing maintenance and transfer fees. Administration officials have framed this feature as a tool to attract top global talent and strengthen U.S. competitiveness.

At the same time, the Gold Card initiative has stirred concern within the existing EB-5 ecosystem. The EB-5 program, established by Congress in 1990 and reauthorized in 2022 through the Reform and Integrity Act, includes investor protections — including a grandfathering provision for applicants filing before September 30, 2026. The Gold Card program, created via executive order, does not offer the same statutory safeguards.

For now, the administration is defending the slow pace as a deliberate choice rather than a flaw. Lutnick reiterated that the program’s revenue and broader economic impact will ultimately be determined by how funds are deployed. “Its terms are for the betterment of the United States of America,” he told lawmakers. “It needs to be for commerce and the betterment of the United States of America.

Still, with only one approval against a backdrop of tens of thousands of prospective applicants, the program’s future may hinge less on demand and more on legal durability. As Congress intensifies oversight and the courts begin to weigh in, the Gold Card initiative is shaping up to be not just an immigration experiment — but a defining test of how far executive authority can stretch in reshaping the U.S. economic immigration system.

JBizNews Desk

United Airlines warned Wednesday that the company is raising ticket prices by as much as 20% as it grapples with surging jet fuel costs driven by the war in Iran.

The alarming notice came during the company’s quarterly earnings call, where CEO Scott Kirby said the airline is aiming to “recover 100% of the increase in jet fuel prices as quickly as possible.”  

“Sell-in yields for all future travel are now up 20% year-over-year,” Executive Vice President and Chief Commercial Officer Andrew Nocella said, indicating that customers are already booking future flights at prices roughly 20% higher than last year’s levels.

Kirby added that yields likely need to remain near that range to achieve long-term profit margins.

AMERICAN AIRLINES CEO SAYS MERGER WITH UNITED WOULD BE ‘BAD FOR CUSTOMERS’

“Yields need to increase by about 15% to 20%, and we are assuming that fuel may remain higher for longer,” he said.

The CEO added that higher prices are expected to dampen overall demand, but noted there have been no signs of decline yet following earlier fare and baggage fee increases implemented since the war began.

“We believe we have the ability to pass on the increase in fuel due in large part to our brand loyal customers, continued demand strength and preference to fly United even at higher fares,” Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer Michael Leskinen said. 

MAJOR AIRLINE AXES 20,000 ‘UNPROFITABLE’ FLIGHTS AS JET FUEL COSTS SOAR

“At this point, we can tell you that the price increases are going well and demand is hanging in there really strong,” Nocella added.  

The airline has already implemented five broad price increases since January mostly to offset higher fuel costs, according to the call. 

While ticket yields were up just 4% year over year in January and February, they reportedly climbed to 12% in early March, 18% later that month, and have now reached 20% for all future travel. 

United further attributed its “robust” demand to a strong base of brand-loyal customers and continued strength in premium and business travel.

Kirby also suggested that if demand does soften, the carrier may respond by supplying fewer seats to the market.  

Management noted that the longer fuel prices remain elevated, the more likely higher ticket prices are to become permanent across the industry.

UNITED AIRLINES CHECKED BAG FEES CLIMB $10–$50 AS FUEL PRICES NEARLY DOUBLE SINCE IRAN WAR

Fuel costs have surged to multi-year highs following the outbreak of the U.S.–Israel conflict with Iran on Feb. 28, which disrupted roughly 20% of global oil flows passing through the Strait of Hormuz.

As of Wednesday, jet fuel in major U.S. markets averaged $4.23 per gallon, up nearly 70% from levels seen before the war began, according to Argus data published by Airlines for America. At one point in early April, prices reportedly surged more than 95% to $4.88 per gallon.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

In response, multiple major airlines have launched efforts to mitigate rising operating costs, including increasing baggage fees and consolidating flights by canceling select routes. 

United Airlines specifically raised checked bag fees by $10 to $50 earlier this month.

This post was originally published here

The United States Navy’s blockade of Iranian ports is working to perfection, and is basically stopping Iran from selling any oil or getting any money. Losing $400 or $500 million a day means you’re in a business that has no future. You won’t meet payroll. No retirement accounts. No health benefits either. And your employees and their families and friends are getting very, very angry. They didn’t sign on to this insane radical Islamism, which is leading to the destruction of their country. Just think about this, it’s how revolutions begin.

And besides President Trump’s steel backbone in maintaining the blockade, hats off to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent for his own maximum pressure campaign through Economic Fury. My sources tell me the Treasury has been freezing all those Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps offshore bank accounts in places like Turkey, Qatar, the United Arab Emirates, and Oman. These are the generals who have looted and stolen from Iran for decades and decades so they and their kids can live the high life outside of Iran. It’s what dictators and totalitarians always do. Yet many, if not most, of these Iranian offshore bank accounts have been frozen by Mr. Bessent.

So no dollars are available to Iran. Very important: no dollars are getting into Iran. This is the banking freeze. It’s also the export-import freeze. And sources tell me the secretary is poised to sanction any country that facilitates any trade or finance flows on behalf of Iran. If they do, they will be thrown out of the American economic system. Knocked off the Swift accounting ledger and the New York Fed’s transactions wire. So hats off to Mr. Bessent for keeping the financial heat on as part of the war effort.

Now, as bad as it’s gotten in Iran, the other side of the coin is that Trump-Bessent economic policies are keeping the American economy in pretty good shape. Four-dollar-a-gallon gasoline has not stopped significant consumer spending. Manufacturing has come alive. Take a look at the ISMs and the S&P Global PMIs. Private sector employment has beaten all expectations. The unemployment rate is at a low 4.3 percent.

Looking through the temporary energy price spike, the inflation rate is probably close to 2.5 percent, and you can bet Kevin Warsh will bring it lower when he takes over. Weekly and monthly unemployment claims remain rock bottom.  And profits, which are the mother’s milk of stocks and the lifeblood of the economy, are booming.

Productivity is high. Unit labor costs are low. And business is making good money in order to expand, build new factories, and pay overtime and tips without taxes. And stock markets are at or near record highs across the board. America is a great free-market capitalist economic machine, backed up by a president who believes in rewarding success, not punishing it. And pushes for free and fair trade.

Finally, another reason for America’s economic success during wartime is simple: we have oil. Plenty of it. Mr. Trump’s “drill, baby, drill” over the past decade was sheer genius. We don’t need their oil, we have our own oil. And virtually the rest of the world is coming to us because they need fuel and we are reliable suppliers. Just think of it.

This post was originally published here

As the 2026 NFL Draft is set to kick off, Fanatics and the NFL announced an exclusive, multi-year partnership where the global sports platform will be the league’s official on-site retail partner at marquee events like the one set for Thursday night in Pittsburgh. 

Fanatics will be bringing its on-site retail expertise to marquee global events, including the Super Bowl, NFL Kickoff, NFL International Games, NFL Flag Championships, NFL Scouting Combine and the Pro Bowl Games. 

This marks the first time both sides have come together to impact on-location retail at the Super Bowl and NFL Draft, the latter of which seeing a fun activation for all fans watching their favorite teams draft the future over the next three days. 

CLICK HERE FOR MORE SPORTS COVERAGE ON FOXBUSINESS.COM

Fanatics will be operating more than 10 retail locations throughout the draft footprint in Pittsburgh, headlined by a massive, 13,000-square-foot NFL Shop flagship tent. The footprint will also include satellite trailers, stadium concourse locations and more all conveniently located throughout the North Shore of Pittsburgh, which includes Acrisure Stadium and Point State Park. 

There will be more than 250 products from brands like Nike, New Era, Mitchell & ness, Topps, ’47, Homage, Yeti and many more as part of Fanatics’ on-location retail system with the league. 

‘NFL REDZONE’ HOST SCOTT HANSON PREDICTS WILD FIRST ROUND OF THE NFL DRAFT

And even better, for the first time ever, fans at the draft will be able to order a special jersey for any first-round pick moments after that player is selected, with jerseys produced entirely on-site. The jerseys will feature a 2026 NFL Draft patch, the player’s name and the number one on the back – just like the ones they will receive on stage. 

“As the NFL has grown into a year-round, global event leader, Fanatics has established itself as the perfect partner to meet consumer demand for the best merchandise possible,” Casey Collins, NFL Senior Vice President of Consumer Products and Licensing, said in a statement. “We look forward to working in lockstep with Fanatics to deliver every fan a world-class retail experience during the League’s biggest moments.” 

Fanatics’ expanded partnership with the NFL taps into the global sports platform’s merchandising and operational capabilities, while also showcasing its creativity with the retail footprint at these key events each year. 

For example, exclusive and unique collabrations and capsule collections were created for the NFL Draft, focusing on the rich history of Pittsburgh. The “Bridge to Greatness” is a Fanatics curated assortment of premium workwear-inspired T-shirts, hoodies, quarter-zips, and coaches jackets in black-on-black and Pittsburgh’s black and gold colorways, which will be available exclusive on-site for the draft. Pittsburgh-based artist Jeremy Raymer will also be hosting a live art activation, creating one-of-one pieces for the collection. 

Mitchell & Ness also created a Mac Miller tribute collection for the late Pittsburgh music icon, which includes jerseys, T-shirts, hoodies and hats. From Homage’s tributes to the belovevd Primanti Brothers and Mr. Rogers institutions, to designer John Geiger’s collaborations with Fanatics and New Era, the draft will have it all for those in the great city of Pittsburgh as well as those traveling to witness their rookie selections become a part of their team in person. 

“Fanatics and the NFL have built a truly collaborative, cross-functional business together, and this partnership is a testament to that growth and a look to the future,” Gary Gertzog, Fanatics President of Business Affairs, said in a statement. “The League is reaching more fans across more countries each year, and we believe that our global scale and expertise in merchandising and retail operations set us up perfectly to super-serve the fan experience across these coveted, marquee sports moments.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Fanatics was already the official e-commerce partner of the NFL, but this partnership significantly expands their work together, impacting the millions of fans in the States and beyond to deliver an unparalleled fan experience during football’s greatest events. 

Follow Fox News Digital’s sports coverage on X and subscribe to the Fox News Sports Huddle newsletter.

This post was originally published here

America’s largest private landowner is pushing aggressively into artificial intelligence and automation, aiming to modernize one of the oldest industries in the U.S. economy while targeting $1.5 billion in incremental earnings by the end of the decade. For Weyerhaeuser Co., the strategy represents a fundamental shift: turning timber from a cyclical commodity business into a data-driven, precision-managed enterprise.

The Seattle-based company, which manages millions of acres of timberland across North America, is deploying AI across both its forests and manufacturing operations. Devin W. Stockfish, President and Chief Executive Officer of Weyerhaeuser, has emphasized that the company’s scale gives it a unique advantage, noting that its vast land holdings generate enormous datasets that can be leveraged to optimize growth, harvest timing, and operational efficiency. Industry analysts increasingly view that data as a competitive moat.

At the center of the strategy is an ambitious financial target. Weyerhaeuser expects to generate $1.5 billion in additional Adjusted EBITDA by 2030, compared with a 2024 baseline, through a series of operational and technological initiatives. The company has outlined specific contributions across business segments, including approximately $440 million from Wood Products, $230 million from Strategic Land Solutions, $180 million from enterprise-wide initiatives, and $150 million from Timberlands, according to company disclosures. Notably, executives have stressed that these gains are designed to materialize regardless of fluctuations in lumber prices—a key departure from the industry’s traditional earnings model.

Artificial intelligence is already being deployed on the factory floor. At Weyerhaeuser’s oriented strand board facility in Heaters, West Virginia, the company implemented a machine-learning system developed with AI2Infinity to optimize dryer operations handling roughly 200,000 pounds of wood strands per hour. The system continuously adjusts operating conditions in real time, improving efficiency beyond what human operators can achieve. A similar system has since been introduced at the company’s engineered wood products facility in Eugene, Oregon, where it is optimizing veneer press performance.

“This technology is self-learning, so it will just get better and better over time,” a company official said in a corporate update, highlighting how AI can dynamically refine processes. “The AI is faster at determining when to modify the settings than humans are.”

Beyond the mill, Weyerhaeuser is digitizing the forest itself. The company has developed a Next Generation Water Mapping tool that uses internally collected high-resolution LiDAR data to generate one-meter-resolution stream and terrain maps across its timberlands. According to company engineers, the system provides significantly greater accuracy than publicly available datasets, enabling more precise environmental management and harvest planning.

The company is also integrating LiDAR, drone imagery, and GIS analytics to refine planting density, thinning cycles, and harvest timing. Analysts say these tools can yield incremental productivity gains of 1% to 2% annually in key regions such as the U.S. South, where pine plantations dominate. Over time, even modest gains at that scale could translate into substantial financial impact.

Partnerships are playing a role as well. Weyerhaeuser has been working with Treeswift, a drone-based analytics firm, to measure timber inventory and estimate carbon volumes across its land portfolio—capabilities that could become increasingly valuable as carbon markets develop and environmental reporting standards tighten.

At the enterprise level, management has identified roughly $180 million in value creation tied to automation and advanced analytics. These initiatives include real-time forest monitoring, predictive maintenance in mills, optimized logistics, and reduced material waste. The company describes its approach as combining “best-in-class culture and technology platforms” to drive sustained operational improvement.

For investors, the broader significance lies in Weyerhaeuser’s attempt to redefine how a resource company generates returns. By embedding AI into both land management and manufacturing, the company is effectively seeking to decouple earnings growth from volatile commodity cycles—a longstanding challenge in the timber and broader materials sectors.

Analysts at firms including Goldman Sachs and RBC Capital Markets have noted that while execution risk remains, the strategy positions Weyerhaeuser closer to an industrial technology operator than a traditional timber REIT. The combination of proprietary land data, automation, and long-term biological growth cycles creates a unique platform that competitors may struggle to replicate at scale.

The outcome of that bet will take years to fully materialize. But if successful, Weyerhaeuser could reshape not only its own earnings profile but also expectations for the entire forestry sector—demonstrating that even the most traditional industries can be reengineered through data, automation, and disciplined capital allocation.

JBizNews Desk

Roughly half of outstanding U.S. mortgages still carry rates below 4%, a legacy of the pandemic-era refinancing boom that continues to choke housing turnover and keep many owners anchored in place. Redfin said in market analysis published in 2024 that about 82% of homeowners with mortgages hold rates below 6%, a dynamic Chief Economist Daryl Fairweather described as a powerful lock-in effect that leaves owners reluctant to trade cheap debt for far costlier financing.

That divide traces directly to the emergency policy response of 2020 and 2021, when the Federal Reserve cut its benchmark rate to near zero and mortgage borrowing costs collapsed. In a 2024 speech, Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell said the central bank understood that higher rates now weigh on interest-sensitive sectors, while Freddie Mac data show the average 30-year fixed mortgage rate fell to a record low of 2.65% in January 2021 before climbing above 6% and, at times, near 7% in the current cycle.

The result: homeowners who refinanced or bought during that period hold financing terms that look almost impossible to replace. Realtor.com has said the so-called lock-in effect remains one of the biggest reasons existing-home supply stays constrained, and Chief Economist Danielle Hale said in company commentary that many owners simply “don’t want to give up” ultra-low monthly payments. Data from the National Association of Realtors reinforce the point, with Chief Economist Lawrence Yun repeatedly saying elevated mortgage rates and limited inventory continue to suppress sales activity even as underlying demand for housing persists.

The pressure shows up clearly in transaction data. According to the National Association of Realtors, existing-home sales in 2024 remained near historically weak levels, and Lawrence Yun said in recent releases that “home sales have been essentially stuck” because affordability remains difficult and owners with low-rate mortgages have little incentive to list. Fannie Mae economists have delivered a similar assessment, saying in housing outlooks that the spread between existing homeowners’ mortgage rates and prevailing market rates has become a structural drag on mobility.

That immobility matters far beyond real estate agents and homebuilders. Economists at Bank of America and Goldman Sachs have said in research notes covered by Reuters and Bloomberg that reduced housing turnover dampens spending on renovations, furniture, appliances and moving-related services. Redfin has also argued that the lock-in effect limits labor mobility because workers who might otherwise relocate for a job face a much steeper housing payment if they move, a point Daryl Fairweather tied to broader economic frictions in public comments cited by major outlets.

Affordability has deteriorated sharply for new buyers, even if many existing owners sit on favorable debt. Mortgage Bankers Association Chief Economist Mike Fratantoni said in recent market commentary that purchase demand remains highly sensitive to rate moves because home prices and financing costs together keep monthly payments elevated. Weekly survey data from the Mortgage Bankers Association and rate tracking from Freddie Mac show that even modest declines in mortgage rates tend to bring buyers back, underscoring how constrained demand has become under current financing conditions.

Home prices, meanwhile, have stayed unexpectedly firm because supply remains so thin. S&P Dow Jones Indices said in its latest Case-Shiller release that national home prices continue to sit near record highs, and index manager Brian D. Luke said annual gains reflect “continued resilience” in the housing market despite affordability strains. That combination of high prices and high rates leaves first-time buyers squeezed while incumbent owners enjoy both low financing costs and, in many cases, substantial home equity accumulated over the past several years.

Policymakers and housing economists do not expect a quick reset. In its economic and housing outlook, Fannie Mae said mortgage rates could ease gradually but likely remain above the levels that prevailed during the refinancing boom, meaning the lock-in effect should persist. Jerome Powell has said the Federal Reserve does not set mortgage rates directly and that longer-term borrowing costs depend on broader market conditions, inflation expectations and Treasury yields, a reminder that even eventual Fed easing may not recreate the cheap financing of 2020 and 2021.

For builders, lenders and investors, the next phase hinges on whether lower rates arrive fast enough to unlock inventory without reigniting price pressure. Lennar and D.R. Horton executives have said on earnings calls that builders continue to use mortgage-rate buydowns and incentives to attract buyers, effectively stepping into a market where resale supply remains constrained. Until a larger share of owners feel comfortable giving up mortgages that start with a three or even a two, the U.S. housing market looks set to remain defined by scarcity, weak turnover and a widening divide between those who already own and those still trying to get in.

JBizNews Desk

U.S. equities stepped back from record levels Thursday, as investors recalibrated risk in response to escalating tensions in the Middle East while continuing to digest a mixed but resilient corporate earnings backdrop. The pullback was measured rather than disorderly, reflecting a market still supported by strong economic undercurrents but increasingly sensitive to geopolitical shocks tied to the Strait of Hormuz.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 49,310.32, down 179.71 points, or 0.36%, while the S&P 500 fell 29.50 points, or 0.41%, to 7,108.40. The tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite led declines, dropping 219.06 points, or 0.89%, to 24,438.50, as high-valuation growth stocks faced renewed pressure. Trading volumes remained steady, suggesting rotation—not panic—was the primary driver of the session.

Market participants pointed to a familiar late-cycle pattern: capital shifting out of stretched technology names and into sectors more directly tied to inflation and global supply shocks. That dynamic played out clearly across Thursday’s session.

Strength in industrial and semiconductor names provided a notable counterbalance. United Rentals Inc. (URI) surged more than 22%, with executives citing strong demand tied to U.S. infrastructure expansion and domestic manufacturing. The company’s results reinforced the durability of reshoring trends and capital investment flows into heavy industry.

Meanwhile, Texas Instruments Inc. (TXN) jumped nearly 19%, driven by robust demand for analog and embedded chips supporting artificial intelligence infrastructure. Peers including Microchip Technology Inc. (MCHP) and ON Semiconductor Corp. (ON) also advanced, reflecting continued investor confidence in the AI-driven capital expenditure cycle. Analysts at Morgan Stanley, led by semiconductor specialist Joseph Moore, noted that “industrial and AI-linked demand remains structurally strong despite macro noise,” underscoring a bifurcated tech landscape.

In contrast, software stocks struggled as earnings and forward guidance failed to meet elevated expectations. ServiceNow Inc. (NOW) fell more than 17%, even after topping Wall Street estimates, as investors focused on margin pressures tied to rising energy costs and a slower-than-anticipated pace of enterprise AI monetization. Workday Inc. (WDAY) and other cloud-based enterprise providers also declined, reflecting broader skepticism about near-term growth acceleration in software.

Consumer discretionary names added to the downside. Lululemon Athletica Inc. (LULU) dropped sharply after signaling softer apparel demand trends, suggesting that higher energy costs and inflationary pressures may be beginning to weigh more meaningfully on consumer spending behavior.

Energy markets, by contrast, moved decisively higher. West Texas Intermediate crude settled near $96.50 per barrel, rising approximately 3.8%, while Brent crude pushed above $100, marking a psychologically important threshold. The gains were fueled by renewed concerns over shipping security in the Strait of Hormuz, a critical artery for global oil supply.

President Donald Trump, in remarks Thursday, ordered U.S. naval forces to “shoot and kill any boat” laying mines in the strategic waterway and to intensify mine-sweeping operations. The directive followed reports of vessel seizures and continued Iranian-linked activity in the region. A senior defense official, speaking on background, said the U.S. is “maintaining maximum deterrence while preserving diplomatic channels,” reflecting the administration’s dual-track approach.

Despite the escalation, a fragile ceasefire between the United States and Iran technically remains in place, with diplomatic efforts continuing through intermediaries, including Pakistan. Analysts at Goldman Sachs, led by commodities strategist Daan Struyven, warned that “any sustained disruption in Hormuz flows could materially tighten global energy balances and feed directly into inflation expectations.”

Gold prices edged lower, settling near $4,714 per ounce, as the U.S. dollar held firm and investors refrained from full-scale flight-to-safety positioning. The muted move suggested markets are not yet pricing in a worst-case geopolitical scenario.

On the policy front, the administration continues to walk a narrow line—extending diplomatic timelines while signaling readiness to escalate militarily if necessary. Officials have pointed to strengthening domestic manufacturing activity, driven in part by tariffs and reshoring incentives, as a key pillar supporting economic resilience. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said earlier this week that “the underlying U.S. growth trajectory remains strong,” highlighting industrial expansion as a buffer against external shocks.

Still, rising energy prices pose a potential complication. Economists at JPMorgan, led by chief U.S. economist Michael Feroli, noted that “sustained oil above $100 could begin to filter into broader inflation metrics,” potentially complicating the Federal Reserve’s policy outlook.

Looking ahead, markets enter the weekend with a clear focus: geopolitical developments in the Middle East and the next wave of corporate earnings. While Friday’s economic calendar is relatively light, traders expect headline risk to remain elevated.

The broader takeaway from Thursday’s session is not one of breakdown—but of tension. Markets remain fundamentally supported, yet increasingly reactive to global instability. As long as that balance holds, volatility—not direction—may define the near-term path.

Data compiled from major exchanges and official statements as of the 4 p.m. EDT close on April 23, 2026. After-hours trading continues.

Washington state’s decision to impose a new tax on high earners has sharpened a long-running debate over whether states can raise more revenue from top-income households without pushing people, capital and jobs elsewhere. In a statement released by Gov. Bob Ferguson when he signed the measure, Washington state said the new levy would make the tax code “more fair” and help fund school meals, family tax rebates and other programs, according to the governor’s office and the enacted legislation.

The law marks a notable shift for a state that long marketed itself as a haven from personal income taxes and helped attract major employers including Amazon, Microsoft, Costco, Boeing and Starbucks. Supporters in Olympia argued the change targets only the highest earners, while critics said it risks eroding one of the state’s biggest competitive advantages. In public remarks accompanying the bill signing, Ferguson said the measure means “free meals for K–12 students” and “the largest tax break in state history for small businesses,” according to materials published by the governor’s office.

The broader question confronting governors and lawmakers extends well beyond Washington: whether high-tax states can keep affluent households and corporate investment from drifting to lower-tax rivals in the South and Mountain West. Economists and tax analysts have long cautioned that migration decisions rarely turn on one issue alone, but tax burdens matter at the margin, especially for top earners with mobile income and flexible work arrangements. Jared Walczak, vice president of state projects at the Tax Foundation, has said in the group’s state tax analyses that “taxes are one of many factors” in relocation decisions, but they become more important “for highly mobile individuals and businesses,” according to the organization’s published research.

Recent migration data show the pressure on high-cost, high-tax states has not eased. In annual moving studies, United Van Lines has repeatedly found net outbound migration from states such as California, New York, New Jersey and Illinois, while lower-tax states including Texas, Florida, Tennessee and the Carolinas continue to draw new residents. United Van Lines said in its most recent report that retirement, job changes and lifestyle preferences remained major drivers, but the company’s survey also cited cost of living among the leading reasons for interstate moves.

Official census figures point in the same direction. The U.S. Census Bureau said in its annual population estimates that states in the South posted some of the strongest gains, while several Northeastern and West Coast states lagged or lost residents. Those shifts matter because they influence labor supply, housing demand, tax collections and, over time, congressional representation. In its release on state population trends, the Census Bureau said domestic migration “continued to be a key component of population change” across many states, underscoring how tax and cost pressures can compound broader demographic shifts.

The tax competition story also has a corporate dimension. Tesla moved its headquarters from California to Texas, and Oracle made a similar move, while Chevron and other companies have publicly weighed the costs of operating in states with heavier regulatory and tax burdens. In 2021, Elon Musk said Tesla chose Austin because the Bay Area’s housing costs and long commutes made it “tough for people” and because the company wanted a location where “there’s less congestion,” according to remarks at the company’s annual meeting. Those comments reflected a wider executive calculation in which taxes sit alongside labor costs, regulation, energy prices and housing affordability.

State officials defending higher levies argue the revenue supports services that businesses and families also value. California Gov. Gavin Newsom has repeatedly said the state’s economy remains the nation’s largest and that innovation clusters, deep capital markets and talent pools continue to outweigh relocation headlines. In statements issued by his office and in budget presentations, Newsom has argued that investments in education, infrastructure and climate resilience strengthen long-term competitiveness, even as the state contends with budget volatility tied to capital gains and top-income taxpayers.

That volatility remains a central concern for budget writers. Analysts at the Tax Policy Center and state budget offices have noted that relying heavily on high earners can produce windfalls in boom years and painful shortfalls when markets turn. Lucy Dadayan, a principal research associate at the Urban-Brookings Tax Policy Center, has said in research on state revenues that personal income tax collections in high-income states tend to be “more volatile” because they are closely linked to capital gains and financial market performance, a dynamic that can complicate spending commitments.

For employers, the practical issue is not simply where taxes stand today, but where policy appears headed. Companies weighing expansion plans often look for predictability, and households with the means to move can act quickly if they believe a state’s tax trajectory is turning less favorable. Moody’s Analytics chief economist Mark Zandi has said in public commentary that migration patterns increasingly reflect a mix of affordability, climate risk, labor market opportunity and tax policy, with no single factor explaining every move. Even so, he has argued that states ignoring cost pressures “do so at their peril,” according to interviews and published remarks.

Washington’s new tax therefore lands at a sensitive moment, as states try to preserve social spending while competing for investment and talent in a more mobile economy. The next test will come not only in revenue collections but in whether business formation, high-income tax filings and net migration hold up over the next several years. If they do, supporters will claim proof that progressive taxation can coexist with growth; if they do not, critics will say the state surrendered a key advantage just as interstate competition for workers and capital intensified.

JBizNews Desk

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said the U.S. economy could still expand by more than 3% this year even as the International Monetary Fund cut its global outlook and warned that a deeper Middle East conflict could damage growth through higher energy prices. Speaking at a Wall Street Journal event in Washington on April 14, Bessent said, “I think the underlying economy remains strong,” adding, “I do think that the growth could easily exceed 3 percent, 3.5 percent this year, still,” according to remarks reported by the Wall Street Journal and other outlets covering the event.

The upbeat assessment landed just as the IMF struck a more cautious tone on the world economy. In its latest public update on April 14, the fund said an escalation in the Iran conflict and a sustained rise in oil prices could materially weaken global activity, with IMF economists warning that the world economy could move closer to recession under a more severe shock scenario. In the fund’s published analysis, Pierre-Olivier Gourinchas, the IMF’s chief economist, said geopolitical tensions “could lead to renewed supply disruptions and higher commodity prices,” a risk that matters because inflation pressures had only recently begun to ease in many major economies.

President Donald Trump moved quickly to push back on fears that the conflict would fuel a fresh inflation spike, arguing that energy costs would retreat. Trump said oil prices would “fall sharply” and suggested the inflation impact would prove limited, according to public remarks cited by major U.S. media including Reuters. That message aligns with the administration’s broader effort to reassure markets that the U.S. expansion can withstand geopolitical shocks, even as crude traders and economists monitor whether any disruption to regional supply routes becomes more than temporary.

The divergence between Bessent’s confidence and the IMF’s warning underscores the central economic question for executives and investors: whether the U.S. can keep outrunning a softer global backdrop. The IMF said in its update that global growth risks had tilted further to the downside, while Reuters reported that policymakers and analysts increasingly view oil as the key transmission channel from the conflict into broader inflation and consumer spending. Bessent, by contrast, framed the domestic picture as resilient, pointing to what he described as strong underlying momentum in the U.S. economy during his Wall Street Journal appearance.

That resilience faces a practical test in the months ahead through fuel costs, freight rates and business confidence. Economists have long argued that a sustained oil shock acts like a tax on households and companies, and the IMF reiterated that point in warning that higher energy prices could slow demand while complicating central-bank efforts to return inflation to target. In comments published by the fund, Gourinchas said policymakers face “a more difficult trade-off” if commodity prices rise again, because growth would weaken even as inflation pressure reappears.

Market participants, for now, appear to share part of Bessent’s view that the U.S. enters the latest geopolitical flare-up from a position of relative strength. Recent U.S. data on employment and consumer activity had signaled continued expansion, and Reuters and Bloomberg both noted in recent coverage that traders have treated any energy spike as potentially manageable unless supply disruptions broaden. Still, economists cited by CNBC and Reuters have warned that confidence can deteriorate quickly if oil remains elevated long enough to squeeze transport, manufacturing and household budgets.

The policy implications extend beyond growth forecasts. If oil prices stay high, the Federal Reserve could face renewed pressure to keep interest rates restrictive for longer, even if headline growth slows. Officials at the central bank have repeatedly said they need greater confidence that inflation will return sustainably to 2%, and public remarks from Federal Reserve policymakers in recent months have emphasized sensitivity to commodity-driven price shocks. That makes Bessent’s optimism more than a headline number: a stronger-than-expected U.S. economy would give the administration political cover, but it could also leave borrowing costs higher if inflation proves sticky.

For corporate leaders, the more immediate issue lies in whether the conflict remains contained. The IMF’s warning made clear that a limited disturbance in energy markets differs sharply from a prolonged disruption that affects shipping lanes or regional production. In its analysis, the fund said a more severe escalation could produce “significant adverse effects” on global output, language that investors typically read as a signal to watch not only oil benchmarks but also insurance costs, logistics bottlenecks and emerging-market vulnerabilities. Reuters similarly reported that the economic fallout would depend heavily on the duration and breadth of the conflict rather than the initial shock alone.

What comes next will determine whether Bessent’s 3%-plus call looks prescient or overly confident. If oil prices ease as Trump predicted, the U.S. could preserve stronger growth than many peers even as the IMF trims global expectations. If the conflict deepens and energy stays elevated, the fund’s warning about weaker growth and renewed inflation pressure could move from scenario analysis to baseline risk. For markets, policymakers and boardrooms, that gap between resilience and vulnerability now stands as one of the most important economic variables of the year.

JBizNews Middle East Desk

Ford is recalling more than 140,000 Ranger trucks in the U.S. after federal safety regulators warned a wiring issue could elevate the risk of fire, as well as potential crashes or injuries.

The recall affects 140,201 vehicles spanning the 2024 through 2026 model years, according to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA).

The agency said the problem is linked to wiring associated with the sun visor and headliner that may be routed incorrectly or wrapped with too much tape, conditions that can cause the wires to degrade and potentially trigger an electrical short near the A-pillar.

HOW CUTTING ONE COSTLY HABIT COULD SAVE SMALL BUSINESSES THOUSANDS ON FUEL: EXPERT

To address the issue, Ford dealers will examine the wiring and update the vehicle’s body control module software. Harnesses showing signs of damage will be replaced at no cost to owners, the agency said.

FORD RECALLS NEARLY 1.4 MILLION F-150 PICKUP TRUCKS OVER GEARSHIFT ISSUE

The recall is being rolled out in phases, beginning with certain 2025 model-year trucks. Owner notification letters are scheduled to start the week of May 31, followed by additional rounds in late June for 2026 models and late July for 2024 models.

FORD RECALLS OVER 422,000 VEHICLES OVER WINDSHIELD WIPER ISSUE

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Regulators said interim notices alerting drivers to the safety risk are expected to be mailed April 27, with a final repair solution anticipated later in the summer. The campaign is identified as 26S29, and affected VINs have been searchable on NHTSA’s website since mid-April.

Reuters contributed to this report. 

This post was originally published here

Hospital Competition Shrinks Across U.S. Cities

Hospital consolidation is tightening its grip on urban America, leaving patients in nearly half of metropolitan areas with only one or two health systems for inpatient care—a shift with direct implications for prices, employer health costs and regulators’ antitrust agenda.

In a March market analysis, KFF said 47% of metro areas in 2024 had just one or two hospital systems. Nearly 80% of metropolitan hospital markets either became less competitive from 2015 to 2024 or remained dominated by a single system throughout that period.

The findings underscore how deeply provider concentration now shapes the U.S. healthcare economy. KFF’s review of metropolitan statistical areas shows a decade-long erosion in inpatient competition, even as policymakers in Washington and several states step up scrutiny of healthcare mergers.

Antitrust Pressure and the Price Consequences

Regulators have long warned that consolidation carries costs. The Federal Trade Commission has said hospital mergers can “increase prices, reduce quality, and inhibit innovation,” a position it has reiterated in enforcement actions and policy statements.

The Congressional Budget Office has similarly found that consolidation tends to raise commercial prices, with uncertain quality gains. Economists at the Health Care Cost Institute and in peer-reviewed research have reached comparable conclusions.

Zack Cooper, a health economist at Yale University, wrote in research published by the National Bureau of Economic Research that hospital mergers “lead to substantial increases in the price of hospital care,” a finding that has become central to antitrust debates.

Federal regulators have stepped up enforcement. Lina Khan said during her tenure that healthcare consolidation “has been a key driver of rising healthcare costs,” and the FTC has challenged several hospital deals in recent years. In one closely watched case, the agency moved against the proposed merger of Novant Health and Community Health Systems-owned hospitals in North Carolina, arguing the deal would reduce competition for inpatient services.

Industry Response and the Cost Burden on Employers

Hospital groups argue scale is necessary to navigate rising costs. The American Hospital Association says systems face “significant financial headwinds,” including labor costs, inflation and weak reimbursement from public programs, and that consolidation can preserve access to care rather than simply raise prices.

Even so, much of the evidence cited by regulators and policy researchers points in one direction: when markets narrow to a handful of dominant systems, commercial rates tend to rise faster than inflation.

That pressure extends beyond hospital walls. KFF has documented steady increases in employer-sponsored family coverage costs, and economists widely cite provider market power as a key structural driver.

Peterson-KFF Health System Tracker researchers have found that consolidation strengthens providers’ leverage in negotiations with insurers, feeding into premiums and out-of-pocket costs. For employers, that translates into higher benefit spending; for workers, it can mean narrower networks or higher payroll deductions.

Policy Drivers: The ACA’s Role in Consolidation

The Affordable Care Act reshaped the competitive landscape in ways many researchers say accelerated consolidation. While the law expanded coverage and introduced quality reforms, it also created structural incentives for hospitals to scale or affiliate.

New reporting, documentation and quality-measurement requirements increased administrative complexity. Hospitals were required to meet expanded electronic health record mandates under the HITECH Act, alongside value-based purchasing rules, readmission penalties and other federal programs. Smaller and rural systems often struggled to absorb those costs without the scale of larger networks.

The law also promoted Accountable Care Organizations, or ACOs, designed to coordinate care and share financial risk. In practice, larger systems often held an advantage, given their capital, data infrastructure and physician networks. Independent providers frequently joined ACOs led by dominant systems rather than building their own, further concentrating referral patterns.

Researchers have pointed to similar dynamics in physician markets. Quality reporting programs—such as the Physician Quality Reporting System, later incorporated into the Merit-based Incentive Payment System under MACRA—added compliance burdens that encouraged hospital acquisition of physician practices, reducing the number of independent competitors.

Geographic Disparities and the Path Ahead

The effects of consolidation vary by region. KFF found metropolitan markets broadly less competitive, though outcomes differ depending on whether a single nonprofit system, academic network or multistate chain dominates local capacity.

The Medicare Payment Advisory Commission has warned that concentrated markets can limit insurers’ ability to steer patients to lower-cost providers, particularly when systems control hospitals, outpatient facilities and physician practices under one umbrella.

For investors and insurers, the trend suggests healthcare cost pressures may persist even if other drivers, such as drug spending, moderate. UnitedHealth Group, CVS Health and peers have cited provider pricing as a key variable in medical cost trends.

Regulators are signaling tougher oversight. The Department of Justice and FTC have both indicated stricter review of healthcare transactions, while several states have expanded cost-growth monitoring and pre-merger notice requirements.

Whether that slows consolidation remains unclear. What is clear is the direction of travel: as KFF’s data show, many urban patients already face limited choice—and the decisions made by regulators, courts and hospital systems will shape not only merger activity, but the trajectory of employer premiums and household medical costs for years to come.

Boxing’s future as both a sport and a business was front and center on Capitol Hill this week, where lawmakers and industry leaders discussed whether a fragmented system that has governed the sport for decades can still compete in today’s media landscape.

At issue is a proposed overhaul that would allow for the creation of a “new, centralized, alternative professional boxing system called Unified Boxing Organizations (UBO).” 

The entities would be capable of controlling promotion, rankings and championships under one system. 

Senate Commerce Committee Chairman Ted Cruz, R-Texas, framed the moment as a turning point for the sport’s business model.

DANA WHITE’S BOXING ORGANIZATION MAKES SPLASH CONOR BENN SIGNING IN LAS VEGAS AMID WRESTLEMANIA WEEK

“Thirty, forty years ago, boxing was a dominant sport in America,” Cruz said in an interview with FOX Business. “Now there’s chaos and division: fractured belts, disputed titles.”

He added that the goal of the proposed reforms is “to make boxing great again” by increasing compensation, improving safety and rebuilding the sport’s pipeline of talent.

The legislation under consideration, the Muhammad Ali American Boxing Revival Act of 2026, and already passed by the House of Representatives, would not eliminate the current system outright. 

TED CRUZ SLAMS TRUMP’S PROPOSED SPIRIT AIRLINES GOVERNMENT BAILOUT PLAN

Instead, it would create what Cruz described as “a second alternative path,” allowing fighters to choose between the existing system and the more centralized model designed to generate larger media deals and new revenue streams.

That dual-track approach has done little to resolve a deeper divide within the sport, however.

Former champion and Olympic gold medalist Oscar De La Hoya, who testified before the committee, argued the current framework remains essential to protecting fighters, particularly those early in their careers.

“We’re here to make sure we protect the fighters’ rights,” De La Hoya said in an interview with FOX Business after the hearing. 

Drawing on his own experience, he pointed to a famous 1998 fight against Félix Trinidad, when he signed a lucrative deal with promoter Bob Arum but was unaware of the full financial windfall from the event.

At the time, De La Hoya said, fighters were not given clear disclosures about how much revenue their bouts generated, leaving them at a disadvantage in negotiations. 

De La Hoya also argued that boxing’s decentralized system helps protect fighters by preventing too much power from being controlled by a single group.

“The fighters are making the majority of the money,” he added. “We don’t have to answer to corporate America. We don’t have to answer to shareholders. … We answer to the fighters.”

BOXER TYSON FURY’S DAD, JOHN FURY, REVEALS THEIR RELATIONSHIP ‘IS DESTROYED’

But proponents of reform argue that fragmentation has become boxing’s biggest commercial obstacle.

WWE President Nick Khan, who also testified at the hearing, said boxing lacks the centralized infrastructure that has helped leagues like the NFL and UFC grow into global media titans.

“Boxing — especially in the United States — is dying. … It’s a sport that needs to be revived,” Khan, who was representing TKO and Zuffa Boxing at the hearing, told FOX Business, pointing to limited media integration, weak merchandising and inconsistent event quality. 

“When boxing is great, there might not be anything better,” he said. “The issue is it’s just not great often enough.” 

Khan and other supporters envision a system that could standardize competition and deliver more consistent, marketable events that could potentially unlock larger broadcast deals and sponsorship opportunities.

NFL LAUNCHES LOBBYING BLITZ AT FCC TO DEFEND ITS MEDIA MODEL AS STREAMING SCRUTINY INTENSIFIES

“There’s some central body” behind the growth of other major sports leagues, Khan said, suggesting boxing has struggled in part because it lacks that structure. 

For now, Cruz emphasized flexibility, arguing that giving fighters a choice between systems could allow the market to decide what works.

“If they choose not to take the new option, that’s their choice,” he said. 

“But if it results in higher compensation … I think that improves the outcome for everyone.”

CLICK HERE TO READ MORE ON FOX BUSINESS

Khan echoed that view, pointing to boxing’s decline in cultural and commercial relevance.

“In 1976, [boxing] was the most culturally dominant sport of (the) bicentennial year a mere 50 years ago. Now, if you look at the current state of boxing, not one major media conglomerate is in the boxing space outside [one] deal,” Khan said.

“Our hope and plan is to change all of that. That will benefit the fighter.”

This post was originally published here

TEHRAN — Iran has begun collecting transit fees from vessels passing through the Strait of Hormuz, a move that is raising alarm across global energy markets and intensifying tensions with the United States and its allies.

Hamidreza Hajibabaei, deputy speaker of Iran’s parliament, confirmed Thursday that the first revenues from the toll system have already been deposited into accounts at the country’s central bank. “The implementation of transit fees has begun,” Hajibabaei said in remarks carried by state-affiliated media, signaling that the policy is now operational.

The toll structure, according to Iranian lawmakers including Abbas Papizadeh and Alireza Salimi, is calculated based on vessel type, cargo volume, and perceived risk factors. While officials did not disclose total revenues, analysts estimate the system could generate as much as $20 million per day from oil shipments alone, underscoring the financial stakes involved.

The development comes amid a broader escalation in the region following a U.S.-led naval blockade of Iranian ports earlier this month. The U.S. Navy confirmed that dozens of vessels have been forced to reroute or turn back since the blockade was imposed, contributing to growing disruption in global shipping flows.

Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian indicated that the country intends to maintain tight control over access to the strait, citing ongoing disputes with Washington. “The continuation of restrictions is tied to unresolved issues, including sanctions and security guarantees,” Pezeshkian said, pointing to stalled negotiations over Iran’s nuclear program and regional policies.

The Strait of Hormuz is one of the world’s most critical energy chokepoints, historically accounting for roughly 20% of global oil shipments. Any disruption or additional cost imposed on transit through the waterway has immediate implications for oil prices, shipping insurance, and global supply chains.

U.S. officials have pushed back strongly against Iran’s actions. Secretary of State Marco Rubio stated at a recent G7 meeting that the United States would not accept any scenario in which Iran profits from restricting access to international waterways. “Freedom of navigation is a core principle of global commerce,” Rubio said, reflecting a broader consensus among Western governments.

Legal experts have also raised concerns about the legitimacy of the toll system under international law. Analysts citing the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea note that the strait qualifies as an waterway where vessels are entitled to “innocent passage” without undue interference or fees. The imposition of tolls could therefore face legal challenges and diplomatic pushback.

Beyond the immediate legal and political implications, the move has sparked fears of a broader precedent. Some analysts warn that allowing tolls in the Strait of Hormuz could encourage similar actions in other strategic waterways, including the Taiwan Strait, potentially reshaping global maritime norms.

For energy markets, the situation remains highly fluid. Traders are closely watching shipping volumes, insurance costs, and military developments in the region, all of which could influence oil prices in the weeks ahead.

With tensions unresolved and enforcement now underway, the Strait of Hormuz has effectively become both a geopolitical flashpoint and a financial lever — one that could reverberate across the global economy.

-JBizNews Desk

WASHINGTON, D.C. — The U.S. Department of Justice on Thursday announced a sweeping change to federal drug policy, reclassifying certain marijuana products under Schedule III of the Controlled Substances Act, marking the most significant shift in federal cannabis policy in decades.

Acting Attorney General Todd Blanche confirmed that FDA-approved marijuana products and state-licensed medical cannabis will no longer be treated as Schedule I substances — a category reserved for drugs such as heroin. “The Department of Justice is delivering on President Donald Trump’s commitment to expand access to medical treatment options,” Blanche said in a statement accompanying the decision.

The move signals a major recalibration in how federal authorities view cannabis, acknowledging its potential medical use while opening the door to expanded research and commercial activity. The administration also announced plans for an expedited hearing in June to consider broader reclassification of marijuana at the federal level, a step that could further reshape the industry.

Industry leaders and policy advocates quickly hailed the decision as a turning point. Adam Smith, executive director of the Marijuana Policy Project, described the shift as “a historic recognition that cannabis has accepted medical uses,” noting that federal classification had long lagged behind state-level legalization trends.

From a business perspective, the impact could be immediate. Irwin Simon, Chief Executive Officer of Tilray Brands Inc., said the reclassification will allow companies to engage more directly with federal regulators. “We now have the ability to present research to the FDA and DEA in a meaningful way,” Simon said, emphasizing the opportunity for expanded product development and regulatory clarity.

The change also carries significant financial implications. By moving to Schedule III, cannabis businesses may gain relief from restrictive tax provisions that previously limited deductions under Section 280E of the Internal Revenue Code. Analysts say this could materially improve profitability across the sector, particularly for multi-state operators.

However, the policy shift stops short of full federal legalization. Marijuana remains illegal under federal law for recreational use, and the reclassification does not affect existing criminal cases or individuals currently incarcerated for cannabis-related offenses. Legal experts note that broader reform would require congressional action.

The announcement has also exposed divisions within the political landscape. More than 20 Republican senators previously urged the administration to maintain stricter controls on cannabis, citing public health and safety concerns. The upcoming June hearings are expected to further test those divisions as policymakers weigh the long-term direction of federal drug policy.

For the cannabis industry, long constrained by limited access to banking services and federal research funding, the change represents a potential inflection point. Companies are now positioned to operate with greater legitimacy and fewer regulatory barriers, even as uncertainty remains around future policy developments.

What comes next will depend heavily on the outcome of the June review and the broader political environment. But for now, the federal government has taken a decisive step — one that could reshape an industry and redefine the legal framework surrounding cannabis in the United States.

JBizNews Desk

MENLO PARK, Calif.Meta Platforms Inc. is moving aggressively to reshape its workforce around artificial intelligence, with Chief Executive Officer Mark Zuckerberg informing employees Thursday that the company will eliminate roughly 8,000 jobs, or about 10% of its global workforce, in one of the largest tech layoffs of 2026.

In an internal memo sent April 23, Zuckerberg confirmed that the cuts will begin May 20 and will be accompanied by a freeze on approximately 6,000 open roles the company had planned to fill. “We’re entering a phase where efficiency gains from AI are fundamentally changing how work gets done,” Zuckerberg wrote, according to people familiar with the memo, underscoring a broader strategic pivot already underway across Silicon Valley.

The layoffs come as the technology sector faces a renewed wave of workforce reductions tied to automation and cost discipline. According to workforce analytics firm Trueup, more than 96,000 tech jobs have been cut globally so far in 2026, reflecting an acceleration from last year’s already elevated levels. Analysts say the shift is less about cyclical downturns and more about structural change driven by AI adoption.

Zuckerberg had signaled this transition earlier in the year following Meta’s fourth-quarter results, stating publicly that advances in AI were allowing smaller teams to accomplish work previously requiring far larger groups. “Projects that used to require big teams can now be done by a single highly skilled individual,” he said at the time, framing 2026 as a turning point for productivity inside the company.

People familiar with the matter told Reuters that additional layoffs could follow later this year, depending on how quickly Meta is able to integrate AI tools into its engineering, product, and operations workflows. While the scale of future cuts has not been finalized, executives are said to be actively modeling scenarios tied to automation gains and cost targets.

The move mirrors a broader pattern among large technology companies. Amazon.com Inc. recently reduced its corporate workforce by roughly 30,000 employees, while fintech firm Block Inc., led by Chief Executive Jack Dorsey, has undertaken deep cuts as part of its own AI-driven restructuring. In both cases, executives pointed to automation and efficiency improvements as key drivers behind the decisions.

Meta’s workforce stood at approximately 79,000 employees at the end of 2025. The current round of layoffs follows earlier reductions in 2022 and 2023, when the company cut about 21,000 jobs during what Zuckerberg described as the “year of efficiency.” Analysts at IndexBox noted that a cumulative reduction approaching 20% of staff would mark the most significant transformation in Meta’s operating model since its pivot toward the metaverse.

Investors have largely supported the shift toward leaner operations and higher margins, particularly as Meta continues to invest heavily in AI infrastructure, including custom chips and large-scale data centers. Still, the human cost of the transition is substantial, with thousands of employees now facing job losses in the coming weeks.

The restructuring also raises broader questions about the future of work in the technology sector. As AI systems become more capable, companies are increasingly prioritizing high-skill, high-output roles while reducing layers of management and support functions — a trend that analysts say could redefine employment across industries.

For Meta, the immediate focus is execution. The first wave of layoffs begins May 20, marking the start of a transition that could extend well beyond 2026 as the company continues to align its workforce with an AI-first future.

JBizNews Desk

The White House Office of Science and Technology Policy accused China of “industrial-scale” AI technology theft in a scathing Thursday memorandum just weeks before President Donald Trump is set to meet with Chinese President Xi Jingping in Beijing, China.

“The U.S. has evidence that foreign entities, primarily in China, are running industrial-scale distillation campaigns to steal American AI. We will be taking action to protect American innovation,” OSTP Director Michael Kratsios wrote in a Thursday morning X post.

Kratsios accused China and other foreign entities of using tens of thousands of proxies in a coordinated effort to siphon American AI innovation.

“Foreign entities who build on such fragile foundations should have little confidence in the integrity and reliability of the models they produce,” Kratsios wrote.

EXPERT RIPS ‘IRRESPONSIBLE AI STUDY OVER BLACKMAIL SCENARIOS

Models built on such innovation theft cannot replicate the efficacy and innovation of the technologies they’re ripping off, an OTSP memo stated. They can, however, simulate select benchmarks at a fraction of the cost.

“These distillation campaigns also allow those actors to deliberately strip security protocols from the resulting models and undo mechanisms that ensure those AI models are ideologically neutral and truth-seeking,” the memo read.

The accusation precedes the historic Trump-Xi summit by just three weeks. Originally scheduled for the end of March, the Beijing talks were postponed to May 14.

AI THREATENS MILLIONS AS EXPERTS WARN WHITE-COLLAR JOBS ARE FIRST TO GO

The pair is expected to discuss the ongoing war in Iran, with Trump telling reporters on Air Force One that China’s reliance on oil from the Strait of Hormuz means they should be open to joining a coalition to put pressure on Iran to keep the strategic waterway open.

Technology was already on the docket before the OTSP announcement, as China will likely seek Washington to loosen technology controls on semiconductors and AI.

The OTSP announcement also comes one day after the House Judiciary Committee held a hearing named “Stealth Stealing: China’s Ongoing Theft of U.S. Innovation.” During the review, Sen. Chuck Grassley, R-Iowa, presented evidence showing Chinese technology theft cost the U.S. economy between $400-600 billion yearly.

China grabbed headlines in 2025 with its AI “Sputnik moment,” touting a cost-efficient breakthrough with its DeepSeek AI model.

But Anthropic, the company responsible for the increasingly-popular Claude model, accused China of stealing from Anthropic to build DeepSeek.

Anthropic claimed that China used a mass-proxy distillation process to siphon key data. The proxy strategy is the same one that OTSP outlined in the Wednesday memo.

“Foreign labs that distill American models can then feed these unprotected capabilities into military, intelligence, and surveillance systems — enabling authoritarian governments to deploy frontier AI for offensive cyber operations, disinformation campaigns, and mass surveillance,” Anthropic said at the time.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

After a public split between Anthropic and Washington that saw the Pentagon label it as a supply chain risk, Anthropic’s leaders were back in the White House on Friday, reportedly to discuss cybersecurity.

“Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei today met with senior administration officials for a productive discussion on how Anthropic and the U.S. government can work together on key shared priorities such as cybersecurity, America’s lead in the AI race, and AI safety. The meeting reflected Anthropic’s ongoing commitment to engaging with the U.S. government on the development of responsible AI. We are grateful for their time and are looking forward to continuing these discussions,” an Anthropic spokesperson previously told Fox News Digital. 

Fox News Digital contacted the White House, OTSP, Anthropic and the Chinese Embassy to the U.S. for further comment but did not immediately receive a response.

Fox News Digital’s Morgan Phillips contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

The future of American defense is undergoing a high-tech revolution as the Pentagon has awarded a multimillion-dollar contract to test heavy-duty humanoid robots.

Foundation Future Industries recently secured the $24 million contract for its “Phantom” robots, designed to breach enemy sites and spare American lives. CEO Sankaet Pathak and chief strategy advisor Eric Trump argue the technology will help maintain America’s edge on the battlefield.

“We are America First. We have to win this race,” Trump said Thursday on “Mornings with Maria.” 

“The uses are unlimited, and I think it’s a very beautiful thing, but we must win this race,” he added. 

VIRAL VIDEO SHOWS HUMANOID ROBOT CHASING WILD BOARS OFF STREET IN BIZARRE ENCOUNTER

Pathak noted that China has also been working on similar technology, making strides in both land- and air-based autonomy. He said that while the U.S. remains competitive in air warfare, this contract aims to strengthen its readiness on land.

DELIVERY ROBOTS SHATTER CHICAGO BUS SHELTER GLASS IN SEPARATE INCIDENTS, INCLUDING ONE CAUGHT ON CAMERA

“You cannot build a utopia and then not defend it. That just doesn’t make any sense,” Pathak said, adding, “There are a lot of people who want to destroy what exists in America.”

Trump said he decided to invest in the company and the Phantom robot because of the pressure to surpass China. He noted that he’s seen the robots in action and believes they could reshape military operations.

TESLA ENDS PRODUCTION OF MODEL S AND MODEL X VEHICLES, WILL FOCUS ON ROBOTS IN 2026

The robots themselves are designed for strength and fluid motion. The Foundation website says  the latest version of the technology has eliminated the “robotic” feel, allowing them to better integrate into “human environments.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The bot featured on the company’s website weighs 176 pounds and can move at 1.7 meters per second. Pathak said more technology is on the way, including Phantom 2. He also noted the company believes the robots can serve industries beyond defense, including construction and disaster relief. 

“I think what we’re about to unveil the next couple of months, I don’t think anything like that exists,” Pathak told Fox Business. “I think it’s going to be the strongest humanoid robot that exists anywhere in the world, including China.” 

This post was originally published here

Sen. Ted Cruz, R-Texas, came out full throttle against the Trump administration’s proposed plan to bail out Spirit Airlines on Wednesday.

Cruz replied to reports that the administration’s plan would see the U.S. government own up to 90% of the airline. President Donald Trump first floated the idea of buying out the airline on Tuesday.

“This is an absolutely TERRIBLE idea,” Cruz wrote in a statement on X.

“The TARP corporate bailouts were a huge mistake & the government doesn’t know a damn thing about running a failed budget airline (that the Biden admin killed),” he added.

BIDEN-SCHUMER-PELOSI WOULD DO MORE DAMAGE IN 2 YEARS THAN OBAMA DID IN 8: TED CRUZ

Cruz was joined by Sen. Tom Cotton, R-Ark., in pushing back on the plan this week. Cotton argued it was “not the best use of taxpayer dollars.”

“If Spirit’s creditors or other potential investors don’t think they can run it profitably coming out of its second bankruptcy in under two years, I doubt the US Government can either,” Cotton wrote on X.

Trump was interviewed on CNBC’s “Squawk Box” on Tuesday and said, “I don’t mind mergers”, suggesting that could help resolve the issues Spirit faces.

GOP SENATORS EXPRESS ‘CONCERNS,’ ‘SKEPTICISM’ OVER TRUMP’S SPENDING BILL AFTER MUSK RANT

“You know, Spirit’s in trouble, and I’d love somebody to buy Spirit. It’s 14,000 jobs, and maybe the federal government should help that one out,” the president said.

He went on to draw a distinction between a merger involving Spirit and the reports of a possible merger between United Airlines and American Airlines, saying those companies are “doing very well. I don’t like having them merge.”

Transportation Secretary Sean Duffy spoke Tuesday at an event on reforms to the nation’s Air Traffic Control system and acknowledged the president’s comments, adding he will look into the matter.

AMERICAN VICTIMS OF TERRORISM COULD SOON SUE INTERNATIONAL ORGS IF CRUZ’S BILL PASSES

Spirit Airlines filed for its second bankruptcy in August 2025 amid mounting losses and dwindling cash reserves. The low-cost carrier first filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection in November 2024 after unsuccessful merger talks with JetBlue and Frontier.

In late February, Spirit announced a deal that would allow it to exit bankruptcy proceedings by early summer after reaching an agreement with lenders.

The airline told a bankruptcy court the deal would allow it to emerge as a leaner carrier, focusing on routes and time periods with the strongest demand as well as cutting some of its high-cost aircraft leases and improving the utilization of its remaining fleet.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

It also planned to expand premium seating options and enhance its loyalty programs to drive repeat business and preserve its low-fare positioning.

Fox Business’ Eric Revell contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

TEL AVIV — A cutting-edge anti-drone platform developed by Israel-based Sentrycs, now part of U.S.-listed Ondas Holdings Inc. (NASDAQ: ONDS), has been selected to help secure venues for the upcoming FIFA World Cup across the United States, Canada, and Mexico, underscoring the growing global demand for advanced airspace security solutions.

The deployment follows Ondas’ acquisition of Sentrycs in late 2025, a strategic move aimed at expanding its capabilities in autonomous defense and critical infrastructure protection. The selection for World Cup security marks a significant milestone for the combined platform, placing Israeli-developed technology at the center of safeguarding one of the largest global sporting events.

At the core of the system is Sentrycs’ proprietary Cyber-over-RF (CoRF) technology, which enables passive detection, tracking, and identification of unauthorized drones. Unlike traditional counter-drone systems that rely on jamming or physical interception, the platform allows operators to take controlled command of rogue drones and guide them safely to designated landing zones—without disrupting surrounding communications.

Oshri Lugassy, Co-CEO of Ondas Autonomous Systems, said the deployment reflects a broader shift in how governments and event organizers approach security. “We are seeing increasing demand for integrated, multi-layered security solutions that address both aerial and ground-based threats,” Lugassy said. “Sentrycs provides a critical capability within our broader autonomous defense architecture, enabling precise and non-disruptive control of low-altitude airspace.”

The system is expected to be deployed across all 16 host cities ahead of the tournament, covering stadiums, fan zones, and surrounding infrastructure where millions of spectators are expected to gather. Organizers have placed heightened emphasis on aerial security amid the rapid proliferation of commercial drones and evolving threat scenarios.

Prior to its acquisition, Sentrycs had already established a strong international presence, securing sensitive sites including airports, military installations, and national infrastructure projects in more than 25 countries. Its field-proven performance in complex operational environments contributed to its selection for World Cup deployment, according to industry observers.

Ondas executives have positioned Sentrycs as a key component of a broader ecosystem that integrates autonomous aerial platforms, sensor networks, and real-time command systems. The company is working to build a unified operational framework capable of securing dense urban environments without interfering with authorized communications or civilian activity.

Analysts say the World Cup deployment could serve as a global showcase for next-generation counter-drone systems, potentially accelerating adoption across both public-sector security agencies and private infrastructure operators. Large-scale international events are increasingly being used as testing grounds for technologies that can later be scaled across transportation hubs, cities, and national defense networks.

As geopolitical risks and technological threats continue to evolve, the ability to manage low-altitude airspace in real time is becoming a critical layer of modern security strategy. The selection of Sentrycs highlights how Israeli innovation continues to play a central role in shaping that landscape on a global stage.

JBizNews Desk – Tel Aviv

Gold and silver prices declined sharply Thursday morning, as a surge in global oil prices and stalled U.S.-Iran negotiations redirected investor focus away from traditional safe-haven assets and toward energy markets, underscoring how geopolitical risk is being priced in across commodities.

Spot gold fell to approximately $4,707 per troy ounce, extending losses after briefly climbing above $4,750 a day earlier following President Donald Trump’s extension of the Iran ceasefire. The pullback reflects a combination of near-term headwinds, including a firmer U.S. dollar, rising oil prices, and uncertainty surrounding the Senate confirmation process for Federal Reserve Chair nominee Kevin Warsh, whose policy stance could reshape the interest rate outlook.

Silver experienced an even steeper decline. Spot silver dropped to around $76.97 per ounce, marking a roughly 2% fall over the past 24 hours. The metal is now down more than 15% since the onset of the U.S.-Iran conflict, reflecting a sharp reversal from its earlier rally as both safe-haven demand and expectations for near-term industrial growth weaken.

The selloff comes despite what would typically be a supportive macro backdrop for precious metals. Over the past year, gold has surged more than 41%, reaching a record high of $5,602.22 per ounce on January 28, 2026. Silver similarly hit an all-time high of $121.67 one day later before geopolitical developments began to alter market dynamics. The divergence highlights how rapidly capital flows can shift when competing macro forces intensify.

At the center of the current market rotation is inflation — and more specifically, energy-driven inflation. Brent crude rose to $102.83 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate climbed to $93.80, as Iran maintained control over the Strait of Hormuz and continued restricting maritime traffic. Reports of Iranian forces firing on commercial vessels this week, combined with ongoing U.S. enforcement actions in the region, have reinforced concerns about supply disruptions in one of the world’s most critical energy corridors.

Gaurav Garg, a research analyst at Lemonn Markets, said the move reflects a broader repositioning across asset classes. Traders, he noted, are recalibrating portfolios as oil prices climb and the ceasefire remains uncertain, creating a volatile mix of currency movements and commodity shifts that have weighed on gold and silver despite elevated geopolitical risk.

The key variable, however, remains the Federal Reserve. Elevated energy prices risk keeping inflation higher for longer, potentially forcing policymakers into a more restrictive stance. Higher interest rates typically reduce the appeal of non-yielding assets such as gold and silver, amplifying downside pressure even in periods of uncertainty.

Silver has also been particularly sensitive to developments in Washington. During his Senate confirmation hearing, Kevin Warsh emphasized the need for an independent and disciplined monetary policy framework to address persistent inflation, comments that markets interpreted as potentially hawkish. The prospect of tighter financial conditions added to selling pressure across precious metals.

Even with the latest declines, long-term performance remains striking. Gold is still up more than 41% year-over-year and nearly 6% over the past month, while silver has surged approximately 131% over the same annual period. The gold-to-silver ratio widened to 61.1, reflecting silver’s sharper pullback and its dual exposure to both industrial demand and monetary policy expectations — a pattern analysts say is common during periods when energy shocks dominate market sentiment.

Market participants increasingly view the current environment as a competition between fear trades. While gold has traditionally served as the primary hedge against instability, oil has taken center stage as the more immediate risk signal, driven by tangible supply constraints and real-time geopolitical escalation.

The path forward for precious metals will likely hinge on developments in the Middle East. Any credible progress toward reopening the Strait of Hormuz or easing tensions could quickly redirect capital flows back into gold and silver. Conversely, sustained disruption in energy markets may continue to suppress metals in favor of oil-linked assets.

For now, markets are making a clear statement: in the hierarchy of global risk, energy security is taking precedence over monetary hedging. At $102 per barrel, the pressure point is not in the gold vault — it is in the oil supply chain.

J-BizNews Desk -MARKETS & COMMODITIES

Warner Bros. Discovery Inc. announced on Thursday that its shareholders voted to approve its previously announced transaction with Paramount Skydance Corp. at a special meeting of stockholders.

“Shareholder approval marks another important milestone towards completing our acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery, building on our successful equity and debt syndications and progress across regulatory approvals. We look forward to closing the transaction in the coming months and realizing the creation of a next-generation media and entertainment company that better serves both the creative community and consumers,” a Paramount spokesperson told Fox News Digital. 

The deal would put Paramount CEO David Ellison in charge of two Hollywood studios, along with two major newsrooms in CNN and CBS News. The transaction is expected to close in the third quarter of 2026, subject to customary closing conditions, including regulatory clearances.

WHY NETFLIX’S CEO DROPPED HIS BID TO BUY WARNER BROS DISCOVERY AND TRUMP ‘DIDN’T CARE’

“We appreciate the support and confidence our stockholders have placed in us to unlock the full value of our world-class entertainment portfolio,” Warner Bros. Discovery Board Chair Samuel A. Di Piazza Jr. said in a statement. “With Paramount, we look forward to creating an exceptional combined company that will expand consumer choice and benefit the global creative talent community.” 

Warner Bros. Discovery CEO David Zaslav said that his team has “transformed” the company and returned it to “industry leadership” over the past four years.

“Today’s stockholder approval is another key milestone toward completing this historic transaction that will deliver exceptional value to our stockholders. We will continue to work with Paramount to complete the remaining steps in this process that will create a leading, next-generation media and entertainment company,” Zaslav added.

In December, Warner Bros. announced it had reached a deal with Netflix to buy the Hollywood studio and HBO for $83 billion, prompting Paramount to launch a $108 billion hostile takeover bid for the entire company, including all of its cable assets like CNN, which would have been spun off into a separate company under the Netflix deal.

Netflix dropped a bid to buy Warner Bros. two months later after the studio announced Paramount’s offer to buy the entire company was “superior.” Paramount’s revised offer raised Warner Bros. Discovery’s value to $31 per share, putting the company’s valuation at $111 billion. 

Paramount will also pay a $2.8 billion termination fee to Netflix. 

Ellison’s billionaire father, Larry Ellison, is personally backing Paramount’s bid, committing $45.7 billion in equity through the Ellison Trust, while Bank of America Merrill Lynch, Citi and Apollo will provide a $57.5 billion debt commitment.

Critics of the Paramount takeover have sounded the alarm about putting two legacy studios under one company, which many speculate will result in mass layoffs. Others are concerned about Ellison taking over CNN after his attempts to reduce liberal bias at CBS have irked critics. 

Fox News Digital’s Joseph A. Wulfsohn contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

U.S. equities pulled back at Thursday’s open, pausing after a historic run that pushed both the S&P 500 and Nasdaq to fresh record highs a day earlier, as investors weighed a mixed slate of earnings against renewed geopolitical uncertainty tied to escalating tensions in the Middle East.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 0.31% at the open, while the S&P 500 declined 0.26% and the Nasdaq Composite dropped 0.45%, giving back part of Wednesday’s record-setting momentum. In contrast, the Russell 2000 outperformed, rising 0.74%, signaling continued strength in smaller-cap names even as large-cap tech paused. The early retreat comes after a powerful April rally of roughly 9%, driven largely by strong corporate earnings and continued leadership from semiconductor and AI-linked stocks.

As trading began, the S&P 500 hovered near 7,109, the Dow around 49,521, and the Nasdaq near 24,487, each stepping back from Wednesday’s closing peaks of 7,137, 49,490, and 24,657, respectively. The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) held near 19, reflecting modest but persistent investor caution as markets digest both earnings and geopolitical developments.

A wave of corporate results shaped early sentiment, with clear winners and laggards emerging across sectors. American Express topped quarterly earnings expectations and reaffirmed its full-year outlook, with management signaling resilient consumer spending trends despite macro uncertainty. Shares edged higher in premarket trading following the release.

Blackstone delivered one of the standout reports of the morning, posting a 25% jump in distributable earnings to $1.76 billion. Earnings came in at $1.36 per share, narrowly beating consensus estimates. Jon Gray, President of Blackstone, projected a strong pipeline ahead, stating the firm is positioning for what could be its “best year ever” for public listings as capital markets reopen and AI-related companies prepare to go public.

Comcast also exceeded expectations, reporting an 11% increase in quarterly revenue, supported by major broadcast tailwinds including the Milan-Cortina Winter Olympics and the Super Bowl. The company generated $3.9 billion in free cash flow and returned $2.5 billion to shareholders through dividends and buybacks, underscoring continued capital discipline.

Still, not all earnings impressed. Lockheed Martin missed both revenue and profit forecasts, raising concerns about defense execution. IBM disappointed investors after maintaining unchanged forward guidance, suggesting limited near-term growth acceleration. Tesla shares came under pressure after CEO Elon Musk signaled a significant increase in capital expenditures, sparking concerns about margin compression despite long-term AI and robotics ambitions.

Elsewhere, ServiceNow declined on signs of slowing subscription growth, while American Airlines beat quarterly expectations but sharply reduced its full-year earnings outlook. The airline directly cited rising jet fuel costs tied to the U.S.-Iran conflict as a key driver of the downgrade, highlighting how geopolitics are increasingly filtering into corporate guidance.

Despite these mixed results, the broader earnings season remains solid. According to aggregated market data, roughly 81% of S&P 500 companies reporting so far have beaten earnings estimates, while 76% have exceeded revenue expectations, reinforcing the underlying strength of corporate America even amid uncertainty.

Energy markets remain a central focus for investors. Brent crude climbed to $102.83 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate rose to $93.80, as tensions in the Strait of Hormuz intensified. Iran’s seizure of two vessels earlier this week has raised concerns about the security of one of the world’s most critical oil shipping routes.

The geopolitical backdrop continues to evolve rapidly. President Donald Trump, who recently extended a ceasefire framework, has yet to define a clear timeline for its duration, leaving markets exposed to sudden shifts in policy or escalation. The uncertainty surrounding U.S.-Iran negotiations has injected a layer of risk into an otherwise strong equity environment.

On Wall Street, strategists remain broadly constructive, even as they acknowledge near-term volatility. JPMorgan analysts recently raised their year-end S&P 500 target to 7,600, aligning with broader consensus expectations after briefly adopting a more cautious stance. The firm warned of a likely period of consolidation, noting that elevated oil prices and unresolved geopolitical tensions could weigh on markets in the short term.

Across major institutions, the average 2026 year-end S&P 500 target stands near 7,555, with projections ranging from 7,000 to as high as 8,100, implying roughly 9% upside from current levels. Jurrien Timmer, Director of Global Macro at Fidelity, cautioned that while long-term equity trends remain intact, future returns are likely to moderate, stating that gains may settle into “single-digit territory” following a decade of outsized performance.

Among the most bullish voices, Oppenheimer strategists are forecasting S&P 500 earnings of $305 per share for 2026 and maintaining a year-end target of 8,100, citing continued innovation in AI, resilient consumer demand, and improving capital markets activity.

For now, markets are searching for direction. The path forward will likely hinge on incoming earnings reports, the trajectory of oil prices, and any developments out of the Middle East—particularly the stability of shipping lanes through the Strait of Hormuz.

As the rally pauses at record levels, investors are being reminded that even in strong markets, the next move is rarely linear.

JBizNews Desk

Party City is expanding its retail footprint into more than 700 Staples stores nationwide, marking a major distribution push after shuttering hundreds of locations in recent years.

The partnership, announced Tuesday, will bring Party City’s balloons, décor and party supplies into Staples stores and onto its website, with plans to expand to additional locations through 2026.

The move follows a wave of closures tied to financial struggles and restructuring efforts. Instead of reopening standalone stores, the company is betting on partnerships to quickly scale its presence at a lower cost.

The rollout comes just in time for graduation season, a key spending period for retailers. Nearly 4 million students are expected to graduate in 2026, with graduation-related spending topping $6.8 billion last year, according to industry estimates.

COSTCO PLANS MAJOR GROWTH PUSH, TARGETING 30 NEW LOCATIONS ANNUALLY

For consumers, the collaboration is designed to streamline event planning by combining party supplies with Staples’ existing print and marketing services. Shoppers will be able to purchase balloons, décor and tableware while also creating customized invitations, banners and signs in one place.

TRUMP SAYS HE WANTS ‘SOMEBODY’ TO BUY SPIRIT AIRLINES, OPPOSES UNITED-AMERICAN MERGER

Staples, long known for office and school supplies, has been expanding its in-store services to drive foot traffic and diversify beyond its traditional business. The addition of Party City products is expected to draw in customers planning celebrations while creating opportunities to boost spending through add-on services like printing and signage.

WALMART TO REMODEL OVER 650 STORES, OPEN ABOUT 20 NEW LOCATIONS

As part of the rollout, customers will be able to order party supplies online for in-store pickup, with additional features such as scheduled balloon pickups expected to launch in the coming weeks.

Staples and Party City are also offering promotional deals tied to the launch, including discounts on balloons, decorations and custom printing services.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The companies said they plan to expand the partnership to more locations over time, signaling a continued push to capture a larger share of event-driven consumer spending.

This post was originally published here

U.S. existing-home sales fell in March, extending a sluggish start to the spring selling season as elevated borrowing costs and strained affordability continued to weigh on demand. The National Association of Realtors said in its monthly release that completed transactions for previously owned homes dropped 3.6% from February to a seasonally adjusted annual rate of 4.02 million, a figure that underscored how little relief buyers have seen even as inventory improves.

Lawrence Yun, chief economist at the National Association of Realtors, said in the group’s report that “home buying and selling remained sluggish in March due to the affordability challenges associated with high mortgage rates.” In the same release, NAR said sales fell 5.9% from a year earlier, showing that the housing market remains constrained not simply by a lack of listings but by the cost of financing and the pressure that higher monthly payments continue to place on households.

Mortgage costs remain central to the slowdown. Freddie Mac said in its weekly survey that the average rate on a 30-year fixed mortgage stayed near 7% through much of the period leading into March closings, far above the pandemic-era lows that fueled a buying boom. Sam Khater, chief economist at Freddie Mac, said in a recent statement that “mortgage rates continue to climb,” adding that the increase in financing costs “is making the spring homebuying season more expensive.” That dynamic matters because existing-home sales typically respond quickly to changes in rates, and many would-be buyers have delayed moves rather than absorb sharply higher borrowing costs.

The affordability squeeze has hit even as more homes come onto the market. The National Association of Realtors said total housing inventory at the end of March rose 8.1% from February to 1.11 million units, equal to a 3.3-month supply at the current sales pace. Lawrence Yun said in the report that “increased housing inventory and lower mortgage rates are essential to bring home buyers back into the housing market.” Even with inventory improving, supply remains below the level many economists consider consistent with a balanced market, helping keep prices elevated and limiting the extent to which buyers benefit from a broader selection.

Prices, meanwhile, continued to climb. NAR said the median existing-home price in March rose 4.8% from a year earlier to $393,500, a record for the month of March. In comments accompanying the data, Yun said multiple offers still appeared on a meaningful share of homes, a sign that demand has not disappeared but instead has become highly selective and concentrated around properties that meet buyers’ budgets. That combination of slower sales and rising prices leaves the market in an unusual position: activity remains subdued, but homeowners who do sell still often command strong valuations.

Broader economic sentiment has offered little support. The University of Michigan said its consumer sentiment index fell sharply in April, with survey director Joanne Hsu stating that “consumers perceived multiple warning signs that raise the risk of recession,” according to the university’s preliminary release. While sentiment surveys do not directly determine home purchases, they often shape households’ willingness to take on large financial commitments, particularly when mortgage rates, insurance costs and property taxes remain elevated.

The labor market has held up better than housing, but not strongly enough to offset affordability concerns. The Bureau of Labor Statistics said in its March employment report that nonfarm payrolls increased by 178,000, while the unemployment rate held at 4.3%. In its release, the BLS said job gains continued in several sectors, but the pace did not suggest the kind of accelerating income growth that could quickly restore purchasing power for first-time buyers. For housing, steady employment helps prevent a deeper downturn, yet it has not been enough to overcome the payment shock created by higher rates and still-rising home prices.

Other housing indicators have pointed to the same soft patch. Reuters and CNBC have both reported in recent months that pending home sales and mortgage applications remained uneven as buyers adjusted to volatile rates and limited affordability. Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, said in remarks cited by CNBC that housing “remains one of the most interest-rate-sensitive sectors of the economy,” a view widely shared across Wall Street and among real-estate economists. The implication for executives, lenders and homebuilders is that housing may stay subdued unless financing costs ease materially or wage growth outpaces home-price gains.

Regional performance in March showed the downturn spread broadly, though not uniformly. The National Association of Realtors said sales declined in the Midwest, South and West from the prior month, while the Northeast posted a modest gain. In the same report, NAR said the South remained the largest market by volume, meaning weakness there carried outsized weight for the national total. That regional split suggests local inventory conditions and price points still matter, but the national story remains dominated by financing costs and affordability rather than a simple shortage of homes for sale.

What comes next hinges largely on interest rates, buyer confidence and whether the recent increase in listings continues into the heart of the spring market. Federal Reserve officials have repeatedly signaled, in public remarks and policy statements, that they need greater confidence inflation is moving sustainably toward target before cutting rates. For the housing market, that means relief may not arrive quickly. If mortgage rates stay near current levels, sales could remain muted even with more inventory available; if rates retreat, pent-up demand could reappear quickly. For lenders, brokers, builders and consumer-facing businesses, the next few months will offer a critical read on whether housing simply endures a slow patch or slips into a longer period of stagnation.

JBizNews Desk

Federal Reserve officials still expected interest-rate cuts later this year even as fighting in the Middle East threatened to lift oil prices and complicate the inflation outlook, underscoring a central bank trying to balance geopolitical risk against signs of softer demand. In minutes from the March 17-18 meeting released by the Federal Reserve, policymakers said “most participants” saw a prolonged conflict as a potential drag on growth if higher energy costs squeezed household spending, a view that echoed reporting from Reuters and coverage by Bloomberg on the market implications of rising crude.

The Fed left its benchmark rate unchanged at 3.5% to 3.75% at that meeting, and the minutes said officials judged that “the risks around the economic outlook had increased,” with energy markets a particular concern, according to the official record published Tuesday by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. Chair Jerome Powell had already signaled after the meeting that policymakers did not need to rush, saying at his press conference that the central bank remained focused on incoming data and that uncertainty around inflation and growth still argued for patience, according to the Federal Reserve transcript and statement.

What stood out in the minutes, however, lay in the conditional case for easing. The document said “most participants raised the concern that a protracted conflict in the Middle East could lead to a further softening in labor market conditions, which could warrant additional rate cuts,” while also noting that substantially higher oil prices could “reduce households’ purchasing power, tighten financial conditions, and reduce growth abroad,” according to the Federal Reserve. That framing matters for investors because it suggests officials still view an oil shock less as a reason to tighten than as a risk that could weaken consumption and hiring if the hit to real incomes proves large enough, a dynamic economists at firms cited by CNBC and Reuters have flagged in recent weeks.

The tension for policymakers remains clear: energy-driven inflation can lift headline prices even as it slows the broader economy. Economists at Goldman Sachs, in a note cited by Reuters, said oil spikes tied to geopolitical events often create a “stagflationary impulse,” raising near-term inflation while weighing on activity. Oxford Economics has made a similar point in public commentary, saying higher fuel costs act like a tax on consumers, and that assessment aligns with the minutes’ warning that household purchasing power could erode if crude stays elevated, according to the Federal Reserve release.

Markets have spent much of the year recalibrating how quickly the Fed might move, and the minutes are unlikely to settle that debate on their own. Futures pricing tracked by CME Group has shifted repeatedly with each inflation print and each move in oil, while strategists quoted by Bloomberg said the central bank’s reaction function now hinges on whether energy costs bleed into broader inflation expectations or simply sap demand. Jerome Powell has repeatedly said, including in remarks published by the Federal Reserve, that officials pay close attention to longer-term inflation expectations because temporary commodity shocks do not automatically justify a policy response unless they threaten to become embedded.

Recent economic data help explain why officials still kept rate cuts on the table. In prior releases, the Bureau of Labor Statistics said job growth had moderated from last year’s pace, while inflation, though still above the Fed’s 2% target, showed uneven progress across core categories. Analysts at Wells Fargo, in research cited by MarketWatch, said the central bank faces a “difficult trade-off” if gasoline prices rise sharply into the summer because consumers tend to cut back elsewhere, potentially weakening discretionary spending and business confidence even if headline inflation temporarily moves higher.

The global backdrop adds another layer of caution. The minutes said higher oil prices could “reduce growth abroad,” and that concern fits with warnings from institutions such as the International Monetary Fund, which has said in recent outlooks that geopolitical fragmentation and commodity shocks remain key threats to the world economy. Reporting from Reuters on energy markets has shown how quickly crude benchmarks can react to disruptions in the Middle East, and executives across transport, chemicals and manufacturing have told investors in earnings calls that sustained fuel inflation can pressure margins and delay capital spending.

For corporate America, the message from the minutes is less about an imminent move than about the conditions that could force one. If oil prices retreat and inflation remains sticky, the Fed could stay on hold longer; if energy costs keep climbing and consumers pull back, officials appear more open to easing to cushion the labor market, according to the March record from the Federal Reserve. That leaves coming inflation reports, payroll data and developments in the Middle East carrying unusual weight for boards, investors and borrowers alike, because they will shape whether the central bank’s next move reflects persistent price pressure or a broader slowdown.

JBizNews Middle East Desk

A growing number of Californians are fleeing the Golden State as the cost of living climbs, and many are coming out ahead financially.

Facing sky-high housing prices and rising everyday expenses, residents are relocating to more affordable areas where the savings can be substantial. On average, movers end up in neighborhoods with monthly housing costs about $672 lower.

After seven years, they are 48% more likely to own a home than those who stay, according to the California Policy Lab’s recent report, “Priced Out: Relocation Amidst California’s Affordability Crisis.”

The study analyzed anonymized credit bureau data tracking migration patterns from 2016 to 2025.

“We expected to see people moving to cheaper locations in other states, but our analysis showed the average costs dropping by nearly $400,000 – that’s a key data point for families who want to become homeowners,” Evan White, executive director of the California Policy Lab, told FOX Business.

BILLIONAIRES AND BUSINESSES FUEL GROWING EXODUS FROM BLUE STATES

“The likelihood of becoming a homeowner increased by nearly 50% for those who left California. That’s a big difference,” he added.

Even in its less expensive regions, California remains costly compared to much of the country.

Residents pay about 11% more for groceries, 40% more for gas and 61% more for utilities than the national average, according to the report.

“When people leave California, they move to much more affordable locations,” White said. “This suggests that California’s high costs of living factor into their decision to move, or at least their choice of destination.”

While incomes in destination states are often slightly lower, reduced housing and living expenses tend to outweigh those differences, the study notes.

Most relocations are to nearby, lower-cost states rather than across the country.

RED & BLUE DIVIDE: STATES PUSH COMPETING TAX PLANS AS VOTERS WEIGH CHANGES IN ELECTION CYCLE

Nevada leads as the top destination, followed by Idaho, Oregon and Arizona.

“I was surprised to see that people were most likely to leave California for nearby states, like Nevada and Idaho, and not for Texas and Florida, which gets so much media attention,” White said.

The trend also spans income levels.

A growing share of those leaving come from higher-income areas, though many show signs of financial strain, such as higher debt and lower credit scores compared to their peers.

“What happens to California over the long-term is in the hands of policymakers. Presently, they seem focused on lowering the costs of living, but it takes a long time to ‘turn the ship’ on these issues,” White said.

“But people should temper their expectations about what success means. Costs are unlikely to fall dramatically, but we may be able to slow their growth. California will always be more expensive than other states, simply because it is a more desirable place to live.”

FOREIGN BUYERS EYE LUXE LA HOMES AS PROPOSED WEALTH TAX PUSHES BILLIONAIRES OUT OF CALIFORNIA

The migration trend also comes as California lawmakers weigh new taxes targeting the ultra-wealthy, including a proposed 2026 ballot measure that would impose a one-time 5% tax on individuals worth more than $1 billion.

Kevin Brady, former House Ways and Means Committee chairman and an advisor to Americans for Free Markets, previously told FOX Business that steep taxes and heavy regulation are driving businesses and individuals to leave blue states, calling it “the economic story of the decade.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“I don’t know why California continues to tax its businesses and people just so brutally,” Brady said. “It’s a beautiful state, it is a dynamic state, but they’re chasing out – not just the wealthy and not just businesses – but their young people.”

This post was originally published here

EXCLUSIVE: The great American wealth migration has officially reached its “mecca” phase.

As tech titans like Mark Zuckerberg and Larry Page lead a billion-dollar exodus from high-tax strongholds in California and New York, Corcoran Group CEO Pamela Liebman says Miami’s transformation into a global powerhouse is no longer a “boom-and-bust” trend but rather a permanent structural shift.

Speaking exclusively with Fox News Digital, the real estate mogul reveals why the elite are ditching the West Coast for South Florida’s “vibrant” culture and business-friendly climate, declaring: “When people see names like this flocking to a city like Miami, it helps to even more establish what’s already a global city into a mecca for these incredibly wealthy people.”

“Miami is a true luxury lifestyle home,” she added. “I moved back here in 2020. I’m a big believer in Miami… it’s really established itself as a world-class and worldwide city with tons of recognition… that’s just not going away.”

INSIDE THE 50-HOME MIAMI SANCTUARY WHERE SMART MONEY IS BUYING DECADES OF SECURITY FOR THEIR KIDS

Liebman and her team most recently launched sales at the first-ever residential development in Miami’s renowned Design District. Miami Design Residences by Chipperfield — a 26-story tower featuring 143 condos and a flagship Fouquet’s hotel — marks a historic shift for an area previously reserved for ultra-luxury retail and fine dining. A surprising catch: Units start at $1.8 million, a reasonable figure for a high-demand, low-supply market.

The longtime CEO revealed to Fox News Digital that the project is so high conviction she has personally purchased a unit alongside other “global names in fashion.”

“We work on a lot of projects, and I haven’t bought that many units across all my years. I bought some, but this project was a no-brainer to me,” she said. “This building will have an incredible sense of community. It will be very chic. It will be one of these buildings, in my opinion, that you can look back on and say, ‘Wow, I’m so glad I bought early,’ … And again, I put my money where my mouth is.”

Though the Miami heat keeps ramping up, as Liebman noted first-quarter condo sales are up 17% and home sales above $5 million have risen almost 10%, she admits that there’s “a tale of two markets” between luxury and median homebuyers.

The differences contrast the “painful” reality of insurance, taxes and high mortgage rates for the middle class, she says, as today’s buyers are “selective” and “disciplined,” not reckless like the 2021 peak.

“It’s very, very difficult for buyers that are not in the luxury segment, and that is the majority of the market. But they’re feeling priced out. That pressure is real. And a lot of it revolves around rates, insurance costs, limited supply, a lack of building of that type of product, older product that’s facing tons of work and assessments… And the dollar only goes so far at this point,” Liebman said.

“What we’re hoping is that opportunities will emerge. We’re seeing more negotiating room for properties that have been on the market for a long time,” she offered as a silver lining. “So I think the advantage now is going to a prepared buyer who knows where to look and can act quickly.”

STEP INSIDE THE $44M FOUR SEASONS PENTHOUSE WHERE EX-STARBUCKS CHIEF HOWARD SCHULTZ IS STARTING RETIREMENT

Interest stability is the “new baseline,” according to the CEO, but 6% rates are still a psychological barrier keeping sellers locked in, as they won’t give up 3% mortgages for a higher one.

“We are seeing buyers start to adjust their expectations. So the psychology shifts from wait-and-see to, ‘Ok, how can I make this work?’ And when that happens, we see the activity picking up. But that said, a true inventory surge, I think that likely needs to see something that starts with a five [percent rate],” Liebman said.

“They’re not going to move until these rates come down meaningfully. So I think near-term, it’s more of a gradual thaw than a flood, but people have to make decisions and their lives change. And you can’t totally allow your life to be dictated by a mortgage,” she continued. “If there’s one thing I could ever hope for the housing market, it wouldn’t be that the luxury market is just always leading the way… but we could see average Americans feel good about their housing situations.”

While critics have long waited for the “Florida flight” to reverse, Liebman notes that the global perception of prestige has undergone a fundamental changing of the guard. For the veteran CEO, the proof isn’t just in the balance sheets but in the reaction she gets when traveling internationally.

“When I used to travel and say I’m from New York, everyone would say, ‘Oh, New York, New York. I always want to go to New York.’ And now I say I am from Miami and their eyes light up,” she reflected.

This “buzz” is increasingly centered on a shift toward health-conscious, community-driven living — a stark distinction from the grueling corporate grind of traditional northern hubs. As cities like San Francisco, Seattle and Chicago grapple with commercial vacancies and population loss, Liebman suggests the Miami model offers a blueprint for recovery: build what the modern consumer actually wants rather than relying on past glory.

“Miami did a good job of leaning into their strengths. San Francisco, an amazing city. New York, one of the greatest cities ever. Chicago, a tougher environment there. But I think cities need to lean into their strength and decide, ‘Why was it such a great city? And how can we keep that going? How can we draw people back?’” she said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

She notes that the success of the Design District’s residential pivot is proof that creating a sense of culture is the ultimate magnet for capital.

“Every city needs to decide how do they build their communities or rebuild the communities,” Liebman concluded. “This is a game-changer for the Design District. The Design District was a game changer for Miami. This is a residence not to be overlooked.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

The U.S. labor market is changing in a way that goes beyond immigration and hiring cycles: older Americans are stepping out of work in growing numbers, tightening labor supply and altering the outlook for employers, consumers and policymakers. The latest employment data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics show labor-force participation among people 55 and older remains well below its pre-pandemic trajectory, and Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City economists said in research on pandemic-era retirements that “excess retirements” became a meaningful drag on labor-force growth, according to the bank’s published analysis.

The demographic force behind that shift is straightforward. In projections published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the agency said the labor force “will continue to age,” with workers 65 and older making up a larger share of the workforce through the decade as the population itself gets older. At the same time, the youngest members of the baby-boom generation have entered their 60s, and that transition matters because, as Brookings Institution economist Wendy Edelberg said in labor-market commentary, aging alone “puts downward pressure on participation,” a point echoed in public analysis from several labor economists.

Not all of the decline reflects weak demand for older workers. A sizable share appears tied to financial capacity and lifestyle choice. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell said in earlier remarks on the post-pandemic labor market that retirements had risen and that asset gains likely played a role, a view reinforced by Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis research linking stronger household balance sheets to earlier retirement decisions. According to the Federal Reserve’s Survey of Consumer Finances and household wealth data, rising home prices and equity-market gains lifted net worth for many older households, giving some workers more freedom to leave jobs earlier than they once expected.

That financial backdrop helps explain why retirement patterns did not fully reverse even after inflation cooled from its 2022 peak. Fidelity Investments said in its retirement analysis that many older Americans continue to prioritize flexibility and health over maximizing years in the workforce, while Transamerica Center for Retirement Studies reported in survey findings that a meaningful share of older workers retired sooner than planned during and after the pandemic. Catherine Collinson, chief executive of Transamerica Institute, said in the group’s public materials that retirement timing increasingly reflects “a complex interplay” of finances, health and caregiving, rather than wages alone.

Employers, meanwhile, face a more complicated staffing environment than the headline unemployment rate suggests. Nick Bunker, economic research director at Indeed Hiring Lab, said in published labor-market commentary that slower labor-force growth means businesses “can’t count on a rapidly expanding supply of workers,” especially in sectors that long relied on experienced older employees. That challenge shows up acutely in healthcare, transportation, skilled trades and local government, where institutional knowledge matters and replacement pipelines often move slowly, according to reporting from Reuters and the Associated Press on labor shortages tied to retirements.

The trend also intersects with technology in ways that cut both directions. Some economists say automation and artificial intelligence could make it easier for companies to operate with fewer workers, but others argue the transition itself may encourage some older employees to leave rather than retrain late in their careers. Dario Amodei, chief executive of Anthropic, has said publicly that AI will change white-collar work significantly over the next several years, while International Monetary Fund Managing Director Kristalina Georgieva said the technology is set to affect a large share of jobs globally. For older workers, that can mean both opportunity and exit pressure, particularly in administrative and professional roles where software adoption is accelerating.

Public policy adds another layer. Janet Yellen, while serving as Treasury secretary, said repeatedly that labor-force participation remained central to the economy’s long-run growth potential, and Congressional Budget Office projections have warned that slower labor-force expansion will weigh on economic output over time. Immigration can offset some of that pressure, but it does not fully solve the retirement wave now moving through the economy, especially because many occupations losing older workers require specific licensing, experience or local labor-market attachment.

There are signs some retirees could still return under the right conditions. AARP has said in employer guidance and survey work that older Americans often want part-time roles, flexible schedules and less physically demanding work rather than a full return to traditional careers. Jo Ann Jenkins, the organization’s former chief executive, said in public remarks that older workers represent “an untapped resource” if employers adapt jobs to meet their needs. That suggests the participation decline is not simply a one-way exit, but a structural shift toward different forms of work that many companies have yet to accommodate.

For markets and executives, the message is clear: a shrinking pool of older workers could keep wage pressures firmer than expected in some industries even if overall hiring cools, while boosting demand for retirement services, healthcare, wealth management and age-friendly consumer products. The next few years matter because Bureau of Labor Statistics projections and Federal Reserve research point in the same direction: population aging, stronger household wealth and changing work preferences are likely to keep older Americans on the sidelines longer, forcing businesses to rethink hiring, training and productivity strategies as the labor market enters a more constrained era.

JBizNews Desk

We’ve all been there: at an airport after landing from a long-haul flight; at a bar staying out late with friends; leaving from a packed concert or sporting event, and we swipe open the Uber app. Seeing an absurd number, you close the app, try again, and the number’s only getting higher. So you turn to the person you’re with, have them book the same trip home, and it’s significantly lower, sometimes a fraction of the price.

You may not be alone. Some Uber riders are accusing the company of charging higher fares when an American Express card is selected in the app, reviving long-running concerns about how opaque ride-hailing algorithms decide what each customer pays.

The latest wave of complaints appears to have been sparked by a viral video showing an UberX ride in Atlanta priced at $33.05 when the rider selected an Amex card, then dropping to $20.33 after the rider switched to a Visa card. Similar claims have since circulated across Reddit, Instagram, YouTube, FlyerTalk, and credit-card forums, where users say fares appear to rise when Amex cards, Uber Cash credits, Uber One memberships, gift-card balances, or business profiles are attached to their accounts.

American Express markets Uber credits as a premium cardholder perk. Platinum cardholders can receive up to $200 in Uber Cash annually, distributed as $15 per month plus a $20 December bonus. Uber’s terms say riders must add an eligible Amex card, select it as the payment method, and enable Uber Cash to redeem the benefit. The same terms say American Express shares certain card information with Uber, “including the Card type,” for benefit fulfillment.

That has led some cardholders to argue the benefit may be offset by higher fares. “It really undermines the benefit of receiving that $15 monthly credit if I end up spending an additional $15 per ride,” one Reddit user wrote in an Amex Platinum thread about the viral video. Another Reddit user said switching from a Chase Sapphire Reserve card to an Amex Platinum card raised an airport ride estimate by roughly $12 to $16, or 17% to 27%, before the price dropped again when the user switched back to Visa.

The pricing debate

Questions about Uber’s dynamic pricing go back years. In 2017, a FlyerTalk thread discussed if the “Amex Platinum make[s] Uber trips more expensive.” A user in the forum said trips began costing roughly 15% more after linking an Amex Platinum card, while another said rides became 13% to 17% more expensive after switching from a previous card to Amex Platinum. “Looks like the advertised credit is a trap,” that FlyerTalk user wrote.

Neither Uber nor American Express has responded to Fortune’s requests for comment.

The rideshare company has denied that payment method affects fares in an April 2025 story about related gift-card complaints. Uber spokesperson Zahid Arab told SFGATE, “Uber does not personalize fares for drivers or riders.” Arab added that “Uber’s pricing tech does not set different prices for riders according to the payment type they use,” and said fare changes are driven by real-time conditions including demand, estimated time and distance, traffic, and driver availability.

Allegedly getting charged more for gift cards and low battery

Other users have claimed that Uber charges more when riders have Uber Cash or gift card balances. That SFGATE story chronicled Bay Area resident Rupinder Summan, who said that “like nine times out of ten” his phone showed higher fares after he loaded Costco gift cards than his wife’s app did for the same route at the same time. A travel blogger said a regular airport ride seemed unusually expensive after he had a $15 Amex Uber credit in his account, and one reader responded that a regular $20 Uber ride rose to about $30 after loading discounted Costco Uber gift cards.

Forum commenters have drawn parallels to other Uber benefits as well. In a Reddit thread about Uber One, one commenter asked, “what if Amazon increased prices exclusively for Prime Members?,” after the poster said a home-to-airport fare that was usually around $54 became $68 after signing up for Uber One through Amex Platinum. In another Uber thread, a commenter claimed American Express users “often see higher rates” and advised riders to try a different card.

In 2023, Belgian newspaper Dernière Heure tested two phones in Brussels and found a ride quote of €17.56 on a phone with 12% battery, compared with €16.60 on a phone with 84% battery. Uber denied using battery level to calculate fares, though former Uber economist Keith Chen previously said the company had found low-battery users were more willing to accept surge pricing, according to Vice.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A tentative ceasefire between the United States and Iran entered a fragile new phase on Thursday, with regional diplomacy expanding to Lebanon even as military pressure and shipping concerns kept investors and policymakers on edge. Reuters and Associated Press have reported in recent days that any pause in direct confrontation has done little to settle wider questions around proxy activity, maritime security and the durability of back-channel talks, underscoring how quickly a narrow de-escalation can collide with broader regional fault lines.

The immediate business significance remains centered on energy flows and freight risk, and officials across the Gulf have made clear they are watching the Strait of Hormuz as closely as the battlefield. In public statements carried by Reuters, analysts at major shipping and energy consultancies said the market’s central concern is not only whether Tehran and Washington avoid direct escalation, but whether allied militias or naval incidents disrupt tanker traffic through one of the world’s most important oil chokepoints. International Energy Agency data frequently cited by market participants show roughly a fifth of global oil consumption moves through the strait, a figure that helps explain why even limited military flare-ups can ripple through crude prices, insurance costs and corporate supply chains.

At the same time, Israel signaled a parallel diplomatic opening with Beirut, a move that could matter for border stability even if it does not resolve the more immediate conflict dynamics. Officials in Israel have said publicly that they are prepared to negotiate with the Lebanese government over security arrangements, while maintaining that operations against Hezbollah positions remain outside any narrower truce framework. That distinction mirrors repeated statements from the office of Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, which has argued that Israel retains freedom of action against the Iranian-backed group, according to reporting from Reuters and statements released by the Israeli government.

For Beirut, the opening is diplomatically significant but operationally limited, because the Lebanese state still lacks full control over armed actors in the south and east. Lebanon’s leadership has repeatedly said, in statements reported by AP and regional outlets, that it wants to avoid becoming a wider war theater, while also pressing for international support to reinforce state authority. The challenge for executives and investors with exposure to the eastern Mediterranean is that political talks can begin even as security conditions remain unstable, especially when cross-border strikes and militia activity continue in parallel.

The broader U.S. posture points to an effort to keep diplomacy alive without signaling strategic retreat. Vice President JD Vance is expected to lead a U.S. delegation for in-person discussions with Iranian representatives in Islamabad, according to officials familiar with the planning cited by multiple outlets, including Reuters. While the administration has not publicly framed the meeting as a breakthrough, officials have said the goal is to test whether a short-term pause can open space for more structured talks on escalation management, detainees, regional proxies and maritime security. The White House has consistently said it seeks de-escalation while protecting U.S. personnel and commercial navigation, a formulation that leaves room for diplomacy but also for rapid military response.

Tehran, for its part, has tried to project both restraint and leverage. Iranian officials, in comments carried by state media and cited by Reuters, have said the country does not seek a broader war but will respond to attacks on its territory or interests. That message aligns with previous public remarks from the Iranian Foreign Ministry, which has framed any negotiations as contingent on what it describes as respect for Iran’s sovereignty. For markets, the practical takeaway is that even if direct U.S.-Iran exchanges continue, the risk premium tied to proxy forces, drones and missile activity is unlikely to disappear quickly.

Shipping companies and commodity traders are already adjusting to that reality. Maritime security advisories from the Joint Maritime Information Center and guidance from the U.K. Maritime Trade Operations office have repeatedly urged vessels transiting the Gulf region to maintain heightened vigilance, citing the possibility of miscalculation or opportunistic attacks. Insurance brokers and freight specialists quoted by Bloomberg and Reuters have said war-risk premiums can jump sharply even without a formal closure of the Strait of Hormuz, because underwriters price uncertainty as aggressively as physical disruption. That matters not just for oil majors, but for refiners, airlines, chemical producers and any manufacturer exposed to energy-intensive inputs.

The diplomatic track with Lebanon also carries implications for reconstruction finance and sovereign risk, though any near-term payoff looks remote. International institutions including the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund have long warned that Lebanon’s economic crisis cannot ease sustainably without political stability and functioning state institutions. In public assessments, the World Bank has described Lebanon’s collapse as one of the world’s most severe modern crises, and analysts say any reduction in border tensions could eventually support donor engagement. But as long as Israeli strikes continue against Hezbollah-linked targets and the militia preserves operational capacity, investors are unlikely to treat diplomatic contacts alone as a turning point.

What comes next now matters as much as the truce itself. The Islamabad talks, if they proceed as planned, could show whether Washington and Tehran can move from a short-lived pause to a process with guardrails, while Israel’s Lebanon channel could indicate whether regional de-escalation extends beyond the immediate U.S.-Iran file. For business leaders, the key signals remain clear: statements from the White House and Iranian officials on the scope of talks, guidance from maritime security agencies on Gulf transit risk, and any shift in Israeli operations against Hezbollah. As Reuters and AP reporting suggests, the ceasefire may be holding for now, but the real test is whether diplomacy can outpace the region’s many triggers for renewed conflict.

JBizNews Middle East Desk

Construction employers are seeing a modest improvement in how younger workers view the trades, but the industry still confronts a stubborn labor shortage that threatens housing supply and project timelines. In a report released April 20, National Association of Home Builders said interest in construction careers among adults ages 18 to 25 has doubled over the past decade to 6% from 3%, and the group said 73% of young adults cited “good pay” and the chance to gain “useful skills” as key reasons to consider the field, according to the association’s latest workforce research.

Even with that shift, NAHB made clear the pipeline remains too thin for the industry’s needs. “Additional work is needed to educate the public about the growing opportunities for well-paying, long-term careers in the skilled trades,” the association said in its report, pointing to a gap between improving perceptions and actual recruitment. That matters for homebuilders because labor constraints continue to limit how quickly companies can bring new homes to market, a pressure NAHB has repeatedly tied to affordability challenges across the U.S. housing market.

The broader labor picture remains tight. Associated Builders and Contractors said in its 2025 workforce outlook that the construction industry would need to attract hundreds of thousands of additional workers on top of normal hiring demand to keep pace with expected activity. Anirban Basu, chief economist at ABC, said in that report that “the construction industry must continue to raise wages, enhance benefits, and invest in workforce development” if it wants to close the gap, a warning that underscores why even better sentiment among Gen Z has not yet translated into enough new entrants.

Federal data show why employers remain concerned. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics has said employment in construction and extraction occupations is projected to grow over the next decade, with many openings coming not only from expansion but also from retirements and workers leaving the field. In its occupational outlook, BLS said median pay in many construction trades exceeds the national median for all occupations, reinforcing NAHB’s finding that compensation remains one of the industry’s strongest recruiting tools.

Builders and trade groups have argued for years that the sector suffers from an image problem as much as a wage problem. Home Builders Institute, the workforce development arm of NAHB, has said employers need to counter outdated assumptions that four-year college paths offer the only route to stable earnings. Ed Brady, president and chief executive of HBI, has said in public remarks that skilled trades careers can offer “excellent wages and career advancement without the burden of student debt,” a message the organization has used in outreach to schools, community groups and military veterans.

That message appears to resonate more than it did a decade ago, but not enough to erase structural barriers. NAHB said younger adults still need more exposure to what modern construction jobs look like, including the use of technology, specialized training and clear advancement tracks. The association’s report said many respondents remain unfamiliar with the range of opportunities available, from carpentry and electrical work to project management and specialty contracting, suggesting the industry still struggles to market itself effectively to first-time job seekers.

The stakes extend beyond builders’ payrolls. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell has said repeatedly that the U.S. housing market faces a long-running shortage of available homes, and industry groups argue labor scarcity adds to that imbalance by slowing completions and raising costs. NAHB has said that “builders continue to face elevated construction costs and persistent labor shortages,” a combination that can feed directly into home prices and rents. For executives across real estate, building materials and home improvement, the workforce issue has become a core operating constraint rather than a temporary post-pandemic disruption.

Companies have responded by expanding apprenticeship programs, partnering with high schools and community colleges, and promoting shorter training pathways. National Center for Construction Education and Research has said in its workforce materials that credential-based training can help workers move into jobs faster while giving employers a more predictable skills pipeline. At the same time, economists and trade groups continue to note that demographic trends, including an aging workforce, mean replacement hiring alone will remain a major challenge for years.

The latest NAHB findings suggest the industry has made some progress in changing minds, especially among younger adults who increasingly value practical skills and earnings potential. But the report’s central message is less celebratory than cautionary: interest is rising from a very low base, and employers still need to convert awareness into actual hires. What comes next will matter well beyond the jobsite. If builders, educators and policymakers can turn that early interest into sustained recruitment, the payoff could reach housing supply, infrastructure capacity and wage growth across the trades; if not, the labor squeeze that has dogged construction for years is likely to remain a defining business risk.

JBizNews Desk

Today’s tumult in the Strait of Hormuz may be a dress rehearsal for tomorrow’s war in the Pacific, according to Singapore Foreign Minister Vivian Balakrishnan.

The city-state considers both the United States and China as partners. U.S. entities make up the largest share of its largest foreign investments, with American multinational enterprises directly pouring $467.6 billion into the country in 2024. Not only that, the U.S. trade surplus with Singapore reached $3.6 billion last year, per U.S. Trade Representative data, a 91.5% increase from 2024’s $1.7 billion. At the same time, Singapore also reached its largest trade partnership with China, exporting $58.8 billion worth of goods there in 2023. 

While the U.S. looks to extend a tenuous ceasefire as the war in Iran continues, China is maintaining a low profile, publicly as a peacekeeper. Despite this happening on the world stage, Balakrishnan said he doesn’t feel like Singapore has to pick between the two countries. However, should tensions between the U.S. and China escalate in a future conflict, Singapore may be placed in a challenging position to navigate its best interests while maintaining diplomacy with its two partners.

“Are we exquisitely positioned to take advantage of developments in both America and China? We are,” he said. “The main danger is: That relationship fractures if they go to war in the Pacific. What you’re witnessing now in the Strait of Hormuz is just a dry run.”

Singapore’s stake in the Iran war

The ongoing conflict in the Gulf may be jostling the U.S. and China’s positions as global superpowers. Shipping traffic at the Strait of Hormuz, through which 20% of the world’s oil usually passes, has yet to return to its normal flow. As the U.S. blockade seeks to stymie Iran’s oil revenue, it is also leaving oil prices elevated and threatening high gas prices and inflation in the U.S. 

Meanwhile, China has quietly benefitted from the U.S.’s exertions in the war. While its export market is slowing due to rising energy prices, China’s steep investment in renewables may see increased demand as other countries look to diversify energy sources. Ongoing sanctions and tariffs have also encouraged China’s allies, such as Iran and Russia, to de-dollarize and move away from trading oil with the petrodollar, a fixture of global trade that allowed the U.S. to keep a tight grasp on worldwide reliance on the dollar. Instead, industry experts say ships have been able to pass through the Strait of Hormuz using the Chinese yuan, further weakening dollar dominance.

While tensions slowly mount between these two counties, Balakrishnan indicated that if forced to choose one power over another, Singapore would prioritize its own needs without taking a side.

“We will refuse to choose,” Balakrishnan said. “The way we conduct our affairs is we assess what is in Singapore’s long term national interest, and if I have to say no to Washington or Beijing or anyone else, we don’t flinch from that.”

“But they will also know that when we say no, it’s not at the behest of the other party, we are acting in our own long term national interest,” he added. “We will be useful, but we will not be made use of.”

Singapore’s precarious plans for the Strait of Malacca

The Strait of Hormuz chaos may already be foreshadowing challenges Singapore may face in the Pacific. Tehran has proposed charging tolls to ships passing through the Strait of Hormuz as a means of generating revenue amid ongoing economic strain.

Should tolls be implemented—which would violate the UN Convention on the Law of the Sea, according to legal experts—it could set a precedent for tolls to also be deployed at the Strait of Malacca, a 500-mile waterway passing by Singapore which sees ships carrying about 30% of the world’s traded goods.

Balakrishnan said the states surrounding the Strait of Malacca (Singapore, Malaysia, and Indonesia) have a “cooperative mechanism” to not collect tolls, as it would go against their best interest as trade-dependent countries. 

Even if geopolitical tensions were to boil over and extend to the Pacific, the minister said not only would he advocate against tolls, he would also avoid different treatment of the U.S. and China.

“The right of transit passage is guaranteed for everyone,” Balakrishnan said. “We will not participate in any attempts to close or interdict or to impose tolls in our neighborhood.”

As Singapore tries to maintain diplomatic ties with both China and the U.S., it may be cooling relations closer to home. Other Southeast Asian nations are taking alternative approaches to trade passage access. Indonesian Finance Minister Purbaya Yudhi Sadewa has said the country is weighing levies on vessels traveling through the strait as a way to monetize the busy chokepoint. Thailand’s government is fast-tracking plans for a landbridge that would connect between the Indian and Pacific oceans and bypass the Strait of Malacca.

Nurul Izzah Anwar, daughter of the Malaysian prime minister and deputy president of the People’s Justice Party, has criticized Balakrishnan’s earlier decision to not negotiate with Iran to access the Strait of Hormuz, once again citing his belief that international law dictates trade route passage as a right, not a privilege. Anwar suggested Balakrishnan’s decision was not universally favorable for all countries in the region. Malaysia was among a select few countries granted toll-free passage through the Strait of Hormuz by Iran.

“Malaysia will not be lectured on the merits of engagement,” she said in a statement earlier this month.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Lufthansa is cutting roughly 20,000 short-haul flights this summer, citing a spike in jet fuel prices that has rendered many routes “unprofitable” as the global aviation industry grapples with rising costs.

The German carrier said Tuesday the cuts, which will run through October, are expected to save about 40,000 metric tons of jet fuel. The airline noted that fuel prices have roughly doubled since the outbreak of the Iran war.

“In total, 20,000 short-haul flights will be removed from the schedule through October, equivalent to approximately 40,000 metric tons of jet fuel, the price of which has doubled since the outbreak of the Iran conflict,” the company said in a statement. “The schedule adjustments reduce the number of unprofitable short-haul flights across the Lufthansa Group network.”

TRUMP SAYS HE WANTS ‘SOMEBODY’ TO BUY SPIRIT AIRLINES, OPPOSES UNITED-AMERICAN MERGER

The move reflects a broader trend, as airlines worldwide adjust operations in response to surging fuel costs. 

The energy market has seen increased volatility since the Iran war began and the flow of oil through the Strait of Hormuz has been severely constrained by the threat of Iranian attacks, impacting the availability of a key input in making jet fuel.

Other carriers are taking similar steps. Air Canada announced Friday it is suspending select U.S.-bound routes as jet fuel prices continue to climb. 

AIR CANADA SCRAPS KEY US ROUTES AS FUEL COSTS SURGE AMID IRAN WAR

Delta Air Lines has also trimmed some summer routes, telling USA TODAY the adjustments are part of “normal planning.”

At the same time, several major airlines – including JetBlue, United, Delta and Southwest – have raised baggage fees in recent weeks.

“We’re seeing airfare increase across the board, from the full-service airlines to the budget carriers, from domestic flights to long-haul international,” Sean Cudahy, senior aviation reporter at The Points Guy, told FOX Business. “And it’s not just fares – almost every major U.S. carrier has hiked checked bag fees, too. This is really just a classic case of companies passing on costs to their customers, and it’s a big cost at that.”

SOARING JET FUEL PRICES THREATEN TO DRIVE UP SUMMER TRAVEL COSTS

Jet fuel is typically airlines’ second-largest expense, according to Cudahy.

“Even if the Strait of Hormuz reopened tomorrow, you’d likely see lingering high fares for months to come. And those checked bag fees that just rose? Those almost never come back down once they go up,” he added.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

FOX Business reached out to Lufthansa and Delta Air Lines for comment.

FOX Business’ Eric Revell and Bonny Chu contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

The Trump administration is nearing a rescue package for Spirit Airlines that could provide up to $500 million in financing to the struggling budget carrier, The Wall Street Journal reported. The deal, which has not been finalized, would reportedly give the government warrants to purchase Spirit stock, potentially leaving taxpayers with a meaningful stake in the airline if it recovers.

It’s an unusually direct federal intervention in the fate of a single airline and comes as Spirit has been trying to survive an extended financial crisis. The low-cost carrier has struggled with rising jet fuel prices, weak demand in the leisure travel market, and the aftermath of a failed turnaround. Spirit had already been seeking government help as it faced the risk of liquidation. The airline reportedly was willing to offer the government equity in exchange for emergency aid, according to The Points Guy.

President Donald Trump signaled this week that he was open to federal support for Spirit. “I’d love somebody to buy Spirit,” Trump said Tuesday in an interview with CNBC’s Squawk Box, adding, “Maybe the federal government should help that one out.

“The Trump administration continues to monitor the situation and overall health of the U.S. aviation industry that millions of Americans rely on every day for essential travel and their livelihoods,” White House spokesperson Kush Desai told Fortune in a statement.

“Spirit Airlines would be on a much firmer financial footing had the Biden administration not recklessly blocked the airline’s merger with JetBlue,” the statement contineud.

Desai is referring to a 2022 bid by JetBlue to buy Spirit for $3.8 billion, arguing the two smaller carriers together would create a larger challenger to the “Big Four” airlines in the U.S.: American, Delta, Southwest, and United.

However, in March 2023, the DOJ under the Biden administration stopped the deal and argued Spirit’s presence in the market created a “Spirit Effect” that forced other airlines to lower fares where Spirit competed. The DOJ said the deal would eliminate the nation’s largest ultra-low-cost carrier and raise fares for travelers.

Iran war-sparked fuel shortages

Global airline carriers, not just Spirit, are dealing with surging jet fuel prices thanks to U.S.-Israeli strikes on Iran, which have disrupted ​traffic through the Strait of Hormuz—previously the route taken by more than a fifth of the world’s oil supply tankers.

Spirit has said it plans to shrink its fleet to about one‑third of its pre‑bankruptcy size, retaining roughly 76 to 80 aircraft by the third quarter ​of 2026. It built the plan based on fuel costs averaging about $2.24 per ​gallon in 2026 and $2.14 in 2027, according to its March disclosures.

By mid-April, jet fuel prices ‌were ⁠around $4.24 a gallon, roughly double the level assumed in its projections.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The number of 4-year-olds attending state-funded preschools reached record highs last school year, driven by states embracing universal access and an unprecedented $14.4 billion in spending.

State-funded preschool enrollment in the U.S. rose to 1.8 million kids, reaching 37% of 4-year-olds and about 10% of 3-year-olds, according to an annual report published Wednesday by the National Institute of Early Education Research. In total, states added 44,000 students to their preschool enrollment. But the report’s authors noted that the gains were smaller than the year prior and said preschool access remains wildly uneven from state to state. Some states even lost ground.

“If providing high-quality preschool education to all 3- and 4-year-olds were a race,” the authors wrote, “some states are nearing the finish line, others have stumbled and fallen behind, and a few have yet to leave the starting line.”

Free preschool has expanded in California

More than half the nation’s public preschool enrollment gain — some 25,000 students — came in California, which this year made every 4-year-old eligible for its “ transitional kindergarten ” program, or “TK.” The rapid rollout has had its tradeoffs. The national institute outlines 10 quality benchmarks for preschools, related to teacher training, class size and curriculum. California met just two of them last school year. And private preschool owners say the rush of 4-year-olds joining public schools threatens to cripple their businesses.

Universal TK … is a real win, but it’s also just the start of the work and not the end of it,” said Jessica Sawko of Children Now, which advocates on early childhood issues in California. She noted that the state will hit two more quality benchmarks in next year’s report, by lowering its student-teacher ratio to 10-to-1 and by requiring lead teachers to have early education training.

The report illustrates some of the difficult tradeoffs states face when they scale up programs quickly or have limited funding. Hawaii is one of six states that meet all the institute’s benchmarks. Its state preschool program also only serves 10% of 4-year-olds.

Evidence is mounting that the impact of high-quality preschool can follow children into adulthood, making them better prepared for kindergarten, more likely to graduate high school and more likely to find work. And it is increasingly seen as essential for success in kindergarten and beyond. Educators now also expect youngsters to start their first year of school already equipped to navigate kindergarten.

“We have a lot of kids who still do not fulfill their potential,” said Steven Barnett, founder and director of the early education institute. “We have evidence — very strong evidence — that preschool programs substantially improved the foundation for later success.”

Some states also recognize that free prekindergarten can make a difference for the wider economy, allowing parents to return to work at a time when private child care is becoming less affordable.

Preschool means confident kindergartners

Heather Sufuentes witnessed the impact of preschool when she was principal of Parkview Elementary in Chico, California, as it began its transitional kindergarten program. She said students who attended the program, which has a play-based curriculum and runs the length of a workday, arrived with more confidence and often volunteered to be class leaders.

“They’re well prepared to transition into that big elementary school setting,” said Sufuentes, now director of elementary education for Chico Unified School District. Chico has more than doubled the number of TK seats it offers since 2022.

Marisol Márquez, a secretary who works for the state, sends her daughter to transitional kindergarten at 1st Street Elementary in Los Angeles. She had been sending her for free to a learning center underwritten by COVID-19 relief funding. But she would have had to start paying tuition this year, and she’s not sure how she and her husband, a UPS driver, would have made it work. She was elated to hear 1st Street Elementary was offering free transitional kindergarten.

Educators there quickly discovered her daughter was bright and began sending her to kindergarten for math and reading lessons.

“If it hadn’t been for this program, we would have never found that out,” Márquez said.

In some states, preschool is expensive. In others, it’s free

Despite the raised expectations for 5-year-olds, no state mandates that children attend preschool, and only some cities and states make it accessible to every 4-year-old. Preschool offerings differ vastly. A family living in Wyoming, which has no state-funded preschool, could move to Colorado, where every parent can send their 4-year-old to part-time preschool without paying a dime in tuition. In the District of Columbia, even affluent families have access to two full years of prekindergarten, while neighboring Virginia has a far less robust program.

The uneven access across states can exacerbate disparities. Wealthier families can often afford private preschool tuition, regardless of what their state offers. In 2024, private child care centers, which often use preschool curriculum, averaged annual tuition of more than $12,000 for 4-year-olds, according to Child Care Aware of America.

For families that can’t afford preschool tuition, the options can be limited. State-funded preschool programs often have waitlists.

If a family’s earnings are low enough, they can qualify for programs like Head Start, which provides early education for the neediest Americans. But the number of children in Head Start is falling, in part due to staff shortages. Lower-income families may also qualify for state or federal child care subsidies that can help with private preschool, but those have growing waitlists, too.

Trump says states should pay

Federal support for expanding early education funding is sparse and shrinking. Recently, President Donald Trump said the federal government couldn’t afford to support child care while it was waging a war with Iran.

“We’re fighting wars. We can’t take care of day care,” Trump said. States, he added, “should pay for it. … They’ll have to raise their taxes.”

The map of states that offer the highest-quality public preschool programs would surprise some partisans. Republican-led states have pioneered universal prekindergarten, with Oklahoma introducing it in the late 1990s. Alabama and West Virginia also have preschool-for-all programs that receive top marks. Wealthier, Democratic-led states have lagged behind, even as many blue-leaning cities have moved ahead with their own initiatives. New York state lost enrollment last school year, even as New York City, which already has universal prekindergarten, is charging ahead with a plan to make all child care free for younger children.

And Georgia, another state with Republican leadership, is the first to have a universal preschool program that meets all quality benchmarks set by the National Institute of Early Education Research.

Rebecca Ellis’s son John Patrick, 5, attends the private Capitol Hill Child Enrichment Center in Atlanta free of charge, thanks to the state’s preschool-for-all program. She said it saved her family a huge amount of money, and she is impressed by how much her son has grown socially and emotionally.

“They focus so much on just helping kids learn how to calm down, to make friends, to regulate their feelings, to solve problems,” Ellis said.

John Patrick and her older son, who attended the same preschool, have even given their parents advice. When they become agitated, the children urge them to take deep breaths.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here


AUSTIN, Texas — Tesla Inc. reported stronger-than-expected first-quarter earnings Wednesday, but shares gave up early gains after CEO Elon Musk and CFO Vaibhav Taneja revealed a sharp increase in capital spending plans, overshadowing an otherwise solid financial performance.

The electric vehicle maker posted revenue of $22.39 billion, up 16% from a year earlier but slightly below Wall Street expectations, while adjusted earnings per share came in at $0.41, beating analyst estimates. Operating income surged 136% year-over-year to $0.9 billion, with margins improving to 4.2%, reflecting tighter cost controls and improved pricing dynamics.

Tesla’s gross margin climbed to 21.1%, well above forecasts, driven by lower material costs and higher average selling prices, along with a one-time benefit tied to warranty and tariff adjustments. Automotive revenue rose to $16.2 billion, while the company’s energy division lagged, with revenue declining 12% to $2.41 billion following a sharp drop in energy storage deployments from late-2025 highs.

The market reaction turned sharply during the earnings call, when Taneja disclosed that Tesla now expects to spend more than $25 billion in capital expenditures in 2026, a $5 billion increase from prior guidance and nearly triple the $8.6 billion spent in 2025. The spending will fund a broad expansion across manufacturing, artificial intelligence, and robotics, including new global factories, battery production, semiconductor development, and the company’s AI infrastructure buildout.

Investors initially pushed Tesla shares higher following the earnings beat, but the stock quickly reversed course as the scale of the spending increase became clear, highlighting concerns about near-term profitability and execution risk.

On the product front, Musk confirmed that Tesla’s Cybercab — a fully autonomous, steering wheel-free robotaxi — has begun production at its Texas facility, though he cautioned that the ramp-up would be gradual. “Initial production will be very slow, but then ramping up exponentially toward the end of the year and into next year,” Musk said, adding that Tesla Semi production is also set to begin soon in Nevada.

Tesla’s Robotaxi service, first launched in Austin in 2025, has expanded to Dallas and Houston, with Musk stating that the company aims to operate in “a dozen or so states” by the end of the year, pending regulatory approvals. He emphasized that Tesla is taking a cautious approach as it scales fully autonomous driving capabilities.

In a notable regulatory milestone, Tesla received approval for its Full Self-Driving (Supervised) system in the Netherlands, marking the company’s first entry into European autonomous driving markets.

Musk also provided updates on Tesla’s Optimus humanoid robot, saying a production-ready version is nearing demonstration, with a public unveiling expected later this summer. He acknowledged delays were partly strategic, aimed at protecting intellectual property from competitors. Tesla is converting part of its Fremont factory into a dedicated Optimus production hub.

On the technology side, Musk said Tesla has completed the design phase of its next-generation AI5 chip, which will power vehicles, AI training systems, and robotics platforms — underscoring the company’s deepening push into artificial intelligence.

In a separate disclosure, Tesla revealed it made a $2 billion equity investment in SpaceX during the quarter, contributing to a rise in total cash and investments to $44.7 billion.

Wall Street remains divided on Tesla’s trajectory. Dan Ives, Managing Director at Wedbush Securities, who maintains an outperform rating, said the company’s long-term valuation hinges on its AI and autonomy strategy. “The key focus is the Robotaxi rollout and Cybercab production — that’s the future growth engine,” Ives wrote ahead of the results.

Analysts at Cantor Fitzgerald described 2026 as a “transitional year,” noting that while Tesla’s next-generation platforms show promise, they remain in early commercialization stages amid intensifying global competition from companies such as BYD and Xiaomi.

Tesla shares are down roughly 14% year-to-date, underperforming other megacap technology firms. The company also disclosed that its Bitcoin holdings declined 22% to $786 million, reflecting ongoing volatility in digital assets.

In a development affecting existing customers, Musk confirmed that vehicles equipped with Tesla’s older Hardware 3 system will not support future unsupervised Full Self-Driving capabilities, a setback for owners who had expected eventual upgrades through software.

The results underscore Tesla’s evolving identity — from automaker to AI and robotics company — but also highlight the growing tension between long-term ambition and near-term investor expectations, as the company embarks on one of the most aggressive investment cycles in its history.

JBizNews Desk

A Florida produce distributor has recalled thousands of cantaloupes due to a potential risk of salmonella contamination, and now the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) is warning of an increased risk.

The recall was first initiated last month, but the FDA upgraded it to Class I on April 20, meaning consuming the affected cantaloupe could lead to severe health consequences or death. 

According to an FDA enforcement report updated earlier this week, Ayco Farms Inc., based in Pompano Beach, Florida, recalled 8,302 cartons of its fruit.

Although the recalled cantaloupes are no longer sold in stores, the FDA’s upgrade underscores a lingering risk. Consumers who purchased the fruit earlier this year may still have it stored in their freezers, where contamination can persist.

GENERAC RECALLS PORTABLE GENERATORS SOLD AT COSTCO OVER FIRE RISK

The recalled fruit was sold in cardboard cartons containing between six and 12 melons wrapped in food-safe bags and distributed to retailers across California, Florida, New York and Pennsylvania.

Ayco Farms said in a press release the recall listed in the FDA’s enforcement report is no longer active.

“The listing reflects a previously completed, voluntary recall of fresh whole cantaloupes that were distributed between December 12, 2025, and January 16, 2026, due to ‘potential’ Salmonella contamination,” a press release states. 

MACY’S RECALLS POPULAR KITCHEN ITEM OVER BURN RISK

“The recall was initiated earlier this year as a precautionary measure in coordination with the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. On March 24, 2026, Ayco Farms issued formal notifications to its customers, as agreed with the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, as part of the agency’s standard recall reporting process.”

This recall follows a prior cantaloupe recall in 2024, when Arizona-based Eagle Produce LLC recalled 224 cases of whole cantaloupes sold under the Kandy brand, according to an FDA report at the time.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

There have been no reports of illnesses from consuming the affected cantaloupes, but the FDA warns that salmonella can be deadly to certain age groups.

Consumers who purchased the recalled melons are encouraged to dispose of the products immediately.

FOX Business’ Andrea Vacchiano contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here


WASHINGTON, D.C. — U.S. egg prices have stabilized at roughly $2.25 to $2.50 per dozen nationwide, a sharp reversal from the historic spikes seen during the height of the avian influenza crisis, as flock repopulation accelerates, federal agencies report improving supply conditions, and industry leaders say the market has largely rebalanced — though risks remain.

The U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Agricultural Marketing Service (AMS) said in its latest Egg Markets Overview that wholesale prices have continued to decline, with some loose egg prices trading below $1 per dozen in select channels. The agency cited “light to moderate demand and mostly adequate to ample supplies” as key drivers behind the sustained drop, signaling a market that has shifted from shortage to relative surplus in a matter of months.

U.S. Secretary of Agriculture Brooke Rollins, who has made food affordability a central theme of her tenure, said the turnaround reflects both producer resilience and federal support. “America’s egg farmers stepped up in a major way, and our focus has been on ensuring they have the tools to rebuild quickly and safely,” Rollins said in recent public remarks, pointing to expanded biosecurity measures and support programs aimed at stabilizing poultry operations following widespread losses.

The USDA’s Economic Research Service (ERS) underscored the scale of the correction, projecting a significant year-over-year decline in farm-level egg prices in 2026 after the extreme volatility of the prior year. The agency said production is recovering after highly pathogenic avian influenza (HPAI) wiped out tens of millions of egg-laying hens, driving prices to record highs in 2024 and early 2025.

Mark Jekanowski, Chair of USDA’s World Agricultural Outlook Board, previously warned that recovery would depend heavily on avoiding new outbreaks. “Assuming no additional significant HPAI events, production is expected to continue improving,” Jekanowski said in USDA outlook discussions — a scenario that appears to be playing out, though USDA data shows millions of birds have still been affected in 2026, highlighting the fragility of the recovery.

From the industry side, Emily Metz, President and CEO of the American Egg Board, said supply conditions have improved faster than many anticipated. “There’s never been a better time to buy eggs,” Metz said in a recent interview, crediting farmers’ investments in biosecurity and operational resilience. She added that close coordination with USDA helped maintain confidence during the peak of the crisis.

Government inflation data confirms the shift. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that eggs have become one of the most significant contributors to easing food-at-home inflation in recent months. Economists note the category’s rapid swing — from a leading driver of grocery price increases to a source of relief — illustrates how quickly agricultural markets can reset once supply constraints are addressed.

Mark Zandi, Chief Economist at Moody’s Analytics, said the magnitude of the decline has not received proportional attention. “When prices surge, it dominates the narrative. When they fall this quickly, it tends to go largely unnoticed — even though consumers feel the benefit directly,” Zandi said, pointing to eggs as a case study in post-shock normalization.

Retail dynamics are also shifting. USDA data shows promotional activity increasing across major grocery chains, with some discount and overstock channels offering eggs at sharply reduced prices — in isolated cases dropping below 70 cents per dozen as retailers work through excess inventory. Analysts caution these prices are not representative of the national average but reflect localized discounting strategies.

Despite the improvement, economists and policy observers say the role of federal intervention — including producer support, disease containment coordination, and supply chain stabilization — has received limited public acknowledgment. That gap, they note, reflects a broader pattern in economic discourse where price increases are quickly politicized, while declines are less frequently attributed.

Looking ahead, USDA officials say egg prices are expected to remain relatively stable, barring new disruptions. The key risk remains avian influenza, which continues to pose a threat to flock stability. At the same time, analysts say the industry faces a secondary challenge: rebuilding consumer demand after many buyers shifted to substitutes during the period of elevated prices.

For now, however, the stabilization of egg prices marks one of the clearest examples of a rapid inflation reversal in the U.S. economy — even if it is happening with far less attention than the surge that preceded it.

JBizNews Desk

If you walked right past the meat aisle on your last trip to the grocery store, you’re not the only one. Beef is starting to feel like a luxury as prices stay at record highs, and there’s no end in sight for markups.   

Ground beef averaged about $6.70 per pound in March, nearly a dollar more than last year, according to data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics. Beef steaks, which cost an average of $12.73 per pound in March, are up 16% from a year ago.

Prices have decreased slightly since January, according to the BLS, but don’t expect ground beef to return to $4 or $5 per pound anytime soon. In its most recent forecast, the USDA estimated that beef prices will climb 10.1% in 2026, though price inflation could vary between 2.8 to 18.3%. 

It’s easy to point out supply-side issues as the reason for higher prices. Beef cattle inventory is at a 75-year low, according to the American Farm Bureau Federation, due to persistent drought, high interest rates, and rising production costs. As of January, the cattle inventory is down 8.2 million animals or 8.6% from 2020, a year before a persistent and extreme drought began to shrink herd sizes. Cattle numbers are expected to stay down until at least 2028, according the Farm Bureau.

But the largest contributor to high prices is ever-increasing demand from American consumers, said Glynn Tonsor, professor of agricultural economics at Kansas State University. 

“Meat is having a moment,” Tonsor told Fortune. Growing beef demand is part of a larger protein-frenzy in the U.S. in recent years as Americans turn to high-protein foods in an attempt to improve their health. New federal dietary guidelines recommend “prioritizing protein” and include it in every meal. 

Higher supply and demand are ultimately the reason for higher prices, explained Tonsor, who runs the Meat Demand Monitor, a project out of Kansas State that has surveyed the U.S. public about their preferences, views, and demand for meat every month since February 2020. 

Self-reported rates of being vegan or vegetarian have also gone down, according to the monitor. In 2020, 14% of Americans reported being vegan or vegetarian. In 2025, just 7% of people reported being vegan or vegetarian, signaling higher interest in consuming meat and other animal products. 

“Domestic U.S. consumer demand for beef has grown each of the last two years, and that economic force has the effect of pulling up prices,” Tonsor said. “That’s actually a bigger economic force of your higher prices today than anything on the supply side.” 

Despite having fewer cows, the U.S. has produced more beef than before to meet high demand. 

“We’re getting more beef per cow because of the offspring. We’re making them bigger and selling them at a heavier weight than ever before, and we’re importing more beef from abroad as part of that.” To meet high demand, meatpackers have been importing more beef from countries such as Argentina and Mexico. Imports this year have increased 11% year-to-date as of April 11, compared to 2025, according to the USDA.

What to expect in the next few months

Protein prices have gone down in the last two months, but a hike in production costs is expected this year as the war in Iran raises energy prices. Average gas prices in the U.S. have held steady over $4 per gallon this month, and experts and government officials believe that they will stay high for the next several months, if not until 2027. 

High energy prices will have reverberations on every part of the beef production process, from cow feed to transportation costs to meat processing and refrigeration at the grocery store. Increased transportation costs are going to hit beef consumers soon, Tonsor said. But price increases could continue well into last year due to higher fertilizer prices, which will raise corn and cow feed prices. This will likely lead to weaker production growth because production costs are higher, no matter how much Americans want more beef. 

“Not everybody will expand that would have before, so you may have less eventual beef show up for consumers than you would have before,” Tonsor said.  

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here


CHICAGOUnited Airlines Holdings Inc. (NASDAQ: UAL) cut its full-year profit outlook nearly in half, becoming the first major U.S. carrier to formally reset expectations as jet fuel prices surged because of the escalating U.S.-Iran conflict, even as the airline reported stronger-than-expected quarterly results.

The carrier now expects 2026 adjusted earnings of $7 to $11 per share, down from a prior forecast of $12 to $14 per share issued in January, before hostilities intensified in late February. The revision reflects a sharp deterioration in cost conditions rather than demand, which executives say remains resilient.

First-quarter revenue rose more than 10% to $14.6 billion, driven by continued strength in international and premium travel, according to the company.


Fuel Shock Reshapes Outlook

The earnings reset underscores the sensitivity of airline margins to energy markets.

Data from S&P Global Commodity Insights (Platts) show U.S. jet fuel prices climbed to $4.78 per gallon on April 2, nearly doubling from $2.39 on February 27, the day before the conflict escalated. Prices have since eased to roughly $3.51 per gallon, though they remain well above historical norms.

United said it expects to pay approximately $4.30 per gallon in the second quarter, after absorbing about $340 million in incremental fuel costs in the first quarter compared with a year earlier.


Kirby Signals Demand Strength

Chief Executive Scott Kirby, speaking on CNBC, said the company is not seeing a slowdown in bookings despite higher fares.

“Bookings are strong,” Kirby said, adding that United continues to see stable demand across its network.

To offset rising costs, the airline is scaling back growth plans, trimming capacity by roughly five percentage points. United now expects flat to 2% capacity growth in the second half of the year, compared with 3.4% expansion in the first quarter.


Industry Moves in Tandem

The pressures are rippling across the sector.

Alaska Air Group Inc. (NYSE: ALK) withdrew its full-year guidance, with CEO Ben Minicucci telling analysts the carrier has raised fares by about $25 to offset fuel costs.
Delta Air Lines Inc. (NYSE: DAL) declined to update its outlook, citing volatility in fuel markets, while Deutsche Lufthansa AG warned that higher energy costs could erode margins.


Pricing Power Offsets Costs

Airlines have so far been able to pass through much of the cost increase.

Carriers have raised fares, baggage fees, and fuel surcharges, with demand — particularly among higher-paying travelers — holding up. Analysts say this pricing power has helped cushion the immediate impact of fuel volatility.

According to data compiled by Whalesbook, 63% of analysts covering United rate the stock a “strong buy,” with a consensus price target of $132.85, indicating continued confidence in long-term fundamentals.


Market Reaction and Outlook

United shares fell in after-hours trading following the guidance cut, even as quarterly results topped expectations.

The outlook for airlines now hinges largely on fuel prices, which remain tied to geopolitical developments. With no clear resolution to the conflict in sight, carriers face continued uncertainty over one of their largest cost inputs.

For now, the industry is navigating a familiar equation: strong demand offset by volatile fuel — with margins increasingly dependent on how long elevated energy prices persist.


JBizNews Desk

Southwest Airlines Co. reported adjusted quarterly profit and revenue that fell just shy of Wall Street’s expectations, as the US carrier joins rivals in grappling with higher fuel costs.

Shares in the Dallas-based airline extended losses in aftermarket trading after Southwest declined to update its full-year profit guidance of at least $4 a share, underscoring the volatility in the industry. 

It said achieving those results would require lower fuel prices mixed with stronger revenue performance. It also projected second-quarter adjusted EPS in a range of 35 cents to 65 cents, with analysts expecting 59 cents.  

Southwest fell 3.8% and closed at $39.35 in regular trading Wednesday, mirroring stock declines of other carriers. 

Southwest’s decision is broadly in line with other carriers contending with fuel costs driven higher by the US-Iran war. Rival carrier Delta Air Lines Inc. has declined to update its full-year forecast, while others such as United Airlines Holdings Inc. and Alaska Air Group Inc. have revised or withdrawn guidance. 

For the first quarter, Southwest reported earnings of 45 cents per share, compared to analyst estimates of 46 cents. Operating revenue was $7.25 billion, compared with the roughly $7.29 billion analysts polled by Bloomberg expected on average.

Analysts are likely to press Southwest executives on an earnings call Thursday about the degree to which the carrier can boost fares to offset fuel prices without alienating customers. 

The airline is also in the middle of a major corporate makeover that includes adding premium seating, lounges and other initiatives designed to improve its finances.

“Much of the transformation Southwest has implemented, from premium seating to baggage fees, has been focused on improving revenue per existing core passenger,” Melius Research analyst Conor Cunningham said in a note. “With two domestic fare increases now in place, Southwest may be the most exposed to demand destruction among its peers.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

WASHINGTON, D.C. — U.S. importers now have a direct path to recovering billions of dollars in tariff payments after U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) officially launched a new online refund system on April 20, marking a significant shift in how businesses reclaim duties tied to recent trade actions.

The platform — known as the Consolidated Administration and Processing of Entries (CAPE) portal — is designed to dramatically simplify what has historically been a complex, time-consuming refund process. According to CBP, the system allows importers to receive refunds with interest through a single electronic payment, replacing the traditional entry-by-entry filing method.

Officials say refunds are expected to be processed within 60 to 90 days, with early filings already underway nationwide.


Targeted Relief: Which Tariffs Qualify

The refund program applies exclusively to IEEPA emergency tariffs imposed in 2025, a key distinction for businesses navigating multiple layers of U.S. trade policy.

Other major tariff programs — including Section 122, Section 232, and Section 301 — are not eligible under the CAPE system, limiting the scope but maintaining clarity for affected importers.


Who Is Eligible to File

CBP confirms that two primary groups can initiate refund claims:

  • Businesses that directly paid IEEPA tariffs
  • Customs brokers who paid duties on behalf of importers

However, the agency emphasizes that only the importer of record is entitled to receive the refund, even if a third party handled payment logistics.


How the Application Process Works

To begin, businesses must access the Automated Commercial Environment (ACE) Secure Data Portal, the federal government’s primary trade-processing system.

Importers and brokers are required to:

  • Create and upload a CAPE Declaration
  • Ensure they have an active ACE account
  • Complete and maintain CBP Form 5106 if not already on file

Claims are submitted by uploading CSV files containing entry numbers, with each submission capped at 9,999 entries — though multiple files can be submitted for larger claims.

🔗 Apply here:


What Happens After Submission

Once a claim is approved, CBP says refunds will be issued within two to three months, with processing occurring in phases.

Phase 1 prioritizes:

  • Unliquidated entries
  • Entries within 80 days of their liquidation date

The system recalculates duties as if the IEEPA tariffs were never applied, potentially resulting in substantial recoveries for businesses with high import volumes.


Early Response Signals Strong Demand

Initial feedback suggests significant demand for the program, particularly among small and mid-sized businesses seeking liquidity relief.

One early filer reported completing submissions for 17 shipments totaling over $162,000 in tariffs in approximately five minutes, highlighting the portal’s efficiency compared to legacy systems.

At the same time, some users encountered early technical issues, including:

  • Duplicate tax ID errors
  • Temporary portal downtime

CBP has acknowledged the glitches, issuing support tickets and working to stabilize the system as usage scales.


Support and Webinars for Businesses

To assist applicants, CBP is hosting two informational webinars:

  • April 21, 2026
  • April 28, 2026

Both sessions will be recorded and made available on CBP’s IEEPA Refunds page, offering step-by-step guidance and updates as the rollout continues.


A Shift Toward Faster Trade Relief

The CAPE portal represents a broader federal push to modernize trade administration and deliver faster financial relief to U.S. businesses impacted by tariff policy.

If execution matches early expectations, the system could unlock billions in refunds, improve cash flow for importers, and set a precedent for how future trade remedies are administered.


JBizNews Desk

JBizNews Desk covers business, trade, and economic policy affecting the American marketplace.
Visit JBizNews.com for daily updates.

U.S. car buyers entered the spring selling season with a record amount of debt attached to their trade-ins, a sign that elevated vehicle prices and extended loan terms continue to strain household balance sheets. Edmunds said in data released in April that the average amount of negative equity rolled into a new-vehicle loan reached $7,138 in the first quarter, and analyst Ivan Drury said in the company’s release that “buyers are still grappling with affordability challenges,” a trend the pricing firm tied to years of expensive financing and high transaction prices.

The share of trade-ins carrying negative equity also remained unusually high, underscoring how many consumers still owe more than their vehicles are worth. In its first-quarter analysis, Edmunds said 30.9% of trade-ins toward new-vehicle purchases came with underwater loans, just below the 31.9% level recorded in the first quarter of 2021 during the pandemic-era market dislocation. Jessica Caldwell, head of insights at Edmunds, said in prior company commentary on affordability that “consumers are stretching themselves financially” as higher prices and rates reshape buying behavior, and the latest figures suggest that pressure has not eased meaningfully.

That pressure sits squarely in a market where financing costs remain far above pre-pandemic norms. According to Cox Automotive, average auto loan rates have stayed elevated even as some vehicle prices cooled from their peak, and chief economist Jonathan Smoke said in recent market commentary that affordability “remains a major challenge for many households.” Reporting from Reuters and CNBC over the past year has similarly highlighted how buyers increasingly rely on longer repayment periods to keep monthly payments manageable, even if that leaves them carrying debt longer and more vulnerable to depreciation.

The mechanics of negative equity are straightforward but punishing. When a borrower trades in a vehicle worth less than the remaining loan balance, the difference gets added to the next loan, increasing the amount financed and often extending the payoff timeline. Consumer Financial Protection Bureau officials have said in public guidance that rolling debt from one vehicle into another can “increase the risk of becoming upside down again,” and the agency has warned that longer-term loans can leave borrowers exposed if they need to sell or replace a vehicle before the balance catches up with the car’s value.

Automakers and dealers have benefited from resilient demand, but the financing backdrop has become harder to ignore. J.D. Power said in its U.S. auto retail forecasts that monthly payments and interest costs remain key constraints on sales, and analyst Thomas King has said consumers “continue to face affordability headwinds” despite improved inventory. That matters for manufacturers because negative equity can delay replacement cycles, push buyers into lower-priced models, or force them out of the new-vehicle market altogether.

The broader credit picture suggests lenders also face a more fragile consumer. The Federal Reserve Bank of New York said in its Household Debt and Credit reports that auto loan delinquencies have risen, particularly among lower-credit borrowers, and researchers there noted that stress in auto credit has become more visible as pandemic-era savings buffers faded. In separate reporting, Bloomberg and Reuters have pointed to rising repossessions and late payments as signs that some households are struggling to absorb higher borrowing costs across cars, credit cards and housing.

Used-car values, while still historically elevated in some segments, no longer provide the cushion they did during the supply crunch. Manheim, the wholesale vehicle marketplace operated by Cox Automotive, said in its pricing updates that used-vehicle values have normalized from extraordinary pandemic highs, and that shift has made it harder for borrowers to trade out of loans cleanly. Jeremy Robb, senior director of economic and industry insights at Manheim, said in market commentary that depreciation patterns have become more typical again, a development that helps buyers entering the market now but hurts those who financed expensive vehicles at the peak.

For dealers, the trend creates a more complicated sales conversation. National Automobile Dealers Association chief economist Patrick Manzi has said in industry remarks that affordability remains one of the sector’s central issues, especially when high rates collide with still-elevated prices. Buyers carrying thousands of dollars in rolled-over debt often need incentives, longer terms or larger down payments to make a deal work, and each option can compress margins or increase credit risk somewhere in the chain.

What comes next depends largely on rates, used-car pricing and whether automakers keep leaning on incentives to support volume. Edmunds said the first-quarter record reflects a market still digesting the aftereffects of the pandemic pricing boom, while economists at Cox Automotive and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York have indicated that consumer strain in auto finance bears close watching. If borrowing costs stay high and depreciation continues to normalize, more households could find themselves trapped in a cycle of rolling old debt into new cars, a dynamic that matters not just for auto sales but for lenders, manufacturers and the health of U.S. consumer credit more broadly.

JBizNews Desk

Seattle could lose hundreds of millions of dollars in tax revenue as Starbucks expands operations in Tennessee, a local outlet estimates.  

Fox 13 Seattle reported Tuesday that the Emerald City “could lose up to $750 million in tax revenue in the coming years as Starbucks expands in Tennessee instead of Washington.”

In a press release Tuesday, Starbucks announced it will invest $100 million and bring 2,000 new jobs to Nashville. 

WASHINGTON BUSINESS OWNERS FEAR SOCIALIST ‘MILLIONAIRES TAX’ IS DRIVING BUSINESSES OUT — AND THEY’RE NEXT

“Starbucks has major plans for its newest business location, where it will employ up to 2,000 people over the next several years to serve in a variety of corporate-related operations,” the announcement said.

“The Nashville office will directly support continued coffeehouse expansion and rising customer demand, particularly in the southeastern U.S., while working closely with the company’s global headquarters in Seattle.” 

Tennessee Gov. Bill Lee welcomed the announcement Tuesday, writing in a post on X, “​​Great to welcome @Starbucks’ continued investment in TN as it establishes its new Southeastern hub in Music City. 

“This iconic global company’s $100 million investment — a testament to our strong economy & unmatched workforce — will create 2,000 new jobs for Tennesseans.” 

Fox 13 Seattle called Lee’s attitude “sharply different from Seattle Mayor Katie Wilson when she encouraged a crowd to boycott the company shortly after she was elected mayor,” noting that Wilson’s remarks were given to a crowd during a Starbucks union workers rally in November.

“I am not buying Starbucks, and you should not too,” Wilson said.

AS SOCIALIST MAYOR BATTLES ICE, SEATTLE POLICE AND CRIME VICTIMS SAY REPEAT OFFENDERS ARE TERRORIZING THE CITY

In a statement to Fox 13 Seattle, Wilson said, “Starbucks is a core part of Seattle’s identity. We’re proud to be home to its first store, its headquarters and so many of the workers who make the company what it is. We’re focused on maintaining a strong partnership with leadership and with employees, so Starbucks continues to succeed in the city where it all began.”

The Tax Foundation ranked Washington state sixth overall in the nation for doing business in its 2014 State Business Tax Climate Index. 

In 2026, the Tax Foundation ranked the state as 45th overall

In March, Washington state Democrats passed the “millionaires tax,” which Democratic Gov. Bob Ferguson signed March 30. 

WILL SOCIALISM SAVE SEATTLE? CITY ADVOCATES STRUGGLE TO FIND SOLUTIONS AS HOMELESS, DRUG ADDICTS FLOOD STREETS

The “millionaires tax” is the state’s first-ever income tax, supported by progressives and socialists and opposed by conservatives. The Wall Street Journal editorial board called it a “con” after its passage that will “inevitably capture the middle class.”

It will impose a 9.9% income tax on households earning more than $1 million each year. The tax applies to any money earned after the first $1 million of someone’s annual income. It will take effect Jan. 1, 2028, with the first payments due in April 2029, KOMO News reported

Fox News Digital reached out to Starbucks and Wilson for comment but did not immediately receive responses. 

This post was originally published here

“The blockade scares them even more than the bombing — they’ve been bombed for years, but the blockade they hate.” That’s President Trump talking to Fox News’ Martha MacCallum in a very telling statement. And it may well be that the factionalized Iranians simply cannot come up with any kind of unified agreement to present American negotiators.

It also may well be that there’s no such thing as an agreement, other than unconditional surrender. All nuclear activity stops. Enriched uranium must be transferred from Iran to America. All proxy and other forms of terrorism must be stopped. The Strait of Hormuz must be completely open. And frankly whatever other American demands are placed on a badly defeated Iran.

In a sense, there is a ceasefire now, but American military combat operations, which are even stronger today than at the beginning of the war, may be resumed at any moment. And perhaps most importantly, the United States Navy’s blockade of Iranian ports continues. That’s the state of play and the state of war right now. No oil, no money. That’s Iran’s dilemma.

America presumably will control the entire Persian Gulf theatre, including the Strait of Hormuz. It’s probably costing Iran something near $450 million a day, annualizing to nearly $160 billion a year, for a budget that’s estimated at only $100 billion annually. Put simply, there’s no money to meet payroll or retirement.

All the thugs, and barbarians, and Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps and the rest of the government, and all the businesses that they have stolen and looted, and all kinds of fanatics who are just not going to get paid.

If we actually took out Kharg Island, that would knock out an additional 1.5 million barrels a day, worth about $140 million at current prices, covering 190,000 personnel, according to a NY Post op-ed by a retired United States Navy captain, Lance B. Gordon. And there may be roughly 200 million barrels a day of Iranian oil floating on the high seas mostly near Communist China, that could be worth about $20 billion. Yet the economic crunch from the blockade is the biggest and most powerful financial weapon; we’ve never tried this before, and it just might work. I’d love to see the United States Treasury seize all the bank accounts of the criminals running Iran, but that’s a separate story.

The point is for the moment, Mr. Trump is content to let the blockade inflict its punishment on Iran for the foreseeable future, perhaps as long as it takes to just bring them to their unconditional knees.

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump said he will be paying attention to whether major companies seek refunds tied to tariffs that the U.S. Supreme Court ruled unlawful, injecting a new political calculation into a decision that could affect some of the country’s largest importers. In an interview with CNBC on April 21, Trump said, “It’s brilliant if they don’t do that,” adding, “If they don’t do that, I will remember them,” in remarks that immediately raised questions about how corporate America will balance fiduciary duties against White House pressure, as reported by CNBC.

The legal backdrop traces to the long-running fight over Trump-era tariffs imposed under emergency and trade authorities, with importers arguing the government collected duties it had no lawful basis to impose. In prior coverage of tariff litigation, Reuters reported that companies challenging the measures sought to recover billions of dollars in duties, and court records in trade cases before the U.S. Court of International Trade and subsequent appeals have shown how high the stakes remain for retailers, manufacturers and technology groups with global supply chains. While the latest Supreme Court ruling framed the immediate refund question, the broader issue for business centers on whether companies now act on a legal right that could invite political scrutiny.

Neither Amazon nor Apple has publicly said whether it plans to pursue refunds, leaving investors and trade lawyers to parse the significance of Trump’s comments. Amazon declined to comment, and Apple did not immediately respond to requests from multiple media outlets, according to reports carried by CNBC and other U.S. news organizations. That silence matters because both companies sit at the center of U.S.-China trade flows, and any move to reclaim tariff payments could become a test of how large multinationals manage relations with a president who has repeatedly used tariffs as both economic policy and political leverage.

Trade lawyers have long said refund claims in customs disputes are not optional in the ordinary course of business but part of a company’s duty to protect shareholder interests when a court invalidates a levy. In public commentary on tariff litigation, attorneys cited by Reuters and Bloomberg have said importers typically face strict deadlines and procedural requirements to preserve claims, meaning hesitation can carry a real financial cost. That practical reality could put in-house legal teams and boards in a difficult position if they conclude that seeking reimbursement makes economic sense even as the White House signals displeasure.

The episode also underscores how tariff policy continues to blur the line between trade enforcement and corporate diplomacy. Trump has repeatedly defended tariffs as a tool to rebuild domestic industry and pressure trading partners, telling CNBC in the same interview that tariffs remain central to his economic approach. Economists at institutions including the Peterson Institute for International Economics and the Tax Foundation have said in prior analyses that tariffs often function as a tax on importers and consumers, even when policymakers present them as a cost borne by foreign producers. Those findings help explain why refund claims could matter not just to company earnings but also to pricing, margins and supply-chain decisions across sectors from electronics to consumer goods.

For Apple, the politics carry particular weight because the company’s manufacturing footprint in China and broader Asia has made it a frequent target in Washington’s trade debates. Apple Chief Executive Tim Cook has previously said on earnings calls that the company evaluates tariff impacts carefully and works to manage supply-chain exposure, according to transcripts carried by financial data providers and reported by outlets including Reuters. For Amazon, whose marketplace and retail operations touch a vast range of imported products, any tariff reimbursement could ripple through cost structures that affect third-party sellers as well as the company’s own retail economics, analysts cited by CNBC and MarketWatch have noted in past trade coverage.

The market significance extends beyond two companies. Public filings and customs litigation over the past several years show that a wide range of importers, from industrial manufacturers to apparel groups, challenged tariff collections and preserved their rights to refunds. In prior reporting on customs disputes, Bloomberg said successful claims could unlock substantial repayments for companies that kept protests and cases alive through the courts. If some businesses now decide not to pursue those claims, investors may ask whether management put politics ahead of recoverable cash, especially at a time when many companies continue to cite trade uncertainty, input costs and consumer sensitivity in quarterly guidance.

What happens next will depend on the fine print of the court ruling, refund procedures at U.S. Customs and Border Protection, and whether companies judge the legal and financial upside to outweigh the political risk. Customs and Border Protection has said in prior guidance that importers seeking duty corrections or refunds must follow established protest and liquidation processes, and trade attorneys say those windows can be narrow. With Trump making clear on CNBC that he is watching, the next moves by Amazon, Apple and other major importers could become an early measure of how corporate America plans to navigate a second Trump-era tariff regime in which legal rights, boardroom obligations and presidential pressure increasingly collide.

JBizNews Desk

Lululemon Athletica Inc. named Heidi O’Neill its new chief executive officer on Wednesday as the athletic retailer looks to move beyond a turbulent period of slowing growth and investor unrest.

O’Neill, who was most recently Nike Inc.’s president of consumer, product and brand, will take over as permanent CEO on September 8, the company said in a statement. Calvin McDonald, who had led Lululemon since 2018, left his post in January and went on to lead a beauty business.

Lululemon shares dropped as much as 7% in postmarket trading. The shares had fallen more than 21% so far this year as of Wednesday’s close. 

O’Neill arrives with a series of fires to put out. Recent product mishaps, including selling leggings that were see-through, and a disappointing sales outlook, have left investors concerned that the company can pull itself out of a rut. Sales growth has slowed since losing share to trendier competitors.

Elliott Investment Management has built a stake of more than $1 billion in the company. Jane Nielsen, a former Ralph Lauren Corp. executive, was Elliott’s preferred candidate for Lululemon’s top job. 

Lululemon’s founder, Chip Wilson, who no longer has a formal role with the company but is one of its biggest shareholders, has also publicly criticized the company and pushed for changes on its board.

While at Nike, O’Neill was considered to be an internal prospect to replace former Chief Executive Officer John Donahoe, Bloomberg Businessweek previously reported.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A chemical leak at a West Virginia silver recovery business on Wednesday killed two people and sent 19 others to the hospital, including one in critical condition, authorities said.

The leak occurred at the Catalyst Refiners plant in Institute as workers were preparing to shut down at least part of the facility, Kanawha County Commission Emergency Management Director C.W. Sigman said.

A chemical gas reaction occurred at the plant involving nitric acid and another substance, Sigman said, speaking at a news briefing. He added that there was “a violent reaction of the chemicals and it instantaneously overreacted.”

“Starting or ending a chemical reaction are the most dangerous times,” Sigman said.

Among the injured were seven ambulance workers responding to the leak, officials said.

Other people were taken to the hospitals in private cars or even in one case a garbage truck, Sigman said.

One person was in critical condition, Kanawha County Commission President Ben Salango said.

Vandalia Health Charleston Area Medical Center, one of several hospitals in the area, was treating multiple patients, some brought by ambulance, while members of the community were arriving Wednesday afternoon asking to be checked, hospital spokesman Dale Witte said.

Witte said patients were experiencing respiratory symptoms including cough, shortness of breath, sore throat and itchy eyes. They were being evaluated in the emergency room.

WVU Medicine Thomas Memorial Hospital in South Charleston said in a statement it has cared for a dozen patients, including eight who arrived by personal vehicle and were not at the scene but were in the area at the time. It said none of the injuries were considered life-threatening.

A shelter-in-place order was issued for the surrounding area and lifted more than five hours later. Officials said all the deaths and injuries occurred on the plant site.

“You had to get really close to the facility to smell it,” Sigman said.

The leak required a large-scale decontamination operation in which people had to remove their clothes and be sprayed down, authorities said.

Catalyst Refiners works to remove silver from what remains of chemical processes and can find thousands of dollars of the precious metal just by vacuuming the floors in a plant’s offices, Sigmon said.

Ames Goldsmith Corp., the owner of Catalyst Refiners, said it is saddened by the deaths and its thoughts were with all those impacted and their families.

“This is an unfathomably difficult time,” company President Frank Barber said in a statement released at the news briefing. “Our thoughts and prayers are with our colleagues and their families.”

Ames Goldsmith promised to work with local, state and federal officials as they investigate what happened.

The plant is located near Institute, a community about 10 miles (16 kilometers) west of Charleston, the state capital. The plant is in an region known as West Virginia’s “chemical valley,” although many plants that lined the area along the Kanawha River and produced hazardous materials have closed or changed ownership in the past several decades.

___

Jeffrey Collins contributed to this report from Columbia, South Carolina.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The one man blocking Donald Trump from installing Kevin Warsh as his new Federal Reserve chair has drawn a red line: the stability of the US financial markets. 

Republican Thom Tillis, who will retire in January after two Senate terms, provided key backing for some of Trump’s most controversial nominees, including Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth and Director of National Intelligence Tulsi Gabbard. 

But the 65-year-old former management consultant, who has close ties to his home-state banking industry in North Carolina, sees his standoff with the White House over Warsh’s nomination as a stand for Fed independence and, by extension, the health of markets. This time, he says he’s not budging, even though he believes Warsh would do a good job. 

When Tillis learned in January about the Justice Department’s criminal investigation into Fed Chair Jerome Powell, he recalled this week he immediately considered it an attack on the independence of the central bank and worried it would tank markets. He considered the probe retribution for Powell’s refusal to lower interest rates at the speed Trump demanded. 

“I wanted to shut it down before the markets opened,” Tillis said, adding that his background in business compelled him to act. 

The signal the probe sent, Tillis said, was that the Fed in general — and its chair specifically — would be subject to the whims of any president, whether that be Trump or a future Democrat like Senator Elizabeth Warren or New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani. 

“Honestly, I talk to a lot of people in the industry, almost daily, and I haven’t heard anybody saying I got it wrong. I think a lot of them are appreciative that someone was standing in the breach,” Tillis said.

Tillis said some of his Republican colleagues back his effort but he warned them against joining his blockade. His vote in the Banking Committee is enough to stall the nomination, at least until he retires, if Trump doesn’t end the probe. 

“One thing all martyrs have in common, they’re dead,” Tillis said. 

This isn’t Tillis’ first battle with Trump. Last year, he voted against the president’s massive tax bill amid cuts to his state’s health care programs. But his wasn’t the deciding vote, and Trump’s bill was ultimately signed into law. 

This time, however, Tillis singularly holds the power and Republican senators have been all but begging Trump to end the probe.

“The sooner the administration can wrap up this investigation and get ready to move forward with the new Fed chairman, the better off everybody will be,” Senate Majority Leader John Thune told reporters Tuesday.

Senator John Kennedy of Louisiana, a fellow member of the Banking Committee, called Tillis “serious as an aneurysm.”  

“If you’re asking me if I think Tillis is bluffing, the short answer is ‘no,’ the longer answer is ‘hell no,’” he added. 

Tillis no longer has much to lose should Trump target him for political vengeance. He announced last June he would not seek re-election.

Indeed, Tillis has even threatened to launch a similar blockade on the Judiciary Committee, where he could hold up the confirmation of Trump’s pick to succeed departed Attorney General Pam Bondi.

Tillis has maintained a cheerful attitude despite being under fire from Trump, even when the president said in a Fox Business interview last week that Tillis is “no longer a senator.” 

“I’m not dead yet,” a smiling Tillis quipped in a mock British accent, citing the famous Monty Python scene of a not-yet-dead man piled onto a cart of bodies. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

U.S. land prices have climbed sharply since before the pandemic, underscoring how a persistent shortage of buildable lots now extends beyond homes and into the raw material of residential development itself. In a report released April 21, Realtor.com said median listing prices for land reached $62,365 per acre in the first quarter, up 76.6% from the first quarter of 2019, while active land listings fell 23.6% over the same stretch; Joel Berner, senior economist at Realtor.com, said in the report that “the pandemic didn’t only drain home inventory, it drained land inventory, and that loss is permanent.”

The numbers matter because lot scarcity feeds directly into homebuilding costs at a time when the broader housing market already faces affordability strain. National Association of Home Builders Chairman Carl Harris said in a recent industry statement that builders continue to face “elevated financing and development costs,” and the group has repeatedly argued that lot shortages remain a central constraint on new supply, according to NAHB releases and survey data. That dynamic helps explain why rising land values now carry significance well beyond rural acreage investors: they shape where homes get built, what they cost and whether entry-level construction pencils out.

The pressure on developable land also fits with a longer-running imbalance in U.S. housing supply. Freddie Mac said in its housing research that the country continues to face a substantial housing shortfall, with the mortgage-finance company describing supply as “insufficient” relative to household formation and demographic demand. While Freddie Mac has updated its estimates over time, its economists have consistently said the deficit leaves the market vulnerable to price spikes whenever construction slows or financing tightens, a backdrop that gives added weight to Realtor.com’s finding that fewer parcels now come to market even as prices rise.

Land values have historically moved with home prices, but the current cycle reflects a more structural squeeze because once lots enter the development pipeline, they rarely return to inventory. Joel Berner said in Realtor.com’s analysis that “when a builder develops a parcel, that land never returns to the market,” framing the decline in listings as more than a temporary pandemic distortion. That view aligns with comments from Federal Reserve officials and regional bank researchers who have said housing supply remains unusually inelastic; in a speech published by the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas, President Lorie Logan said housing services inflation can stay elevated when supply adjusts slowly, a point with implications for both builders and policymakers.

For developers, the lot market has become another layer of risk in an already difficult financing environment. NAHB Chief Economist Robert Dietz said in recent association commentary that higher interest rates and tighter credit conditions have made it harder to move projects forward, particularly for smaller builders that depend on acquisition and development loans. Public builders have echoed that concern in earnings materials and conference calls, with companies including D.R. Horton and Lennar repeatedly telling investors that lot pipelines and land discipline remain central to margins and community growth, according to their latest filings and transcripts.

The regional picture also helps explain why national averages can mask sharper local stress. U.S. Census Bureau and Department of Housing and Urban Development data show that single-family permitting and starts remain concentrated in fast-growing Sun Belt markets, where population growth and business relocation have intensified competition for developable land. Economists at Realtor.com said in the report that the inventory drawdown reflects years of absorption rather than a short-lived supply shock, and that framing dovetails with migration data from the Census Bureau, which continue to show strong growth in states where entitlement, infrastructure and labor constraints already limit how quickly new lots can come online.

The affordability implications extend to consumers even if they never buy land directly. Lawrence Yun, chief economist at the National Association of Realtors, has said in public remarks that “housing affordability remains a major challenge” because supply has not kept pace with demand, and rising input costs continue to filter into final home prices. Higher lot costs can push builders toward larger homes or higher-end communities where margins better absorb land and financing expenses, leaving first-time buyers with fewer options, a pattern that housing analysts at Moody’s Analytics and Zillow have also highlighted in market commentary.

Investors and policymakers now have a fresh signal that the housing bottleneck starts earlier in the chain than many headline home-price measures capture. Realtor.com’s first dedicated land listing analysis put active listings at 426,986 in the first quarter, and Joel Berner said the market reflects a lasting scarcity rather than a cyclical dip. What comes next will depend on whether lower borrowing costs, zoning changes and infrastructure investment can unlock more buildable supply; until then, the land market looks set to remain a quiet but powerful driver of home prices, construction strategy and housing affordability across the U.S.

JBizNews Desk

When Corie Barry was named CEO of Best Buy seven years ago this month, hopes were high that the electronics retailer would build on a period of successful reinvention. After all, she was a key architect of that reinvention, as chief strategic transformation officer under her predecessor Hubert Joly.

But it was not to be: Best Buy revenue is lower now than when she started as CEO, and the company is struggling to find its way.

Barry, who has consistently been ranked among the Most Powerful Women in business by Fortune in recent years, announced today that she is stepping down as CEO in the autumn right before the key holiday season. She is being replaced by Jason Bonfig, a longtime Best Buy executive who is currently the company’s chief customer, product, and fulfillment officer.

Barry has plenty to boast about from her tenure at Best Buy: She served as Joly’s right-hand person in pulling off one of the most dramatic reinventions of a major retailer ever, making Best Buy stores and web site appealing enough for loyal shoppers to choose them over Amazon and avoid the fates of now-defunct rivals such as Circuit City.

In 2019, during her first analyst day as CEO, Barry said Best Buy was eyeing a $50 billion in revenue milestone by 2025 and betting that its nascent healthcare business would be a key engine of growth to get there. But last year, revenue came in at $41.7 billion and Best Buy wrote down some of its investment in Best Buy Health as that line of business has failed to live up to its promise. In the time she has been CEO, Best Buy shares have risen 6%, well below the 157% gain for the S&P 500.

To be fair, Best Buy did at one point pass the $50 billion mark she was aiming for, but largely because of the COVID pandemic when the retailer’s sales soared as more people starting working and schooling at home, buying up laptops and home-entertainment systems. Sales in the year ended in early 2021 rose 21% to $51.8 billion.

Barry won praise for managing the chaos of the pandemic, from the surge in sales and its impact on Best Buy’s supply chain and inventory levels, to setting up curbside pickup for online sales, to addressing the turmoil it inflicted on employees as many stores were closed or partly closed for extended periods. Barry “skillfully guided the company through many external challenges,” the company’s board said in a press release Wednesday. Among her other big successes as CEO was the launching of a retail media network called Best Buy Ads, as well as an online marketplace.

Unfortunately, electronics sales came back down to earth post-pandemic. Barry has been praised for managing costs (there have been several rounds of layoffs and and employee reorganizations in stores) and protecting Best Buy’s margins, but analysts have taken issue with the absence of strategies that could really rev up sales again, with the COVID bump now six years in the past.

Best Buy stores are “largely uninspiring spaces” that invite only “casual browsing,” Neil Saunders, managing director of GlobalData, wrote in a research note to clients. “Rather than rethinking how it approaches the market, Best Buy has dabbled in adding non-electronics categories like furniture to the store,” he added.

Now, the challenge of rethinking Best Buy falls to veteran Bonfig. He started there as an inventory analyst in 1999, and now is in charge of several essential areas including merchandising, e-commerce, marketing, and supply chain, as well as Best Buy Canada and the company’s retail media network.

As for Barry, she leaves with a reputation as a competent steward and manager, but not a transformational leader able to reinvent a venerable retail brand for a challenging era in consumer sales.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Renting now costs less than buying a starter home in all 50 of the largest U.S. metropolitan areas, a striking sign that elevated mortgage rates and still-high home prices continue to shut out many first-time buyers. In a report released April 16, Realtor.com said “a person moving into the typical rental spends less each month than someone buying a starter home today,” with chief economist Danielle Hale adding in the company’s statement that “renters who are intentional about saving have a real opportunity to build toward a down payment faster than they might think.”

The affordability gap reflects a housing market that remains badly skewed against entry-level ownership even after some moderation in home-price growth. According to Realtor.com, renters save an average of $920 a month compared with the monthly cost of purchasing a starter home, a figure Danielle Hale said could materially accelerate down-payment savings. Separate reporting from Reuters and Associated Press has consistently tied weak affordability to mortgage rates that remain far above pandemic-era lows, with Freddie Mac saying in its weekly survey that borrowing costs near 30-year highs in recent years have “continued to impact buyer demand.”

That pressure shows up most clearly in the monthly payment math. Data published by Mortgage Bankers Association and cited in its regular housing updates indicate financing costs remain the biggest obstacle for would-be buyers, with chief economist Mike Fratantoni saying in prior market commentary that “purchase application activity continues to be constrained by affordability challenges.” While home listings have improved in some markets, National Association of Realtors chief economist Lawrence Yun has repeatedly said in public remarks that “housing affordability remains a major challenge,” especially for younger households trying to enter the market.

The gap between renting and buying also underscores how the economics of housing have shifted since the run-up in prices during the pandemic. In recent releases, S&P Dow Jones Indices managing director Brian D. Luke said home prices have remained “well above” pre-pandemic levels even as annual gains cooled, a dynamic that keeps ownership costs elevated despite modest market normalization. Reporting from CNBC and Bloomberg on recent housing data similarly noted that buyers face a combination of high prices, limited affordable inventory and financing costs that leave renting the cheaper near-term option in much of the country.

For households determined to buy, the report points to a practical, if frustrating, conclusion: renting may now function as the financial bridge to ownership rather than a detour from it. Danielle Hale said in Realtor.com’s release that the monthly savings from renting “can be earmarked for a down payment when they are ready to purchase,” particularly in markets where the spread between rental and ownership costs is widest. Economists at Zillow have made a similar point in market commentary, with senior economist Orphe Divounguy saying in prior analyses that affordability constraints increasingly force buyers to spend more time saving before entering the market.

The broader economic backdrop offers only limited relief. Officials at the Federal Reserve have said policy decisions remain driven by inflation and labor-market conditions, not housing alone, leaving mortgage rates vulnerable to shifts in bond yields even if the central bank eventually eases. Jerome Powell, chair of the Federal Reserve, has said in public remarks that the housing sector has faced “longer-term shortages” and that rate-sensitive parts of the economy continue to feel the effects of tighter monetary policy. Reporting from Reuters on Fed deliberations has emphasized that any decline in mortgage rates could prove gradual rather than dramatic, limiting the chance of a sudden affordability reset.

That matters not only for consumers but also for builders, landlords and lenders trying to gauge demand. National Association of Home Builders chairman Carl Harris said in one recent industry statement that builders continue to face “elevated financing and construction costs,” even as they try to add more entry-level supply. At the same time, apartment operators benefit when would-be buyers remain renters for longer, a trend RealPage and other housing-data firms have said supports leasing demand in many markets, even if rent growth itself has cooled from earlier peaks.

The report does not suggest Americans have given up on ownership; rather, it highlights how long the path to a first purchase has become. Surveys from Fannie Mae have shown consumers still view homeownership positively over the long term, even as many say it is a bad time to buy. In its monthly sentiment releases, Fannie Mae has repeatedly said affordability remains the dominant concern, with many respondents citing high home prices and mortgage rates as the main barriers.

What comes next hinges on three variables: mortgage rates, starter-home supply and wage growth. If rates ease meaningfully or more lower-priced inventory reaches the market, the rent-versus-buy gap could narrow. Until then, Realtor.com’s finding that renting costs less in every major metro offers a blunt message for executives, lenders and policymakers alike: the U.S. housing market still lacks a workable on-ramp for first-time buyers, and that imbalance will keep shaping consumer spending, household formation and residential investment through the rest of the year.

JBizNews Desk

An appeals court has blocked a California law passed in 2025 requiring federal immigration agents to wear a badge or some form of identification.

The Trump administration filed a lawsuit in November challenging the law, arguing that it would threaten the safety of officers who are facing harassment, doxing, and violence and that they violated the constitution because the state is directly regulating the federal government.

A three-judge panel of the 9th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals issued an injunction pending appeal Wednesday. It had already granted a temporary administrative injunction to block the implementation of the law.

At a hearing March 3, Justice Department lawyers argued that the California law sought to regulate the federal government, violating the Supremacy Clause of the Constitution.

The appeals court agreed, saying the law “attempts to directly regulate the United States in its performance of governmental functions,” in an opinion written by Judge Mark J. Bennett.

California lawyers argued that the law applied equally to all law enforcement officers without discriminating against the U.S. government, and that states could apply “generally applicable” laws to federal agents. They also argued that the law was important to address public safety concerns.

The initial lawsuit also addressed another California measure signed into law last year that would have banned most law enforcement officers from wearing masks, neck gaiters, and other facial coverings. It was blocked by a federal judge in February.

The legislation did not apply to state law enforcement and made exceptions for undercover agents, protective equipment like N95 respirators or tactical gear, and other situations where not wearing a mask would jeopardize the operation.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent pushed back Wednesday after Sen. Chris Coons, D-Del., suggested temporary sanctions relief for Iran has granted the country $14 billion during the war.

During a fiery exchange at Wednesday’s Senate Appropriations Committee subcommittee hearing on the 2027 fiscal budget, Coons levied the charge at Bessent, noting that “estimates are” that Iran has gained $14 billion since the U.S. granted the Islamic Republic temporary oil waivers in March.

Citing President Donald Trump’s previous criticisms of former President Barack Obama for giving $1.7 billion to Iran, Coons said, “I don’t know how you described 14 billion, but you don’t have to read ‘The Art of War’ to know that helping your adversaries gain money while you’re at war is a terrible idea, and it’s shocking to me that the country’s currently profiting from the release of sanctions.”

Bessent disputed the characterization as a “myth” and “a DNC talking point.”

IRAN CEASEFIRE DEADLINE LOOMS: RAND PAUL WEIGHS IN ON PEACE TALK CHAOS

“If anyone would like to show me where that 14 billion comes from,” Bessent added.

“I look forward to an exchange of details on that. Mr. Secretary,” Coons shot back.

“Can exchange it in a very public forum,” Bessent continued.

Coons then asked Bessent point-blank, “Do you disagree that Iran has received significant additional revenue from their sales of oil because of sanctions relief?”

“Couldn’t disagree more,” Bessent replied.

“OK. But do you disagree that Russia has received significant additional revenue from the sanctions relief?” Coons asked.

Again, Bessent responded, “I couldn’t disagree more.”

Bessent proceeded to explain why the Treasury Department elected to provide temporary sanctions relief to Iran and Russia.

“Just as you are concerned about gasoline prices for the American consumer and for our Asian allies, as are we,” Bessent said.

FBI OFFERS URGENT GUIDANCE ON SECURING HOME ROUTERS AFTER DISRUPTING RUSSIAN INTELLIGENCE HACKING NETWORK

“Treasury was able to create more than 250 million barrels on the water. And the way to think about this is as they came in today, the oil prices are at $100. If we had not done that sanctions relief, they might have been at $150 because the world became very well supplied.

“So, if Russia was selling their oil at a 20% discount, I can tell you that 100% of 100 is less than 80% of 150. And the American consumer has been better off.”

Treasury issued the relief to Iran through temporary 30-day oil waivers in March, then extended them another 30 days on Wednesday.

Bessent, again pushed by Coons, added that many U.S. allies in the Gulf and in Asia have requested foreign exchange swap lines.

“Swap lines, whether it’s from the Federal Reserve or the Treasury, are to maintain order and the dollar funding markets and to prevent the sale of U.S. assets in a disorderly way. So, the swap line would both benefit the UAE [United Arab Emirates] and the U.S. And, as I said, numerous other countries, including some of our Asian allies, have also requested them,” he said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Fox News Digital contacted the Treasury Department and Coons’ office for further comment but did not immediately receive a response.

This post was originally published here


The agency’s three-pillar reform agenda targets disclosure burdens, litigation risks, and shareholder activism, aiming to reverse a decades-long decline in public listings

WASHINGTONPaul S. Atkins, Chairman of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, is moving swiftly to revive America’s initial public offering market, making it the central priority of his tenure as he advances a sweeping regulatory overhaul aimed at lowering barriers to going public.

A Market in Long-Term Decline

Speaking at the U.S. Chamber of Commerce in February, Atkins laid out the magnitude of the challenge. In the mid-1990s, shortly after his earlier tenure at the SEC, more than 7,800 companies were listed on U.S. exchanges. Today, that number has fallen by roughly 40% — a shift he attributes to decades of accumulating regulation that have made public listings more costly, complex, and less appealing, particularly for emerging growth companies.

“Such decline was not inevitable — nor is it now irreversible,” Atkins said, framing his broader push to restore the strength and competitiveness of U.S. capital markets.

A Three-Pillar Reform Strategy

At the center of Atkins’ agenda is a comprehensive three-pillar framework: reorienting corporate disclosures around financial materiality, reducing the growing influence of shareholder activism on corporate governance, and creating alternatives to what he describes as excessive and often frivolous litigation.

The proposed overhaul of disclosure rules could prove the most consequential. Christina Thomas, Deputy Director and Chief Advisor on Disclosure Policy at the SEC’s Division of Corporation Finance, signaled openness to sweeping changes at the agency’s annual conference, stating that “the door is very much open” to revisiting key frameworks such as Regulation S-K and Rule 14a-8 governing shareholder proposals. “Everything is on the table,” she said.

Among the changes under consideration are efforts to anchor disclosure requirements strictly to financial relevance, tailor reporting obligations based on company size and stage of growth, and streamline executive compensation disclosures, which critics argue have expanded significantly without delivering clearer insight to investors.

Litigation Reform Takes Center Stage

On the legal front, Atkins has identified what he calls “vexatious litigation” as a significant deterrent to companies entering public markets. He has pointed to high-profile firms such as SpaceX and OpenAI as examples of companies choosing to remain private amid regulatory and legal complexity.

To address this, the SEC is evaluating whether to clarify its position on mandatory arbitration provisions in corporate charters — a move that could give companies greater flexibility to resolve disputes outside traditional securities litigation.

Additional proposals include a “loser-pays” model for shareholder lawsuits and a potential “safe harbor” provision that would shield companies from liability tied to broadly known macroeconomic or global events.

Wall Street Signals Support

The initiative has drawn early backing from Wall Street. David Solomon, Chief Executive of Goldman Sachs Group Inc. (NYSE: GS), has engaged with Atkins on what both have described as the potential for a renewed IPO cycle in the coming years.

Solomon has framed the evolving regulatory landscape as an “unleashing of animal spirits,” pointing to the possibility that reduced friction could encourage more companies to tap public markets.

Central to that outlook is expanding the IPO “on-ramp” established under the JOBS Act, which allows newly public companies to operate under scaled disclosure requirements, as well as revisiting the definition of accredited investors to broaden access to private and alternative investments.

The ACT Framework

On April 20, Atkins formally introduced the SEC’s new “ACT” strategy — Advance, Clarify, Transform — marking a shift away from what he characterized as a prior “regulation-by-enforcement” approach toward a framework focused on clarity, collaboration, and modernization.

Atkins emphasized that the agency’s role should be to increase the cost of fraud and market manipulation — not the burden of compliance.

“Updating the rulebook does not mean deviating from the SEC’s core mission,” he said. “It means fulfilling it with tools that are equal to the task.”

Looking ahead, the success of Atkins’ overhaul will hinge on whether these reforms can materially reduce the friction of going public — and restore confidence in U.S. capital markets as the premier destination for high-growth companies.

JBizNews Desk

The U.S. economy nearly stalled at the end of 2025, with growth revised lower to an annualized 0.5% in the fourth quarter, a sign that demand lost momentum even before policymakers confront the next round of inflation and labor-market data. In its third and final estimate released Wednesday, the Bureau of Economic Analysis said “real gross domestic product increased at an annual rate of 0.5 percent in the fourth quarter of 2025,” down from the prior 0.7% estimate, with the agency stating that the revision “primarily reflected downward revisions to consumer spending and private inventory investment.”

The softer reading matters because household demand has carried much of the expansion, and the latest revision suggests that engine cooled more sharply than earlier estimates indicated. The BEA said “the increase in real GDP in the fourth quarter primarily reflected increases in consumer spending and investment,” while noting that those gains faced pressure from trade, as “imports, which are a subtraction in the calculation of GDP, increased.” Reporting on the release, Reuters said the downgrade pointed to a more fragile handoff into 2026 after growth slowed markedly from earlier in the year.

The details showed consumers still spending, but with less force than previously thought, a key concern for executives and investors tracking whether high borrowing costs and fading excess savings continue to restrain activity. In its release, the Bureau of Economic Analysis said personal consumption expenditures remained a positive contributor, while business investment also added to output. Economists cited by Bloomberg said the revision reinforced a picture of an economy losing altitude, particularly as inventory accumulation and trade no longer provided the same cushion seen in prior quarters.

Government activity also drew attention because a prolonged federal shutdown late in the quarter disrupted public services and weighed on measured output. While the BEA release breaks out federal government spending in the national accounts, private-sector economists told CNBC and other outlets that shutdown-related effects likely distorted the quarter’s headline figure by reducing government consumption and delaying some economic activity. Analysts at Oxford Economics, in comments reported by CNBC, said shutdowns can temporarily depress measured GDP even if some activity returns later, a reminder that quarterly growth figures can reflect both underlying demand and one-off policy disruptions.

The revised report also offered a fresh look at inflation embedded in the growth data, an issue central to the Federal Reserve and financial markets. The BEA said the price index for gross domestic purchases and the personal consumption expenditures price measures remained elevated enough to keep policymakers cautious, even as real activity softened. In public remarks this year, Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell has said the central bank needs “greater confidence” that inflation is moving sustainably toward 2%, according to statements published by the Federal Reserve, and a weaker growth print alone is unlikely to settle that debate.

For businesses, the composition of the report may matter as much as the headline. A slowdown led by softer consumer spending and weaker inventory investment can signal more cautious ordering patterns, tighter capital budgets and slower revenue growth across retail, manufacturing and transport. Economists at Wells Fargo, in a note cited by MarketWatch, said subdued final-quarter growth suggested companies entered 2026 with less momentum than expected, even if the economy avoided outright contraction. That reading aligns with the BEA statement that imports rose modestly, reducing net exports’ contribution to output.

Markets and corporate planners also pay close attention to revisions because they can reshape assumptions about earnings, rates and fiscal policy. The final estimate from the Bureau of Economic Analysis carries more complete source data than the earlier releases, and the agency said the latest changes stemmed mainly from updated information on consumer activity and inventories. Reuters noted that economists often treat final GDP revisions as important inputs for first-quarter tracking models, especially when the prior quarter ends on such a weak footing.

The broader question now is whether the fourth-quarter slowdown marked a temporary stumble or the start of a more prolonged cooling phase. Upcoming data on retail sales, payrolls, business investment and inflation will help answer that, while the Federal Reserve and corporate America gauge whether softer growth eases price pressures or simply squeezes margins. As the BEA made clear in its final estimate, the economy still expanded, but only barely, and that leaves investors, policymakers and executives watching the next run of data more closely than ever.

JBizNews Desk

JBizNews Desk | April 22, 2026

The United States is intensifying efforts to restructure global supply chains for critical minerals, with U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer urging allies to accept higher costs in exchange for long-term security as Washington moves to reduce dependence on China. The push comes as President Donald Trump has directed a whole-of-government approach to reduce strategic vulnerabilities tied to Beijing’s dominance in key industrial inputs.

In remarks published Wednesday, Greer said Western nations must be willing to pay what he described as a “national security premium” to secure reliable, non-Chinese sources of critical minerals—key inputs for defense systems, semiconductors, and electric vehicles. “There is a premium we pay… and we will all pay a national security premium to have a secure supply chain,” Greer said, underscoring what he framed as a necessary shift in global trade priorities.

He directly challenged the cost-focused mindset that has guided global trade for decades. “What you’re talking about, which is cost efficiency — this is why we are in the situation we’re in,” Greer added, arguing that prioritizing low-cost sourcing enabled China to dominate the processing and refinement of key materials. Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala, Director-General of the World Trade Organization, has similarly warned in recent forums that overconcentration in supply chains poses systemic risks to global trade stability.

China currently controls roughly 90% of global critical minerals processing capacity, a structural advantage that has become a focal point for policymakers in Washington. While Beijing has recently eased some export restrictions amid a temporary U.S.–China trade truce, officials remain concerned about long-term exposure. José W. Fernández, U.S. Under Secretary of State for Economic Growth, Energy, and the Environment, has repeatedly emphasized the urgency of diversifying supply chains to “ensure resilience in strategic sectors.”

Under direction from President Trump, Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick and Greer have been given a 180-day deadline to secure agreements with allied nations aimed at diversifying supply. According to Gina Raimondo, former U.S. Commerce Secretary and current senior economic advisor, building domestic and allied processing capacity will be “critical to long-term economic and national security.” Policy options under review include expanding refining capabilities, securing long-term offtake agreements, and implementing price floors to stabilize investment.

Should negotiations fall short, the White House has indicated it is prepared to act unilaterally, with potential tools including tariffs, quotas, and minimum import pricing mechanisms. Robert Lighthizer, former U.S. Trade Representative, has previously argued that such measures may be necessary to counter “non-market behavior” and level the playing field in strategic industries.

Despite the urgency, allied governments are approaching the strategy cautiously. Valdis Dombrovskis, European Commission Executive Vice President and Trade Commissioner, has signaled that while Europe supports diversification, it must also balance economic competitiveness and avoid triggering retaliatory trade actions from Beijing.

China’s Embassy in Washington pushed back on the U.S. position, with a spokesperson stating that Beijing remains committed to maintaining “stable and unimpeded” industrial and supply chains. Wang Wenbin, spokesperson for China’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs, has similarly warned that politicizing trade could undermine global economic recovery and disrupt established supply networks.

Economists say the challenge facing the U.S. is structural, not just diplomatic. Analysts at the Peterson Institute for International Economics, including Adam S. Posen, the institute’s president, have emphasized that while many countries possess raw mineral reserves, processing capacity remains the critical bottleneck, largely controlled by China.

The U.S. has already begun laying the groundwork for a broader coalition. Earlier this year, Washington signed 11 bilateral critical minerals frameworks with countries including Argentina, Morocco, Peru, the Philippines, the United Arab Emirates, and the United Kingdom, alongside engagement led by Amos Hochstein, Senior Advisor to the President for Energy and Investment, who has been active in coordinating international energy and resource diplomacy.

The outcome of the current push is expected to shape the future of global supply chains across industries ranging from clean energy to defense manufacturing. As Janet Yellen, U.S. Treasury Secretary, has noted in recent remarks on “friend-shoring,” aligning supply chains with trusted partners may come at a higher cost—but is increasingly viewed as essential for long-term economic security.

— JBizNews Desk

Property-tax bills on U.S. single-family homes kept rising in 2025 even as home values eased, underscoring a stubborn cost burden for homeowners and a growing revenue lever for local governments. In its April 9 report, ATTOM said owners of more than 89.6 million single-family homes paid a combined $396.8 billion in property taxes this year, and ATTOM Chief Executive Rob Barber said the latest figures show “property taxes continue to rise across the country,” a trend the company tied to higher effective tax rates and uneven housing-market conditions.

The average tax bill reached $4,427 per home, up 3% from 2024, while the total levy climbed 3.7%, according to ATTOM’s analysis of assessment-office data and estimated market values. ATTOM said the average estimated value of a single-family home slipped 1.7% year over year to $494,231, suggesting tax growth no longer simply tracks appreciation. That matters because, as the Tax Foundation has repeatedly noted in its research on state and local finance, property taxes remain “the largest source of tax revenue for local governments” in the U.S., making them central to school, police and municipal budgets even when housing markets cool.

The 2025 increase also ran ahead of recent consumer inflation trends, adding to a broader affordability squeeze for households already contending with elevated mortgage rates, insurance costs and maintenance expenses. In its latest consumer-price releases, the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics said inflation moderated from the peaks of the prior two years, yet shelter-related costs remained a major pressure point. Economists at Realtor.com have said in market commentary that ownership costs now extend well beyond mortgage payments, with taxes and insurance increasingly shaping buying decisions and mobility, especially for owners reluctant to give up low-rate mortgages.

The burden remains highly uneven across states and metro areas, a pattern long documented by housing researchers and tax-policy groups. In prior market analyses, ATTOM has said effective tax rates tend to run highest in parts of the Northeast and Midwest, where local governments rely more heavily on property levies, while lower-rate Sun Belt markets often offset that advantage with faster home-price growth and rising insurance premiums. The Tax Foundation similarly has said property-tax systems vary widely because assessment practices, exemptions and local budget needs differ sharply by jurisdiction, meaning homeowners can face very different outcomes even when home values look similar on paper.

For local governments, the steady rise in tax collections offers fiscal support at a time when many municipalities face labor and infrastructure costs that remain elevated. The Government Finance Officers Association has said in public guidance that property taxes are generally among the most stable local revenue sources, particularly compared with sales or income taxes that fluctuate more directly with the economy. That stability helps explain why tax bills can keep climbing even in softer housing markets: assessments often lag market prices, and local authorities frequently adjust rates to meet spending needs, a dynamic municipal-finance analysts at Moody’s Ratings and S&P Global Ratings have highlighted in commentary on local-government credit quality.

For homeowners, however, the practical effect is straightforward: a cooler market does not necessarily translate into lower carrying costs. CoreLogic has said in housing-affordability research that non-mortgage expenses, including taxes and insurance, increasingly determine whether households can sustain ownership, particularly first-time buyers and retirees on fixed incomes. Analysts at Zillow have made a similar point in market updates, saying buyers now scrutinize total monthly costs more closely than headline listing prices, especially in regions where taxes have risen faster than wages.

The latest figures also arrive as policymakers debate how to balance local funding needs with voter frustration over housing costs. The National Association of Realtors has argued in policy statements that rising transaction and ownership costs reduce market fluidity, while state lawmakers in several jurisdictions have pursued caps, circuit breakers or homestead exemptions to soften tax increases for primary residences. Those measures can help some households, but public-finance experts frequently caution that relief programs shift pressure elsewhere unless governments cut spending or broaden other revenue sources, a point emphasized in research from the Urban Institute and the Lincoln Institute of Land Policy.

What comes next will depend less on headline home prices than on local assessment cycles, budget decisions and the direction of the broader economy. ATTOM said its 2025 analysis combined tax data from assessment offices with estimated market values, meaning future reports will offer an early read on whether local tax burdens keep rising even if housing demand weakens further. For executives, lenders, builders and consumers, that trajectory matters because property taxes increasingly shape affordability, migration patterns and household spending power, turning a local levy into a national business issue.

JBizNews Desk

Kevin O’Leary is narrowing his crypto strategy after years of experimenting across the digital asset space, arguing that most tokens have failed to justify their place in portfolios as institutional money reshapes the market.

US BANS NEW FOREIGN-MADE CONSUMER INTERNET ROUTERS OVER SECURITY CONCERNS

O’Leary Ventures Chairman Kevin O’Leary joined FOX Business’ Stuart Varney on “Varney & Co.” to discuss why he has consolidated his holdings into what he sees as the two dominant cryptocurrencies driving returns and market activity.

O’Leary said his earlier approach included exposure to dozens of smaller tokens, but a shift in regulatory expectations and institutional analysis last year forced a reassessment. As major players conducted deeper research, he argued, the conclusion became clear: most alternative coins lacked staying power.

“I used to be one of the components… Supporting 27 different positions…  All you need to own is bitcoin and Ethereum, and you own 97% of the volatility of all the other pooh-pooh coins,” O’Leary said.

CRYPTO FRAUD TOPS FBI’S ANNUAL CRIME REPORT AS AMERICANS LOSE BILLIONS TO SCAMS

He added that thousands of smaller cryptocurrencies effectively disappeared following last October’s downturn, reinforcing his decision to exit those positions.

“What’s happened to the pooh-poohs is they collapsed last October… Thousands of them never came back… At the end, why don’t you just own those two?” he said.

Despite ongoing volatility, O’Leary pointed to growing adoption of digital payment systems and stablecoins in global transactions as a key driver behind his continued conviction in the space.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

Argan’s latest results have put a small engineering and construction company at the center of a much bigger market theme: whether the next round of corporate earnings can justify the intense investor focus on power, data centers and AI-linked infrastructure. In a release issued March 27, Argan said fiscal fourth-quarter revenue rose 12.7% to $232.5 million and net income climbed to $49.2 million, or $3.47 a share, figures that sharply exceeded Wall Street expectations tracked by FactSet and cited by MarketWatch. Argan Chief Executive David Watson said in the company’s statement that the business “delivered record quarterly and annual revenues” and entered the new fiscal year with “significant opportunities” tied to its project pipeline, according to the company release.

The earnings surprise mattered because Argan, through its power-industry construction operations, has become a closely watched proxy for the scramble to add electricity capacity for data centers and other large industrial users. In its earnings release, Argan said full-year revenue reached a record $874.2 million, up 32.3% from the prior year, while adjusted EBITDA rose to $102.9 million from $63.8 million. Watson said the company’s results reflected “strong project execution” and demand across its core markets, while Argan also reported a year-end backlog of about $1.4 billion, a figure investors often treat as a signal of future revenue visibility.

The broader backdrop helps explain why the company’s report drew outsized attention. Goldman Sachs said in an April 2024 note that U.S. power demand, after years of stagnation, could rise meaningfully by the end of the decade, driven in part by data centers and electrification. Goldman Sachs analysts wrote that data center power demand alone could increase by 160% by 2030, a forecast that has echoed across Wall Street research and corporate commentary. Bloomberg has reported that utilities, equipment suppliers and engineering firms tied to grid expansion and generation additions have benefited from that shift as hyperscale operators race to secure power.

That demand story has increasingly shown up in executive remarks across the sector. Constellation Energy Chief Executive Joe Dominguez said on the company’s earnings call in February, according to a transcript published by AlphaSense and widely cited by financial media, that “the market has changed dramatically” because large customers now seek “around-the-clock, reliable, clean energy” at a scale utilities had not seen in years. NextEra Energy Chief Executive John Ketchum told analysts on his company’s January earnings call, according to the transcript and company materials, that the U.S. is entering “the early stages of a power demand supercycle,” a phrase investors have seized on as evidence that generation and transmission spending could stay elevated.

For Argan, the opportunity sits less in owning power assets than in building the facilities and related infrastructure needed to meet that surge. The company said its Gemma Power Systems unit continues to serve natural gas-fired power projects, a segment that many utilities still view as essential for reliability even as renewable generation expands. In its annual report filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, Argan said its strategy centers on “engineering, procurement, construction, commissioning, operations and project development services” for the power market, and it cautioned that project timing can create quarterly volatility even when long-term demand remains intact.

Investors have had plenty of reminders that earnings season can reward companies with visible growth and punish those that miss. Reuters reported in recent coverage of U.S. equities that markets have become increasingly selective, with traders favoring companies able to show durable revenue growth and margin resilience despite high interest rates and uneven macro data. Strategists at Morgan Stanley, in a note cited by CNBC, said the next phase of the market likely depends less on broad multiple expansion and more on “earnings revisions breadth,” meaning whether more companies can lift guidance rather than simply clear lowered bars.

That makes the quality of the beat especially important. The consensus among analysts tracked by FactSet, as cited by MarketWatch, called for quarterly earnings of $1.98 a share on revenue of $226.4 million, leaving Argan well ahead on both counts. In the company’s release, Watson said management remains focused on “disciplined execution” and on converting opportunities in its pipeline into booked work, a formulation that suggested confidence without promising a straight-line growth path. The company also declared a regular quarterly dividend and a special cash dividend, underscoring a balance sheet strong enough to return capital while still pursuing expansion.

The market’s reaction reflected more than one company’s numbers. Reuters and Bloomberg have both reported over the past year that investors increasingly group together companies exposed to AI infrastructure, from chipmakers and server manufacturers to utilities, contractors and cooling specialists. JPMorgan analysts wrote in a recent note, cited by Barron’s, that the AI buildout has broadened from semiconductors into “second-derivative beneficiaries,” including firms tied to power availability and physical project delivery. That framing helps explain why a relatively small-cap contractor can suddenly matter to portfolio managers searching for earnings leverage to a durable capital-spending cycle.

What comes next now matters more than the quarter already reported. As reporting season gathers pace in mid-April, investors will look for confirmation from utilities, industrial suppliers and large technology companies that data center expansion plans remain on track and that power constraints continue to support new project awards. Argan said in its filing that the timing of major awards and construction starts can affect near-term comparisons, but the company’s latest results and backlog suggest the underlying demand signal remains strong. If upcoming earnings from across the power and AI supply chain reinforce that message, the market could reward a wider set of infrastructure names; if not, the recent enthusiasm around the theme may face a tougher test.

JBizNews Desk

It may sound hard to believe, but the almost trillion-dollar U.S. military is struggling to fight cheap drones in its war with Iran.

Iran has built a simple drone, the Shahed, with a motorcycle-type engine, loaded it with explosives and successfully targeted its neighbors’ cities and power plants.

Iran has also hit U.S. military bases with these drones, including an early April 2026 attack on the U.S. Victory Base Complex in Baghdad.

The drones cost between $20,000 and $50,000 to build. In response, the U.S. military sometimes fires missiles worth more than $1 million to shoot one down.

As a former U.S. Air Force officer and now national security scholar, I believe that math is a problem: The U.S. military for now has a $1 million answer to a $20,000 question. This math tells you almost everything you need to know about one of America’s biggest national security headaches.

And the frustrating part is that the U.S. military watched this happen in Ukraine for years. It knew the threat was coming.

The weapon that changed modern war

The Shahed isn’t impressive because it’s high-tech. It’s impressive because it isn’t.

Inspection of captured Shahed drones has found that many of their parts are made by ordinary commercial companies. That includes processors from a U.S. manufacturer, fuel pumps from a U.K. company and converters from China.

These military components aren’t hard to get. You could find similar parts in factories or farm machinery. That’s exactly what makes the Shahed so tough to deal with.

Russia, which also produces the drone, tolerates losing more than 75% of its Shahed stock because even at those loss rates, it’s winning the math battle against Ukraine. Russia or Iran don’t need every drone to hit its target. They just need to keep sending waves of them until their opponent runs out of expensive missiles to shoot back.

Ukraine, which had no choice but to learn fast, eventually figured out a better answer. Ukraine developed cheap interceptor drones that could slam into Shahed drones before they reached their targets. Each interceptor costs about $1,000 to $2,000, and Ukrainian manufacturers are producing thousands of them per month. That’s better math: a $2,000 interceptor against a $20,000 attacker.

A fragment of a drone rests on the ground.

This undated photograph released by the Ukrainian military’s Strategic Communications Directorate shows the wreckage of what Kyiv has described as an Iranian Shahed drone downed near Kupiansk, Ukraine. Ukrainian military’s Strategic Communications Directorate via AP

Ukraine’s battlefield experience, as a result, has become one of the most valuable resources in the world, with American and allied forces asking Ukrainian drone experts to share their knowledge.

Why can’t the U.S. churn out a solution of its own? Because the U.S. military doesn’t have a technology problem but a bureaucracy problem.

The Pentagon’s three-legged slowdown

The U.S. Department of Defense typically can’t just buy things. It follows a long, complicated process that can take a decade or more to go from “we need something” to “here it is.” That process runs through three separate bureaucratic systems, each of which can cause years of delay.

First, someone must write a formal document, known as a requirement, that explains exactly what they need and why. A military service, such as the Air Force, for example, drafts up a requirement and routes it through an internal service review within only their branch.

Until recently, this service-vetted requirement went through a Pentagon review process, the Joint Capabilities Integration and Development System, where all joint services took a look. This process, which the Department of Defense ended in 2025, required approval from military officials.

Even though the joint requirements process was ended, implementation of a new system is far from complete, and the existing culture potentially remains. Under the old requirements process, it took over 800 days to get a requirement approved.

Second, any new program then needs money. This is handled through the planning, programming, budgeting and execution process, a budget cycle designed in 1961. Getting a new program into the budget typically takes more than two years after the requirement is approved, because the military must submit its budget request years in advance. By then, the threat has potentially already moved on.

Third, once a requirement is approved and money allocated, the program then must be developed and built. The average major defense acquisition program now takes almost 12 years from program start just to deliver an initial capability to troops in the field, according to a 2025 Government Accountability Office report.

Add it up and you get a system where the military sees a threat, begs for a solution, argues for money and waits a decade.

Why the system is built this way

The Shahed drone exposed a gap that defense experts have been warning about for years: The U.S. military is very good at building the most advanced, most expensive weapons in the world, but it struggles to build cheap, simple things fast. That is the opposite of what this new kind of warfare demands.

It would be easy, but inaccurate, to blame the military for the decade-long contract process. The real answer is more complicated.

A man in a suit stands next to a drone and speaks to a group of seated people.

House Speaker Mike Johnson speaks next to an Iranian Shahed-136 drone on May 8, 2025, at the U.S. Capitol in Washington. Tom Brenner for The Washington Post via Getty Images

The Pentagon’s lengthy process was designed by the Department of Defense and Congress for a reason. Policymakers created the current system during the Cold War to combat excessive and redundant spending by the separate service branches. The system is built with checkpoints, reviews and approvals to make sure taxpayer money isn’t wasted.

Legacy military contractors also benefit from this dysfunctional process and resist change. They have the capital and know-how to wait out the predictable and stable existing contracts, while vying for new ones. These military contractors rarely need to worry about upstart contractors because they know small companies cannot survive waiting for a decade to secure funding for their prototypes.

The problem is that those rules were built for a world where the biggest threat was another superpower’s expensive jets and missiles. It wasn’t built to fight a flying bomb made from tractor parts. This type of threat requires fast innovation from lean companies, the exact companies that struggle in the current budget process.

What’s changing

There are signs of movement. In August 2025, the Pentagon killed its old requirements process entirely and replaced it with a faster, more flexible system.

However, killing the requirements process dealt with only one leg of the three-legged monster. The 1960s-era budget process that determines how money flows remains largely intact.

The most important reforms still need Congress to act, and Congress moves slowly, too. Congress has launched studies into reforming this system numerous times, with the answers being too politically difficult to implement.

Officials are expanding the use of flexible contracting tools, such as Other Transaction Authority, that let the military skip some traditional rules to get anti-drone technology faster. Yet these flexible contracting tools still represent a small slice of the Defense budget, and their effectiveness is unclear.

Ultimately, instead of using flexible contracting tools to quickly buy new prototypes, the bureaucratically easier solution could be to buy more of the expensive, already approved missiles.

This quick fix would reload the military’s stock of interceptors with existing weapons systems, which is the source of the bad math. The math would get worse and at the same time the operational imperative to find cheaper and better solutions might disappear.

So, as the Shahed keeps flying, the most powerful military in the world is still figuring out the paperwork and looking to other countries for help.

Aaron Brynildson, Law Instructor, University of Mississippi

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Conversation

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The hyperscalers building the infrastructure of the AI economy have a $650 billion problem hiding in plain sight — and it doesn’t involve tariffs, talent, or chip export bans. It involves helium.

A new report from Moody’s Ratings warns that helium supply disruptions stemming from the Middle East conflict are now threatening the semiconductor supply chains that underpin artificial intelligence and data center buildout. The colorless, odorless gas is used in multiple critical stages of chip manufacturing — including wafer cooling during etching, as a carrier gas, and for leak detection — and no effective substitutes exist at an industrial scale.

“The AI economy runs on tokens, tokens run on GPUs, and GPUs depend on Qatari helium, Israeli bromine, and LNG tankers with a single, 21-mile-wide exit from the Persian Gulf,” said David Pan, Moody’s Director and AI Industry Practice Lead, in a statement to Fortune. “This is the risk of a critical, irreplaceable input in the AI supply chain colliding with surging reliance on AI compute.”

The Qatar chokepoint

Qatar accounts for roughly 30% of global high-purity helium supply, collecting it as a byproduct of natural gas production. When attacks struck the country’s Ras Laffan industrial complex — one of the world’s largest petrochemical hubs — helium supplier Air Liquide’s AirGas subsidiary declared force majeure, signaling it could no longer fulfill contracted supply volumes. The Qatar complex ceased operations on March 2.

The timing is significant. Hyperscalers, including Amazon, Microsoft, Google, and Meta are collectively committing roughly $650 billion to U.S. AI infrastructure this year alone — investment that assumes the underlying supply chain holds. Helium isn’t manufactured; it accumulates over millions of years through radioactive decay and is captured only as a byproduct of natural gas processing, making it uniquely difficult to replace or ramp up quickly.

The helium crunch fits a pattern that veteran investor Jeremy Grantham has been warning about. In a recent interview with Fortune, the GMO co-founder and famed bubble-spotter argued that the data centers underwriting the AI boom “depend entirely on scarce metals” — resources present in the earth’s crust in shrinking concentrations that no amount of capital investment can replenish. He only saw one outcome, telling Fortune, “We are going to have to get used to slower growth rates, lower resource use.”

Moody’s Ratings notes that the immediate crisis is being managed for now, making Grantham’s warning down the road a bit of a can kicked down the road.

Buffers are buying time — not solving the problem

The global market was actually oversupplied heading into the conflict — worldwide demand ran at about 170 million cubic meters in 2025 against a supply of around 184 million cubic meters — and producers had invested heavily in storage capacity. Air Liquide’s German helium storage cavern can hold close to a year’s worth of its needs, while Linde commissioned a massive storage cavern in Beaumont, Texas, in July 2025, with capacity exceeding 85 million cubic meters, nearly half of last year’s global demand.

South Korean chipmakers Samsung and SK Hynix entered 2026 with sufficient helium inventory to last through at least June, Reuters has reported, though both are paying premiums to secure supply from U.S. sources.

Still, liquid helium can only be maintained in containers for roughly 45 days before it begins to degrade, and spot prices have already surged sharply. A fragile U.S.-Iran ceasefire agreed on April 7 could ease some pressure on the Strait of Hormuz shipping lanes, but Moody’s Ratings cautions that Qatari helium production would not immediately resume even if the conflict de-escalates.

The deeper vulnerability

The episode is exposing a structural fragility that the AI industry has largely ignored. Unlike neon gas — whose supply shock during the Ukraine war spurred recycling investments across chip fabs — helium poses a harder mitigation challenge because some manufacturing steps, like leak detection, offer virtually no recycling opportunity.

One potential relief valve: Russia’s Amur helium complex, which has been operating below capacity under sanctions. A lifting of sanctions could “significantly increase supply,” Moody’s Ratings notes, though it remains unclear over what timeframe. The lifting of sanctions, of course, is a significant political issue. Johns Hopkins professor Steve Hanke recently told Fortune that the Iran War is “good for Russia” for related reasons: everything Russia sells, mainly oil but also resources such as helium, is now being sold in higher volumes at much higher prices.

But even Russia’s return online would not be a silver bullet, according to Moody’s Pan. “Helium doesn’t get much attention in the AI supply chain, but it should,” he told Fortune. Not only is it essential for cooling wafers during chip etching, he argued, “there is no viable substitute at scale.”

For an industry betting hundreds of billions on uninterrupted compute growth, the helium crunch is a reminder that the AI supply chain runs through some of the world’s most volatile geography — and that the atoms holding it together are millions of years in the making.

For this story, Fortune journalists used generative AI as a research tool. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Generac Power Systems is recalling certain portable generators sold at Costco after identifying a defect that could cause gasoline to leak, posing a potential fire and burn hazard, according to a notice sent to customers.

The recall affects Generac GP9200E gas generators purchased between May 2025 and February 2026, Generac Power Systems said to Costco members. The affected serial numbers range from 3016786070 to 3016788388.

The issue stems from the generator’s carburetor, which may leak fuel when the unit is first filled with gasoline, creating a risk of fire or explosion.

MACY’S RECALLS POPULAR KITCHEN ITEM OVER BURN RISK

Customers who have not yet filled the generator with fuel, or who experience any gasoline leakage, are being urged to stop using the product immediately. However, the notice states that generators that have already been used without any fuel leakage may continue to be operated.

MORE THAN 30K WIRELESS POWER BANKS RECALLED AFTER REPORTS OF FIRE, EXPLOSIONS

The recall applies only to units within the specified serial number range, and customers are advised to check their generator to determine whether it is included.

Owners of affected generators can arrange for a free repair through an authorized dealer or return the product to Costco for a full refund, according to the notice.

Generac is one of the largest U.S. manufacturers of backup power equipment, with its products commonly used during outages caused by severe weather and grid disruptions.

OVER 1.1M POWER BANKS RECALLED AFTER REPORTS OF FIRES, EXPLOSIONS

“The safety and safe use of our products is always our top priority,” told FOX Business in a statement. “We encourage consumers to stop using affected units and determine eligibility for a free repair. Consumers with generators that have previously been filled with enough gasoline to move the gauge off “E,” or have been used without any gasoline leakage, can continue use.”

Generac estimates that about 51,500 of the 149,400 affected generators were sold to consumers.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

FOX Business has reached out to Costco for further comment.

This post was originally published here

Management and business expert Suzy Welch warns that three “sudden death” interview answers can instantly sink otherwise strong candidates.

In a recent CNBC column, she recounts an MBA standout who kept getting rejected until a mock interview revealed he was telegraphing an eventual exit by saying he hoped to start a business, which she calls a fatal cue to recruiters investing in long-term hires.

Welch argues that certain statements trigger instant doubts about fit, durability, and drive—and offers alternatives that focus on aligning with the company’s mission and demonstrating growth mindset.

The three “sudden death” answers

  • “I want to start my own business someday,” which signals early exit risk to employers who expect multi-year ramp and return on their investment.
  • “I value work-life balance and self-care,” which, when presented as a primary theme, can read as low urgency or limited stretch, despite balance being universally important.
  • “I was let go as part of my company’s recent layoffs,” which can invite skepticism about why the candidate wasn’t redeployed; better to frame it as a lesson and pivot point with concrete upskilling.

What to say instead

Welch’s guidance: align long-term ambitions to the role and company so goals sound additive, not competitive, with the employer’s needs. Acknowledge balance briefly, then emphasize craftsmanship, contribution, and team standards. If laid off, tell a forward-looking story about resilience, learning, and impact.

What Fortune 500 executives seek

Fortune’s reporting shows top executives probe for authenticity, motivation, and self-awareness—areas strengthened by Welch’s reframing advice—not weakened by exit signals or defensive answers. Leaders from firms like Marriott, UKG, DHL, PwC, and Blackstone focus on why candidates want the role, how colleagues describe them, and what misconceptions they’ve overcome. So preparing substance-rich answers directly supports Welch’s playbook.

Fortune’s interview tips to apply now

  • Prepare sharp, honest answers to “why this company,” “how others describe you,” and “what misconceptions exist,” demonstrating research, self-knowledge, and long-term fit, which executives told Fortune they actively test.
  • Practice confident body language and presence; Fortune has highlighted the power of a genuine smile and positive nonverbal signals to differentiate in close calls.
  • Go in with thoughtful questions and a clear mindset; Fortune’s interview playbooks emphasize preparing questions and breaking the ice effectively.

Framing matters

Welch’s advice is less about avoiding topics and more about framing: show commitment to the employer’s mission, translate setbacks into learning, and keep the focus on contribution and growth. Fortune’s coverage reinforces that the candidates who stand out marry this framing with strong self-awareness, visible enthusiasm for the role, and well-prepared answers to leaders’ curveball questions.

For this story, Fortune used generative AI to help with an initial draft. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The warnings about AI’s impact on jobs echo from Silicon Valley to Wall Street to Washington, D.C. But Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang thinks you should worry less about the robots and more about your coworker, the one quietly “tokenmaxxing,” or using AI to do in minutes what takes you hours.

In a recent interview with former national security advisor H.R. McMaster at the Stanford Graduate School of Business alongside Rep. Ro Khanna (D-CA), Huang said AI won’t exactly replace you. Instead, it’s possible you’ll be replaced by the worker who’s boosted their productivity by using AI.

“It is unlikely most people will lose a job to AI,” Huang said in the interview published last week. “It is most likely that most people will lose their job to somebody who uses AI. And so, we have to make sure that everybody uses AI.”

The statement is a break from what other business leaders have warned about the technology. Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei said the technology will wipe out half of all entry-level white collar workers. Microsoft AI chief Mustafa Suleyman has said the same, and gave it about 18 months until that becomes a reality. 

At the same time, there’s a growing discontent among workers about AI adoption. KPMG found in November four in 10 workers fear AI could take their job. And a report from AI enterprise platform Writer found that 29% of workers are actively sabotaging their company’s AI strategy, with about one-third of those citing fear of AI for doing so. 

Huang versus the doomsayers: Why Nvidia’s CEO believes AI will create jobs

While other business leaders are adamant AI will lead to a wider labor market disruption, the 63-year-old billionaire has remained steadfast in his assertion the technology won’t lead to mass layoffs. In an interview last May, Huang said the technology could actually put up to 40 million people back into the workforce. And in March, the CEO mapped out exactly how AI could transform the technology, predicting 100 AI agents working alongside every human worker.

Huang’s prediction is already playing out in the labor market, according to the Writer report. In the survey, 60% of executives said they’re considering cutting employees who refuse to adopt AI. Moreover, workers using AI are three times as likely to have gotten a promotion and pay raise last year compared to workers dragging their feet on AI adoption.

Still, a recent Anthropic study argues AI is already theoretically capable of performing the majority of tasks associated with white-collar professions, such as law, business, engineering, and management. But Huang explained that while AI automates specific tasks, it doesn’t necessarily eliminate that profession. 

“Your job, the purpose of your job, and the tasks that you do in your job are related but not the same,” he said.

How Nvidia puts AI adoption into practice

Huang shared some insights into how AI adoption looks at Nvidia. He said the most successful employees are those who embrace the tool. 

“The software engineers who know how to work with AI are the most popular software engineers.” He adds the software engineers are actually busier than ever.

The tech firm is putting its money where its mouth is, according to Huang. In his keynote address at the Nvidia GTC conference in March, the CEO said in order to attract top talent, the company is offering an unusual incentive: AI tokens for engineers—the fundamental units of data used to process and generate text—worth nearly half their salary.

But it’s not just engineers. Huang is seeking AI pros across the board. He said companies are looking for recent college grads with sophisticated AI knowledge.

“Whether it’s [an] expert at using AI for marketing or finance or engineering or software engineering, we are looking for expert AI users,” he said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here


U.S. stocks rallied Wednesday, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average jumping 371 points, or 0.8%, as stronger-than-expected earnings from Boeing Co. and easing geopolitical tensions boosted investor sentiment.

The S&P 500 gained 0.9%, while the Nasdaq Composite advanced 1.2%, briefly hitting a new intraday high, as markets responded to a combination of solid corporate results and a cooling in Middle East tensions.

Investor confidence improved after President Donald Trump extended the U.S.-Iran ceasefire, citing a “seriously fractured” leadership structure in Tehran — a move that reduced immediate fears of renewed conflict and helped stabilize markets.

Boeing Delivers Stronger-Than-Expected Results

Boeing Co. reported first-quarter revenue of $22.2 billion, beating analyst estimates of $21.91 billion and rising 14% year-over-year. The company posted an adjusted loss per share of $0.20, far narrower than the expected $0.68 loss, sending shares higher in early trading.

The aerospace giant delivered 143 commercial aircraft in the quarter, topping Airbus SE’s 114 deliveries — marking Boeing’s first quarterly lead over its European rival since before the 737 MAX crisis.

The 737 MAX accounted for 114 of those deliveries, highlighting its continued role at the center of Boeing’s recovery.

Kelly Ortberg, Boeing’s President and Chief Executive Officer, confirmed production of the 737 MAX is running at 38 aircraft per month, with a fourth assembly line set to open in Renton, Washington this summer. The expansion could lift total narrowbody output to roughly 53 aircraft per month by year-end.

Boeing also reaffirmed strong long-term demand, with a record backlog of $682 billion representing more than 6,100 aircraft orders.

Jay Malave, Boeing’s Chief Financial Officer, said the company expects to generate between $1 billion and $3 billion in free cash flow in 2026 — a potential inflection point after years of financial pressure.

Caution Remains Beneath the Rally

The gains follow a volatile Tuesday session, when the Dow fell 293 points on concerns surrounding the ceasefire deadline.

Scott Welch, Chief Investment Officer at Certuity, warned that underlying risks remain. “The market was not cheap before the conflict, and this rally brings valuations back into focus,” Welch said, adding that investors will likely shift attention back to fundamentals including inflation, labor markets, and Federal Reserve policy in the coming weeks.

Looking ahead, markets now face a critical balancing act — weighing improving corporate performance against persistent macroeconomic and geopolitical uncertainty.

JBizNews Desk

Gen Z’s relationship with higher education has never been more fraught. Soaring tuition costs and a brutal entry-level job market have left many young people questioning whether getting a degree was worth it at all.

But Valerie Capers Workman, who served as vice president of people at Tesla, has a sharply different message for the graduating class of 2026: don’t buy the noise. This comes even as her former boss, Elon Musk, is part of the chorus of powerful voices casting a doubt on college.

“Do not let anyone, not a tech founder, not a headline, not a podcast host, convince you that your education was a waste,” Workman said last week at the Defining the Future conference at California State University, San Bernardino. “It was not. It is more valuable today than it has ever been.”

The skills a degree develops—the ability to reason, question, and lead with humanity—are precisely what artificial intelligence cannot replicate, she argued. 

And counterintuitively, it’s liberal arts fields like history, English, and the arts that she says are becoming more relevant in the AI era, not less, despite long being dismissed as financially impractical.

“In the age of AI, these disciplines are not ‘soft skills,’” Workman, who currently serves as the chief human resources officer at Empower Pharmacy, added. “They are the source code for the emotional intelligence, ethical reasoning, cultural fluency, and critical thinking that machines will never have.”

How to use your degree to land a job in today’s AI world, according to Tesla’s former head of HR

Workman’s optimism about degrees comes at a time when landing a job right out of college has become significantly harder.

Job postings on Handshake—an early careers platform where Workman also formerly held a C-suite role—declined more than 16% year over year as of August 2025, while the average number of applications per posting rose 26%. For the class of 2026, who will soon begin walking across the stage, more than 60% are pessimistic about their career prospects, with AI’s disruption of the job market a central frustration.

Workman’s advice to graduates—regardless of their degree or desired profession—isn’t to lean on their diploma alone. It’s to pair it with something their predecessors never had to learn: AI fluency.

“You do not get to sit this one out,” she said. “You do not get to say, ‘I am not a tech person.’ That identity is retired. If you plan to work, lead, build, or earn in this economy, you must become fluent in artificial intelligence the way your parents’ generation had to become fluent in email and the internet, the way your grandparents’ generation had to become fluent in the personal computer.”

She offered two concentrated ways to get started. First, learn prompt engineering—and treat it seriously: “Treat it like a second language,” Workman said. “The people who can instruct AI clearly, specifically, and strategically will out-earn and out-perform everyone else in the room.”

Second, master the art of asking great questions: “The graduates who win this decade will not be the ones with the best answers. They will be the ones with the best questions.”

Fortune reached out to Workman for further comment.

Tech leaders like Mark Zuckerberg, Alex Karp, and Elon Musk aren’t sold higher education is worth it

While Workman joins a growing number of business leaders who remain bullish on higher education, many of the loudest voices in tech are not.

Mark Zuckerberg—who famously dropped out of Harvard University after launching Facebook from his dorm room—has expressed his concern that colleges are failing to equip students for today’s workforce.

“I’m not sure that college is preparing people for the jobs that they need to have today. I think that there’s a big issue on that, and all the student debt issues are…really big,” he said last year on Theo Von’s podcast.

Palantir CEO Alex Karp, who has three degrees of his own, has been particularly scathing, criticizing higher education for both the debt it saddles students with and what he calls ideological “indoctrination.”

“Everything you learned at your school and college about how the world works is intellectually incorrect,” Karp told CNBC in 2025.

Elon Musk—Workman’s former boss—has echoed that concern.

“I think college is basically for fun and to prove that you can do your chores, but they’re not for learning,” Musk said at the Satellite 2020 conference, adding that requiring a degree for employment is “absurd.” 

At Tesla, the main requirement for landing a job is “exceptional ability,” Musk said, who received a bachelor’s from the University of Pennsylvania in 1997.

But despite the anti-college rhetoric from Silicon Valley, there hasn’t been a mass exodus from higher education. Total postsecondary enrollment in the United States grew 1.0% in fall 2025, according to the National Student Clearinghouse Research Center—suggesting that many Gen Z are still betting on degrees. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Iran fired on three ships in the Strait of Hormuz and seized two of them on Wednesday, intensifying its assault on shipping in the key waterway a day after U.S. President Donald Trump extended a ceasefire while maintaining an American blockade of Iranian ports.

Iranian media said the paramilitary Revolutionary Guard was bringing the two ships to Iran after seizing them in the strait, through which 20% of the world’s oil passes in peacetime. The standoff over Iran’s closure of the strait and the U.S. blockade raised doubts about when or if talks would resume to end the crisis.

The conflict has already sent gas prices skyrocketing far beyond the region and raised the cost of food and a wide array of other products. The longer the strait remains closed, the more severe and widespread the effects will be — and the longer it will take the economy to bounce back.

The European Union energy commissioner, Dan Jørgensen, warned of lasting impact for consumers and business, likening the crisis to other major energy crunches over the last half-century. He said the war is costing Europe around 500 million euros ($600 million) each day.

Iran holds firm in apparent tit-for-tat with US

Iran’s leaders appear poised to drive a hard bargain with American negotiators after Trump said the U.S. would indefinitely extend the ceasefire that had been due to expire Wednesday, while Washington awaits a new proposal from Tehran.

Iranian media said the MSC Francesca and the Epaminodes were being escorted to Iran. The ships’ owners could not be immediately reached for comment. The U.S. had earlier seized two Iranian vessels as the ceasefire talks were due to take place in Pakistan.

The Guard attacked a third ship, identified as the Euphoria, which had become “stranded” on the Iranian coast, Iranian media reported, without elaborating.

The British military’s United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations Center also reported the attacks, saying a Revolutionary Guard gunboat opened fire on a container ship and “caused heavy damage to the bridge.” A second cargo ship came under fire hours later, with no report of damage, though the vessel was then stopped in the water. No injuries to the crew of either vessel were reported.

There have been more than 30 attacks on ships in the Mideast since the U.S. and Israel launched the war on Feb. 28 with a surprise attack on Iran. Before then, the strait was open for all traffic.

It’s not clear when talks will restart

Iran’s ability to restrict traffic through the strait — which leads from the Persian Gulf to the open ocean — has proved a major strategic advantage.

While the ceasefire means that American and Israeli airstrikes have stopped in Iran — and Tehran’s missiles no longer target Israel and the wider Middle East — the attacks in the strait and earlier American interdictions of Iranian ships show the maritime threat remains.

Without any diplomatic agreement, those attacks will likely deter ships from even attempting to pass through the waterway, and further squeeze global energy supplies. Wednesday’s attacks saw Brent crude oil, the international standard, spike to nearly $100 a barrel, up more than 35% since the war started.

The night before, hard-line supporters of Iran’s theocracy held rallies in which the Guard showed off missiles and launchers — a sign of defiance to Israel and the U.S., which devoted much of their airstrike campaign to destroying the country’s ballistic missile arsenal.

Mojtaba Ferdousi Pour, the head of the Iranian mission in Egypt, told The Associated Press that no delegation would go to Pakistan until the U.S. lifts its blockade.

Two Pakistani officials told the AP that Islamabad is still waiting to hear from Tehran on when it will send a delegation. They spoke on condition of anonymity because they were not authorized to talk to the media.

In the Iranian capital, Tehran, many wondered whether the ceasefire would hold.

“We should know where we stand. Is it going to be a ceasefire, peace or the war is going to continue?” said Mashallah Mohammad Sadegh, 59. “The way things currently are, one doesn’t know what to do.”

One killed in drone attack in Lebanon

In Lebanon, where fighting between Israel and the Iran-backed Hezbollah broke out after the U.S. and Israel launched their initial strikes, the state-run National News Agency said an Israeli drone strike on the village of Jabbour killed one and wounded two others. Israel’s military denied that it had attacked the area.

A 10-day ceasefire went into effect in Lebanon on Friday, but there have been several Israeli strikes and Hezbollah claimed its first attack on Tuesday.

Since the war started, at least 3,375 people have been killed in Iran, according to authorities. More than 2,290 people have been killed in Lebanon, 23 people have died in Israel and more than a dozen have died in Gulf Arab states. Fifteen Israeli soldiers in Lebanon and 13 U.S. service members have been killed.

___

Associated Press writers Samy Magdy in Cairo, Munir Ahmed in Islamabad, Lorne Cook in Brussels and Jamey Keaten in Geneva contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

AT&T Inc. delivered stronger-than-expected quarterly results Wednesday, with growth in its fiber broadband and 5G wireless businesses lifting revenue above Wall Street forecasts, even as a slowdown in postpaid phone additions and weaker free cash flow signaled emerging competitive pressures across the telecom sector.

The Dallas-based telecommunications giant reported revenue of $31.5 billion, up 2.8% year-over-year and roughly $260 million ahead of analyst expectations. Adjusted earnings came in at $0.57 per share, slightly topping consensus estimates. However, free cash flow fell 19% to $2.5 billion, missing market forecasts and drawing investor attention to capital intensity and integration costs tied to recent acquisitions.

John Stankey, AT&T’s Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, said the company’s performance reflects growing customer demand for bundled connectivity services. “We met or exceeded all of the financial targets we set,” Stankey said, emphasizing that more customers are choosing AT&T as a single provider for both wireless and broadband needs.

Wireless and Fiber Lead Growth

AT&T’s Advanced Connectivity segment, which includes wireless and fiber operations, remained the primary growth engine. Core service revenue from these businesses rose 3.6% to $22.9 billion, supported by strong subscriber additions and continued network expansion.

The company added 584,000 net new advanced internet subscribers during the quarter — evenly split between 292,000 fiber customers and 292,000 fixed wireless users — marking what AT&T described as its strongest first-quarter performance ever for internet growth.

Fiber continues to play a central role in AT&T’s long-term strategy. The company ended 2025 with its fiber network reaching 32 million locations, while maintaining a streak of more than one million fiber net additions annually for eight consecutive years.

Stankey highlighted the growing overlap between services, noting that 42% of AT&T Fiber households now also subscribe to AT&T wireless, a record level of customer convergence that the company sees as key to driving long-term profitability.

Postpaid Growth Slows Amid Competition

Despite strong broadband momentum, AT&T’s wireless business showed signs of slowing growth. The company added 294,000 net postpaid phone subscribers, down from 324,000 in the same period last year.

Postpaid phone churn — a key measure of customer retention — rose to 0.89% from 0.83%, reflecting increased competition from rivals T-Mobile US Inc. and Verizon Communications Inc.

Analysts have pointed to slowing phone additions as a potential headwind, particularly as pricing competition intensifies across the U.S. wireless market. The company’s ability to sustain growth will likely depend on whether its higher-margin fiber and bundled offerings can offset pressure in legacy and mobility segments.

Strategy Focused on Convergence

Pascal Desroches, AT&T’s Chief Financial Officer, has emphasized that the company is deliberately prioritizing a convergence strategy — converting standalone fiber customers into bundled wireless subscribers — rather than relying heavily on promotional pricing to drive growth.

That approach, Desroches noted in prior remarks, is designed to improve customer lifetime value while reducing churn, even if it results in slower headline subscriber growth compared to competitors.

Impact of Acquisitions and New Structure

The latest results mark AT&T’s first report under a new business segment structure, introduced following its acquisitions of Lumen Technologies’ mass markets fiber unit and EchoStar earlier this year.

Management indicated that both deals are expected to weigh modestly on earnings in the near term, with benefits projected to become accretive by 2028 as integration progresses and scale efficiencies are realized.

Outlook: Fiber Momentum vs. Industry Pressure

Looking ahead, AT&T reaffirmed its expectation of more than 5% service revenue growth and at least 6% EBITDA growth in its Advanced Connectivity segment by 2026.

The company’s trajectory now hinges on execution — particularly its ability to expand fiber coverage, deepen bundled relationships, and manage competitive pressures in wireless.

With telecom peers ramping up investment and promotional activity, AT&T’s bet on convergence over volume growth represents a more measured strategy. Whether that approach can deliver sustained earnings expansion in an increasingly crowded market will be closely watched in the quarters ahead.

JBizNews Desk

JBizNews Desk | April 22, 2026

Google Cloud CEO Thomas Kurian opened the company’s annual Cloud Next conference in Las Vegas on Wednesday with an aggressive push into enterprise artificial intelligence, unveiling a new generation of custom AI chips alongside a broad suite of tools designed to help businesses build and deploy autonomous AI agents at scale.

Speaking at the Mandalay Bay Convention Center, Kurian framed the announcements as a turning point in Google’s AI strategy—from research leadership to full-scale enterprise execution—highlighting upgrades to its Gemini models, new agent-building infrastructure, and significant advances in proprietary silicon.

At the center of the rollout is Google’s seventh-generation Tensor Processing Unit (TPU), codenamed Ironwood, which the company says delivers up to a fourfold performance increase for high-volume, low-latency AI inference workloads. The chip is a core component of Google’s AI Hypercomputer, a tightly integrated hardware and software system designed to support the massive computational demands of modern AI models.

Jeff Dean, Chief Scientist at Google, emphasized the strategic shift toward specialized computing. “As demand grows for quickly processing AI queries, it now becomes sensible to specialize chips more for training or more for inference workloads,” Dean said, underscoring a broader industry move toward separating how AI models are built versus how they are deployed at scale.

Analysts say the new architecture reflects a deeper transformation in how cloud infrastructure is being designed. Holger Mueller, Vice President and Principal Analyst at Constellation Research, noted that “enterprise AI is moving from batch processing to persistent, always-on workloads,” requiring fundamentally different systems optimized for continuous inference rather than periodic training cycles.

The commercial implications are already materializing. Dario Amodei, CEO of Anthropic, confirmed the company is expanding its use of Google Cloud infrastructure, building on a previously announced agreement that could provide access to up to one million TPU chips by 2026—one of the largest AI compute commitments disclosed to date. The deal highlights how even leading AI model developers are increasingly relying on hyperscaler infrastructure to meet growing demand.

Beyond hardware, Google is placing a significant bet on what it calls the “agentic enterprise.” The company introduced new tools enabling businesses to build AI agents capable of executing multi-step tasks autonomously—ranging from logistics coordination to customer service resolution—rather than simply responding to prompts.

Amin Vahdat, Vice President and General Manager of Systems and Services Infrastructure at Google Cloud, said the goal is to provide “a full-stack platform where enterprises can deploy, manage, and scale AI agents reliably,” positioning Google Cloud as a foundational layer for next-generation business operations.

The rollout builds on recent software advances, including the introduction of Gemini 3.1 Pro, which Google says improves complex reasoning and problem-solving capabilities. The model is being made available through Vertex AI, Gemini Enterprise, and the Gemini API, giving developers broader access to build customized AI applications.

Industry data suggests the shift toward AI agents could be transformative. According to Google Cloud’s 2026 AI Agent Trends Report, autonomous agents are expected to play a central role in enterprise workflows this year, with companies like Salesforce CEO Marc Benioff signaling growing interest in interoperable systems built on emerging standards such as the Agent2Agent (A2A) protocol.

The broader competitive landscape is intensifying. Analysts argue Google is not simply launching new products but positioning itself as the infrastructure backbone for always-on AI systems. Dan Ives, Managing Director and Senior Equity Analyst at Wedbush Securities, said the company is “effectively building an operating system for enterprise AI, where the real value is controlling the compute and orchestration layer.”

That strategy comes as rivals face infrastructure constraints. Industry observers note that capacity shifts and project delays across the AI ecosystem have created openings for Google Cloud to expand its footprint, particularly in Europe and the U.K., where demand for large-scale AI compute continues to accelerate.

With Google Cloud Next 2026 running through April 24, the company is using the event to make a clear statement: the next phase of artificial intelligence will not be defined solely by models—but by the infrastructure, chips, and platforms that allow those models to operate continuously at enterprise scale.

— JBizNews Desk

JBizNews Desk | April 22, 2026

American drivers paying roughly $3.45 per gallon may feel squeezed when oil prices rise—but compared with much of the world, they are still paying significantly less. As of April 2026, the global average gasoline price stands near $1.50 per liter, placing the United States well below most advanced economies, a gap driven largely by tax policy, domestic production strength, and long-standing political decisions.

The biggest dividing line is taxation. According to the U.S. Energy Information Administration (EIA), the federal gasoline tax remains fixed at 18.3 cents per gallon, unchanged since 1993. In contrast, European governments impose substantially higher levies. The European Commission mandates a minimum excise duty of €0.359 per liter—roughly $1.60 per gallon—with most countries charging above that threshold. Combined with value-added taxes, fuel taxes account for more than half of pump prices across the European Union, with Italy (55%), Germany (54.5%), France (53%), and Spain (45%) among the highest, according to Commission data.

Jacob Macumber-Rosin, Excise Tax Policy Analyst at the Tax Foundation, has noted that Europe’s baseline fuel tax alone exceeds the total gasoline tax burden in most U.S. states. Even in California, which has the highest combined federal and state gas taxes in the U.S., the total reaches about $1.25 per gallon—still below European minimums.

Beyond taxes, the United States benefits from a powerful structural advantage: it produces much of its own oil. The EIA’s Short-Term Energy Outlook shows U.S. crude production hit a record 13.6 million barrels per day in 2025, led by the Permian Basin, which accounted for nearly half of total output. That domestic capacity reduces reliance on imports and limits exposure to transportation costs that weigh heavily on Europe and Asia.

Energy economists say that production economics also support sustained output. Data from the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas Energy Survey indicates breakeven costs in key U.S. shale regions hover around $61–$62 per barrel, allowing producers to remain profitable even during price downturns. Garrett Golding, Assistant Vice President for Energy Programs at the Dallas Fed, has emphasized that this cost discipline is a key factor underpinning U.S. energy resilience.

Industry groups point to the broader transformation of the U.S. energy sector. The American Energy Alliance has highlighted that advances in hydraulic fracturing and horizontal drilling have turned the U.S. into the world’s largest oil producer and a net petroleum exporter, strengthening supply security and helping stabilize domestic prices relative to global markets.

Looking ahead, price forecasts remain sensitive to geopolitical developments. The EIA’s April 2026 outlook projects gasoline prices will average $3.70 per gallon in 2026 and $3.46 in 2027, up from $3.10 in 2025, while diesel is expected to remain elevated near $4.80 per gallon due to tighter global supply. Steve Nalley, Acting Administrator of the EIA, has said the agency expects prices to moderate over time, though recent Middle East tensions have pushed projections higher.

Trade policy is another variable shaping the outlook. According to the American Fuel & Petrochemical Manufacturers, about 60% of U.S. crude imports come from Canada and 7% from Mexico. The Trump administration’s tariffs—25% on Mexican crude and 10% on Canadian crude—have so far had limited impact due to a global supply surplus, but could become more consequential if markets tighten.

Ultimately, the price Americans pay at the pump reflects policy as much as market forces. While countries draw from the same global oil supply, governments determine final costs through taxes, subsidies, and regulatory frameworks. European leaders have long defended higher fuel taxes as tools for funding infrastructure and advancing climate goals, while U.S. policymakers have historically avoided significant increases due to political sensitivity.

As Garrett Golding has observed, gasoline prices tend to rise quickly and fall slowly—“like a falling feather”—with much of the profit concentrated upstream among producers and refiners rather than at retail stations. The takeaway is clear: relatively low U.S. gasoline prices are not accidental, but the result of deliberate policy choices, robust domestic production, and a sustained political preference for keeping fuel affordable.

— JBizNews Desk

At 9 a.m. Eastern Time today, the price of oil sits at $101.14 per barrel, using Brent as the benchmark (we’ll explain what that means shortly). That’s an increase of $4.82 since yesterday morning and roughly $33 more than at this time last year.

oil price per barrel % Change
Price of oil yesterday $96.32 +5.00%
Price of oil 1 month ago $112.77 -10.31%
Price of oil 1 year ago $67.90 +48.95%

Will oil prices go up?

Nobody can predict the future path of oil prices with certainty. A range of factors influence how oil trades, yet supply and demand remain the main drivers. When fears of economic slowdown, conflict, or similar shocks rise, oil prices can move sharply.

How oil prices translate to gas pump prices

The price you see at the gas pump reflects more than just crude oil. Also built in are the costs of refining, distribution through wholesalers, various taxes, and the margin your neighborhood station charges.

Crude oil is still the largest single driver of the final pump price, typically representing over half of each gallon’s cost. Spikes in oil prices tend to push gas prices higher in short order. But when oil prices decline, gas prices often ease down gradually, a behavior known as “rockets and feathers.”

The role of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve

In the event of an emergency, the U.S. maintains a stockpile of crude oil known as the Strategic Petroleum Reserve. Its main goal is to safeguard energy security when disasters strike—think sanctions, severe storm damage, or war. It can also do a lot to ease the pain of sudden price jumps when supply gets disrupted.

It’s not a permanent fix, as it’s more meant to provide immediate support for consumers and ensure critical parts of the economy like key industries, emergency services, public transportation, and so on can keep operating.

How oil and natural gas prices are linked

Both oil and natural gas play key roles as major sources of energy. A big change in oil prices can affect natural gas by proxy. If oil prices increase, some industries may swap natural gas for some segments of their operations where possible, increasing the demand for natural gas.

Historical performance of oil

Oil prices are often measured by two key benchmarks:

  • Brent crude oil is the main global oil benchmark.
  • West Texas Intermediate (WTI) is the main benchmark of North America.

Between the two, Brent is a better representation of global oil performance because it prices much of the world’s traded crude. It’s also often the best way to review historical oil trends. In fact, the U.S. Energy Information Administration now leans on Brent as its primary reference in its Annual Energy Outlook.

When you look at the Brent benchmark across multiple decades, you’ll see that oil has been anything but consistent. It has experienced spikes driven by wars and supply cuts, as well as crashes linked to global recessions and an oversupply (called a “glut”). For example:

  • The early 1970s brought the first big oil shock when the Middle East cut exports and imposed an embargo on the U.S. and others during the Yom Kippur War.
  • Prices dropped in the mid-1980s for reasons such as weaker demand and more non-OPEC oil producers entering the industry.
  • Prices spiked again in 2008 with rising global demand, but soon crashed alongside the global financial crisis.
  • During the 2020 COVID lockdown, oil demand collapsed like never before, bringing prices to under $20 per barrel.

In short, oil’s historical performance has been far from steady. It’s massively affected by wars, recessions, OPEC whims, evolving energy initiatives and policies, and much more.

Energy coverage from Fortune

Looking to stay up-to-date regarding the latest energy developments? Check out our recent coverage:

Frequently asked questions

How is the current price of oil per barrel actually determined?

The current price of oil per barrel depends largely on supply and demand, including news about potential future supply and demand (geopolitics, decisions made by OPEC+, etc.). In the U.S., prices also move based on how friendly an administration is to drilling, as it can affect future supply. For example, 2025 saw the Trump administration move to reopen more than 1.5 million acres in the Coastal Plain of the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge for oil and gas leasing, reversing the Biden administration’s policy of limiting oil drilling in the Arctic.

How often does the price of oil change during the day?

The price of oil updates constantly when the “futures” markets are open. A futures market is effectively an auction where people agree to buy or sell oil in the future. As long as people and companies are trading contracts, the oil price is changing.

How does U.S. shale oil production affect the current price of oil?

In short, shale is rock that contains oil and natural gas. Think of shale as energy yet to be tapped. The more shale the U.S. accesses, the more energy we’ll have—and the more easily oil prices can keep from spiking as much thanks to a greater supply.

How does the current price of oil impact inflation and the broader economy?

When oil is expensive, it tends to make everyday items cost more. This can be related to energy (your heating, gas utilities, etc.), but it’s also due to the logistics involved with making those items accessible to you. Shipping, for example, can affect the price of things at the grocery store, as it’s more expensive to get those products from warehouses and farms onto the shelf.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Investors are flocking to actively managed exchange-traded funds (ETFs) and recently pushed the amount of assets in the investment class above a notable milestone.

Actively managed ETFs surpassed $1 trillion in assets under management in the U.S., as investors look to find investment options that may outperform passive ETFs that track an index.

“Active ETFs are exploding because investors want the best of both worlds, Wall Street strategy with Main Street pricing,” Ted Jenkin, managing partner for Exit Wealth Advisors, told FOX Business. “You’re getting flexibility to navigate volatile markets, potential tax efficiency, and in many cases a real shot at outperforming the index instead of just riding a mutual fund.”

The ETF market has grown across both actively and passively managed ETFs, but the two types have important distinctions.

COULD S&P 500 ETFS ALONE FUND YOUR ENTIRE RETIREMENT?

While passively managed ETFs are designed to track a benchmark such as the S&P 500, actively managed ETFs aim to outperform a given benchmark by having the portfolio manager adjust the investments within the ETF based on research or strategies they’re utilizing.

“Both approaches serve an important role for retail investors – the difference comes down to intent,” Charles La Rosa, vice president and head of ETFs at Gabelli Funds, told FOX Business. 

“Active ETFs seek to provide thoughtful security selection, risk management and potentially differentiated outcomes, particularly during periods of volatility or in less efficient areas of the market,” La Rosa said.

US ETF ASSETS UNDER MANAGEMENT TO MORE THAN DOUBLE TO $25T BY 2030, CITIGROUP SAYS

Fidelity Investments said that there are two types of actively managed ETFs that differ in how they disclose their holdings. 

Traditional actively managed ETFs, as well as passive ETFs, disclose their holdings on a daily basis, whereas semi-transparent active ETFs disclose their holdings on a quarterly basis.

GOLDMAN SACHS COMPLETES INNOVATOR CAPITAL ACQUISITION, LIFTING ETF ASSETS TO $90B

Research from the Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) Division of Economic and Risk Analysis noted that last year, as active ETFs surpassed the $900 billion level, passive ETFs had over $8 trillion in total net assets.

The SEC’s research also notes that active ETFs had higher expense ratios than their passive peers, with asset-weighted passive ETF having operating expenses at 0.12% of net assets versus 0.49% for active ETFs as of 2024. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Equal weighted ETFs in both categories had higher expenses, with passive ETFs at 0.45% and active ETFs at 0.70%.

This post was originally published here

JBizNews Desk | April 22, 2026

U.S. equity futures moved higher early Wednesday after President Donald Trump extended the ceasefire with Iran, reversing a two-day selloff on Wall Street fueled by concerns the truce would collapse without a diplomatic breakthrough.

S&P 500 futures climbed 0.55%, Nasdaq 100 futures advanced 0.73%, and Dow Jones Industrial Average futures gained roughly 207 points, or 0.44%, signaling a rebound in risk appetite following heightened geopolitical volatility.

The shift came after Trump announced Tuesday that the ceasefire would remain in place, pointing to what he described as a “seriously fractured” Iranian leadership and indicating negotiations could continue until Tehran presents a unified proposal. The move marked a reversal from his earlier stance, when he had signaled reluctance to extend the truce, injecting fresh uncertainty into markets earlier in the week.

Investors are now recalibrating expectations around energy markets and global growth. WTI crude pulled back to about $89.07 per barrel, down 0.67%, in early trading, as traders priced in a reduced risk of immediate supply disruption. The retreat follows a sharp spike in the prior session, when Brent crude briefly approached $98.50 per barrel, reflecting fears that escalating tensions could choke critical shipping lanes and trigger a broader energy shock.

Despite the relief rally, risks remain elevated. A continued U.S. naval blockade of Iranian ports has drawn sharp criticism from Tehran. Iran’s foreign minister has characterized the move as an “act of war,” underscoring the fragile nature of the ceasefire. Adding to tensions, an Iranian gunboat reportedly fired on a commercial container vessel near the Strait of Hormuz shortly after the extension was announced, highlighting the persistent threat to one of the world’s most critical energy corridors.

Market participants are closely watching whether diplomatic momentum can translate into sustained de-escalation. Any disruption in the Strait of Hormuz — through which roughly a fifth of global oil supply passes — could rapidly reverse the current pullback in crude prices and reignite inflationary pressures globally.


Premarket Movers — April 22, 2026

Gainers

Kyverna Therapeutics (NASDAQ: KYTX) surged more than 25% in premarket trading after the company reported positive clinical trial results for its lead cell therapy candidate, miv-cel, strengthening investor confidence in its autoimmune disease pipeline.

Adobe Inc. (NASDAQ: ADBE) rose over 2% after the company’s board approved a $25 billion share repurchase program running through April 2030, signaling confidence in long-term cash flow generation and capital return strategy.

United Airlines Holdings (NASDAQ: UAL) edged up about 1%, even after issuing weaker forward guidance. The carrier projected full-year 2026 adjusted earnings of $7 to $11 per share, down from prior guidance of $12 to $14. Second-quarter expectations of $1 to $2 per share also fell short of the $2.08 FactSet consensus, though first-quarter results exceeded analyst estimates.

Losers

Apple Inc. (NASDAQ: AAPL) remained under pressure after falling 2.52% in the prior session following the announcement that CEO Tim Cook will step down on September 1. Cook, 65, is set to transition to executive chairman, with Senior Vice President of Hardware Engineering John Ternus named as his successor. The leadership transition briefly pushed Apple’s market capitalization below the $4 trillion threshold.

Capital One Financial Corp. (NYSE: COF) declined after reporting first-quarter earnings of $4.42 per share on revenue of $15.23 billion, missing Wall Street estimates of $4.55 and $15.36 billion, respectively. Total net revenue fell 2% year-over-year, raising concerns about margin pressure in the consumer lending environment.


On Watch

Tesla Inc. (NASDAQ: TSLA) is set to report first-quarter 2026 earnings after the bell at 5:30 PM ET, with investors bracing for volatility. The company reported 358,023 vehicle deliveries, missing the 365,645 consensus estimate by roughly 7,600 units. Analysts note that Tesla shares have historically reacted sharply to earnings, with last year’s comparable release triggering a 12% overnight move.


Outlook

While the extension of the Iran ceasefire has temporarily stabilized markets, investors remain highly sensitive to geopolitical headlines. The interplay between diplomacy, energy prices, and inflation expectations is likely to drive near-term market direction.

A sustained easing in tensions could support equities and relieve pressure on central banks navigating persistent inflation risks. However, any renewed escalation — particularly involving shipping disruptions in the Persian Gulf — could quickly reverse gains and reintroduce volatility across global markets.

— JBizNews Desk

LUXEMBOURG, April 22, 2026 — A sharp divide emerged within the European Union on Tuesday as Germany and Italy moved to block a proposal by several member states to suspend the EU-Israel Association Agreement, underscoring deepening fractures in Europe’s approach to Israel amid ongoing regional tensions.

The proposal, led by Spain, Slovenia, and Ireland, called for formal discussions on suspending the decades-old trade and cooperation agreement with Israel. Spanish Foreign Minister José Manuel Albares confirmed ahead of the meeting that the issue had been placed on the agenda for deliberation among EU foreign ministers.

Germany swiftly rejected the move. German Foreign Minister Johann Wadephul described the proposal as “inappropriate,” arguing that the European Union should maintain engagement with Israel through “critical, constructive dialogue” rather than punitive economic measures.

Italy aligned with Berlin’s position. Italian Foreign Minister Antonio Tajani indicated that no immediate action would be taken, stating “no decision will be taken today,” effectively delaying further consideration of the proposal until the next Foreign Affairs Council meeting scheduled for May 11.

Other member states signaled a more critical stance. Belgium called Israeli conduct “unacceptable” and advocated for a partial suspension of the agreement, reflecting a middle-ground approach within the bloc.

EU foreign policy chief Kaja Kallas acknowledged the lack of consensus, stating, “I have seen no change in positions around the table,” highlighting the entrenched divisions among member states.

Economic Stakes

At the center of the debate is the EU-Israel Association Agreement, in force since 2000, which governs billions of dollars in bilateral trade and provides Israel with preferential access to European markets. The agreement underpins key Israeli export sectors, including technology, pharmaceuticals, and agriculture.

Any suspension—full or partial—would represent one of the most significant economic actions taken by the EU against Israel in recent years and could have ripple effects across supply chains and investment flows between Israel and Europe.

Growing Policy Divergence

Some countries have already taken unilateral steps. Slovenia has banned imports from Israeli settlements, while Spain enacted similar restrictions through a decree implemented at the start of 2026.

Israel strongly rejected the initiative. Israeli Foreign Minister Gideon Saar called the proposal “absurd and distorted,” arguing that it unfairly targets Israel “at a time when it is in an existential war.”

Diplomatic officials noted that Israel’s role in broader regional security dynamics, particularly in relation to Iran, has strengthened its position with several EU governments—contributing to the bloc that opposed Tuesday’s push.

What Comes Next

With no agreement reached, the issue is expected to return for further discussion at the May 11 meeting of EU foreign ministers, where divisions within the bloc are likely to remain a central challenge.

For businesses and investors, the outcome could carry significant implications for trade flows, regulatory frameworks, and geopolitical risk exposure across European and Middle Eastern markets.

— JBizNews Desk- Europe